all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals | photos | label |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 4.08 MiB | September 25 2023 / March 23 2024 | delayed release | ||
1 |
|
User Manual Statement | Users Manual | 589.79 KiB | September 25 2023 / March 23 2024 | delayed release | ||
1 |
|
Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 1.85 MiB | September 25 2023 / March 23 2024 | delayed release | ||
1 |
|
External Photos | External Photos | 2.20 MiB | September 25 2023 / March 23 2024 | delayed release | ||
1 |
|
Label and Location | ID Label/Location Info | 214.24 KiB | September 25 2023 | |||
1 |
|
Attestation Statement part 2.911(d)(7) | Attestation Statements | 208.21 KiB | September 25 2023 | |||
1 |
|
Attstn Stmt part 2.911(d)(5)(i)&(ii) | Attestation Statements | 369.67 KiB | September 25 2023 | |||
1 | Block Diagram | Block Diagram | September 25 2023 | confidential | ||||
1 |
|
Confidentiality Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 231.38 KiB | September 25 2023 | |||
1 |
|
LOA Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 206.49 KiB | September 25 2023 | |||
1 | Operational Description | Operational Description | September 25 2023 | confidential | ||||
1 |
|
RF Exposure | RF Exposure Info | 337.53 KiB | September 25 2023 | |||
1 | Schematics | Schematics | September 25 2023 | confidential | ||||
1 |
|
TSUP | Test Setup Photos | 335.95 KiB | September 25 2023 / March 23 2024 | delayed release | ||
1 |
|
Test Report | Test Report | 611.02 KiB | September 25 2023 | |||
1 |
|
Test Report Antenna | Test Report | 413.40 KiB | September 25 2023 |
1 | User Manual | Users Manual | 4.08 MiB | September 25 2023 / March 23 2024 | delayed release |
Owner's Manual Saveiro
*5U7012720AG*
5U7.012.720.AG Owner's Manual:
Saveiro Stand: 25.08.2023 | PAN - XXXXXX Englisch: 10.2023 Artikel-Nr.: 24A.5L1.SAV.20 l a u n a M s
r e n w O o r i e v a S Vehicle data sticker Fig. 1 1 2 3 4 Vehicle identification number Model, engine power, transmission Engine code letters, transmission code letters, paint code, internal equipment Optional equipment, PR numbers Delivery date:
Volkswagen Dealership stamp Volkswagen Brazil works continuously to develop and improve all its vehicles. Please understand that we must therefore reserve the right to alter any part of the vehicle and its equipment or technical specifi-
cations at any time. The data provided concerning scope of delivery, appearance, performance, dimen-
sions, weights, fuel consumption, standards and ve-
hicle functions are all correct at the time of going to print. Some of the equipment described might not yet be available in a particular vehicle (information can be provided by your local Volkswagen Dealer-
ship), and some equipment may not be available in certain countries. No legal commitment may be in-
ferred from the information, illustrations or descrip-
tions in this manual. No part of this manual may be entirely or partially reprinted, reproduced or translated without the written permission of Volkswagen do Brasil. All rights under the copyright laws are expressly re-
served by Volkswagen do Brasil. Subject to alteration and amendment. Printed in Brazil. 2023 Volkswagen do Brasil Manual printed in paper bleached without the use of chlorine. Thank you for choosing Volkswagen By purchasing this Volkswagen, you have become the owner of a vehicle fitted with the most up-to-date technology and a multitude of convenience functions for your use and enjoyment. Before using your vehicle for the first time, carefully read and observe the information in this Owner's Man-
ual to become familiar with your vehicle and all of its functions, in addition to learning about the potential dangers to yourself and others and how to avoid them. If you have any further questions about your vehicle, or if you think that the manual set has not covered everything, please contact your local Volkswagen Dealership. Volkswagen Dealerships are always happy to deal with your questions, suggestions or issues. We hope you have a great driving experience in your new vehicle. Happy motoring. Volkswagen do Brasil Thank you for choosing Volkswagen 1
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Table of Contents About this Owner's Manual Description of symbols Owner's Manual Overview of the vehicle Front view Side view Rear view Driver door Driver's side Centre console Front passenger side Symbols in the roof headliner Driver's information Warning lamps and indicator lamps Instrument cluster Dash panel insert operation Safety Overall guidelines Adjusting the seat position Seat belts Airbag system Transporting children in the vehicle In an emergency Open and close Vehicle key Central locking button and doors Bed cover Bed canvas Windows Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel position Seats and head restraints Front seat Rear seat Head restraints Lights Turn signals Driving lights Parking light Interior lighting 2 Table of Contents 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 12 13 14 21 23 24 26 34 39 42 45 47 52 53 56 59 60 61 61 63 63 66 67 Visibility Windscreen wiper and washer Mirrors Sliding headliner Heating and air conditioning Heating, ventilating, cooling Driving Driving guidelines Starting and stopping the engine Manual gearbox Steering assistance Driver assist systems Starter assist system Hill descent control system Cruise control system (GRA) 68 70 73 74 79 86 88 89 92 93 94 Parking and manoeuvring Parking 95 Handbrake 96 Park distance control (Park Pilot) 97 Rear view camera 99 Brake support systems 101 Practical equipment Stowage compartment 106 Cup holder 108 Socket 109 Radio Before using the unit for the first time 112 Overview of the convenience consumers 112 Aerial and radio feed 112 Special precaution areas 113 Safety recommendations 113 Instructions for use 115 Power management 115 Anti-theft coding 116 Device overview 116 Basic operating information 119 Connectivity App-Connect 121 Apple CarPlay 122 Android Auto 123 Maintenance Service 238 Vehicle conservation Guidelines for the conservation of the vehicle 241 Washing of the vehicle 241 Clean and conserve the exterior of the vehicle 243 Cleaning and conserving the interior of the vehicle 245 Accessories, modifications, repairs and part replacement Accessories and spare parts 249 Repairs and technical modifications 250 Repairs and limitations in the airbag system 250 Retrofitting two-way radios 251 Information stored in control units 252 Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle without a connection to the external aerial 252 Vehicle lifting points 253 Consumer information Volkswagen warranty 255 Additional service offers 255 Information stickers and plates 256 Installing the radio 257 Headphones 257 Declaration of conformity 257 License to use the remote control key 257 License to use the electronic immobilizer 257 Technical data Guidelines on the technical data 258 Petrol engine 263 TOTALFLEX engines 264 Abbreviations 267 Index 269 Composition Touch (R 340G) Radio 125 Media 128 Wired or wireless connections 132 Telephone 134 Settings 142 Media Plus (RCD 320G 2 DIN) Radio 145 Media 150 Wired and wireless connections 157 Telephone 158 Settings 164 Transporting Stowing cargo 166 Luggage compartment 166 Roof rack 170 Towing a trailer 172 Fuel Fuel handling safety guidelines 176 Fuelling and fuel types 177 Engine control unit and exhaust gas emission control system 180 If and when Vehicle toolkit 182 Wiper blades 185 Exterior lighting 187 Fuses 193 Jump starting 197 Tow starting and towing 200 Checking and refuelling In the engine compartment 200 Service fluids and consumables 204 Washer fluid 204 Engine oil 205 Engine coolant 208 Brake fluid 211 Warm starting system (E-FLEX) 212 Vehicle battery 213 Wheels and tyres Tyre monitoring system 217 Important information on wheels and tyres 219 Hub caps 231 Changing a wheel 232 Table of Contents 3
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. About this Owner's Manual This Owner's Manual is valid for all available models and versions of this vehicle. The Owner's Manual de-
scribes all of the equipment and models, without identifying as special equipment or model variations. Thus, there may be pieces of equipment described which are not included in your vehicle or which are only available to specific markets. The equipment contained in your vehicle is detailed in the product's sale documentation. Contact your local Volkswagen Dealership for further information. All data in this Owner's Manual correspond to the in-
formation available at the time of going to print. Due to continuous technical improvement of the ve-
hicle, actual vehicle features and equipment may differ from the indications provided in this manual. No discrepancy in data, illustrations or descriptions shall form the basis for any legal claim. Please ensure that the complete manual set is al-
ways in the vehicle when lending or selling the vehi-
cle. An alphabetical index is included at the end of this manual. A list of abbreviations detailing technical terms and acronyms can be found at the end of the manual. Directions and positions such as left, right, front and rear are normally relative to the vehicle's di-
rection of travel, unless otherwise indicated. Illustrations assist with orientation and should be regarded as schematic representations. Short definitions highlighted before some of the sections in this manual, summarize the functions and use of a system or piece of equipment. Fur-
ther information on the systems and equipment, apart from their features, commands and system limitations, is found in the respective sections. Any technical changes made to the vehicle after publication of this booklet are provided in a Sup-
plement that is included with the manual set. Standard booklets in the manual set:
Owner's Manual Service records (may not be available for some countries) Additional booklets in the manual set
(optional):
Supplement Radio manual 4 About this Owner's Manual Description of symbols Refers to an excerpt within a chapter that contains important information and safety notes . Such reference must always be observed. the next page. Indicates that the section is continued on Indicates the end of a section. Indicates situations in which the vehicle must be stopped as quickly as possible. The symbol indicates a registered trade-
mark. However, the absence of this symbol does not constitute a waiver of the rights concerning any term. Symbols of this type reference warnings within the same section or page, indicating potential risks of accidents and injuries, as well as how they can be avoided. Cross reference to information about possi-
ble damage to your vehicle within the same section or on a given page. DANGER Texts with this symbol indicate extremely danger-
ous situations, which may lead to fatal or severe injuries if you do not observe the warning. WARNING Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situa-
tions which will lead to fatal or severe injuries if you do not observe the warning. CAUTION Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situa-
tions, which may lead to light or severe injuries if you do not observe the warning. NOTICE Texts with this symbol indicate dangerous situa-
tions, which may lead to vehicle damages if you do not observe the warning. Texts with this symbol are environment pres-
ervation recommendations. Texts with this symbol contain additional in-
formation. Description of symbols 5
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Overview of the vehicle Front view Fig. 2 Front view of the vehicle. Key for Fig. 2:
Windscreen 1 Exterior mirrors........................................................................................................................................................ 2 Additional turn signal light............................................................................................................................. Bonnet release lever.............................................................................................................................................. Headlights................................................................................................................................................................... Fog light...................................................................................................................................................................... 3 4 5 70 63 202 187 63 6 Owner's Manual Side view Fig. 3 Side view of the vehicle. Key for Fig. 3:
1 2 3 4 5 Roof aerial.................................................................................................................................................................. Tank flap...................................................................................................................................................................... Roof luggage compartment vertical rib (Nova Saveiro with extended cab).................................. External door handle Jacking points........................................................................................................................................................... 255 177 170 232 Overview of the vehicle 7
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Rear view Fig. 4 Rear view of the vehicle. Key for Fig. 4:
1 2 3 4 5 Elevated brake lights and luggage compartment lighting.................................................................... 187, 193 52 Volkswagen logo to open the dropside......................................................................................................... 187 Tail lights..................................................................................................................................................................... 97 Rear parking distance control sensors........................................................................................................... Tailgate........................................................................................................................................................................ 52 8 Owner's Manual Driver door Fig. 5 Overview of the controls in the driver door. 48 56 47 70 106 Key for Fig. 5:
1 2 3 4 5 Driver door locking pin lining (locking pin only for vehicles with mechanical locking)............ Buttons for operating electric windows .................................................................................................. Central locking button for locking and unlocking the vehicle ................................................. Interior door handle Setting rotary control for electric exterior mirrors................................................................................... Exterior mirror setting Storage compartment........................................................................................................................................... 6
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Overview of the vehicle 9 Driver's side Fig. 6 Overview of the driver side. Key for Fig. 6:
1 2 3 Air vents....................................................................................................................................................................... Instrument cluster.................................................................................................................................................. Light switch .......................................................................................................................................................... Light switched off --
Automatic light control Side light and dipped beam Fog lights Lever for...................................................................................................................................................................... Main beam/long-range beam Headlight flasher Turn signal Cruise control system (GRA).......................................................................................................................... Multifunction steering wheel controls:
Volume settings for the radio or phone calls Mute function for the radio or activating the voice control system Opening the main telephone menu or answering phone calls Audio . Control buttons of the Volkswagen information system , 74 47 63 63 94 10 Owner's Manual 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 14 17 13 68 Instrument cluster:
Instruments.......................................................................................................................................................... Display..................................................................................................................................................................... Warning lamps and indicator lamps.......................................................................................................... Lever for...................................................................................................................................................................... Windscreen wipers Interval wipe for the windscreen Single windscreen wiper movement x Windscreen wipers Automatic windscreen washing and wiping system Controls of the Volkswagen information system - , /..................................................... 21 Storage compartment and fuse box cover................................................................................................... 106, 193 Bonnet release lever.............................................................................................................................................. 200 Horn (works only when the ignition is switched on) Lever for adjusting the steering column....................................................................................................... Driver front airbag................................................................................................................................................... Pedals........................................................................................................................................................................... Ignition lock............................................................................................................................................................... 59 34 79 86 Centre console Fig. 7 Overview of the upper section of the centre console. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. 3 4 5 Fig. 8 Overview of the lower section of the centre console. Key for Fig. 7:
1 2 Air vent......................................................... Electronic stability control (ESC) button........................................................... Off-road feature on/off button.......... Rear window heating button ........ Hazard warning lights button ....... 74 104 92 74 42 Overview of the vehicle 11 6 7 8 9 10 Parking distance control on/off button........................................................... Indicator light PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator light regarding front passenger airbag deactivation
(not available in some versions)........ Luggage compartment light button. Radio (factory fitted).............................. Controls for:
Heating and fresh air system......... Air conditioning system................... Key for Fig. 8:
1 2 3 4 12-volt socket........................................... Storage compartment............................ Drink holder in the centre console... Lever for:
Manual gearbox................................... 97 34 68 112 74 74 109 106 108 88 Front passenger side Fig. 9 Overview of the front passenger side. Key for Fig. 9:
1 2 3 Location of front passenger front airbag in the dashboard........................ Opening lever for the stowage compartment............................................. Switch activated by the vehicle key to switch the front passenger air-
bag off (not available in some ver-
sions)............................................................. 34 106 34 Symbols in the roof headliner Symbol Definition
, , , , Interior and reading lights switches page 67 12 Owner's Manual Driver's information Warning lamps and indicator lamps
, faults Warning and indicator lamps indicate a number of warnings or other specific functions. Some warning and indicator lamps light up when the ignition is switched on and should go out once the engine is running or the vehicle is in motion. Depending on the version, additional text mes-
sages could appear in the display on the instru-
ment cluster to provide further information or to ask you to perform certain tasks page 14. Depending on the vehicle equipment level, sym-
bols may be displayed in the instrument cluster instead of warning lamps. Sound signals can also be heard when certain warning or indicator lamps light up. Sym-
bol Meaning Stop driving!
Parking brake activated, low brake fluid level or damaged brake system. page 95 Lit: Stop driving!
Coolant temperature too high or engine coolant level too low. Flashing: fault in engine coolant sys-
tem. page 208 Stop driving!
Engine oil pressure too low. page 205 page 26 Seatbelt not fastened by the driver. Fault in the alternator. Flashing: alarm activated. page 213 page 50 Lit: ESC faulty or malfunctioning. page 101 Flashing: ESC running. page 101 Lit: ESC disabled by driver. page 101
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Sym-
bol Meaning ABS faulty or not functioning. Fog light switched on. page 101 page 63 Fault in pollutant emission control sys-
tem. page 180 Fault in electronic engine output con-
trol. page 180 Fuel tank almost empty. page 16 Fault in front belt tensioner system or airbag. page 34 Tyre pressure to low or damaged tyre pressure control system. page 217 Cold start system heating. page 212 Left or right turn signal. page 63 Hazard warning lights switched on. page 42 Emergency brake activation lights. page 42 Cruise control system (GRA) on. page 94 Lit up: hill descent control system switched on. page 93 Flashing: hill descent control system operating. page 93 Main beam is switched on or the head-
light flasher is being operated. page 63 Electronic immobilizer activated. Service interval display. page 88 page 20 WARNING Failure to observe the warning lamps could lead to your vehicle breaking down in traffic, and to accidents and serious injuries. Driver's information 13 Never ignore any warning lamps or text mes-
sages that appear. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. Stop the vehicle at a safe distance away from moving traffic and ensure that no part of the exhaust system can come into contact with any inflammable material underneath the vehicle, e.g. dry grass, fuel or oil, etc. Broken-down vehicles lacking due signalling increase the risk of accidents both for you and for other road users. Always switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle to warn other road users. Before opening the engine compartment cover, switch off the engine and allow it to cool down sufficiently. The engine compartment of any motor vehi-
cle is a dangerous area and may cause severe injuries page 200, Safety guidelines for work in the engine compartment. NOTICE Failure to observe the illuminated indicator lamps could lead to vehicle damages. Instrument cluster Introduction After starting the engine with the vehicle's bat-
tery completely flat, or with a replacement bat-
tery in the vehicle, the system's configuration
(time, date, comfort and programming configura-
tions) may have been deleted or become corrup-
ted. Check and adjust the settings after the vehi-
cle battery has been sufficiently recharged. WARNING Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. Never operate the instrument cluster's but-
tons while the vehicle is in motion. To prevent the risk of accidents and injuries proceed with all the settings of the indica-
tors of the instrument cluster's display and those of the radio system's display only when the vehicle is stopped. Analogue instrument cluster Please refer to at the start of the chapter on page 14. Fig. 10 Instrument cluster in the dashboard (variable 1). 14 Owner's Manual Fig. 11 Instrument cluster in the dashboard (variable 2). Some of the controls and functions depicted are specific to certain models/versions or are option-
al. Explanations about the Fig. 10 and Fig. 11:
1 2 3 4 Rev. counter (running engine speed in revolutions x 1,000 per minute). Display indicators page 17. Speedometer (speed indicator). Reset button or to display the (trip) recorder. Press the button for approximately 2 seconds to reset the trip recorder and other multi-
function display indicators, if necessary page 18. 4 4 5 6 7 Clock settings knob . Service interval display reset button page 20. Dashboard lighting adjustment button page 67 Engine coolant temperature display (depending on the vehicle version) page 16. Fuel level display (depending on the vehicle version) page 16. To avoid engine damages, the rev. counter needle must not remain in the red area of the scale for more than a short period of time. Switching to higher gears in advance helps save fuel and reduce operating noises. Tachometer (Rev counter) Please refer to on page 14. at the start of the chapter The start of the red zone on the rev counter indi-
cates the maximum engine speed of a run and warm engine for each selected gear. Change to the next higher gear, position the selector lever to D or S, or relieve the accelerator pedal before the needle reaches the red zone
. NOTICE While the engine is cool, avoid high rotations, total acceleration and increased engine load. Driver's information 15
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Fuel gauge Please refer to on page 14. at the start of the chapter Fig. 12 On the instrument cluster display: fuel gauge (variable 1). Fig. 13 On the instrument cluster: fuel gauge (vari-
able 2). When switching the ignition on, certain warning and indicator lamps flash to check functions. Such lamps go out after a few seconds. The fuel gauge may vary depending on the vehi-
cle model Fig. 12 or Fig. 13. For vehicles with Volkswagen information sys-
tem, the control light lights up in the instru-
ment cluster display. Fuel tank almost empty The indicator light flashes for approximately 10 seconds, indicator position in the four small seg-
ments Fig. 12. The reserve fuel is consumed, fuel up as soon as possible. Fuel tank almost empty The indicator lamp lights up in yellow, indicator in red marking (arrow) Fig. 13. The reserve fuel is consumed, fuel up as soon as possible. 16 Owner's Manual WARNING Driving the vehicle when the fuel level is too low could lead to your vehicle breaking down in traffic, accidents and serious injuries. When the fuel level is too low, the fuel sup-
ply to the engine could be irregular, especial-
ly when driving up or down hills and inclines. The steering, all driver assist systems and brake assist systems will not function if the engine stops due to a lack of fuel or irregular fuel supply. Always fill the tank when it is still 1/4 full. This reduces the risk of running out of fuel and breaking down. NOTICE Failure to observe the illuminated indicator lamps and its descriptions and meanings could lead to vehicle damages. Do not run the tank completely empty. Irregu-
lar filling periods can cause backfiring and al-
low unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system. This could damage the catalytic converter!
The small arrow next to the fuel pump sym-
bol Fig. 12 or Fig. 13 in the display in-
strument indicates the side of the vehicle on which the fuel tank flap is located. Engine coolant temperature indicator Please refer to on page 14. at the start of the chapter Fig. 14 Engine coolant temperature indicator in the instrument cluster (variable 1): A cold zone; B nor-
mal zone; C warning zone. Display indicators Please refer to on page 14. at the start of the chapter On the dash panel insert display several different pieces of information may be displayed according to the version of the vehicle:
Warning and information displays page 19 Distance displays Time Exterior temperature Gear recommendation page 80 Multifunction display and menus for various settings page 21 Service interval display page 20 Fuel level display page 16 Engine coolant temperature display page 16 Distance displays The odometer records the total distance travelled by the car. The trip recorder (trip) shows the distance travel-
led since the trip recorder was last reset. The last digit stands for 100 m. Exterior temperature indicator Whenever the exterior temperature is below
+4C, a snowflake symbol appears on the ex-
terior temperature indicator (ice on the road). This symbol starts to flash and lights up until the exterior temperature rises above +6 C If the vehicle is parked or moving at a very low speed, the indicated temperature may be slightly higher than the actual exterior temperature, due to the heat generated by the engine. The measurement range is -40C to +50C. Gear-change indicator Depending on the vehicle version, a gear selec-
tion recommendation may be indicated on the instrument cluster display to optimize fuel sav-
ings page 80. Radio In some versions, certain radio functions are indi-
cated on the instrument cluster display only while the vehicle is running. Driver's information 17 Fig. 15 Engine coolant temperature indicator in the instrument cluster (variable 2): A cold zone; B nor-
mal zone; C warning zone. A B C Cold zone. The engine has not yet reached its operating temperature. Avoid engine over-
loading and high rotation while the engine is cooled. Normal zone. Warning zone. Coolant temperature too high. Engine coolant The red indicator lamp flashes. The engine coolant level is not correct or the coolant system is faulty. Stop driving!
Stop the vehicle, turn the engine off and let it cool down. Check coolant level, if the level is low, refill with engine coolant page 210. If the warning lamp remains lit despite the coolant level being correct, then there is a fault in the system. Go to a Volkswagen Deal-
ership or qualified workshop. WARNING Failure to observe the warning lamps and text messages could lead to your vehicle breaking down in traffic, and to accidents and serious in-
juries. Never ignore any warning lamps or text mes-
sages that appear. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. NOTICE Failure to observe the illuminated indicator lamps could lead to vehicle damages. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. WARNING There may be ice layers on roads and bridges even if the exterior temperature is above freez-
ing temperature. There may be ice layers on roads even if the exterior temperature is above +4C and the snowflake symbol is not indicated on the display. Never consider only the exterior temperature indicator!
Indicator Current fuel consumption While the vehicle is motion, current fuel con-
sumption is displayed in km/l while the engine is running. The current value is calculated in 30 me-
ter intervals and updated approximately every second. Indicator Average fuel consumption The average consumption in km/l is shown after a distance of 300 meters, after switching on the ignition. The display will show dashes up to this point. Displayed values are updated every 5 sec-
onds. Menu On-board Computer Please refer to on page 14. at the start of the chapter Switching between displays Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel:
press the windscreen wiper lever switch. Vehicles with multifunction steering wheel:
press or . Toggle memory Press OK to toggle between memories. Memory 1 - trip The memory records trip and consumption data from the moment the ignition is switched on un-
til the moment it is switched back off. If the trip is interrupted for more than two hours, the memory is automatically reset. If the journey is continued within two hours of the ignition be-
ing switched off, the new values will be added to the existing trip recorder. Memory 2 - total trip The memory collects journey data for any num-
ber of individual journeys up to a total of 99 hours and 59 minutes of travel time, 9,999 km distance travelled, or 999 litres of fuel consumed. If any of these maximum limits is exceeded, the memory is automatically deleted and reset to zero. Manually deletion of memory 1 or 2 Select the memory that you wish to delete. Press and hold the OK button for approxi-
mately two seconds. Indicator Fuel range Approximate calculation of the distance in km that can still be travelled with the current fuel level, under the current driving conditions. One factor used for calculating this figure is the cur-
rent level of fuel consumption. Travel time Indicator Travel time in hours (h) and minutes (min) elapsed since the ignition was switched on. Indicator Distance travelled Distance travelled in km since the ignition was switched on. Average speed Indicator The average speed will be shown after a distance of 300 meters travelled since the ignition was switched on. The display will show dashes up to this point. Displayed values are updated every 5 seconds. Digital speed indicator Current vehicle speed displayed digitally. Saving a speed for the speed warning Select the Speed warning display. Press the OK button to store the current speed or activate the warning system. If necessary, set the desired speed with the menu item +5 km/h or -5 km/h and press the OK button to increase or decrease speed. Press OK again. The speed will be stored and the warning will be activated. To deactivate, select the Speed warning display again and press OK . The speed warning will be deactivated. 18 Owner's Manual Personal selection of displays In the Settings menu, On-board Computer submenu, it is possible to select which multifunction display indicators are shown in the instrument cluster display. Different instrument clusters are available, which means that the versions and displays may vary. In displays without warning or infor-
mation messages, faults are indicated exclusively by the indicator lamps. Warning and information texts Time Please refer to on page 14. at the start of the chapter Please refer to on page 14. at the start of the chapter The system runs a check on certain components and functions in the vehicle when the ignition is switched on or while the vehicle is in motion. Functional faults are indicated by red and yellow symbols with warning and information messages on the instrument cluster display ( page 13). An acoustic warning is also given in certain cases. The screen may vary according to the version of the instrument cluster fitted. Existing functional faults can also be accessed manually. Access such faults through the selec-
tion menu Vehicle Est.. Priority 1 warning message (red) Symbol lit up or flashing partially, along with acoustic warnings. Stop driving! Dangerous situation. Check the damaged function and elimi-
nate its cause. If necessary, go to a Volkswagen dealership or a qualified workshop. Priority 2 warning message (yellow) Symbol lit up or flashing partially, along with acoustic warnings. Faulty functions or lack of flu-
ids may damage or interrupt vehicle operation. Check the faulty function as soon as possible. If necessary, go to a Volkswagen dealership or a qualified workshop. Guidance on information in the owner's manual Further guidance on the current warning mes-
sage can be found in the owners manual. Information text. Information about various procedures within the vehicle. When there are several warnings, the icons will be displayed in sequence a few seconds each. The symbols will appear until the faults are rectified. Switch on the ignition. To set the clock, press and hold on the instrument cluster page 14 for approximate-
ly five seconds. Press and hold until the hour display starts to flash. Briefly press button to set the hour. Numbers are displayed in ascending order. Briefly press once again to flash the mi-
nute display. Briefly press to set the minutes. Num-
bers are displayed in ascending order. Press again to close the clock settings. Settings Menu Please refer to on page 14. at the start of the chapter The scope of the menus and information indica-
tors depends on the electronic components ship-
ped with the vehicle and vehicle version scope. Language Select the language used in display messages. MFI Settings for which MFI data should appear in the instrument cluster display page 18. Parking sensor The parking distance control acoustic warning settings. Increase or decrease the rear parking sensor sound warning volume. ECO Comfort Settings for which ECO Comfort data should ap-
pear in the instrument cluster display. Driver's information 19
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. The purpose of the ECO Comfort function is to show assistance messages in the instrument cluster display to improve the vehicle's fuel con-
sumption rate. Which data will be shown in the display can be defined in the ECO Comfort submenu. Data may be defined separately, as groups (all options) or also disabling options, so that no alert is shown in the display. Data available for the vehicle is not shown in the instrument cluster display, since it varies accord-
ing to the vehicle's electronic system and assem-
bled equipment. In addition to the warning message shown in the display, other warnings with additional informa-
tion may also appear. Warning messages ECO COMFORT Air resistance: Close windows. ECO COMFORT Air conditioning on: Close windows. ECO COMFORT Observe the gearshift indicator. ECO COMFORT When breaking, only declutch below 1300 rpm. ECO COMFORT Do not activate the gas pedal when start-
ing engine. ECO COMFORT Do not activate the gas pedal when sta-
tionary. ECO COMFORT Avoid running the engine when stationary. Convenience Settings for the vehicle's convenience functions:
Sound warning: turn the sounds function on or off when locking or unlocking the vehicle. If the sounds function is turned on, a sound
(horn) will be made whenever the vehicle is locked, and two sounds whenever the vehicle is unlocked. Light warning: turn the light warning function on or off when locking or unlocking the vehicle. If the lights function is turned on, turn signals will flash once when the vehicle is locked, and twice when the vehicle is unlocked. Automatic closing: electric window settings: all windows can be closed or open when locking or unlocking. Maintenance Define the mileage in which a visual and acoustic warning must be issued indicating that the vehi-
cle requires maintenance
. 20 Owner's Manual Factory setting Some functions in the Settings menu are reset to factory settings. NOTICE The Maintenance function is an additional guidance feature for established vehicle maintenance pro-
cedures. The mileage to be defined must not ex-
ceed the mileage established in page 238. Service interval display Please refer to on page 14. at the start of the chapter Fig. 16 Instrument cluster display: service interval display. The service interval display is shown on the in-
strument cluster Fig. 10 2 or Fig. 11 2 . Different instrument clusters are available, which means that the versions and displays may vary. Service warning When a service is becoming due, a service warn-
ing is displayed when turning the ignition on. The mileage or specified interval time correspond to the mileage or interval until the next service. Service reminder If the vehicle is due to be serviced, the display INSP or Service now! (for vehicles equipped with the Volkswagen Information System), it will appear in the instrument cluster display for 20 seconds af-
ter the vehicle is started. Resetting the service interval display If the service was not performed by a Volkswagen Dealership, the instrument cluster display can be reset as follows:
Switch off the ignition. Press and hold the button . Switch on the ignition. Release and press it again within approx-
imately 10 seconds. Do not reset the display between service inter-
vals. This may result in incorrect displays. The service message will disappear after a few seconds with the engine running or af-
ter pressing the OK button on the windscreen wiper lever. Dash panel insert operation Introduction With the ignition switched on, the different dis-
play functions can be accessed via the menus. WARNING Drivers distracted while driving could lead to accidents and injuries. Never access the instrument cluster menus while the vehicle is in motion. Dash panel insert menus Please refer to on page 21. at the start of the chapter The scope of the menus and information indica-
tors depends on the electronic components ship-
ped with the vehicle and vehicle version scope. A qualified workshop can program and modify other functions depending on the vehicle equip-
ment level. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Some menu options can only be called up when the vehicle is stationary. On-board Computer page 18 Audio page 112 Vehicle status page 21 Settings page 19 WARNING Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. Never access the instrument cluster menus while driving. The menus in the instrument cluster display depend on the vehicle electronics and the level of vehicle equipment. Display information may be abbreviated or slightly different than described in this document. Operation by way of the windshield wiper lever Please refer to on page 21. at the start of the chapter Fig. 17 Vehicles without multifunction steering wheel: press button 1 in the windscreen wiper lev-
er to confirm the menu point and rocker switch 2 to switch between menus. While a priority 1 warning message is displayed, it is not possible to call up any menu. All warning messages automatically disappear after a few seconds. Additionally, certain warning messages can be confirmed and hidden by pressing the OK button. Driver's information 21
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Calling up the main menu Switch on the ignition. If a message or vehicle pictogram is displayed, press OK ( Fig. 17 1 ). Press and hold Fig. 17 2 or press upward and downward for at least 2 seconds. The main menu will be displayed. Opening a submenu Press key 2 up or down, until the desired menu item is selected. The selected menu option is located between the two horizontal lines. Press OK to view a submenu item. Making settings in the menu Make the desired changes using the key of the windshield wiper lever. If necessary, press and hold the controls to increase or decrease the values quickly. Select or confirm your selection by press-
ing OK . Returning to the main menu Menu: select the Back menu option to leave the submenu. When operated using the windscreen wiper lever: press and hold the rocker. Operation by way of the multifunction steering wheel Please refer to on page 21. at the start of the chapter Windscreen wiper lever buttons are not available in certain vehicles equipped with multifunction steering wheels. In these cases, the multifunction display is controlled exclusively through the mul-
tifunction steering wheel buttons. Calling up the main menu Switch on the ignition. If a message or vehicle pictogram is displayed, press OK Fig. 18. The main menu is not displayed. To navigate through menu options, press or several times. Opening a submenu Press or until the desired menu option is selected. The selected menu option is located between the two horizontal lines. Press OK to view a submenu item. Making settings in the menu Using the arrow keys of the multifunction steering wheel select the desired changes. If necessary, press and hold the controls to in-
crease or decrease the values quickly. Select or confirm your selection by press-
ing OK . Returning to the main menu Menu: select the Back menu option to leave the submenu. Returning to the previous item Press . For vehicles without a radio, the controls for the multifunction steering wheel are de-
activated. If an original Volkswagen radio is sub-
sequently installed at a Volkswagen Dealership, it is possible to activate the controls on the multi-
function steering wheel. Fig. 18 Right-hand side of the multifunction steer-
ing wheel: instrument cluster menu control buttons. 22 Owner's Manual Safety Overall guidelines Fig. 19 Driver side mat attached to the floor pin. Preparations for travel and driving safety Observe the following information both before and during every journey to ensure your own safety, and the safety of all passengers and other road users The driver is responsible for all vehicle pas-
sengers, especially if they are children. Check that all lights and turn signals are working properly. Check the tyre pressure ( page 223) and fuel level ( page 16). Ensure that you have a good, clear view through all of the windows. The supply of air to the engine may not be suppressed and the engine should not be covered with covers or insulating materials page 200. Secure any objects and luggage in the stow-
age compartments, the luggage compart-
ment or on the roof page 166. Ensure that you are able to operate the ped-
als freely at all times. Secure any children travelling in the vehicle in a restraint system suitable for their weight and size page 39. Adjust the front seats, headrests and mirrors properly in accordance with the size of the occupants page 24. Wear proper shoes that provide good grip for your feet when using the pedals. The floor mat in the footwell on the driver side must be securely fastened to ensure the pedal area is unobstructed. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the driver mat may be attached to the floor mat pin Fig. 19. Assume a correct sitting position before and while driving. This also applies to all passen-
gers page 24. Fasten your seat belt correctly before setting off and keep it properly fastened throughout the journey. This also applies to all passen-
gers page 26. Each vehicle occupant must sit in a seat of their own and must have their own seat belt. Never drive if your driving ability is impaired, e.g. by medication, alcohol, drugs, among other substances capable of influencing your perception and reaction. Do not allow yourself to be distracted from the traffic (e.g. by passengers, telephone calls, browsing through display menus.) Always adjust speed and driving pattern ac-
cording to visibility, climate, road, and traffic conditions, under respective speed limits. Observe traffic regulations and speed limits. When travelling long distances, stop and take a break regularly at least every two hours. Carry animals in the vehicle using restraint systems based on their weight and size. Driving abroad Some countries adopt special safety regulations and relevant prescriptions for exhaust gases which may differ from the structural condition of the vehicle. Volkswagen recommends that you visit your local Volkswagen Dealership before travelling abroad in order to learn about any legal requirement and the following issues concerning your destination:
Does the vehicle need any technical modifi-
cations for driving abroad, e.g. masking or switching the headlights over?
Are the necessary tools, diagnostic equip-
ment and spare parts available for service and repair work?
Is there a Volkswagen Dealership in the des-
tination country?
Safety 23
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Alcohol, drugs, medication and narcotics can severely impair perception, reaction times and driving safety. This could cause you to lose control of the vehicle. WARNING Always observe current traffic regulations and speed limits, and think ahead when driving. Correct interpretation of a driving situation can make the difference between reaching your destination safely and having an accident with severe injuries. NOTICE Volkswagen may not be held liable for damages caused to the vehicle due to low-quality fuel, in-
sufficient/incorrect maintenance, and use of non-genuine parts. Regular servicing of your vehicle not only maintains its value, but also ensures that your vehicle remains roadworthy and in perfect working order. Servicing work should therefore always be carried out in accordance with the Volkswagen maintenance guidelines. Under sever operating conditions it may be necessary to carry out some maintenance jobs prior the next sched-
uled service. Additional information on adverse conditions is available on page 238, which pri-
or reading is essential. Contact a Volkswagen Dealership for more information. Adjusting the seat position Introduction Number of seats Rear seats only apply to the New Extended Cab Saveiro. The vehicle has a total of 2 seats: 2 front seats. The Extended Cab New Saveiro has a total of 5 seats: 2 front seats and 3 rear seats. Each seat is equipped with safety belts. Driving abroad (Continued) Is there unleaded petrol with the correct oc-
tane number and free of metallic additives
(such as manganese) in the destination coun-
try?
Are the correct engine oil ( page 205) and other service fluids that comply with Volkswagen specifications available in the destination country?
Are special tyres required for travelling in the destination country?
Checks when fuelling Never carry out any work on the engine or in the engine compartment if you are not familiar with the necessary procedures and the general safety requirements, as well as without available re-
sources, fluids and tools page 200, Safety guidelines for work in the engine compartment!
The work should be carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. Please ensure that the following points are checked regularly, preferably every time you fill the tank:
Windscreen washer fluid level page 204 Engine oil level page 205 Engine coolant level page 208 Brake fluid level page 211 Tyre pressure page 223 Vehicle lighting necessary for traffic safety:
Turn signals Side light, dipped beam and main beam headlights Tail light lamps Brake light Rear fog light Number plate light Information about changing bulbs page 187. DANGER Follow the important safety instructions rela-
ted to the front passenger's front airbag page 39, Child seat types. WARNING Driving under the influence of alcohol, drugs, medication or narcotics can cause serious acci-
dents and fatal injuries. 24 Owner's Manual Whenever the vehicle is in motion:
Never stand in the vehicle. Never stand on the seats. Never kneel over the seats. Never tilt the backrest too far to the rear. Never lean against the dash panel. Never lay down on the rear seat (applicable to the New Extended Cab Saveiro only). Never sit on the front edge of a seat. Never sit sideways. Never lean out of a window. Never put your feet out of a window. Never put your feet on the dash panel. Never place your feet on the seat cushion or seat backrest. Never travel in a footwell. Never travel on a seat without wearing the seat belt. Never travel in the internal luggage compart-
ment. WARNING Any incorrect sitting position in the vehicle in-
creases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sudden driving or brak-
ing manoeuvre. All vehicle occupants must maintain a cor-
rect sitting position and wear their seat belt properly while the vehicle is in motion. Sitting in an incorrect position, not fastening the seat belt, or leaving too short a distance to the airbag exposes the occupants to the risk of sustaining critical or fatal injuries, es-
pecially if the airbags are triggered and strike an occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position. WARNING Assuming an incorrect sitting position in the vehicle can increase the risk of severe or fatal injuries during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, in the event of a collision or acci-
dent, or if the airbags are triggered. All vehicle occupants must assume a correct sitting position before setting off and main-
tain this position throughout the trip. This al-
so applies to the use of seat belts. The number of vehicle occupants must never exceed the number of seats with seat belts in the vehicle. Secure any children travelling in the vehicle in a restraint system approved and suitable for their age page 39, Transporting chil-
dren in the vehicle, page 34, Airbag sys-
tem. Always keep your feet in the footwell while the vehicle is in motion. Never place your feet on the seat or on the dash panel and never hold your feet out the window. The airbag and seat belt can otherwise not pro-
vide optimal protection and can actually in-
crease the risk of injury during an accident. Dangers of an incorrect sitting position Please refer to on page 25. at the start of the chapter If the seat belts are not worn or are worn incor-
rectly, the risk of severe or fatal injuries increa-
ses. Seat belts can only provide optimal protec-
tion if the seat belt routing is correct. An incor-
rect sitting position considerably impairs the lev-
el of protection provided by the seat belts. This could lead to severe or even fatal injuries. The risk of severe or fatal injuries is especially aug-
mented when a triggered airbag hits an occupant who has assumed an incorrect sitting position. The driver is responsible for all vehicle passen-
gers, especially if they are children. The following list contains examples of sitting positions that could be dangerous for all occu-
pants. Safety 25
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Correct sitting position Please refer to on page 25. at the start of the chapter Fig. 20 Correct distance between the driver and the steering wheel, correct seatbelt position and correct headrest adjustment. The following points describe the correct sitting positions for the driver and passenger. Persons who due to their physical build are un-
able to sit correctly in the vehicle should contact a specialized workshop to be informed on possi-
ble special installations. The seat belts and air-
bags can only provide a maximum level of pro-
tection if a correct sitting position is assumed. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Volkswagen recommends the following sitting positions on the seats for the occupants own safety and to reduce the level of injury in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or an acci-
dent:
Points for the driver:
Move the backrest into an upright position so that your back rests fully against it. Adjust the seat so that the distance between the steering wheel and the driver's chest is at least of 25 cm Fig. 20 A and so the driver can firmly hold the steering wheel by its outer rim with both hands and with slightly flexed arms. The steering wheel must always point towards the breastbone and not towards the face. Adjust the driver's seat lengthwise so that the pedals may be reached with slightly flexed legs and so that the distance between the knees and the dashboard is at least 10 cm Fig. 20 B . 26 Owner's Manual Adjust the height so that you can reach the highest point of the steering wheel. Always leave both feet in the footwell to main-
tain control of the vehicle at all times. Fasten seat belts properly page 26. Points for the front passenger:
Move the backrest into an upright position so that your back rests fully against it. Push the front passenger seat as far back as possible so that the airbag can provide maxi-
mum protection if it is triggered. Always keep your feet in the footwell while the vehicle is in motion. Fasten seat belts properly page 26. Points for rear vehicle passengers:
Valid only for the New Extended Cab Saveiro. Adjust the head rest so its top edge is at the same height as the top of the head Fig. 20 but not below eye level. Position the back of your head as close to the head restraint as possible. In case of short stature individuals, push the head restraint all the way down, even if the head is then located underneath the top edge of the head rest. For taller people, push the head rest up as far as possible. Always keep your feet in the footwell while the vehicle is in motion. Adjust and fasten seat belts properly page 26. Seat belts Introduction Check the condition of all seat belts regularly. In case of damages to belts, connections, automatic belt retractor, or seat belt latches, the respective seat belt must be immediately replaced by a Volkswagen Dealership
. One must use cor-
rect spare parts that are compatible with the ve-
hicle, equipment level and model year. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. WARNING Incorrectly fastened or unfastened seat belts increase the risk of severe or fatal injuries. Seat belts will only offer the optimum level of pro-
tection when they are fastened and used prop-
erly. Seat belts are the most effective means of reducing the risk of severe and fatal injuries in case of accidents. For the protection of the driver and of all vehicle occupants, seat belts must always be fastened properly when the vehicle is in motion. Before every trip, each vehicle occupant must assume a correct sitting position, cor-
rectly fasten the seat belt belonging to their seat and keep it fastened properly through-
out the trip. This applies to all passengers in any traffic condition. While the vehicle is in motion, secure all chil-
dren travelling in the vehicle in a restraint system suitable for their age, as well as properly secured seat belts page 39, Transporting children in the vehicle. Only start driving when all passengers have correctly fastened their seat belts. Only ever insert the latch plate into the buckle of the associated seat, and always en-
sure that it engages properly. Using a buckle that does not belong to the seat that you are occupying reduces the level of protection and can lead to severe injuries. Never let any foreign bodies or liquids enter the seat belt buckle slot. This could prevent belt buckles from working properly. Never unfasten the seat belt while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Never allow more than one person to share the same seat belt. Never allow children or babies to be trans-
ported on someone's lap, or while being held. Never drive wearing loose, bulky clothing
(such as an overcoat over a jacket). This could prevent the seat belts from fitting and functioning properly. WARNING Damaged seat belts are extremely dangerous and can cause severe or fatal injuries. Never damage the belt by trapping it in the door or in the seat mechanism. If the belt bands fabric or any other part of the seat belt becomes damaged, the seat belt may tear during an accident or sudden braking manoeuvre. Damaged seat belts must be replaced imme-
diately with new seat belts at a Volkswagen Dealership. Seat belts used during an acci-
dent and subjected to stress or belt tension-
er activation must be replaced by a Volkswagen Dealership. Replacement may be necessary even if there is no apparent dam-
age. The belt anchorage should also be checked. Never attempt to repair, modify or remove the seat belts yourself. All repairs to seat belts, belt retractors and buckles must be carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership. Warning lamp Please refer to on page 27. at the start of the chapter Fig. 21 Instrument cluster display warning lamp. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the warn-
ing lamp and the seat belt acoustic warning may not be available. An acoustic warning sounds for a few seconds whenever the seat belts are not fastened prior to reaching a speed of more than 25 km/h or when-
ever the seat belts are unfastened while driving. In addition, the warning lamp flashes . The warning light is only switched off after the driver fastens the respective seat belt, while the ignition is turned on. Safety 27
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. However, the most significant factor is the vehi-
cle speed. For example, when the speed doubles from 25 km/h to approximately 50 km/h (15 mph to approximately 30 mph), the kinetic energy in-
creases fourfold!
The amount of kinetic energy depends on the vehicle speed and weight of the vehicle and pas-
sengers The higher the speed and the heavier the weight, the greater the amount of energy that will be released in the event of an accident. Passengers not wearing seat belts are, therefore, not connected to the vehicle. In the event of a frontal collision they will continue to move for-
ward at the same speed at which the vehicle was travelling before impact, until something stops them. Because the passengers in our example are not restrained by seat belts, the entire amount of kinetic energy will only be released at the point of impact against the wall Fig. 23. At a speed of approximately 50 km/h (30 mph), the forces acting on the body during an accident can easily exceed one tonne (1,000 kg). These forces are even greater at higher speeds. This example applies not only to frontal colli-
sions, but to all kinds of accidents and collisions. What happens to passengers who have not fastened their seat belts Please refer to on page 27. at the start of the chapter Fig. 24 An unbelted driver is thrown forward. WARNING Incorrectly fastened or unfastened seat belts increase the risk of severe or fatal injuries. Seat belts will only offer the optimum level of pro-
tection when they are fastened and used prop-
erly. Frontal collisions and the laws of physics Please refer to on page 27. at the start of the chapter Fig. 22 Unbelted occupants in a vehicle heading for a brick wall. Fig. 23 Unbelted occupants in a vehicle striking a brick wall The physical principles involved in a frontal colli-
sion are relatively simple. As soon as the vehicle is in motion Fig. 22, both the moving vehicle and its passengers gain movement energy. Such energy is known as kinetic energy. The higher the vehicle speed and the heavier the weight of the vehicle, the greater the amount of energy that will have to be released in the event of an accident. 28 Owner's Manual Seat belts protect Please refer to on page 27. at the start of the chapter Fig. 25 The unbelted rear passenger is thrown for-
ward violently, hitting the belted driver. Many people believe that they can brace their weight with their hands in a minor collision. This is not true. Even at low speeds, the forces acting on the body in a collision are so great that occupants cannot brace themselves with their arms and hands. In a frontal collision, unbelted passengers are thrown forward and will make unchecked contact with parts of the vehicle interior, e.g. the steering wheel, dash panel, or windscreen Fig. 24. The airbag system is not a substitute for the seat belts. When triggered, airbags only provide addi-
tional protection. Airbags are not triggered in all kinds of accidents. Even if the vehicle is equipped with an airbag system, all vehicle occupants, in-
cluding the driver, must fasten their seat belt and wear it correctly while the vehicle is in motion. This reduces the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident - regardless of whether an airbag is available. An airbag can only be triggered once. To achieve best possible protection, seat belts must always be worn properly. This also ensures that protec-
tion is provided in accidents in which the airbag is not triggered. Any vehicle occupant not wear-
ing a seat belt can be thrown out of the vehicle and sustain even more severe or even fatal inju-
ries as a result. It is also essential for rear passengers to wear seat belts properly, as they could otherwise be thrown forward violently in an accident. Rear passengers who are not wearing seat belts en-
danger not only themselves and the driver, but also other people in the vehicle Fig. 25. Fig. 26 Driver restrained by a properly positioned seat belt during a sudden braking manoeuvre. Correctly fastened seat belts can make a major difference. When fastened properly, seat belts hold the vehicle occupants in the correct sitting positions and considerably reduce the kinetic en-
ergy in the event of an accident. Seat belts also help to prevent uncontrolled movements that could lead to severe injuries. Additionally, wear-
ing seat belts properly reduces the risk of being thrown from the vehicle Fig. 26. Passengers wearing seat belts correctly benefit greatly from the ability of the belts to reduce the kinetic energy generated. The front crumple zones and other passive safety features (such as the airbag system) are also designed to mitigate kinetic energy. The amount of energy generated will thus decrease, thereby reducing the risk of injury. Accident statistics prove that correctly fastened seat belts considerably reduce the risk of injury in all types of accidents and increase the chance of survival in an accident. This is why seat belts must be fastened before every trip - even if your only planning on going around the block. Furthermore, properly worn seat belts ensure proper airbag operation in case of accidents. For this reason, the use of seat belts is mandatory under Brazilian law. For example, the front airbags will only be trig-
gered in certain types of frontal collision. Front airbags will not be triggered during minor frontal Safety 29
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. collisions, minor side collisions, rear collisions, rolls or accidents in which the airbag trigger threshold in the control unit is not exceeded. Do not allow the belt bands to become jam-
med, damaged or to rub on any sharp edges. Always keep the latch plate and slot in the buckle free from foreign bodies and liquids. Using seat belts Please refer to on page 27. at the start of the chapter Fastening and unfastening seat belts Checklist Using seat belts Check the condition of all seat belts regular-
ly. Keep the seat belts clean. Never let any foreign bodies and liquids get on to the seat belt, the latch plate or into the slot for the seat belt buckle. Do not trap or damage the seat belt and latch plate (e.g. when closing the door). Never remove, modify or repair the seat belt or any part of the belt fixture system. Always fasten the seat belt correctly before driving and wear it properly while the vehicle is in motion. Twisted seat belt If it is difficult to remove the seat belt from the belt guide, the seat belt may have become twis-
ted if it was returned too quickly into the side trim: In this case:
Take hold of the latch plate then slowly and carefully pull out the seat belt. Untwist the seat belt and guide it back slowly by hand. Fasten the seat belt even if you are unable to un-
do the twist. However, the twist should not be in an area of the seat belt that comes into direct contact with the body! The twist should be cor-
rected immediately by a Volkswagen Dealership. WARNING Using seat belts incorrectly increases the risk of severe or fatal injuries. Regularly check to see if the seat belt and its related parts are in perfect working condi-
tions. Keep the seat belts clean. 30 Owner's Manual Please refer to on page 27. at the start of the chapter Fig. 27 Inserting the seat belt latch plate into the buckle. Fig. 28 Removing the seat belt latch plate into the buckle. If worn properly, seat belts hold the vehicle occu-
pants in the correct sitting position during an ac-
cident or braking manoeuvre, giving occupants maximum protection
. Fastening the seat belts Fasten seat belts before driving. Always adjust the seats and head rests proper-
ly page 24. Gently pull the seat belt through the latch plate, across the chest and the pelvic area. Do not twist the seat belt
. Insert the latch plate securely into the buckle of the respective seat Fig. 27. Pull test the seat belt to ensure that the latch plate is securely locked in the buckle. Unfastening the seat belts Unfasten seat belts only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary Press the red button in the belt buckle
. Fig. 28. The latch plate is released and springs out. Guide the belt back so that it rolls up easily, without twisting the seat belt and without damaging the trim. WARNING Incorrect seat belt routing can cause severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident. The seat belts only offer best protection when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened prop-
erly according to the occupant's height. Unfastening seat belts while the vehicle is in motion can lead to severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking manoeuvre. Seat belt routing Please refer to on page 27. at the start of the chapter Fig. 29 Correct seat belt routing and head rest ad-
justment. Fig. 30 Correct seat belt routing during pregnancy. Seat belts only provide an optimum level of pro-
tection during an accident and reduce the risk of severe or fatal injuries when they are routed cor-
rectly. Correct seat belt bands routing also holds the vehicle occupants in position so that an in-
flating airbag can offer the maximum level of protection. Therefore always fasten your seat belt and ensure that the seat belt routing is cor-
rect. An incorrect sitting position can cause severe or fatal injuries page 24, Adjusting the seat posi-
tion. Correct seat belt routing The shoulder part of the seat belt must always lie on the centre of the shoulder, never across the neck, over or under the arm, or behind the back. The lower seat belt strap must always lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must always lie flat and firm against the body. Slightly loosen the seat belt if necessary. For pregnant women, the seat belt must be posi-
tioned over the chest and as low as possible over the pelvis, so that no pressure is exerted on the lower body Fig. 30. Correct seat belt routing according to height The seat belt routing can be adjusted as follows:
Belt height adjuster for the front seats page 32. Seat with height adjustment page 60. Safety 31
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. WARNING Belt height adjuster Incorrect seat belt routing can cause severe in-
juries in the event of an accident or a sudden braking / driving manoeuvre. The seat belts only offer best protection when the backrests are in an upright position and the seat belts have been fastened prop-
erly. The shoulder part of the seat belt must lie on the centre of the shoulder and never under the arm or across the neck. The seat belt must lie flat and firmly over the chest. The lower seat belt strap must always lie across the pelvis, never across the stomach. The seat belt must lie flat and firmly over the pelvis. Slightly loosen the seat belt if neces-
sary. For pregnant women, the lap part of the seat belt must be as low as possible over the pel-
vis around the bulge of the belly. Do not twist the belt bands while securing the seat belt. Never hold the seat belt away from the body by hand. The belt bands should not lie over hard or fragile objects, such as glasses, pens or keys. Never use seat belt clips, retaining rings or similar items to alter the seat belt routing. If a person's physical build prevents them from routing the seat belt properly, contact a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop to find out about any special modifications so that the seat belts and airbags can provide the optimum level of protection. Please refer to on page 27. at the start of the chapter Fig. 31 Next to the seats: seat belt height adjuster. Depending on the vehicle's version, seat belt height adjustment may not be available. The seat belt height adjusters can be used to ad-
just the seat belt position on the shoulder area, so it can be fastened properly:
Press and hold the shoulder belt guide as indi-
cated by the arrows Fig. 31. Push the shoulder belt guide up or down so that the seat belt lies over the middle of the shoulder page 31, Seat belt routing. Let go of the shoulder belt guide. Pull sharply on the seat belt to check whether the shoulder belt guide is engaged securely. For those versions that do not have this manual adjustment, the vehicle has two positions on the column for the seatbelt height adjustment to the shoulder. The seatbelts are factory installed to the first position and can be adjusted to the up-
per position. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. WARNING Never adjust the seat belt height when the ve-
hicle is in motion. 32 Owner's Manual Automatic belt retractor, belt tensioner and belt roll-back function All safety requirements must be observed when the vehicle or components of the sys-
tem are scrapped. Volkswagen Dealerships are familiar with such requirements. Please refer to on page 27. at the start of the chapter Seat belts are part of the vehicle's safety system page 36 and are made up of the following im-
portant functions:
Automatic belt retractor The safety belts are fitted with an automatic re-
triever roller, this device keeps the safety belt ad-
justed to the passenger's body. Full freedom of movement in the passenger's upper body area is made possible when the seat belt is pulled slowly or when the vehicle is travelling at normal speeds. However, the automatic belt retractor locks the seat belt if the belt is pulled out quickly, during sudden braking, when driving uphill or downhill or around bends, and during accelera-
tion. Seat belt tensioners Front seat belts are equipped with belt tension-
ers and roll-back function. Rear seat belts are not equipped with these features. Belt tensioners are activated by sensors during severe frontal and rear collisions, tightening the seat belts against the direction in which they are pulled. Safety belt clearances are eliminated when the belt tensioner is activated, reducing the forward movement of passengers towards the impact direction. Belt tensioners works to-
gether with the airbag system. Belt tensioners are not activated in minor front collisions, rolls or accidents in which the threshold in the control unit is not exceeded. A fine dust may be generated upon activation. This is perfectly normal and does not represent fire risk. Seat belt roll-back function The front seat belts are equipped with roll-back function. The seat belt roll-back function minimizes seat belt force acting over the body in case of acci-
dents. Service and disposal of belt tensioners Please refer to on page 27. at the start of the chapter Seat belts may become damaged during any work on the belt tensioners or while removing or refitting any vehicle parts in conjunction with any other repair work. Such damages will not always be noticeable. The consequence may be that the belt tensioners could function incorrectly, or not function at all, in the event of an accident. Regulations must be observed to ensure that the effectiveness of the belt tensioner is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution. Volkswagen Dealer-
ships are familiar with such requirements. WARNING The risk of severe or fatal injuries may be in-
creased if the seat belts, automatic belt retrac-
tors and belt tensioners are not used correctly, or if they are repaired by a non-professional. In this case, the belt tensioners may not be trig-
gered when they should, or they may be trig-
gered unexpectedly. Only Volkswagen page 249, Accessories, modifications, repairs and part replacement may carry out repairs, adjustments or remov-
al and refitting of parts in the belt tensioner system or seat belts. Belt tensioners and automatic belt retractors cannot be repaired. They must be replaced. Belt tensioners can only be activated once. Once the belt tensioners are activated, they must be replaced. Airbag modules and belt tensioners may contain toxic substances. This product can-
not be disposed / discarded along with common trash. For your own safety and comfort, Volkswagen recommends replacing belt tension-
ers and airbag modules only at Volkswagen Deal-
erships. Safety 33
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Airbag system Introduction The vehicle is equipped with one front airbag for the driver and one for the passenger. Front air-
bags can provide the driver and front passenger with additional chest and head protection if the seat, seat belts, head rests and, in the case of the driver, steering wheel are adjusted and used cor-
rectly. Airbags are meant to provide additional protection. Airbags do not deploy in all collision situations and do not replace seat belts, which should always be used, even when the vehicle is equipped with front airbags. WARNING Never rely solely on the airbag system for your protection. Even if an airbag is triggered, it only offers additional protection. The airbag system only enhances protection if the seat belt is properly used, in order to mitigate injuries page 26, Seat belts. Before every trip, each vehicle occupant must assume a correct sitting position, cor-
rectly fasten the seat belt belonging to their seat and keep it fastened properly through-
out the trip. WARNING The risk of injury increases if there are any items located between the occupant and the deployment area of the airbag when it is trig-
gered. This will impinge on the deployment zone of the airbag or the items will be flung against the body. Never hold any objects in your hand or on your lap while the vehicle is in motion. Never transport any objects on the passen-
ger seat. Objects could enter the deployment zone of the airbag during sudden braking or driving manoeuvres and then be flung dan-
gerously through the vehicle interior if the airbag is activated. People, animals or objects must never be in-
between the vehicle's front seat occupants, the rear side seat occupants and the airbag expansion areas. Ensure this is also followed by children and passengers. 34 Owner's Manual WARNING The airbag system only supports a single airbag triggering event. If the airbags are triggered, the airbag system must be replaced. Airbags that have been triggered, and any af-
fected system parts, must immediately be replaced with new parts that are approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle. Airbag system repairs and part replacements must only be carried out by Volkswagen Dealerships. Volkswagen Dealerships have the necessary tools, diagnostic equipment, repair information and qualified personnel for this purpose. Never use recycled airbag components or components that have been taken from end-
of-life vehicles in your vehicle. Never alter any components of the airbag system. WARNING A fine dust (non-toxic) may be generated upon activation. This is perfectly normal and does not represent fire risk. The fine dust can cause irritation to the skin and eye membranes and cause breathing dif-
ficulties, particularly for people suffering from asthma or people who have or had oth-
er respiratory problems. To help reduce breathing difficulties, get out of the vehicle or open the windows or doors for more fresh air. If you come into contact with the dust, wash your hands and face with a mild soap and water before eating. Do not let the dust get into your eyes or into open wounds. If dust has entered your eyes, rinse them with water. WARNING Cleaning products case the airbag module sur-
faces to become porous and brittle. In case of activation, such parts could break and cause se-
vere injuries. Never apply any chemical or cleaning prod-
ucts to the airbag module surfaces. Use only damp cloths to clean these areas. Indicator lamp Please refer to on page 34. Troubleshooting at the start of the chapter Please refer to on page 34. at the start of the chapter Fig. 32 Indicator lamp on the dashboard for the de-
activated front passenger airbag. Depending on the vehicle version, the front pas-
senger airbag dashboard indicator light may not be available. The yellow indicator lamp on the instru-
ment cluster display lights up briefly after switching on the ignition to test for proper operation, and goes off after a few sec-
onds. Front passenger front airbag disabled. The yellow indicator lamp on the cen-
tre console is permanently on. If, while the passenger front airbag is deactiva-
ted, the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp is not permanently lit or if it remains lit along with the instrument cluster indicator lamp
, the airbag system may be malfunctioning
. DANGER If there is a fault in the airbag system, the air-
bag may not trigger correctly, may not trigger at all or may trigger unexpectedly. This can cause severe or fatal injuries. The airbag system must be checked by a Volkswagen Dealership as soon as possible. Never fit a child seat on the passenger seat while the airbag system is activated! The passenger front airbag may be triggered in an accident, despite damages. NOTICE Failure to observe the illuminated indicator lamps and its descriptions and meanings could lead to vehicle damages. Airbags system or belt tensioner damaged The yellow indicator lamp is permanently on. A message will also be shown on the instrument cluster display. A malfunction was identified in at least one air-
bag or belt tensioner. Contact a Volkswagen Dealership. Belt tensioners and the airbag system must be checked. Front passenger front airbag disabled The yellow indicator lamp is permanently on for the deactivated front passenger front airbag. The front passenger front airbag is deactivated. If, while the passenger front airbag is deactiva-
ted, the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp is not permanently lit or if it remains lit along with the instrument cluster indicator lamp
, the airbag system may be malfunctioning Check whether the front passenger front air-
bag needs to stay deactivated, for instance, while using a child seat on the front passenger seat. in Indicator lamp on page 35. Description and function of the airbags Please refer to on page 34. at the start of the chapter The airbags can protect vehicle occupants in case of accidents, reducing the occupant's move-
ments in case of frontal collisions. When an airbag is triggered, it is inflated by a gas generator. This causes the airbag covers to break, and the airbags inflate forcefully to cover their deployment zones within milliseconds. After holding vehicle occupants in place, who must al-
ways wear their respective seat belts, inflated airbags release a gas through openings located away from the vehicle occupants. This can Safety 35
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Optimised seat belts for all seats. Adjustable steering column. Brakes / parking brakes. Belt tension limiter for the driver and front passenger. Seat belt warning lamp . Airbag indicator lamp . PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp. Belt tensioners for the driver and front passen-
ger. Belt height adjuster for the front seats. Sensors and control units. Situations in which front airbags are not triggered:
If the ignition is switched off during a collision. If the impact intensity measured in control units is too small during frontal collisions. During minor side collisions. During rear collisions. If the vehicle rolls over. If the impact intensity measured by the control unit is insufficient to trigger the airbags. In case of airbag triggering - Crash detection function Whenever airbags are deployed during an acci-
dent, the crash detection functions is activated and the following actions may occur:
Unlocking of vehicle doors (valid for vehicles equipped with electric central locking system) page 47. Fuel supply cut off page 177. Activation of inner vehicle lights page 67. Activation of warning lamps page 42. Warning lamps may be switched off via the dash panel switch. reduce the risk of severe and fatal injuries. A trig-
gered airbag will not always prevent other inju-
ries such as swelling, bruising and grazing. Heat by friction can also be generated during an airbag triggering event. Airbags provide no protection for the arms or lower body parts. The most important factors regarding airbag trig-
gering are the type of accident, the vehicle im-
pact area, the angle, the intensity of the impact, the vehicle structure, and the obstacle to which the vehicle collided. Therefore, airbags are not triggered in all collisions. The airbag system's triggering depends on the intensity of the impact registered by an electron-
ic control unit. If the accident's characteristics do not fall under the parameters configured in the control unit, the airbags are not triggered. Vehi-
cle damages and cost repairs are used as indica-
tors that they airbag system should have been triggered. Important factors in the triggering of the airbag include the nature (hard or soft) of the object that the vehicle hits, the angle and inten-
sity of impact, and the vehicle impact area. Airbags are merely used as additional safety fea-
tures for the seat belts in some accidents in which the impact intensity is sufficient to trigger the airbags. Airbags can only be triggered once and only in certain situations. The seat belts are always there to provide protection in situations in which the airbags are not triggered or have al-
ready been triggered. For example, if the vehicle collides with a further vehicle following the initial collision, or is hit by another vehicle. The airbag system is part of the vehicle's overall passive safety concept. The airbag system can only work effectively when the occupants are wearing their seat belts correctly and have as-
sumed a proper sitting position page 24. Components of the vehicle safety concept The following vehicle safety equipment makes up the vehicle's safety concept to reduce the risk of severe and fatal injuries. Depending on the vehi-
cle version, some of the equipment may not be fitted in your vehicle or may not be available at all in some countries. Front airbags for driver and front passenger. Height-adjustable head restraints optimised for rear impact. Seats. 36 Owner's Manual Front airbags Please refer to on page 34. at the start of the chapter Fig. 33 Location and deployment zone of the driver front airbag. Fig. 34 Location and deployment zone of the pas-
senger front airbag. In conjunction with the seat belts, the front air-
bag system gives the front occupants additional protection for the head and chest in the event of a severe frontal collision. Farthest distance from the front airbag is recommended; at least 25 cm page 24. This allows the front airbags to in-
flate fully when triggered, thus providing maxi-
mum protection. The driver front airbag is located in the steering wheel Fig. 33 and the passenger front airbag is located in the dash panel Fig. 34. Airbag loca-
tions are identified by the text AIRBAG. The areas highlighted in red Fig. 33 and Fig. 34 are covered by the front airbags when triggered (deployment zone). For this reason, you must never leave or attach any items in these areas The airbag covers fold out of the steering wheel Fig. 33 and dash panel Fig. 34 when the driver and passenger airbags are activated. The airbag covers remain connected to the steering wheel or the dashboard. DANGER Once triggered, the airbag inflates at high speed. Always leave the deployment zones of the front airbags clear. Never attach any items, such as drink or tele-
phone holders, GPS, etc., to the covers of the airbags or anywhere in the airbag deploy-
ment zone. Front seat occupants must never carry any people, pets or objects in the deployment zone between themselves and the airbags. Do not attach objects, such as GPS devices, in the windscreen above the passenger front airbag. Do not attach, line, modify, or place any ma-
terials over the centre steering wheel surface
(horn activation) and the front passenger air-
bag module surface, on the dash panel. WARNING The front airbags are triggered in front of the steering wheel Fig. 33 and dash panel Fig. 34. When driving, always hold the steering wheel with both hands on the outside of the ring: 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Adjust the driver seat in such a way that there is at least 25 cm between your breast-
bone and the hub of the steering wheel. If your physical build makes it impossible to fulfil this requirement, you must contact a Volkswagen Dealership in order to imple-
ment any necessary modifications. Adjust the passenger seat so that the dis-
tance between the passenger and the dash-
board is as large as possible. Safety 37
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Switch on the passenger front airbag Switch off the ignition. Open the storage compartment. Unfold the key bit out of the remote control vehicle key page 45 or use the mechanical vehicle key. Using the key bit, turn the key-activated switch Fig. 35 into ON position. Close the stowage compartment. Check if, while the ignition is switched on, the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp on the dash panel is not lit page 35. Recognition feature for the deactivated passenger front airbag A switched off passenger front airbag is exclu-
sively indicated by the PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp permanently lit in the ( permanently lit yellow lamp) page 35, Indicator lamp. If the indicator lamp on the centre console is not permanently lit or if it is lit along with the indicator lamp of the instrument cluster, no child seat system may be assembled over the passenger seat, for safety reasons. The passenger front airbag may be triggered in an accident. WARNING The passenger front airbag may only be deacti-
vated in special cases. Switch the passenger front airbag on and off only while the ignition is switched off, in or-
der to prevent damages to the airbag sys-
tem. The driver is responsible for the correct posi-
tioning of the switch activated by the key. Switch off the passenger front airbag only when there is a child seat assembled on the passenger seat, under special circumstances. Switch the passenger front airbag back on as soon as the child seat is no longer being used on the passenger seat. Airbag system parts must never be reused in case of vehicle or component scrapping. All applicable environment disposal standards must be followed, in addition to other safety standards in effect. Volkswagen Dealerships are familiar with such requirements. Manually turn the front passenger airbag on and off using the switch activated by the key Please refer to on page 34. at the start of the chapter Fig. 35 On the stowage compartment: switch deac-
tivated by the key to switch the passenger front air-
bag on and off. Depending on the vehicle version, the front pas-
senger airbag on/off switch may not be availa-
ble. When fastening a rear-facing child seat on the passenger seat, the passenger front airbag must be deactivated!
Switch off the passenger front airbag Switch off the ignition. Open the storage compartment. Unfold the key bit out of the remote control vehicle key page 45 or use the mechanical vehicle key. Using the key bit, turn the key-activated switch Fig. 35 into OFF position. Close the stowage compartment. The PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator lamp on the dashboard is permanently lit while the ignition is switched on page 35. 38 Owner's Manual Transporting children in the vehicle Introduction Child seats reduce the risk of injury in an acci-
dent. Always transport children in child seats, ac-
cording to applicable laws!
Note:
Child seats are grouped according to the child's size, age and weight. Installing child seats in the vehicle can be exe-
cuted with different retaining systems. Before transporting babies and children in child seats on the front passenger seat, it is imperative to read all airbag system information and learn about potential injuries airbag deployment can cause children in the 0 and 0+ group. This information is very important for the safety of the driver and all passengers, especially babies and small children. Volkswagen recommends using child seats from the Volkswagen Original Accessories Program. These child seats were developed and approved for use in Volkswagen vehicles. WARNING Children who are not strapped in or who are not strapped in properly could sustain severe or fatal injuries while the vehicle is in motion. Never leave a child seat facing backwards on the front passenger seat without disabling the airbag for risk of possible injuries should the airbag trigger. Volkswagen recommends to always trans-
port children of age under 12 years or less than 1.50 m high on the rear seat. Always secure children in the vehicle in an authorised restraint system suitable to their age. Always fasten child seat or children's seat belts correctly and ensure that children as-
sume a correct sitting position. Ensure that the seat belt routing is correct for each use condition. If the seat belt must be passed over the child's body, ensure that the seat belt passes through the child's shoulder and never through the child's neck. Never allow children or babies to be trans-
ported on someone's lap, or while being held. Only ever fasten one child into each child seat. Read and observe the child seat's manufac-
turer instructions, especially regarding prop-
er seat belt attachment. Replace child seats that withstand any force during an accident as they could have sus-
tained damage that may not be visible. WARNING An unsecured, unoccupied child seat could be flung through the vehicle interior in the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or accident. This could cause injuries. Always secure child seats safely, even if they are not being used, or stow them in the lug-
gage compartment while the vehicle is in motion. Child seat types Please refer to on page 39. at the start of the chapter Fig. 36 Figures A , B and C illustrate the main securing points for the child restraint system for children only wearing the seat belt. Always secure child seats properly, safely and in accordance with the installation instructions from the child seat manufacturer. The child seat must be fastened by the vehicle's seat belts and must not allow longitudinal or transversal movement. Safety 39
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Child seats that have been tested and approved under the ECE R 44 standard bear the test mark firmly on the seat: a capital E in a circle, below the test number. WARNING Ignoring any of the points on this important safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju-
ries. Always follow the instructions on the check-
list and comply with applicable safety pre-
cautions. WARNING In the event of an accident, the rear seat is the safest place for children with properly fastened seat belts. A suitable child seat, correctly fitted and used on one of the rear seats, will provide the maximum level of protection for children up to 12 years old in most accident scenar-
ios. Installation and child seat usage in the vehicle Please refer to on page 39. at the start of the chapter The laws of physics, which come into force on a vehicle during a collision or any other kind of ac-
cident, also apply to children page 26. In con-
trast to adults and teenagers, however, children's muscles and bones are not yet fully developed. Children have a higher risk for children of sus-
taining severe injuries in case of an accident. Children must be transported using child re-
straint systems that are specifically suited to their size, weight and physical build, as children's bodies are not yet fully developed. Not all countries allow you to transport children on the front passenger seat. The front passenger airbag can pose severe risks for children transported in a rear-facing child seat. Legislation and legal requirements take prece-
dence over the descriptions in this Owner's Man-
ual. Various standards and regulations govern the use of child seats and methods for securing them
( page 26). For example, this could mean that in some countries you are not allowed to use child seats on certain seats in the vehicle. Country-specific standards for transporting children in vehicles Child seats must conform to the ECE-R 441) standard (Europe). Additional information can be obtained from your Volkswagen Dealership and online at www.volkswagen.com. Country-specific securing systems Child seat types Fig. 36:
A B C Portable crib or baby convenience seat Child seat Lifting seat The systems are made up of attachments for child restraint systems for children wearing the seat belt in the rear seat. Group classification for child seats according to ECE-R 44 Weight class Child's weight Group 0 up to 10 kg Group 0+
up to 13 kg Group 1 9 kg to 18 kg Age up to approximate-
ly 9 months up to approximate-
ly 18 months approximately 8 months to 31/2 years Group 2 Group 3 15 kg to 25 approximately 3 to kg 7 years 22 kg to 36 approximately 6 to kg 12 years In addition to age range, other aspects must be considered for child seat adjustment purposes, such as weight, height, and physical build of the child, since the child's biotype may not corre-
spond to the majority of the population within the same age range. In case of doubts, please contact a Volkswagen Dealership. 1) ECE Regulation: Economic Commission for Europe-Regelung 40 Owner's Manual DANGER If a child must use the front passenger seat, push the seat as far back as possible longitu-
dinally in order to ensure greater distance from the front airbag. Keep the backrest in an upright position. Always secure children in the vehicle in an authorised restraint system suitable for their height and weight. Using child seats on rear vehicle seats Please refer to on page 39. at the start of the chapter Rear seat only applies only to the New Extended Cab Saveiro. Initially, it is imperative to distinguish the child restraint system principle, as per page 39. Before assembling the child seat, adjust or re-
move the head rest and adjust the front seat backrest angles, in case they somehow interfere with the child seat page 61. Securing child seats using the seat belt Please refer to on page 39. at the start of the chapter Universal child seats may be secured with the seat belt of seats indicated on the table with u. When such seats cannot be secured, an x is indi-
cated. If a rear-facing child seat is secured to the front passenger seat, an inflating passenger front air-
bag can strike it with such force that critical or
. Therefore, never fatal injuries may occur use a rear-facing child seat on the passenger seat when the front passenger airbag is activated!
Exceptions provided to transport children in the front seat When the vehicle only has front seats. When the number of children below the age of 10 exceeds the rear seat capacity. In this case, children with greatest stature may be trans-
ported in the front seat, using the vehicle's seat belt or the appropriate securing system according to the child's age. Airbag sticker In the vehicle there will be a sticker with impor-
tant information on the front passenger front air-
bag. The content depends on the country and may vary. Check the sticker attached to the driver and/or front passenger sun visor. To the windscreen. Prior installing a child seat backwards it is imper-
ative to observe the warnings
. What to be aware of when a child is using the front passenger seat:
The front passenger seat backrest must be in an upright position. The front passenger seat must be pushed as far back as possible. The child must be using an appropriate child seat for his/her respective age, weight, and height. If seat belt height adjustment is available, it must be adjusted to the most adequate posi-
tion according to the height of the child or the child seat. DANGER Never use child seats facing backwards in the front passenger seat while the front passenger airbag is activated. The child may be killed upon front airbag deployment, since the child seat is impacted with great strength and projected against the backrest. Safety 41
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Weight class Front pas-
senger seat Rear side seats rear cen-
tral seat Group 0
: up to 10 kg Group 0+
: up to 13 kg Group 1
: 9 to 18 kg Group 2 15 to 25 kg Group 3 22 to 36 kg u secured opposite to the driving di-
rection u secured opposite to the driving di-
rection u xa) xa) u secured in the driving direction secured in the driving direction u u secured in the driving direction secured in the driving direction u u secured in the driving direction secured in the driving direction x x x x x a) For vehicles with single and extended cab install backwards to the driving direction with the airbag deactivated page 38. Securing child seats using the seat belt Read and follow the instructions provided by the child seat manufacturer. If the child seat is assembled on the front pas-
senger seat, push the front passenger seat as far back as possible and adjust the backrest to an upright position page 24. If seat belt height adjustment is available, it must be placed in the optimal position based on the height of the child or the child seat. Place the child seat over the seat and pass the seat belt as per the child seat manufacturer's instructions. Adjust or remove the headrest to prevent in-
terference with the child seat, if necessary page 62. Ensure that the seat belt is not twisted. Insert the seat belt latch plate into the respec-
tive buckle until a "clicking" sound is heard. 42 Owner's Manual The seat belt must lie firmly and adequately over the child seat or the child. Conduct seat belt traction test ensure that the lower belt strap is locked and can no lon-
ger be pulled out. Removing child seats Unfasten seat belts only when the vehicle is sta-
tionary Press the red button in the buckle. The latch
. plate is released and springs out. Guide the belt back by hand so that it rolls up easily, without twisting the seat belt and with-
out damaging the trim. Remove the child seat from the vehicle ac-
cording to the instructions given by the child seat manufacturer. WARNING Unfastening seat belts while the vehicle is in motion can lead to severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sudden braking or driv-
ing manoeuvres. Unfasten seat belts only when the vehicle is stationary . In an emergency Making you and your vehicle safe Fig. 37 On the upper portion of the centre console:
warning lamp switch. Observe any legislation concerning the safety of a broken down vehicle. For example, many coun-
tries stipulate that you have to switch on the hazard warning lights page 44. Checklist To ensure your own safety and the safety of your passengers, observe the following points in the order given 1. Stop the vehicle at a safe distance away from
moving traffic and on a suitable surface
. 2. Switch on the hazard warning lights with the Fig. 37 switch. 3. Apply the handbrake page 95. 4. Move the gear shift lever into the neutral po-
sition page 88. 5. Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition lock page 86. 6. Ensure that all occupants exit the vehicle away from moving traffic and proceed to a safe position, e.g. behind the guardrail. 7. Take all vehicle keys with you when you leave the vehicle. 8. Place the warning triangle in position to draw the attention of other road users to your vehicle. 9. Allow the engine to cool down and, if neces-
sary, seek expert assistance. When the hazard warning lights are switched on, all turn signals flash at the same time. The turn signals indicator lights and an indicator light at the switch flash at the same time. The haz-
ard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off. Lit indicator lights could indicate a change in di-
rection or lane while towing or by activating the turn signal lever. The indicator lights are tempo-
rarily interrupted. Examples in which hazard warning lights must be switched on:
When traffic ahead suddenly starts moving more slowly or you reach the tail end of a traf-
fic jam. This will warn vehicles behind you. When there is an emergency. When the vehicle breaks down. When being towed. Always follow local regulations for the use of the hazard warning lights. If the hazard warning lights are not working, use an alternative method of drawing attention to the broken down vehicle (according to applicable legal provisions). Emergency brake lights - ESS (Emergency Stop Signal) For vehicles with ESS function and anti-lock brake system (ABS), during sudden and continu-
ous braking at speeds greater than 80 km/h, the brake light lamp may flash to warn cars coming in from behind. If the braking manoeuvre is further extended, maintaining the same deceleration rate, the warning lights are automatically activated and flash when the vehicle reaches a speed lower than approximately 10 km/h. Upon resuming ve-
hicle movement, warning lights are automatically deactivated. Warning lamps may also be switched off via the dash panel Fig. 37 switch. WARNING Broken-down vehicles lacking due signalling in-
crease the risk of accidents both for you and for other road users. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a safe location. ark the vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic in order to lock all doors securely in an emergency. Switch on the haz-
ard warning lights and set up the warning triangle to warn other road users. Never leave unattended children or people with special needs in the vehicle with the doors locked. This may mean that they are locked in the vehicle in an emergency. Per-
sons locked in the vehicle may be exposed to extremely high or low temperatures. WARNING Ignoring any of the points on this important safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju-
ries. Always follow the instructions on the check-
list and comply with applicable safety pre-
cautions. WARNING The components of the exhaust system be-
come very hot. This can cause fires and serious injuries. Never park the vehicle so that parts of the exhaust system can come into contact with inflammable material underneath the vehi-
cle, e.g. dry grass, fuel, etc. Safety 43
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. The vehicle battery will discharge if the haz-
ard warning lights are left on over a long period of time even if the ignition is switched off. Whenever airbags are activated in acci-
dents, warning lights may be automatically activated page 36. Emergency equipment Fire extinguisher The fire extinguisher may not be available for some export markets. According to the vehicle version, the fire extin-
guisher support may be located in the footwell underneath the driver seat. The fire extinguisher must correspond to the le-
gal requirements, be always ready for use, and be regularly inspected (see the inspection seal on the fire extinguisher). WARNING Loose objects may be projected inside the vehi-
cle in the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, as well as during accidents, and may cause severe injuries. Secure the warning triangle in the respective straps. The warning triangle must comply with ap-
plicable legal provisions in each country. Fig. 38 Behind the passenger seat: warning tri-
angle. On the rear seat floor: warning triangle -
New Saveiro Extended Cab. Warning triangle The warning triangle's placement varies depend-
ing on the vehicle version and/or model. The warning triangle may not be available in some export markets. Fold the passenger seat backrest to access the warning triangle. The warning triangle is located on the floor be-
hind the passenger seat Fig. 38 fastened to the vehicle toolkit. In the New Saveiro Extended Cab, the warning triangle is located on the rear seat floor, secured behind the trim. 44 Owner's Manual Open and close Vehicle key Vehicle key functions Fig. 39 Vehicle key with remote control. Fig. 40 Mechanical key. Foldable mechanical key. Key for Fig. 39:
1 2 Central locking button: unlock the vehicle. Unlock the boot lid: press the button . Only the boot lid is unlocked. Central locking button: lock the vehicle. Folding and unfolding the key bit. Indicator lamp: flashes after pressing the button. 3 4 5
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Key for Fig. 40:
Mechanical key. Foldable mechanical key. Folding and unfold-
ing the key blade (arrow). Locking or unlocking the vehicle from the outside Unlock: press . Press and hold for conven-
ience opening. OR: insert the vehicle key into the driver door lock cylinder and turn counter-
clockwise. Lock: press . OR: insert the vehicle key into the driver door lock cylinder and turn clock-
wise. Press and hold for convenience closing. Unlocking the dropside with remote control:
press the button or page 53 on the vehicle key. The rear lid is unlocked. Unlock the dropside with the key: unlock the driver's door and insert the key into the door cylinder and turncounterclockwise. The rear lid is unlocked. The remote control key only locks and unlocks the vehicle when the battery has enough power and if the remote control key is located a few metres away from the vehicle. When the vehicle is locked, all turn signals will flash once as confirmation. When the vehicle is unlocked, all turn signals will flash twice as confirmation. It is possible to enable the sound signal (horn) of the alarm activation/deactivation confirmation. For vehicles with Volkswagen Information Sys-
tem it is possible to enable/disable it through the instrument cluster. For the remaining vehicles go to a Volkswagen dealership to enable/disable the sound signal. If the turn signals do not flash as locking confir-
mation, at least one of the doors or the boot lid is not closed. The vehicle cannot be locked using the vehicle key if the driver door is still open. The vehicle will be locked again automatically if you do not open one of the doors or the boot lid a few seconds af-
ter unlocking the car with the remote control key. This function prevents the vehicle from re-
maining unlocked if the unlocking button is pressed by mistake. Open and close 45 Key for Fig. 41:
1 2 Remove the cover. Remove the battery. Volkswagen recommends having the battery re-
placed by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. Unfold the vehicle key bit page 45. Remove the cap on the rear side of the key Fig. 41 1 as indicated by the arrow Position the new battery as shown 2 and push it into the battery compartment in the opposite direction of the arrow
. Fit the cap as shown 1 and push it onto the vehicle key housing in the opposite direction of the arrow until it engages. DANGER Should 20 mm diameter batteries or other lithi-
um batteries be swallowed, severe or even fatal injuries may result within a short period of time. Always keep the vehicle key, key ring with batteries, spare batteries, round cells and other batteries out of the reach of children. Seek medical assistance immediately if you suspect someone has swallowed a battery. NOTICE The vehicle key may be damaged if the battery is improperly changed. Unsuitable batteries may damage the vehicle key. Discharged batteries should only be re-
placed with new batteries of the same voltage rating, size and specification. Ensure that the battery is fitted the right way round. The batteries contain toxic substances. This product cannot be disposed / discarded along with common trash. There are specific le-
gal requirements regarding the disposal / dis-
carding of used batteries. For your safety and convenience, Volkswagen recommends replacing vehicle batteries at a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. WARNING Improper or unsupervised use of the vehicle keys can cause severe accidents or injuries. Always take all vehicle keys with you every time you leave the vehicle. Children or unau-
thorised persons could lock the doors and tailgate, start the engine, switch on the igni-
tion and thus operate electrical equipment, such as the electric windows. Never leave unattended children or people with special needs in the vehicle. They could become trapped in the vehicle in an emer-
gency and may not be able to get themselves to safety. Depending on the time of year, for example, locked vehicles can be subjected to very high or very low temperatures. This can cause serious injuries and illness or fatalities, especially for small children. Never remove the vehicle key from the igni-
tion lock when the vehicle is in motion. NOTICE Every vehicle key contains electronic compo-
nents. Protect the key from damage, moisture and excessive vibration. Press the buttons on the vehicle key only if the corresponding function is actually nee-
ded. Pressing a button when the function is not required could lead to the vehicle being unlocked unintentionally or the alarm going off. This also applies even when it is believed to be outside the effective range. Replacing the battery Fig. 41 Vehicle key with remote control: 1 Open the battery case cover. 2 Remove the battery. 46 Owner's Manual Synchronize the vehicle key When it is impossible to unlock or lock the vehi-
cle with the vehicle key, synchronize the vehicle key or replace the battery page 46. Approach the vehicle with the remote control key. Press the locking or unlocking button once
. Insert the key bit to be programmed into the driver door lock cylinder in up to 60 seconds. Next, turn the key towards the vehicle locking or unlocking direction. The system will be synchronized. Synchronisation is only possible if the re-
mote control key is previously programmed for the vehicle. Central locking button and doors Introduction The central locking system will only work cor-
rectly when all doors are properly closed. The ve-
hicle cannot be locked with the vehicle key with remote control or central locking button if the driver door is open. If the vehicle is unlocked and not used for a long time (e.g. in your own garage) the vehicle battery could discharge or the engine may not start. WARNING Improper use of the central locking system could cause serious injuries. The central locking system locks all doors. Troubleshooting Vehicle cannot be locked or unlocked The remote control vehicle key may be tempora-
rily disabled due to obstacles, bad weather con-
ditions, weak battery, or excessive transmitters operating in the same frequency range near the vehicle (e.g. mobile phones or transmitters). OR: if the buttons in the vehicle key with remote control or one of the central locking buttons are pressed repeatedly within a short period of time, the central locking system will switch off briefly to prevent overloading. The vehicle will then be unlocked. Lock the vehicle if necessary. The indicator lamp does not flash When the indicator lamp on the vehicle key does not flash, the vehicle key battery needs to be re-
placed page 46. Spare key To acquire a key for the vehicle, the vehicle iden-
tification number is required. Several vehicle keys may be valid for a vehicle. The new vehicle keys can be obtained from your Volkswagen Dealership or from a qualified work-
shop. Locking the vehicle from the inside may pre-
vent the doors from being opened uninten-
tionally and unauthorised persons from en-
tering the vehicle. However, locked doors can delay assistance to passengers inside the vehicle in the event of an accident or emer-
gency. Never leave unattended children or people with special needs in the vehicle. All doors can be locked from the inside using the cen-
tral locking button. This may mean that peo-
ple lock themselves in the vehicle. Persons locked in the vehicle may be exposed to ex-
tremely high or low temperatures. Depending on the time of year, locked vehi-
cles can be subjected to extremely high or low temperatures. This can cause serious in-
juries and illness or fatalities, particularly for small children. Never leave anyone inside a locked vehicle. They could become trapped in the vehicle in an emergency and may not be able to get themselves to safety. Open and close doors and the dropside only when there is no one near its opening/clos-
ing range. Open and close 47
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Description of the central locking system Please refer to on page 47. at the start of the chapter The central locking system (not available in some versions) allows locking and unlocking the doors:
From outside the vehicle with the mechanical vehicle key in the driver door, for vehicles without remote control page 48. Using the remote control key in the driver door, when the remote control is not function-
al, in case of emergency page 51. Remote control page 45. From inside using the central locking button page 49. The passenger door can be locked manually if the remote control vehicle key or central locking sys-
tem fails page 50. The driver door may be manually unlocked using the mechanical part of the vehicle key, in case the remote control vehicle key or central locking system fails. Automatic locking (Auto Lock) The vehicle is automatically locked after reaching 20 km/h, in case it is still unlocked at such time. If the buttons on the vehicle key with re-
mote control ( page 45, Vehicle key) or one of the central locking buttons Fig. 42 are pressed repeatedly within a short period of time, the central locking system will switch off tempo-
rarily to prevent overloading. The vehicle will then be unlocked. In vehicles without alarm system and with central locking system, whenever the vehi-
cle is locked from the outside, the indicator lamp in the instrument cluster will flash, indicating that the vehicle is locked. Indicator lamp Please refer to on page 47. at the start of the chapter Only available in some versions equipped with the central locking system. When locking the vehicle from the outside, the indicator light will flash on the instrument cluster display. Mechanical locking and unlocking Please refer to on page 47. at the start of the chapter Mechanical locking applies to vehicles without electrical locking systems. Unlock the doors: Insert the vehicle key in the driver door lock or front passenger door lock. Turn the key to the unlocking position. The locking pin moves up. Lock the doors: Insert the vehicle key into the driver door lock. Turn the key to the locking position. The locking pin moves down. Doors may also be unlocked from inside the vehi-
cle. The door is unlocked by pulling the door han-
dle once. It is possible to lock the doors from outside, without the key. For such, press the locking pin down and close the door. This locking method does not apply to the driver door, in order to pre-
vent the key from being locked inside the vehicle. From inside, it is possible to lock the doors through the locking pin. However, for vehicles equipped with alarm systems, the latter will not be activated. If the driver door is open or not entirely closed
(first-stage lock), the vehicle may not be locked. WARNING Locked doors help prevent unwanted individu-
als accessing the car from outside, for example, during a red light. This may also hinder the ac-
cess of proper medical assistance during emer-
gencies. 48 Owner's Manual Central locking button Please refer to on page 47. at the start of the chapter Fig. 42 On the driver door: central locking button. Vehicle with central locking system Key for Fig. 42:
Unlocks the vehicle. Lock the vehicle. The central locking button functions with the ig-
nition switched on or off. If the vehicle is locked from outside with the re-
mote control vehicle key or through the driver door with the mechanical key, the central locking button will not work. Please note the following when using the central locking button to lock the vehicle:
The anti-theft alarm system will not be activa-
ted. It is not possible to open the doors from out-
side, for example, when stopped at traffic lights. The doors can be unlocked and opened from inside by pulling the door release handle. Eventually, you may have to pull the door re-
lease lever more than once. If any of the vehicle's doors is open, the cen-
tral locking system will not be activated. The vehicle will unlock automatically once the vehicle has come to a standstill and the vehicle key has been removed, if the automatic unlock-
ing function is active page 48. Vehicle without central locking system In vehicles without central locking system, the doors are locked by pressing the locking pin page 48. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. To open a door, pull the respective door handle or lift the locking pin. The following applies when the vehicle is locked:
It is not possible to open the doors from out-
side, for example, when stopped at traffic lights. The doors can be unlocked and opened from inside by pulling the door release handle. Eventually, you may have to pull the door re-
lease lever more than once. If any of the vehicle's doors is open, the cen-
tral locking system will not be activated. Manually locking or unlocking the driver door Please refer to on page 47. at the start of the chapter Fig. 43 Driver door handle with lock cylinder. All doors are usually locked when manually lock-
ing the door. Only the driver door is manually un-
locked. If necessary, unfold the vehicle key bit page 45. Insert the key bit into the lock cylinder and lock/unlock the vehicle Fig. 43. Open and close 49 Manually locking the passenger door Please refer to on page 47. at the start of the chapter Secure the rubber seal and close the door completely. Check if the door is locked. The vehicle must be checked immediately by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. NOTICE When carrying out an emergency locking proce-
dure, remove and install parts carefully in order to avoid damage to the vehicle. The vehicle doors can be unlocked and opened from inside by pulling the door re-
lease handle. Eventually, it might be necessary to pull the door release handle twice page 47. The driver door may be locked or unlocked manually through the door cylinder page 51, Mechanically unlocking all vehicle doors (emergency opening). Troubleshooting Please refer to on page 47. at the start of the chapter Locking the vehicle after airbag deployment The entire vehicle is unlocked when the airbags are triggered during an accident. Depending on the level of damage, the vehicle may be locked as follows after an accident:
Switch off the ignition. Open and close one of the doors once. Remove the key from the vehicle and close page 45. OR: press the central locking button in the driver door page 49. Anti-theft alarm system Please refer to on page 47. at the start of the chapter The anti-theft alarm is activated automatically when the vehicle is locked using the remote con-
trol key or mechanical key. Fig. 44 Front part of the right-hand door: emergen-
cy vehicle locking, covered by a rubber seal. Fig. 45 Emergency vehicle locking with the vehicle key. For vehicles with electric locking system, the passenger door may be manually locked. The an-
ti-theft alarm system will not be activated. Open the door. Remove the rubber seal at the side of the door. The seal may be identified via the image of a padlock Fig. 44. If necessary, fold the vehicle key bit out page 45 or use the mechanical vehicle key. Insert the key bit into the slot Fig. 45 and turn clockwise (towards vehicle) until reaching the stop. 50 Owner's Manual When does the system trigger an alarm?
The anti-theft alarm emits audible warning sig-
nals for about 30 seconds (per event) and visual warning signals for up to 5 minutes when the fol-
lowing non authorized actions are executed to the locked vehicle:
Opening of a door mechanically unlocked with the vehicle key. A door is opened. The engine compartment cover is opened. The ignition is switched on using an invalid key. One of the windows is removed, broken or opened. Movement in the vehicle (in vehicles with inte-
rior movement monitoring system page 51). Switching off the alarm Unlocking the vehicle with the unlocking but-
ton of the vehicle key. OR: turning the ignition on with a valid vehicle key. Mechanically unlocking all vehicle doors
(emergency opening) In case the remote control fails and the vehicle must be mechanically unlocked with the key bit, follow the instructions below:
Turn the key in the driver door cylinder clock-
wise. All doors are unlocked (valid for vehicles with central locking system and without alarm). Open the driver door and switch on the igni-
tion in up to 15 seconds, after which the alarm is sounded. By switching on the ignition, the immobilizer recognizes a valid key and deacti-
vates the alarm. After this procedure, all doors and the engine compartment cover may be opened. The alarm is triggered once again if after the initial trigger, a new attempt to enter the vehicle or a protected area occurs. For exam-
ple, if the engine compartment cover is also opened after opening a door. The anti-theft alarm system is not activated by locking the vehicle from inside with the central locking button . When the driver door is mechanically un-
locked with the key, only the driver door is unlocked, instead of the entire vehicle. Only after turning the ignition on will the passenger door be cleared - but not unlocked - and the central lock-
ing button activated (Valid only for vehicles with central locking system and alarm). The anti-theft alarm will not function cor-
rectly if the vehicle battery is weak or dis-
charged. Interior monitoring system Please refer to on page 47. at the start of the chapter Fig. 46 On the roof console: sensors for the interior monitoring system and button A to turn off the in-
terior monitoring system. Depending on the vehicle version, the interior monitoring system may not be available. The interior monitoring system triggers the alarm with the vehicle locked in case movement is identified inside the vehicle. Both the sensor and receptor are located in the scan lamp set Fig. 46 (arrows). Switching on the interior monitoring system Lock the vehicle using the remote control or me-
chanical vehicle key. When the anti-theft alarm is switched on, the interior monitoring system is al-
so activated. Switching off the interior monitoring system Remove the key from the ignition. Open the driver door. Open and close 51
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Bed cover Introduction WARNING Incorrect and unsupervised unlocking, opening or closing of the bed cover can cause accidents and severe injuries. Open and close the bed cover only when there is no one near its opening range. After closing the bed cover, check to make sure that it is closed and locked correctly so that it does not open while the vehicle is in motion. The closed bed cover must be flush with the surrounding body panels. Close and lock the bed cover and doors when the vehicle is not in use. Ensure that no one remains in the vehicle. Never leave children playing unattended in or around the vehicle, especially when the boot lid is open. Children could climb into the lug-
gage compartment and shut the boot lid, trapping themselves inside. Depending on the time of year, locked vehicles can be sub-
jected to extremely high or low tempera-
tures. This can cause serious injuries and ill-
ness or fatalities, particularly for small chil-
dren. Never leave unattended children or people with special needs in the vehicle. All doors can be locked from the inside using the cen-
tral locking button. This may mean that peo-
ple lock themselves in the vehicle. Persons locked in the vehicle may be exposed to ex-
tremely high or low temperatures. NOTICE Before opening the bed cover, please check that there is enough space to open and close the tail-
gate (e.g. when towing a trailer or when parked in a garage). Press Fig. 46 A . The indicator lamp lights up on the dash panel. Close all doors. The indicator lamp remains on for approxi-
mately 30 seconds or until the alarm system is activated. If the alarm is activated within 30 seconds, the indicator lamp will immediately start flashing. Lock the vehicle using the vehicle key in up to 20 seconds. The interior monitoring system is deactivated until the vehicle is locked. For example, switching off the interior monitor-
ing system while unsecured animals are left in-
side the vehicle for a short period page 47. Monitoring must be deactivated each time the vehicle is unlocked, otherwise it would be activa-
ted the next time the vehicle is locked. Risk of false alarm Interior monitoring can only work properly if the vehicle is completely closed. Legal provisions must be followed. A false alarm can be triggered in any of the following circumstances:
When one or more windows are completely or partially opened, since the alarm may be acti-
vated in such cases. If items such as loose pieces of paper and items attached to the interior mirror (e.g. air-
fresheners) are left in the vehicle. If metallic items are left in the storage com-
partment (e.g. keys or coins). If a mobile telephone that is left in the vehicle vibrates. NOTICE Valid only for vehicles with the Volkswagen Infor-
mation System: if the vehicle interior monitoring is switched off and the windows must be slightly opened, the following instructions must be fol-
lowed:
Deactivate the automatic window closing function through the Convenience submenu, in the Auto Closing option. The vehicle interior monitoring system must be switched off, oth-
erwise the alarm may be activated. Volkswagen recommends only performing such procedure if necessary. 52 Owner's Manual Opening and closing the bed cover NOTICE Please refer to chapter on page 52. and at the start of the Fig. 47 Open the bed cover. Locking and unlocking the dropside through the Volkswagen logo In vehicles with central locking system and re-
mote control, press the button or in the vehicle key. The dropside can now be opened. In vehicles with a mechanical key, unlock the driver's door and insert the key into the door cylinder and turn counterclockwise. The rear lid is unlocked. Press the upper part of the Volkswagen logo with your thumb Fig. 47 and insert your oth-
er fingers in the lower part of the logo, pulling it out. The dropside will unlock and positioned in place by the gas spring. Pull it down to open. Close and lock the dropside Lift the tailgate upwards and press it until an audible clicking sound is heard on both sides
. In vehicles with central locking system and re-
mote control, press the button in the vehi-
cle key. In vehicles with a mechanical key, insert the vehicle key bit into the driver's door lock cylin-
der and turn clockwise. WARNING In vehicles with bed canvas, do not close the bed cover while hands are touching the upper cover edge, otherwise such procedure may cause injuries. The bed cover may be loaded with up to 150 kg distributed, when it is fully opened. When maxi-
mum loading is exceeded, the fastening cables may break or the bed cover may be damaged. Never close the bed cover by pulling the fas-
tening cables; this may cause the cables to de-
form or damage the vehicle's paint work. NOTICE For vehicles with bed canvas, the bed cover may be opened even while the canvas is installed. Bed canvas Introduction Passengers may not be transported in the lug-
gage compartment
. Assembling and disassembling the bed canvas Volkswagen recommends assembling and disas-
sembling the bed canvas at a qualified workshop. To assemble and disassemble the bed canvas, specific vehicle parts must also be disassembled. In addition, fastening screws must be tightened with a torque wrench. This requires specialized tools and technical knowledge. Volkswagen rec-
ommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. WARNING Incorrect and unsupervised unlocking, opening or closing of the bed cover can cause accidents and severe injuries. Open and close the bed cover only when there is no one near its opening range. After closing the bed cover, check to make sure that it is closed and locked correctly so that it does not open while the vehicle is in motion. The closed bed cover must be flush with the surrounding body panels. Close and lock the bed cover and doors when the vehicle is not in use. Ensure that no one remains in the vehicle. Never travel in the bed. Open and close 53
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Never leave children playing unattended in or around the vehicle, especially when the bed cover is open. Children could climb into the bed and shut the cover, trapping themselves inside. Depending on the time of year, locked vehicles can be subjected to extremely high or low temperatures. This can cause serious injuries and illness or fatalities, particularly for small children. NOTICE The bed canvas may not be disassembled and as-
sembled without due technical knowledge and special tools. Incorrectly assembling and disassembling the bed may damage the vehicle. Adjust or release the bed canvas Please refer to chapter on page 53. and at the start of the Fig. 48 Bed canvas stretching adjustment locks and bolt. 54 Owner's Manual Fig. 49 Bed canvas attachment. Depending on the vehicle version, the bed canvas may not be available. Adjust the bed canvas stretching Open the tailgate to access the stretching screw and nut page 52. Move the locking pin Fig. 48 A in the direc-
tion of the arrow, in both sides, simultaneous-
ly. Lift the canvas edge in the direction of the ar-
row B . To adjust stretching, release the nut and tight-
en the bolt or release the bolt C until reach-
ing the desired stretching. Next, tighten the nut against the locking han-
dle. Release the bed canvas Open the tailgate to access internal bed cover fastening locks page 52. Move the locking pin Fig. 48 A in the direc-
tion of the arrow, in both sides, simultaneous-
ly. Lift the canvas edge in the direction of the ar-
row B . Remove the belt end from the housing Fig. 49 D , on the sides of the bed cover, and force the belt downwards to unlock the lock E . Pull the strap from the upper region to remove it from the lock. Insert the strap edges into the housing D to facilitate the bed cover retraction. WARNING Never transport or place cargoes over the bed canvas, otherwise it may lead to acci-
dents and vehicle damages. Before driving, ensure that the bed canvas is fastened in place. NOTICE The bed cover may be open even with the bed canvas fully installed. Retract the bed canvas (variant 1) Please refer to and at the start of the chapter on page 53. Fig. 50 Luggage compartment cross struts: A vehicles with fixed strapping supports, B vehicles with slid-
ing strapping supports. Fig. 51 On the bed: fastening strap and bed canvas properly retracted. The bed canvas may be retracted to transport large volumes, as described below:
Release the bed cover page 54. Retract the canvas until the cross members are accessed. To remove the type A or B , move the locking pin in the direction of the arrow Fig. 50. To remove the beam near the rear window, the fastening straps of the bed canvas Fig. 51 C must be released. Open and close 55
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Place the cross members underneath the can-
vas and roll them allowing the external portion
(waterproof) of the canvas to be visible. After fully retracting the canvas, secure it with the fastening straps D . WARNING When installing cross members, ensure that the members' edges are perfectly fitted into its respective housings. Before driving, ensure that the bed canvas is fully retracted and properly fastened in place by the straps. Retract the bed canvas (variant 2) Please refer to chapter on page 53. and at the start of the Once the cross member is fully retracted, se-
cure it using fastening straps Fig. 51 D . To reinstall the bed cover crossmembers again, proceed as described earlier in reverse. WARNING When installing cross members, ensure that the members' edges are perfectly fitted into its respective housings. Before driving, ensure that the bed canvas is fully retracted and properly fastened in place by the straps. Windows Fig. 52 Bed crossmembers - remove and install. Opening or closing the windows The bed canvas may be retracted to transport large volumes, as described below:
Release the bed cover page 54. Retract the canvas until the cross members are accessed. To remove, press the cross member on the left side in the direction indicated by the arrow Fig. 52 1 and remove the cross member from its seat from the right 2 . To remove the cross member near the rear window, the fastening straps of the bed can-
vas Fig. 51 C must be released, and repeat the same previous procedure to remove the cross member (when more than one cross member is available). Place the cross members underneath the can-
vas and roll them allowing the external portion
(waterproof) of the canvas to be visible. Manually opening or closing the windows In vehicles without electric windows, activate the handle located in the internal door lining to open or close windows. Electric opening or closing the windows The buttons are located on the doors and centre console page 9 Opening the window: press the button. Closing the window: pull the button. OR for the centre console buttons, press the bottom part of the button to open and the upper part of the button to close the win-
dow. Passenger door button The button in the passenger door is equal and has the same function as the driver door button. There is only one button in the door's lining. 56 Owner's Manual One-touch opening and closing The one-touch opening and closing function makes it possible to fully open and close the win-
dows. Individual buttons do not have to be held down in order to do so. For the one-touch closing function: pull the re-
spective window's button upwards until reaching the second stage. For the one-touch opening function: press the respective window's button briefly downwards until reaching the second stage. Stopping the one-touch function: press or pull the button for the respective window once again. Convenience opening and closing Depending on the vehicle version and equipment items, the convenience opening/closing and au-
tomatic closing features may not be available, vary in functions, or only be partially available. Depending on the vehicle version, windows can be opened and closed from the outside using the vehicle key with the ignition off:
Press and hold unlock button or lock button on the vehicle key. All electric windows are opened or closed. OR insert the vehicle key in-
to the driver door lock cylinder and hold turned counter-clockwise for all the electric windows to open or clockwise for all the elec-
tric windows to close. To interrupt the function release the locking or unlocking button OR release the key. WARNING Improper or unsupervised use of the electric windows can cause serious injuries. Electric windows must only be opened or closed when you are sure that nobody and nothing is in their operating area. Never leave children or people who require special assistance unsupervised in the vehi-
cle when the vehicle is locked. Always take all vehicle keys with you every time you leave the vehicle. The windows can still be operated using the buttons for a brief period after the ignition has been switched off, provided that the driver door and pas-
senger door are not opened. NOTICE Rain water can enter the vehicle interior and damage the vehicle. The one-touch and roll-back functions will not work if there is a fault in the electric windows. Visit a Volkswagen Dealership or quali-
fied workshop. Roll-back function for the electric windows
. If the one-touch closing func-
The roll-back function for the electric windows can reduce the risk of injuries when the windows are closing tion (closing process) in a window does not work because it is stiff or obstructed, the window will automatically open again. Check to see why the window has not closed. Try to close the window again. After a few repeated activations of the roll-
back function, the automatic window closing feature may be disabled. In order to re-establish the automatic window closing feature, follow the procedure page 58. Please refer to a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop if the window still cannot be closed. WARNING Closing the electric windows without the roll-
back function can lead to severe injuries. Always pay attention when closing electric windows. Ensure that nobody obstructs the path of the electric windows, especially if the roll-back function is not active. The roll-back function does not prevent fin-
gers or other body parts from being pressed against the window frame, resulting in inju-
ries. The roll-back function also acts with the window and sunroof convenience closing with the vehicle key. Open and close 57
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Opening or closing the rear vent window The electric windows should only be opened or closed when you are sure that nobody is in their operating area. NOTICE Rain water can enter the vehicle interior and damage the vehicle. Troubleshooting Restoring one-touch opening and closing function The one-touch opening and closing function is deactivated and must be restored if the vehicle battery has been disconnected or discharged while the windows were not fully closed:
Close all windows. Pull up the button for the window up and hold it in this position for at least one second. Release the button, then pull it up again and hold it in this position. The one-touch function is now ready for operation. Repeat this process for other buttons with the one-touch function deactivated. Restoring one-touch exterior closing function If the vehicle battery has been disconnected or discharged while the windows were not fully closed, or also if after a few activations of the roll-back function, the one-touch opening and closing function with the vehicle key or remote control, from outside the vehicle, is deactivated and must be restored:
Close all windows. Pull up the button for the window up and hold it in this position for at least one second. Fig. 53 Open the rear vent window. Fig. 54 Close the rear vent window. Depending on the vehicle version, the rear vent window may not be available. Open the rear vent window Pull the window detent lever in the direction of the arrow Fig. 53. Press the detent lever outwards until the win-
dow is completely locked in place. Close the rear vent window Pull the detent lever Fig. 54 1 inwards, in the direction of the arrow. Press the detent lever Fig. 54 2 backwards, in the direction of the arrow, until it is locked in place and the window is closed. WARNING Improper use of the rear vent window may cause severe injuries. 58 Owner's Manual Steering wheel Adjusting the steering wheel position Fig. 55 Below and to the left of the steering wheel next to the steering column trim: steering wheel po-
sition adjustment lever. Fig. 56 On the steering wheel: 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock positions. Adjust the steering wheel before setting off and only while the vehicle is stationary Adjust the proper distance between the driver
. and the steering wheel page 26 using the driver seat controls page 60. Push the lever Fig. 55 1 downwards and adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-
tion. Adjust the steering wheel position so as to be able to hold it by the outer rim in the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position Fig. 56 with both hands and slightly bent arms. Firmly press the lever upwards and place it in locking position until it is completely aligned with the steering column
. WARNING After adjusting the steering column, always move lever 1 up so that it engages securely. This prevents the steering column from mov-
ing while the vehicle is in motion. Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is in motion. If, while driving you con-
clude that a readjustment is necessary, safely stop the vehicle and adjust the steering wheel to the correct position. Failure to observe the above indications may compromise the driver's wheel turning movement. The steering wheel must always point to-
wards the chest and not towards the face. This ensures that the driver front airbag pro-
vides maximum protection in the event of an accident. While driving, always keep both hands on the rim of the steering wheel, at the 9 o'clock and 3 o'clock position Fig. 56 to reduce in-
juries caused by a driver's frontal airbag de-
ployment. Never hold the steering wheel in the 12 o'clock position or in any other way, such as in the centre of the steering wheel. If the driver airbag is triggered, you could sustain severe injuries to the arms, hands and head. Failure to observe the above instructions have a direct negative influence on the driv-
ers protection in case of a frontal collision of the vehicle. These recommendations are val-
id for both, vehicles with and without steer-
ing wheel position adjustment. Steering wheel 59
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. The seats may only be adjusted when the ve-
hicle is stationary, since the seat could oth-
erwise change position unexpectedly while the vehicle is in motion, leading to a loss of vehicle control. Additionally, an incorrect seating position is adopted while adjusting the seat. Only adjust the height and tilt of the front seats when the area around the seat is clear. The area for adjustment of the front seats may not be restricted by any items. Manual front seat adjustment Please refer to on page 60. at the start of the chapter Fig. 57 On the front seat: controls. All the possible controls are described below. Ac-
cording to the seat version the quantity of con-
trols may vary. Adjusting the seat position Key for Fig. 57:
1 Pull the lever to move the front seat front or backward. The front seat must be locked in place after releasing the lever. Release the seat backrest and turn the hand-
wheel to adjust the backrest. 2 Seats and head restraints Front seat Introduction WARNING Always adjust seats, seat belts and head re-
straints to their correct position before any journey and ensure that all passengers have fastened their seat belt. Push the front passenger seat as far back as possible. Adjust the driver seat in such a way that there is at least 25 cm between your breast-
bone and the hub of the steering wheel. Ad-
just the driver seat longitudinally in order for pedals to be fully pressed with slightly bent legs, and ensuring a minimum distance be-
tween the driver's knees and the dash panel of 10 cm. If your physical build makes it im-
possible to fulfil this requirement, you must contact a Volkswagen Dealership in order to implement any necessary modifications. Never travel with the backrest tilted far back. The further back the backrest is tilted, the greater the risk of injury caused by incorrect seat belt routing or an incorrect sitting posi-
tion. Never travel with the backrest tilted for-
wards. When an airbag is triggered it could force the seat backrest backwards and injure vehicle occupants on the back seats. Adopt and maintain the greatest possible distance to the steering wheel and dash pan-
el. You should always sit upright with your back against the seat backrest with the front seats properly adjusted. Do not position any body part too close where the airbags are fitted. The risk of serious injury is increased for pas-
sengers on the rear seat if they are not sit-
ting upright because the seat belts are incor-
rectly positioned. WARNING Incorrect seat adjustment may cause accidents and severe injuries. 60 Owner's Manual 3 4 On the driver's seat only, to adjust the seat height, move lever 3 in the direction of the arrow to adjust the height and release the lever. If necessary, repeat the procedure for correct adjustment. Folding the backrest:
According to the version of the vehicle, the seat backrest folding lever may not be available. Versions that come with the seat backrest folding lever: move the lever and fold the seats backrest. Lift the lever as indicated by arrow A and double the backrest forward in the direction of arrow B . When returning the backrest to its normal position ensure it is correctly lock-
et in this position. Rear seat Rear seat bench Depending on the vehicle version, the rear seat may not be available. The rear seat bench has clamping sleeves that secure the seat in place. The clamping sleeves may be damaged if the seat is disassembled, in which case they must be replaced. Volkswagen does not recommend disassembling the seat bench or replacing the clamping sleeves without assistance. Contact a Volkswagen Deal-
ership for more information. WARNING Improperly secured rear seat benches may cause severe injuries. Ensure the seat belt is not caught or dam-
aged in the rear seat bench. No passengers must be transported in the rear seat bench if it is not secured in place. Head restraints Introduction The headrest adjustment and extension possibili-
ties are described below. Ensure correct posture is adjusted page 24. All seats are equipped with head rests. Correct head rest setting Adjust the head rest so that its top edge is at the same height as the top of the head but not lower than eye level. Head restraint setting for shorter people Push the head restraint all the way down, even if the head is then located underneath the top edge of the head rest. There may be a small gap be-
tween the head rest and backrest in the lowest position. Head restraint setting for taller people Push the head restraint up as far as possible. WARNING Driving without head restraints or with incor-
rectly adjusted head restraints increases the risk of severe or fatal injuries in the event of an accident or sudden driving or braking manoeu-
vre. If a seat is occupied, the head restraint for that seat must be fitted and adjusted proper-
ly. Each vehicle occupant must adjust the head restraint to suit their body size, to help re-
duce the risk of neck injuries in case of acci-
dents. At the same time, the top edge of the head restraint must be level with the top of the head, but no lower than eye level. Posi-
tion the back of your head as close to the head restraint as possible. Never adjust the head restraint when the ve-
hicle is in motion. NOTICE When removing or fitting head restraints, make sure that they do not hit the roof or front seat backrest. Otherwise, the roof and other vehicle parts could otherwise be damaged. Seats and head restraints 61
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Adjusting the rear head rest height Move the headrest up or down in the direction of the arrow with the button Fig. 59 1 held down in Introduction on page 61. The head restraint must click securely into po-
sition. Removing the head rest Push the head rest all the way up in In-
troduction on page 61. Press the button Fig. 58 A or Fig. 59 1 in the direction of the arrow. Remove the head rest while pressing the button. Fitting the front head rest Position the head rest correctly over the head rest guides and then insert into the guides of the corresponding seat backrest. Push the head restraint all the way down with button Fig. 58 A pressed. Adjust the head rest so that a correct sitting position can be assumed page 62. Fitting the rear head rest Position the head rest correctly over the head rest guides and then insert into the guides of the corresponding seat backrest. Press and hold Fig. 59 1 to push the head rest downwards. Adjust the head rest so that a correct sitting position can be assumed page 62. Adjusting, uninstalling and installing the headrest Please refer to chapter on page 61. and at the start of the Fig. 58 Front head restraint: adjust, remove and in-
stall. Fig. 59 Rear head restraint: adjust, remove and in-
stall. Depending on the vehicle version, the rear seats head restraint may not be available. Adjusting the front head rest height Push the head rest up or down in the direction in Introduction of the arrow Fig. 58 A on page 61. The head restraint must click securely into po-
sition. 62 Owner's Manual Lights Turn signals Switching the turn signals on and off Fig. 60 On the left on the steering column: turn sig-
nal and main beam lever. Switch on the ignition. Move the turn signal and main beam lever from the centre position to the following posi-
tion:
A B Right turn signal. Left turn signal. Place the turn signal and main beam lever into its basic position to switch the turn indicators off. When the steering wheel returns to its normal position, after a curve, turn signals will be auto-
matically switched off and the lever will return to the central position. If the sound signal does not sound with the turn indicator turned on, visit your Volkswagen deal-
ership or specialized workshop to have the vehi-
cle checked. Lane change flash Briefly push the turn signal lever up or down until the pressure point is reached and then release it. The turn signal automatically flashes three times. WARNING Misuse or lack of use of turn signals, as well as forgetting to switch them on when appropri-
ate, may confuse other road users. This could lead to accidents and severe injuries. Changing lanes, overtaking and conversion manoeuvres must always be indicated ap-
propriately by using the turn signals. Turn off turn signals after changing lanes or completing overtaking and conversion ma-
noeuvres. The turn signal will only work when the ig-
nition is switched on. The hazard warning lights also work when the ignition is switched off page 42. If one turn signal fails on the vehicle or on the trailer, the indicator lamp will start flashing approximately twice as fast. Driving lights Lights, switching on and off Fig. 61 Next to the steering wheel: light switch. Observe any country-specific regulations when using vehicle lighting. Depending on the vehicle version, the foglight may not be available. Depending on the vehicle version, the func-
tion may not be available. The long-range headlights is only valid for specif-
ic versions. Turning the lights on Switch on the ignition. Turn the light switch to the corresponding po-
sition:
Lights 63
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Automatic activation of the driving lights:
the driving lights are automatically turned on and off according to the brightness and weather condition Side lights switched on. The icon on the light switch shines in green colour. Dipped beam headlights switched off. Turning the lights off Switch off the ignition. Turn the light switch to the corresponding po-
sition:
The lights are off. Side lights switched on. The icon on the light switch shines in green colour. Dipped beam off the indicator light re-
mains on while the vehicle key is in the ig-
nition. WARNING The side lights are not powerful enough to illu-
minate the street and make your vehicle seen by other road users. Always switch dipped beam headlights on with low light, fog or poor visibility. A vehicle without rear lights on may not be seen by other drivers in darkness, during rainstorms or other poor visibility conditions. Comply with all applicable legal provisions when handling the aforementioned lighting devices. Fog lights on/off The indicator lamp in the light switch Fig. 61 indicates that the fog light is switched on. For vehicles equipped with fog light:
Turn on the fog light : pull the light switch Fig. 61 from position or until reaching the first position. To switch the fog lights off, press the light switch or move it into position . Functions of the lights Depending on the vehicle version, the automatic driving light control () may not be available. Automatic driving light control The automatic driving light control is simply an ancillary system, which may not sufficiently rec-
ognize all driving conditions. While the automatic driving light control is acti-
vated, low beams and lamps are automatically switched if the twilight sensor detects low light-
ing on the exterior environment, such as when crossing a tunnel during the day, or during night time. Whenever the vehicle is in an environment with intense solar lighting, with the light switch in position , low beams and lamps will be au-
tomatically switched off by the electric central system. If the rotating light switch is in position , the lamp, instrument lights, and license plate lights will be switched on and off automatically under the following scenarios The twilight sensor is located next to the rain sensor page 69. If the automatic driving light control switches on headlights or fog lights, the low beam will also be switched on regardless of the ambient light-
ing.
Altered twilight sensor activation behaviour The possible causes for damages and misinter-
pretations in the sensitive surface area (arrow) of the twilight sensor are, among others, are the following:
Damaged windscreen wiper blades: water films or cleaning stripes due to damaged wiper blades can affect the exterior lighting sensor. Insects: the presence of insects could affect exterior lighting sensors. Salt grooves: salt grooves during the winter can affect exterior lighting sensors. Dust: dry dust, wax, glass lining (lotus effect), and detergent residues (car wash) may reduce the twilight sensor's sensitivity or even its ef-
fectiveness. Stickers and labels: the sensor region cannot be externally or internally covered; otherwise, the twilight sensor will not operate properly. 64 Owner's Manual Acoustic warnings if lights are not switched off If the key is removed from the ignition cylinder and the driver door is opened, an acoustic alarm will sound if the light switch is in position or
. This will remind you to switch off the lights as necessary. Cornering light Depending on the vehicle version, the cornering light may not be available. In slow conversions or sharp curves, the corner-
ing light is automatically switched on. The cor-
nering light is integrated to the fog lights and is only switched on when driving below approxi-
mately 40 km/h. Upon selecting the reverse gear, the cornering light may be switched on in both vehicle sides during a manoeuvre. WARNING Severe accidents may occur if the road is not adequately illuminated and if the vehicle or pe-
destrians are not visible. The automatic driving light control () on-
ly switches on low beams upon lighting var-
iations, and not under foggy conditions, for example. In case of cold or damp weather, the lamp, as well as the rear lights and turn signals, may be temporarily fogged. This event is normal and does not affect the service life of the vehi-
cle's lighting system. Turn on the main beam/long-range beam Fig. 62 On the left on the steering column: turn sig-
nal and main beam lever. Turn ignition and dipped beam on. Move the turn signal and main beam lever from the centre position to the following posi-
tion:
A B Main beam on / long-range beam. Operate the headlight flasher or turn the main beam off. The headlight flasher remains lit for as long as the lever is pulled. With the main beams on or when flashing the headlights the blue indicator lamp lights up on the dash panel insert. WARNING Setting headlights too high, and the incorrect use of the main beam, could distract and dazzle other road users. This could lead to accidents and severe injuries. Always ensure that the headlights are adjus-
ted correctly. Never use the main beam or the headlight flasher if other road users could be dazzled. The long-range beam works simultaneously with the main beam. The main beam / long-
range beam can only be switched on if the dip-
ped beam headlights are already on. Due to the complexity of the long-range beam lamp replacement process, Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop for such pur-
pose. Masking or switching over headlights When driving in countries with opposite driving directions, the asymmetric dipped beam head-
lights may dazzle oncoming traffic. Therefore, the headlights must be masked or switched over if you are driving abroad. If applicable, mask certain areas of the headlight with thin layers or switch over the position in a specialized company. Additional information can be obtained from specialized companies. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Lights 65
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. The use of thin layers over the headlights is only allowed for short periods of time. Please contact a qualified workshop for a perma-
nent alteration Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Troubleshooting Turn signals Left or right turn signals. The indicator lamp flashes twice as fast from normal when one of the vehicle's turn lights has burned out. Check vehicle lighting. Parking light Coming Home and Leaving Home functions
(orientation lighting) With the orientation lighting, the area next to the vehicle is illuminated when leaving (Coming Home) and when arriving at the vehicle (Leav-
ing Home). For vehicles with light and rain sen-
sors, the Leaving Home function is automati-
cally controlled. By activating the Coming Home or Leaving Home function, the dipped beam headlight and side lights are lit up as orientation lighting. For vehicles without the Volkswagen Information System (I-System) and with the Coming Home and Leaving Home function, the latter is activa-
ted manually. Vehicles not equipped with twilight and rain sensor - Manual mode Turning the Coming Home function on:
Switch off the ignition. Flash the main beam / long-range beam for approximately one second. The orientation lights are switched on after opening the driver door. Turning the Coming Home function off:
Automatically after the set lighting delay time has run out. OR: turning the ignition on. 66 Owner's Manual In manual mode, the Leaving Home function only occurs if the Coming Home function has been previously activated. Turning the Leaving Home function on:
Unlock the vehicle with the remote control key. Turning the Leaving Home function off:
Occurs automatically after the set switch-off delay. OR: turning the ignition on. Vehicles equipped with twilight and rain sensor Turning the Coming Home function on:
Switch off the ignition. Flash the main beam / long-range beam for approximately one second. The orientation lights are switched on after opening the driver door. Turning the Coming Home function off:
Occurs automatically after the set switch-off delay. OR: when turning the light switch to position
. OR: turning the ignition on. Turning the Leaving Home function on:
Unlock the vehicle using the key with remote control, if the light switch is in position and the twilight sensor detects the and the twilight sensor detects the darkness. Turning the Leaving Home function off:
Occurs automatically after the set switch-off delay. OR: when turning the light switch to position
. OR: turning the ignition on. For vehicles with the Volkswagen Informa-
tion System (I-System), in the Settings menu, it is possible to set the duration of the orienta-
tion lights, as well as switching the function on or off. The orientation lights time can be program-
med in a Volkswagen Dealership or through the Settings menu in vehicles with the Volkswagen Information System. Head light range control Interior lighting Instrument and switch lighting Fig. 63 In the engine compartment: headlight range adjustment switch. Depending on the vehicle version, headlight range adjustment may not be available or may vary. With the headlight range control, the low beam light can be adjusted based on vehicle occupa-
tion and luggage compartment load conditions. Thereby the driver has the best possible visibility conditions without dazzling the opposite drivers. Headlight range adjustment with switch in engine compartment:
The headlight range can be adjusted with the Fig. 63 switch. Turn the switch in the direction of (arrow):
Occupied front seats and empty luggage compartment. All seats occupied and empty luggage compartment. All seats occupied and loaded luggage compartment. OR Only the driver seat occupied and fully loa-
ded luggage compartment. WARNING Heavy objects in the vehicle may affect head-
light visibility and distract other road users. This could lead to accidents and severe injuries. Always adjust the light beam to current vehi-
cle occupation and luggage compartment load conditions, in order to avoid dazzling other road users. Fig. 64 On the instrument cluster: headlight range control, instrument and switch lighting button. With the ignition switched on, the instrument and switch lighting range can be regulated, in three different levels, by pressing the Fig. 64 button. The switch is always in ascending order, return-
ing to the first level after reaching the greatest intensity. Dash panel lighting sensor Depending on the vehicle's version, the dash panel lighting sensor may not be available. The dash panel lighting sensor is located on the dash panel and is activated automatically. The dash panel lights are activated automatically whenever the external light intensity increases
(e.g. on sunny days). To avoid external light re-
flection on the dash panel. The dash panel lights are switched off whenever the exterior light intensity decreases, and the low beam is turned off (e.g. when passing through tunnels). This will remind the driver to manually turn on the low beam. Interior and reading lights Switch off internal lights. Press the respective button:
Switch on internal lights. Turn on the door contact switch (central position). Interior lights are switched on automatically by unlocking the vehicle, opening a door, or removing the key from the ignition cylinder. The lights are Lights 67
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Visibility Windscreen wiper and washer Windscreen wiper lever switched off a few seconds after closing all doors, locking the vehicle, or switching the ignition on.
Switches the respective reading light on or off. If the vehicle doors are not closed and the switch is in position , the front interior lights are switched off after a few minutes. This prevents the battery from discharging. The interior and reading lights are switched off after locking the vehicle or a few mi-
nutes after the key is removed from the ignition. This prevents the battery from discharging. When airbags are triggered during an acci-
dent, interior lights may be automatically activated page 36. Bed lighting Fig. 66 Windscreen wiper / washer controls.
move the windscreen wipers lever to the desired position 0 Windscreen / rear window wipers switch-
ed off. Interval wipe for the windscreen. Slow wipe. Fast wipe. x touch wipe brief cleaning. The windscreen washer system is active while the lever is pulled. Washer system switched off. 1 2 3 4 5 6 WARNING In winter temperatures, the windscreen washer system without sufficient antifreeze could freeze the windscreen and compromise driver visibility. In winter temperatures, only use windscreen wipers with sufficient antifreeze. Never use the windscreen washer system at winter temperatures before the windscreen has been heated by the ventilation system. The antifreeze mixture may otherwise freeze on the windscreen and restrict vision. Fig. 65 On the centre console: bed lighting button. Depending on the vehicle version, the bed lights may not be available. Bed lights are switched on with the side light with the side light switched on and the igni-
tion switched off. With the bed lights switched on, the bed light is illuminated. To switch on: press the button Fig. 65 on the dash panel. To switch off: press the button Fig. 65 in the dash panel again, switch the side light off or switch the vehicle ignition on. Upon switching the luggage compartment light on, a symbol will appear in the respec-
tive button. 68 Owner's Manual WARNING Rain sensor Worn or dirty windscreen wiper blades reduce visibility and increase the risk of accidents and severe injuries. Windscreen wiper blades should therefore always be changed if they are damaged or worn. NOTICE If the ignition is switched off while the wind-
screen wipers are switched on, the windscreen wipers will resume operation from the same po-
sition after the ignition is switched back on;
however, in this condition (ignition switched off while windscreen wipers were switched on), the windscreen wipers return to the default position. Ice, snow, and other obstacles on the window could damage the windscreen wipers and the windscreen wiper motor. Remove snow and ice from the windscreen wipers before driving. Carefully release the frozen windscreen wiper blades from the windscreen. Volkswagen rec-
ommends using an antifreeze spray for such activity. NOTICE A Do not switch the windscreen wipers on if the window is dry. Otherwise the window may be damaged. NOTICE In icy conditions, always check if the windscreen wiper blades are not frozen to the glass before using the windscreen wipers!
The windscreen wipers will only work when the ignition is switched on. The windscreen wiper interval wipe oper-
ates according to the vehicle's speed. The faster the vehicle, the faster the windscreen wip-
er interval wipe. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Fig. 67 Windscreen wiper lever: adjust rain sensor sensitivity A . Depending on the vehicle version, the rain sensor may not be available. The activated rain sensor automatically controls windscreen wiper intervals according to rain in-
. The rain sensor sensitivity may be tensity manually adjusted. Manual wiping page 68. Move the lever into the desired position Fig. 67:
1 2 Deactivated rain sensor. Active rain sensor automatic wiping, if nec-
essary. Adjust the rain sensor sensitivity:
Turn the switch to the right high sensi-
tivity. Turn the switch to the left low sensitivi-
ty. After switching the ignition off and on, the rain sensor will resume operation if the windscreen wiper lever is in position 2 . Altered rain sensor activation behaviour The possible causes for damages and misinter-
pretations in the sensitivity surface area Fig. 69 of the rain sensor are among others the following:
Damaged windscreen wiper blades: water film or wiping stripes due to damaged wiper blades may extend the activation period, reduce wip-
ing intervals, or affecting quick continuous wiping. Insects: the presence of insects may activate automatic wiping. Salt: during winter time, salt grooves on the window may cause extremely long wiping pat-
terns until the window is nearly dry. Visibility 69 Dust: dust, wax, glass lining (lotus effect), and detergent residues (car wash) may reduce the rain sensor's sensitivity, eventually reducing its speed or effectiveness. Cracks on the windscreen: a rock impact over the windscreen will activate a wiping cycle if the rain sensor is activated. After that, the sensor detects the reduced sensitivity surface and adjusts. According to the rock's impact area, rain sensor activation behaviour may be affected. Stickers and labels: the sensor region cannot be externally or internally covered; otherwise, the automatic lighting functions and twilight sensor will not operate properly. WARNING WARNING Adjusting exterior and interior mirrors while driving may distract the driver. This could lead to accidents and severe injuries. Only adjust exterior and interior mirrors while the vehicle is stationary. When parking, changing lanes and during overtaking or conversion manoeuvres, al-
ways observe the vehicle's surroundings, since other vehicles or objects may be loca-
ted in blind spots. Always ensure that the mirrors are properly adjusted and that rear visibility is not limited by misting or other objects. The rain sensor may not sufficiently detect rain and fail to activate the windscreen wipers. If necessary, manually activate the window wipers whenever the rain affects visibility. Interior mirror Please refer to on page 70. at the start of the chapter Fig. 68 On the windscreen: manual anti-dazzle in-
terior mirror. Regularly clean the sensitive surface of the rain sensor and check the windscreen wiper blades for damages. A glass-cleaning product, such as alcohol, is recommended to remove wax and polishing residues from the windows. Mirrors Introduction
. In order to ensure safety, the driver must proper-
ly adjust exterior and interior mirrors before driv-
ing Drivers are able to notice traffic movements be-
hind them and adjust driving behaviours accord-
ingly using the exterior and interior mirrors. There are some areas to the side and behind the vehicle that cannot be seen through the exterior and interior mirrors. Such areas are called blind spots. There may be other vehicles, pedestrians and objects in blind spots. 70 Owner's Manual Do not place external navigation devices on the windscreen or next to the interior mirror with au-
tomatic anti-dazzle function
. WARNING Interior mirrors should only be adjusted when the vehicle is stationary, in order to prevent the driver from being distracted. Rear visibility is reduced when using mirrors in the anti-dazzle position. The navigation device display's light may compromise proper operation of the interior mirror with automatic anti-dazzle function, potentially leading to severe injuries and ac-
cidents. Visibility is hindered by using interior mir-
rors in the night position. Exterior mirrors Please refer to on page 70. at the start of the chapter Fig. 70 On the front doors: setting knob for the me-
chanical exterior mirrors. Visibility 71 Fig. 69 On the windscreen: automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror. The driver must adjust the interior mirror so that he/she can see clearly through the rear window. Manual anti-dazzle interior mirror Day position: the lower mirror edge lever points towards the windscreen. Night position: pull the lever Fig. 68 (grey arrow) to avoid glare from the headlights of vehicles travelling behind. Automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror Depending on the vehicle version, the automatic anti-dazzle interior mirror may not be available. When the ignition is turned on the sensors meas-
ure the light incidence. There are 2 sensors in the interior mirror, one that measures the incidence of light from the front Fig. 69 1 and the other the light incidence from behind 2 . According to the measured results the internal mirror is auto-
matically darkened. When the light incidence detected by the sensors is compromised or interrupted, the interior mir-
ror with automatic anti-dazzle function may mal-
function. The automatic anti-dazzling is deactivated when engaging the reverse gear. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Exterior mirrors can be manually folded (rotated) inwards and outwards. The use position is de-
fined by a clear locking position in both sides (left and right). WARNING Exterior mirrors should only be adjusted when the vehicle is stationary, in order to prevent the driver from being distracted. WARNING Careless folding of exterior mirrors may cause injuries. Fold exterior mirrors inwards or outwards only when no one is in its operation range. Handle with care in order to prevent fingers from getting stuck between the exterior mir-
ror and the mirror frame, while the mirror is moving. WARNING Inaccurate assessment of the distance of vehi-
cles coming from behind may cause severe ac-
cidents and injuries. The domed surfaces of exterior mirrors (con-
vex) increase visibility and make objects ap-
pear smaller and more distant. Using the left and right-hand exterior mirrors to assess the distance of vehicles coming from behind when changing lanes is inaccu-
rate and may cause severe accidents and in-
juries. Whenever possible, use the internal mirror to ascertain the distance of vehicles coming from behind or the distance to other objects. Ensure that rear visibility is always unob-
structed. NOTICE Always fold in exterior mirrors in automatic washing systems. In case of failure, electric exterior mirrors may be manually adjusted by pressing the edge of the mirror surface. Fig. 71 On the driver door: setting knob for the electric exterior mirrors. Exterior mirrors Operate the adjustment knob on the trims of the front doors Fig. 71. Electric exterior mirrors Switch on the ignition. Rotate the rotary knob in the driver door until reaching the desired icon Fig. 71. Move the rotating knob forward, backward, to the right or to the left, as indicated by the ar-
rows, to adjust the exterior mirror. Adjusting the left exterior mirror. Adjusting the right exterior mirror. Neutral position. The exterior mirrors can-
not be adjusted and all functions are disa-
bled. Store right-hand exterior mirror adjustments for reverse gear (tilt down) Switch on the ignition. Turn the rotary knob to position R. Selecting reverse gear. Adjust the right exterior mirror in order to al-
low proper visibility of kerb edge, for example. The adjusted mirror position is automatically stored. When the reverse gear is disengaged, the right-
hand mirror returns to front driving conditions. To switch off the tilt down function when select-
ing reverse gear, the rotary control must be moved to L or 0. 72 Owner's Manual Sliding headliner Windscreen Sun visors Fig. 73 Cross-linked windscreen with communica-
tion window (blue surface). Windscreens feature a cross-linked screen to protect the eyes against sun rays when using the interior mirror. There is a non-coated area above the interior mirror (communication window) above the interior mirror Fig. 73 which ensures that electronic accessories, for example remote controls, can function properly. The area must not be covered either from the outside or the inside, nor should any stickers be applied to this area as this could cause a fault in the electronic components. Fig. 72 Sun visor. Depending on the vehicle version, the sun visor may contain different combinations, containing or not: lighting, mirror cover and vanity mirror. Possible positions for the driver and passenger sun visors:
Folded down over the windscreen. Remove from the bracket and turn over to-
wards the door Fig. 72 1 . Pulled towards the door in a posterior longitu-
dinal direction. Vanity mirrors A vanity mirror may be located behind a cover on the folded down sun visor. When you open the cover Fig. 72 2 a lamp lights up. The lamp will go out when the vanity mirror cov-
er is pushed back or the sun visor is folded back up. WARNING Sun visors folded downwards may reduce the field of vision and decrease safety. Sun visors and sunblind should always be re-
placed in their holder if they are not being used. NOTICE Handle sun visors and vanity mirror covers care-
fully in order to avoid damages. Visibility 73
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Heating and air conditioning Heating, ventilating, cooling Introduction The following equipment may be installed in the vehicle:
The ventilation and heating system heats and ventilates the vehicle interior. The ventilation and heating system does not cool. The air conditioner cools and dehumidifies the air. They work best when all windows are closed. In case of accumulated heat in the vehicle interi-
or, ventilation may speed the cooling process. WARNING Poor visibility through all windows increases the risk of collisions and accidents, which can lead to severe injuries. Always ensure that all windows are free of ice, snow and mist in order to have good visi-
bility. Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows as quickly as possible, is only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature. Do not start your journey until you have good visibility. Always ensure that the heating and fresh air system or air conditioning and rear window heating system are used properly in order to guarantee proper exterior visibility. Never use the air recirculation mode for ex-
tended periods. If the cooling system is switched off, the windows can mist up very quickly in air recirculation mode and reduce visibility considerably. Always switch off the air recirculation mode if it is not required. WARNING Stale air can quickly cause tiredness and lack of concentration in the driver, which in turn can cause collisions, accidents and severe injuries. Never leave the blower off for extended peri-
ods and never use the recirculation mode for extended periods, since this prevent fresh air from entering the vehicle. NOTICE Switch off the air conditioning system if you suspect that it has been damaged. This can help to prevent further damage. The air condi-
tioning system must be checked by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. Repairs to the air conditioning system require specific knowledge and tools. Volkswagen rec-
ommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. If the cooling system is switched off, the outside air that is drawn into the vehicle is not dehumidified. To prevent the windows from misting over, Volkswagen recommends leaving the air conditioning (supercharger) switched on. For such, press the button . The indicator lamp in the button must light up. Maximum heat output, which is needed to defrost the windows as quickly as possible, is only available when the engine has reached its operating temperature. Keep the air intake slots in front of the windscreen free of snow, ice and leaves to ensure heating and cooling is not impaired, and to prevent the windows from misting over. 74 Owner's Manual Air conditioning controls Please refer to and at the start of the chapter on page 74. Fig. 74 Ventilation and heating system controls. Fig. 75 Air conditioning controls. Some functions and buttons are version dependent and depend o the type of system fit-
ted. Turning off Heating and ventilation system: turn the blow-
er knob to level Fig. 74 2 . Air conditioner: rotate the blower regulator to level Fig. 75 2 . Cooling mode Press the button to turn the cooling on and off. In cooling mode the air is dehumidified.
/ Temperature Heating and ventilation system: turn the left knob Fig. 74 1 to adjust the temperature. Air conditioning: turn the left knob Fig. 75 1 to adjust the temperature. Blower Heating and ventilation system: turn the blow-
er knob Fig. 74 2 . Air-conditioning: rotate the blower regulator Fig. 75 2 . Air recirculation mode In air recirculation mode, no fresh air enters the interior of the vehicle Fig. 75. Press . Heating and air conditioning 75
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Air distribution Heating and ventilation system: rotate the right regulator Fig. 74 3 to the desired po-
sition. Air-conditioning: rotate the right regulator Fig. 75 3 to the desired position. Air distribution to the upper body area. Air distribution to the footwell area. Air distribution to the windscreen and footwell area. Air distribution to the windscreen. Defrost function The defrosting function eliminates the frost from the windscreen. Heating and ventilation system: defogger. Air distribution to the windscreen and side win-
dows in the exterior mirror area Air conditioning: defogger. Air distribution to the windscreen and side windows in the exte-
rior mirror area. Press and increase the strength of the blower in order to defrost the windscreen as fast as possible. Rear window defrost function Press the button to turn the rear window heating on and off with running engine. The indicator lamp lights up on the button while the heating is on. Press the button again to switch off the rear window heating manually. The rear window defroster is turned of automati-
cally after about 10 minutes. Fast cooling inside the vehicle In order to obtain fast cooling inside the vehicle, follow the instructions below:
Set the temperature knob 1 completely to the left. Set the air recirculation controller 3 into po-
sition . Turn the blower knob 2 to the maximum lev-
el 4. Press the button to switch the cooling sys-
tem on. If the vehicle is exposed to the sun for exten-
ded periods, open the front door windows par-
tially or completely for a brief amount of time
(1 to 3 minutes), in order to remove the hot air mass inside the vehicle. Close the windows and press to switch the air recirculation mode on. NOTICE To prevent damages to the rear window defrost-
er, no sticker should be stuck on the inside on the filaments. After the window is cleared, the function must be switched off. Lower current con-
sumption also decreases fuel consumption. If the air conditioner and air recirculation mode are turned off manually, the system will not automatically turn them on next time the blower is switched off and on again. The system will only start working automatically again after the temperature switch is removed from the full left position and placed back into this position. In vehicles without heating, the blower but-
ton is located on the left-hand side, in the temperature button position. 76 Owner's Manual Ventilation and heating system operating instructions Please refer to chapter on page 74. and at the start of the Temperature For vehicles equipped with heating and ventila-
tion system, the internal vehicle temperature must not be lower than the exterior air tempera-
ture, since the heating and ventilation system is unable to cool air. Settings for optimal road visibility In vehicles with heating system, turn the tem-
perature knob Fig. 74 1 completely to the right, to the maximum heating setting. Set the air recirculation controller 3 into po-
sition . Turn the blower knob 2 to level 3 or 4. Keeping the windscreen and side windows defrosted In vehicles with heating system, set the tem-
perature control 1 into the required heating position to ensure proper defrosting. Set the air recirculation controller 3 into po-
sition . Set blower 2 to one of the 4 stages. In vehicles without heating, the blower but-
ton is located on the left-hand side, in the temperature button position. Air recirculation mode Please refer to chapter on page 74. and at the start of the General notes The air recirculation mode prevents outside air from entering the vehicle. If the outside temperature is very high, the air re-
circulation mode must be selected for a short pe-
riod of time to help cool off the vehicle interior faster. The air recirculation mode must be activated if the air conditioning system is switched on. Win-
dows may quickly fog if the air conditioning sys-
tem is switched off. The air recirculation mode is automatically switched off if the air distribution knob is set to position . Switching air recirculation mode on and off Switch on: press ; the indicator light will light up. Switch off: press ; the indicator light will go out. NOTICE In vehicles with an air conditioning system, do not smoke when the air recirculation mode is switched on. The smoke drawn into the cooling system can leave a residue on the evaporator and the dust and pollen filter, producing a permanent unpleasant odour. Vents Please refer to and at the start of the chapter on page 74. Fig. 76 On the dashboard: vents. Heating and air conditioning 77
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Air vents The vents should be left open to ensure that the vehicle interior is sufficiently heated, ventilated and cooled. Press the upper part to open the vents 1 . Adjust the direction of the air flow by moving the grille. Press the lower part to close the vents. Other non adjustable vents can be found on the dash panel Fig. 76 2 and in the footwell areas. Troubleshooting Please refer to chapter on page 74. and at the start of the The following hints and operational instructions help with the correct use of the system. The cooling system for the vehicle interior only works when the engine is running and the blower is switched on. The air conditioning system operates most effec-
tively with the windows closed. However, if the vehicle has heated up after standing in the sun for some time, the air inside can be cooled more quickly by opening the windows for a short time. Why does the cooling system turn off automatically or cannot be turned on?
The engine is not running. The blower is switched off. The air conditioning system fuse has blown. Room temperature is below approximately +2
. The supercharger has been temporarily switched off because the coolant temperature is too high. There is a fault on the vehicle. The air condi-
tioning system must be checked by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. Settings for optimal road visibility Switching the cooling system on not only re-
duces the temperature of the vehicle interior, but also the humidity, thus preventing windows from misting. 78 Owner's Manual NOTICE Do not place any food, medicine or any other heat-sensitive items in front of the vents. Heat-
sensitive food, medicine and other items could be either damaged or rendered useless. The air from vents runs through the vehicle interior and leaves through the exhaust valves located on the rear wings, underneath the bumper. Move the air recirculation switch Fig. 75 3 into position , in this position, the air recir-
culation is automatically switched off. Turn the blower knob 2 to level 3 or 4. Press the button to switch the cooling sys-
tem on. The indicator lamp lights up. Set the temperature knob 1 into the required position. Dust and pollen filter The dust and pollen filter with activated charcoal reduces the level of particles in the outside air entering the vehicle. The pollen and dust filter needs to be regularly replaced to keep the air conditioner's efficiency unimpaired. Case the vehicle is frequently used in heavily polluted environments, the filter should be replaced between servicing events page 238. Water vapour underneath the vehicle If the outside humidity and temperature are high, condensed water may drip off the cooling sys-
tem's evaporator and form a pool of water un-
derneath the vehicle. This is normal and does not indicate a leak!
The air conditioning supercharger con-
sumes engine power during cooling, thus contributing to increased fuel consumption. To reduce cooling time to a minimum, observe the following instructions:
If a vehicle stationary under the sun is too hot, open the doors and windows for a few sec-
onds in order to let the hot air out. Ensure that external hot air does not enter the vehicle, for example, through an open window, while the air conditioning is switched on. If it is possible to reach the desired tempera-
ture without switching the air conditioning on, only use the ventilation system. The windscreen might condense after the engine is started due to the residual humid-
ity in the air conditioning system. Turn on the de-
frost function to clear the windscreen as fast as possible. In some versions, for greater overtaking safety, the air conditioning system is switched off for a few seconds while the gas pedal is fully depressed. This feature allows the engine to reach maximum performance during such period. When arriving at destination (about 2 mi-
nutes before), turn the air conditioner off leaving only the ventilation operating. This helps reducing the humidity in the evaporator, reduc-
ing the appearance of unpleasant odours in the interior of the vehicle. Driving Driving guidelines Pedals Fig. 77 In the footwell area: pedals. Key for Fig. 77:
1 2 3 Gas pedal Brake pedal Clutch pedal The operation and freedom of movement of all pedals must never be impaired by objects or floor mats. Only use floor mats that leave the pedal area free and can be securely fastened in the footwell. If a brake circuit fails, you will have to depress the brake pedal further than normal in order to bring the vehicle to a stop. WARNING Items in the driver footwell can hinder pedal operation. This can lead to loss of control of the vehicle and increase the risk of serious injury. Ensure that all pedals can always be operat-
ed without any hindrance. Always safely secure foot mats. Additional foot mats or other floor coverings should never be placed over the fitted foot mat. Ensure that no objects can enter the driver footwell while the vehicle is in motion. Driving 79
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. 2 2 2 The selected gear is higher than the rec-
ommended gear. A downwards arrow is displayed next to the selected gear indica-
tion. The selected gear matches the recommen-
ded gear. A dot is displayed next to the se-
lected gear indication. The selected gear is lower than the recom-
mended gear. An upwards arrow is dis-
played next to the selected gear indication. The gearshift indicator numbers may vary ac-
cording to the selected gear. Features with engaged reverse gear The following will occur if reverse gear is selec-
ted and the ignition is switched on:
The reverse light comes on. In vehicles with parking distance control sys-
tem, the sensor is activated. In vehicles with rear view camera the rear view is displayed to assist the driver when parking or driving in reverse gear. WARNING The gear-change indicator is merely a support-
ing system and must not distract the driver from traffic. The gearshift indicator merely assists the driver in increasing fuel savings. The driver is exclusively responsible for assessing whether current vehicle, road, and traffic conditions allow safely following the gearshift indicator
(e.g. when overtaking or driving with fully-
loaded vehicles). Enhanced gear selection decreases fuel consumption. Warning texts may vary according to the in-
strument cluster version. The gearshift indicator is switched off by pressing the clutch pedal while the ignition is switched on or when no gear is selected. NOTICE Ensure that you are able to operate the pedals freely at all times. For example, the braking dis-
tance to fully stop the vehicle will be longer if a braking circuit is faulty. The brake pedal will have to be depressed further and harder than normal. Gear change recommendation Fig. 78 On the instrument cluster: gearshift indica-
tor (variable 1). Fig. 79 On the instrument cluster: gearshift indica-
tor (variable 2). Depending on the vehicle version, the gearshift indicator may not be available. The gearshift indicator reduces fuel consumption by recommending gears on the display. The gear recommendation process is illustrated on the following table:
80 Owner's Manual Economical driving style Fig. 80 Fuel consumption in litres per 100 km at two distinct ambient temperatures. Driving correctly it is possible to reduce fuel consumption, harming the environ-
ment and engine, brake and tyre wear. Below are some tips on minimizing the environmental impact and save. Fuel consumption, environmental impact and wear on the engine, brakes and tyres depend largely on 3 factors:
Personal driving style. Conditions of use (such as weather and road surface characteristics). Technical conditions. By adopting an economical driving style and an-
ticipating the traffic situation ahead, you can easily reduce fuel consumption by 10 to 15%. A car uses most fuel when accelerating. If you think ahead when driving, you will need to brake less and thus accelerate less. Wherever possible, let the car roll slowly to a stop, for instance when you can see that the next traffic lights are red. Changing gear earlier Basically: the highest gear is always the most economical gear. As a rule of thumb, the follow-
ing applies to most vehicles: at a speed of 30 km/h (19 mph) drive in 3rd gear, at 40 km/h (25 mph) in 4th gear and at 50 km/h (31 mph) in 5th gear. If traffic and driving scenarios are suitable, skip-
ping gears when changing up a gear will also save fuel. Do not drive gears to their upper limit. Use 1st gear only for pulling away then quickly change up to 2nd gear. Vehicles with gearshift indicator help reduce fuel consumption by recommending ideal gears for each specific situation. Rolling to a stop Taking your foot off the accelerator will interrupt the supply of fuel to the engine and decrease fuel consumption. Therefore, in situations such as approaching a red traffic light, let the vehicle roll without apply-
ing the accelerator. Only press on the clutch ped-
al to disengage if the vehicle becomes too slow or if the stopping distance is longer. The engine will then run at idling speed. Switch off the engine in situations in which the vehicle might be stationary for a long time, e.g. at a level crossing. Thinking ahead when driving, and driving with the flow of traffic Frequently applying the brake and accelerator will increase fuel consumption. By thinking ahead when driving and by maintaining a sufficient dis-
tance to the vehicle in front, simply keeping your foot off the accelerator will stop the speed from fluctuating. This means that active braking and accelerating is not always necessary. Driving smoothly and evenly Smoothness is even more important than speed. The more evenly you drive, the lower your fuel consumption will be. When driving on a motorway, it is much more ef-
fective to drive at a constant moderate speed than to drive with constant acceleration and braking. As a rule, driving with a constant style will get you to your destination just as quickly. Using additional equipment in moderation It is always important to be comfortable in your vehicle, but it is also important to consider the environment. Some equipment will increase fuel consumption when switched on (examples):
Driving 81
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Air conditioning cooling system: if the air con-
ditioning system is set to a very high or low temperature it will require a lot of energy, which is generated by the engine. Therefore the temperature setting in the vehicle should not vary too much from the outside tempera-
ture. It may be a good idea to air the vehicle before setting off and then to travel a short distance with the windows open. The air con-
ditioning system should then be switched on once the windows have been closed. Keep the windows closed when driving at high speeds. Open windows increase fuel consump-
tion. Switch off the rear window defrost function
(not available in some versions) when the win-
dow is clear. Other factors which increase fuel consumption (examples):
Fault in engine management system. Driving in hilly regions. Driving with a trailer. Avoid short journeys Directly after a cold start, the engine has a very high fuel consumption. The engine reaches its working temperature after a few kilometres, when fuel consumption will return to a normal level. The engine and catalytic converter need to reach their proper working temperature in order to minimise fuel consumption and pollutant emis-
sions. The outside temperature also has a deci-
sive influence. The Fig. 80 shows the variation in fuel con-
sumption for the same journey at +20 C and
-10 C. Therefore, avoid making too many short journeys and car share whenever possible. Under the same conditions, the vehicle will use more fuel in the winter than in the summer. Not only is it illegal in some countries to warm up cold engines, it is also technically unnecessa-
ry and a waste of fuel. Adjust tyre pressure The correct tyre pressure reduces rolling resist-
ance and therefore also fuel consumption. When purchasing new tyres, always make sure that the tyres have optimum rolling resistance. 82 Owner's Manual Using low friction engine oil Fully synthetic low-viscosity engine oils, known as low-friction engine oils, reduce fuel consump-
tion. Low viscosity engine oils decrease frictional resistance in the engine and spread better and more quickly, especially for cold starts. They are especially effective in vehicles which make a lot of short journeys. Always make sure that the engine oil level is cor-
rect and that you keep to the service intervals (oil change intervals). When purchasing engine oil, always make sure it complies with engine oil standards and has been approved by Volkswagen. Avoid unnecessary loads The lighter the vehicle, the more economical and environmentally-friendly it is. An extra weight of 100 kg increases fuel consumption, for example, by up to 0.3 l/100km. Remove all unnecessary items and loads from the vehicle. Remove any unnecessary special equipment and accessories The more aerodynamic a vehicle, the lower its fuel consumption. Special equipment and acces-
sories, such as roof carriers or bicycle carriers, make the vehicle less aerodynamic. You should therefore remove any special equip-
ment and luggage carriers that are not being used, especially if you are going to be driving at high speeds. WARNING Adapt your speed and distance from the vehi-
cles ahead to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Information on the brakes New brake pads cannot generate the full braking effect during the first 300 km and must first be
. However, you can compensate for run in the slightly reduced braking force by applying more pressure to the brake pedal. During the run-in period, the braking distance is longer when the brakes are depressed fully or during emergency braking than with brakes that have been fully run in. In the run-in period, the brakes should not be depressed fully and situations should be avoided that create a heavy load on the brakes. For example, when driving too close to other vehicles. The rate of wear of the brake pads depends to a great extent on use conditions and driving style. When frequently driving in city traffic and short distances or in sporty manner, the brake pad thicknesses needs to be periodically checked by a Volkswagen dealership or a specialized work-
shop. When driving with wet brakes, for example after driving through water, after heavy rainfall or af-
ter washing the vehicle, the braking effect may be delayed as the brake discs will be wet, or pos-
sibly iced up (during the winter). Brakes must be dried as soon as possible by carefully braking at higher speed. Ensure that no following vehicle and no other road user is put at risk as a result of this action A layer of salt that accumulates on the discs and pads will delay the braking effect and increase the braking distance. If the brakes on the vehicle have not been applied for a long time on roads that have been gritted with salt, the layer of salt must be reduced through careful braking Corrosion on the brake discs and dirt in the brake pads are facilitated through long periods of inac-
tivity, low mileage and low load levels. If there has been little or no use of the brake pads, or if there is corrosion, Volkswagen recommends that the brake discs and brake pads be cleaned by carefully braking several times at higher speed, always in compliance with speed limits and cur-
rent driving conditions (e.g. wet or dry roads, night or day driving). Ensure that no following vehicle and no other road user is put at risk as a result of this action
. Brake servo The brake servo will only function when the en-
gine is running and reinforces the pressure ap-
plied by the driver on the brake pedal. If the brake servo is not functioning or the vehi-
cle is being towed, the brake pedal will have to be depressed more forcefully, since the braking distance will be increased due to the lack of as-
sistance for the brake system
. WARNING New brake pads will not have the optimal brak-
ing effect when first fitted. New brake pads cannot generate the full braking effect during the first 300 km and must first be run in. A reduced braking ef-
fect can be increased by applying more pres-
sure to the brake pedal. You must drive particularly carefully when driving with new brake pads in order to re-
duce the risk of accidents, severe injuries and loss of vehicle control. Never drive too close to other vehicles when running in new brake pads, and never create a driving situation that will place a heavy load on the brakes. WARNING Overheated brakes reduce the braking effect and considerably increase the braking distance. When driving downhill the brakes are placed under particular strain and become hot very quickly. Before driving down a long, steep gradient, reduce speed and change to a lower gear or move the selector lever to a lower gear. This will make use of the engine braking effect and relieve the load on the brakes. Non-standard or damaged front spoilers could restrict the airflow to the brakes and cause them to overheat. WARNING Wet brakes or brakes coated with ice or road salt react more slowly and require longer brak-
ing distances. Carefully apply the brakes to test them. Always dry brakes and clean off any coating of ice and salt with a few cautious applica-
tions of the brake when visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions permit. WARNING Driving without the brake servo can considera-
bly increase the braking distance and thus cause accidents and serious injuries. Never allow the vehicle to roll if the engine is switched off. If the brake servo is not functioning or the vehicle is being towed, the brake pedal will have to be depressed more forcefully, since the braking distance will be increased due to the lack of assistance for the brake system. Driving 83
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. NOTICE Never let the brakes rub by applying light pressure to the brake when it is not necessary to brake. Continual pressure on the brake ped-
al will overheat the brakes. This can considera-
bly reduce the brake effect, increase the brak-
ing distance and, in certain circumstances, cause the brake system to fail completely. Before driving down a long, steep gradient, re-
duce speed and change to a lower gear or move the selector lever to a lower gear. This will make use of the engine braking effect and relieve the load on the brakes. The brake sys-
tem could otherwise overheat and fail. Only use the brakes to slow down or stop the vehi-
cle. If the front brake pads are tested, the rear brake pads should be tested at the same time. visual check of the thickness of all brake pads should be carried out regularly by checking the brake pads through the openings in the wheels or from the underside of the vehicle. If necessary, remove the wheels to carry out a comprehensive check. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Driving with the bed cover open Driving with the bed cover open is particularly dangerous. Properly fasten all objects and the open bed cover. WARNING Driving with an unlocked or open bed cover can cause serious injuries. Volkswagen recommends not driving with an open bed cover. However, if such scenario is absolutely indispensable, observe the follow-
ing guidelines:
Always stow all objects in the bed secure-
ly. Loose objects can fall out of the bed and injure other road users. Always drive carefully and defensively. Avoid any abrupt or sudden driving and braking manoeuvres as this can cause the open bed cover to move unpredictably. Any objects protruding from the bed must be marked to ensure that they are visible to other road users. Legal provisions must be followed. In case of objects protruding from the load bed, the bed cover must never be used to secure or hold objects. Driving a loaded vehicle NOTICE For good vehicle handling when driving a loaded vehicle, please observe the following:
Stow all items of luggage securely page 166. Accelerate carefully and gently. Avoid sudden braking and driving manoeuvres. Brake earlier than in normal driving. If applicable, observe the information concern-
ing driving with towing mode page 172. If applicable, observe the information concern-
ing driving with a roof carrier page 170. WARNING Moving loads can severely impair the vehicle's stability and driving safety, which can cause ac-
cidents and severe injuries. Secure objects properly to prevent them from sliding. Use suitable straps when securing heavy ob-
jects. 84 Owner's Manual The vehicle's width changes when the bed cover is open. Driving through water on roads Avoid driving through water on roads. Driving un-
der such conditions hinders the driveability, and may cause severe damages to the vehicle, com-
promising the safety of the driver and other pas-
sengers. If absolutely necessary to cross the floo-
ded area, observe the following in order to pre-
vent damages to the vehicle, driver, and passen-
gers:
Check the water depth before driving through water on roads. The water level must be no higher than the lower edge of the vehicle body
(underneath the doors)
. Do not drive faster than walking speed. Do not fully depress the accelerator. Do not drive the vehicle at more than 2/3 of the top engine speed. Do not drive with a trailer attached. From 1,000 to 1,500 kilometres, gradually in-
crease driving performance to top speed and highest engine speed. If the engine is run in gently, the life of the engine will be increased and its oil con-
sumption reduced. Using the vehicle in other countries and continents The vehicle is produced specifically for a certain country and complies with this country's regis-
tration regulations valid at the time of vehicle production. If the vehicle is going to be sold in another coun-
try or used in another country for an extended period, the legal requirements applicable in that country must be observed. In some cases, certain equipment will have to be fitted or removed and functions deactivated. The scope and type of service available may also be affected. This is particularly important if the ve-
hicle is driven in another climate region for a long period of time. Because different frequency bands are used in different countries, the radio unit may not work in other countries. NOTICE Volkswagen may not be held liable for dam-
ages caused to the vehicle due to low-quality fuel, inadequate servicing work, and use of non-genuine parts. Volkswagen may not be held liable in case the vehicle does not comply or only partially com-
plies with legal requirements from other coun-
tries and continents. Never stop the vehicle, reverse or switch off the engine while in water. Oncoming vehicles create waves that could in-
crease the water level for your vehicle to such an extent that it is not safe to drive through the water. WARNING After driving through water, mud and dirt roads the brakes may be hindered due to the humidi-
ty or freezing of brake pads or disks, increasing the braking distance. Dry the brakes and eliminate ice through careful braking manoeuvres. Proceed with-
out putting other drivers at risk or failing to abide by legal requirements. Avoid sudden braking manoeuvres after crossing through water in roads. NOTICE When driving through water in roads, some vehicle components such as the engine, trans-
mission, chassis or electrical system, may be severely damaged. Never drive through salt water, since salt can cause corrosion. Rinse all components that have been exposed to salt water immediately with fresh water. Running-in Please follow the regulations concerning run-
ning-in of new parts. Running-in the engine A new engine needs to be run in during the first 1,500 kilometres. During its first few hours of running, the internal friction in the engine is greater than later on when all the moving parts have bedded down. The style of driving during the first 1,500 kilome-
tres will also affect the engine quality. Even after this time and especially with a cold engine drive the vehicle at moderate speeds in order to reduce engine wear and to increase the mileage that the engine can cover. Do not drive at engine speeds which are too low. Always shift down gear if the engine is not running smoothly. Up to 1,000 kilometres, the following applies:
Driving 85
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Troubleshooting Brake system malfunction A brake circuit may have failed if you have to re-
duce speed and the vehicle does not brake as normal (sudden increase in braking distance). This will be indicated by the warning lamp and in some cases a text message. Go to a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop as soon as possible. Drive at low speed when doing this and anticipate much longer braking distan-
ces and an increase in the pressure required on the pedal. Starting and stopping the engine Ignition cylinder Fig. 81 Next to the steering wheel, to the right: ve-
hicle key positions on the ignition cylinder. Positions of the key in the vehicle Fig. 81 0 Ignition switched off. The vehicle key may be removed. Ignition switched on. Start the engine. When the engine starts running, release the key from the ignition. Upon releasing the vehicle key, it will return to position 1 . 1 2 Whenever it is necessary to restart the engine, return the key into position 0 . The restart blocker in the ignition cylinder prevents the starter engine from working while the engine is switched on, preventing damages. WARNING Improper vehicle key use may cause severe in-
juries. Always take all vehicle keys with you when you leave the vehicle. The engine can be started and electrical equipment such as the window controls can be operated, which may lead to severe injuries. Never leave unattended children or people with special needs in the vehicle. They could become trapped in the vehicle in an emer-
gency and may not be able to get themselves to safety. Depending on the time of year, for example, locked vehicles can be subjected to very high or very low temperatures. This can cause serious injuries and illness or fatalities, especially for small children. Never remove the vehicle key from the igni-
tion cylinder while the vehicle is in motion. NOTICE The starter engine can only be activated while the engine is switched off. If the starter engine is restarted immediately after switching the engine off, both the starter engine and the engine may be damaged. If the vehicle key is left in the ignition for a long period with the engine switched off, the vehicle battery could discharge. Start the engine Vehicles with heated start: turn the vehicle key to position Fig. 81 1 . Ignition switched on. The warm starting system's indicator lamp will then light up on the instrument cluster. Wait until the indicator lamp is disabled, in-
dicating the end of the fuel warming process
(this action may be required when starting cold engines). Vehicles with manual gearbox: step on the clutch pedal and hold it firmly pressed until the engine is running. Position the gear selec-
tor lever into the neutral position. 86 Owner's Manual Turn the vehicle key in the ignition lock to po-
sition Fig. 81 2 do not accelerate. When the engine catches, release the ignition key. Vehicles with heated start: turn the vehicle key in the ignition lock to position Fig. 81 2 to start the engine do not accelerate. If step 5 is not followed, the indicator lamp will flash, indicating the need to stop the starting procedure and repeat it after returning the key to position Fig. 81 0 and waiting approxi-
mately 10 seconds. If the engine does not start, stop the proce-
dure and repeat it after approximately one mi-
nute. Release the handbrake if you wish to pull away page 95. WARNING Never leave the vehicle while the engine is run-
ning. The vehicle may move unexpectedly and cause severe accidents and injuries, especially with the selected gear or respective gear posi-
tion. WARNING A start booster can explode and cause the en-
gine to suddenly run at high revs. Never use a start booster. NOTICE The starter engine or engine may be damaged when attempting to start the engine while driving or when the engine is started immedi-
ately after being switched off. While the engine is cool, avoid high rotations, total acceleration and increased engine load. Do not push or jump start the engine. Unburnt fuel may damage the catalytic converter. Do not leave the engine running when the vehicle is stationary. Immediately resume driving when there is good visibility in the win-
dows; be careful not to force the engine while cold. This allows the engine to reach its opera-
tion temperature faster and reduces emissions. When starting the engine, major electrical consumers are switched off temporarily. When starting from cold, the engine may be a little noisy for a short period of time. This is quite normal, and no cause for concern. Stopping the engine The vehicle must be completely stationary
. Apply the handbrake firmly page 95. Turn the vehicle key into position page 86 0 . WARNING The components of the exhaust system be-
come very hot. This can cause fires and serious injuries. Never park the vehicle so that parts of the exhaust system can come into contact with inflammable material underneath the vehi-
cle, e.g. leaves, dry grass, spilt fuel, etc. Never apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con-
verter, diesel particulate filter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. WARNING Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion. This can lead to loss of control of the vehicle and cause severe accidents and injuries. The airbags and belt tensioners will not work if the ignition is switched off. The brake servo will not work when the en-
gine is switched off. When the engine is switched off, greater force is required on the brake pedal to stop the vehicle. The power steering does not work while the engine is switched off and requires more power to drive the vehicle. NOTICE If the vehicle has been driven at high load for a long period, the engine could overheat when it is switched off. In order to avoid damage to the en-
gine, allow the engine to run in neutral for ap-
proximately 2 minutes before switching it off. After the engine is switched off, the radia-
tor fan in the engine compartment may run on for some minutes, even if the ignition is switched off or the vehicle key has been re-
moved. The radiator fan will switch itself off au-
tomatically. Driving 87
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Electronic immobilizer Manual gearbox Manual gearbox: engaging the gear Fig. 82 On the instrument cluster: display indicat-
ing the activated Volkswagen Information System. immobilizer - vehicles with The immobilizer helps prevent the engine from being started and driven with an unauthorised vehicle key. There is a chip in the key. It automatically deacti-
vates the immobilizer when the vehicle key is in-
serted into the ignition cylinder. The electronic immobilizer is automatically acti-
vated when the vehicle key is removed from the ignition cylinder. Coded vehicle keys are available in an authorised Volkswagen repairer page 45. Troubleshooting Immobiliser malfunction When an invalid vehicle key is used or when the system is damaged, a corresponding indication is shown on the instrument cluster display. The engine will not be able to be switched on. Use a valid vehicle key or visit a Volkswagen dealership. 88 Owner's Manual Fig. 83 Gear shift pattern of a 5-speed manual gearbox. Engaging a forward gear Each gear's positions are illustrated in the gear lever Fig. 83. Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal. Position the gear selection lever into the neu-
tral position
. Gently release the clutch pedal to start mov-
ing. Selecting reverse gear Reverse gear should only be selected when the vehicle is stationary. Fully depress and hold the clutch pedal Move the gear lever to the neutral position and
. push down. Push the gear lever fully to the left and then to the front in the reverse gear position Fig. 83 R . Gently release the clutch pedal to start mov-
ing. Shifting down gears You should always select the next immediate gear when shifting down a gear whilst the vehi-
cle is in motion. Engine revs should not be too
. The clutch, gearbox high when doing so and engine may be damaged if one or more gears are skipped when shifting down a gear at high speeds or high engine revs, even if the clutch is not released in the process
. WARNING When the engine is running, the vehicle will start to move as soon as a gear is engaged and the clutch released. Never switch off the engine while the vehicle is in motion. Never select reverse gear while the vehicle is in motion. WARNING Shifting gears incorrectly to a lower gear can lead to a loss of control of the vehicle, which can cause accidents and serious injuries. NOTICE The clutch, gearbox and engine may be severely damaged if the gear stick of the manual gearbox is shifted to a gear which is too low when travel-
ling at high speeds or at high revs. This also ap-
plies if the clutch remains depressed and the gears do not engage. NOTICE Please note the following points in order to avoid damage and premature wear:
Do not rest your hand on the gear lever when driving. The pressure from your hand is passed onto the selector forks in the transmission. Ensure that the vehicle has come to a full stop before engaging reverse gear. Always fully depress the clutch pedal when changing gear. Do not hold the vehicle by riding the clutch on a hill with the engine running. Steering assistance Introduction The power steering only functions when the en-
gine is running. The power steering assistance function is a sys-
tem that supplements driver efforts when steer-
ing. This system has a steering mechanism based on a hydraulic valve/piston system, controlled by a hydraulic pump, lines, hydraulic fluid, and res-
ervoir with built-in filter. WARNING The steering wheel is very difficult to turn if the steering assistance is not working. This can have a serious impact on your driving safety. The steering assistance only functions when the engine is running. Never allow the vehicle to roll if the engine is switched off. Never remove the vehicle key from the igni-
tion while the vehicle is in motion. Align the wheels before switching off the ve-
hicle. This will reduce vehicle power con-
sumption during start-up. Driving 89
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Checking the power steering fluid level Please refer to at the start of the chapter on page 89. Fig. 84 On the engine compartment: Power steering fluid reservoir. Power steering fluid level control marks. In case of damages to the power steering assis-
tance system or if the engine is not running, the steering assistance function will not work. In this case, the steering effort required will be greater, but steering will still be possible. Preparations Park the vehicle in a flat and steady surface. Align the front wheels. With the engine switched off, let the engine cool down
. Open the bonnet page 200. Check fluid level with cool engine Turn the reservoir cap Fig. 84 1 in the direction of the arrow. Remove the reservoir cap and clean the meas-
uring rod over the cap using a clean cloth
. Screw the cap and wait a few seconds. Remove the cap again and check the fluid level by the MIN and MAX markings with the 20 C indication on the measuring rod 6 . Check fluid level with hot engine Turn the reservoir cap Fig. 84 1 in the direction of the arrow. Remove the reservoir cap and clean the meas-
uring rod over the cap using a clean cloth
. Screw the cap and wait a few seconds. Remove the cap again and check the fluid level by the MIN and MAX markings with the 80 C indication on the measuring rod 7 . WARNING Always let the engine cool down completely before carefully opening the bonnet. Hot parts may cause burns when touched. Go to a Volkswagen Dealership in case of any difficulties when checking the fluid level. If necessary to refill the power steering fluid level, go to a Volkswagen Dealership, which has the approved fluid for your vehicle. CAUTION The steering wheel must not be fully turned for over 15 seconds while the engine is running. this may damage the power steering system. When the steering wheel is turned com-
pletely, the hydraulic fluid is quickly heated by the power steering pump. When the steering wheel is kept completely turned, while the vehicle is stationary, noises will be heard due to the substantial load to which the pump is submitted. Additionally, the en-
gine's slow gear rate is also temporarily re-
duced. 90 Owner's Manual CAUTION If the vehicle is running with fluid levels out-
side the 2 region (cool engine) or 3 region
(hot engine), the power steering system may be damaged. Use only strong cloths in order to prevent them from shredding while cleaning the measuring rod, thus avoiding any residues in the rod from entering the hydraulic system and damaging the power steering system. Driving 91
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. The off-road mode provides convenience fea-
tures when driving in irregular surfaces, in addi-
tion to adjusting the accelerator pedal. The off-road button also enables the follow-
ing feature:
Off-road ABS page 101. Enabling and disabling the off-road feature To enable and/or disable the off-road mode, briefly press the button Fig. 85 on the cen-
tre console. After enabling the off-road mode, the button's indicator lamp is lit. The off-road mode must be re-enabled each time the engine is started. Adjustment of the accelerator pedal The accelerator pedal adjustment feature is ena-
bled in order to enhance accuracy at low speed. By pressing the accelerator pedal, the engine tor-
que is controlled to facilitate starting and driving over slippery or unstable surfaces. WARNING Only use the off-road mode in unpaved roads or irregular/unstable surfaces. The wheels may skid if this mode is used im-
properly, potentially resulting in accidents and vehicle damages. The same tyre models must be installed in all 4 wheels in order to ensure proper oper-
ation of the off-road mode. Different tyre tread diameters could cause unexpected changes in engine torque. Uphill assist system Please refer to on page 92. at the start of the chapter The uphill assist system supports starting proce-
dures in vehicles with ESC, actively holding the vehicle in place. Driver assist systems Starter assist system Introduction WARNING The smart starter assist system technology cannot exceed specific physical limitations. The greater convenience offered by starter assist systems must not encourage drivers to assume unnecessary safety risks. Unexpected vehicle movements may cause severe injuries. The starter assist systems cannot be used as a replacement for the driver's full attention. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions. Starter assist systems are unable to hold ve-
hicles in place in uphill slopes or provide suf-
ficient braking power in downhill slopes (e.g. slippery or frozen surfaces), under any condi-
tions. Off-road mode Please refer to on page 92. at the start of the chapter Fig. 85 On the centre console: manual off-road mode on/off button. Depending on the vehicle version, the off-road mode may not be available. Off-road mode disabled. Off-road mode enabled. 92 Owner's Manual The uphill assist system is automatically enabled under the following circumstances 2 3 Points 1 to 3 must be satisfied simultaneously:
1 Hold the brake pedal to keep the vehicle stopped in place on an uphill of approxi-
mately 5%. The engine runs smoothly. All doors must be closed. Upon releasing the brake pedal, the vehicle is held in place for approximately 2 seconds. The brake is slowly released upon starting. If starting does not occur within two seconds, the brake is re-
leased and the vehicle will move backwards. The uphill assist system is immediately disabled:
1 2 If any of the aforementioned conditions are no longer available page 93. If the engine is switched off or flooded. Adverse conditions:
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) may not identify very steep slopes or gradients (greater than 30%), which could affect the proper func-
tioning of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and, consequently, the Hill Start Assist (HHC - Hill Hold Control) and the parking sensor. To restore the aforementioned systems, it is suf-
ficient that the vehicle is turned off and on again and that the driver starts the car and drives it at a speed greater than 25 km/h for a few seconds. Hill descent control system Hill descent control system (HDC) The hill descent control system helps the driver control vehicle speed by actively braking the ve-
hicle in hill descents However, the road must have sufficient adher-
ence for the system to work. For example, the hill descent control system may not work properly when driving over icy or slippery roads. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. The hill descent control system's availability is shown via the indicator lamp on the instru-
ment cluster display. The indicator lamp flashes while the hill descent control system is operat-
ing. The green indicator light remains lit while the descent system is switched on. The in-
dicator light flashes while the hill descent control system is operating. The hill descent control system is automatically enabled under the following circumstances Points 1 to 3 must be satisfied simultaneously:
Off-road mode on and indicator lamp lit. 1 Speed below 30 km/h. 2 Minimum downhill angle of 10%. 3 While the hill descent control system is operat-
ing, the speed can be adjusted by braking or ac-
celerating the vehicle (under the 30 km/h limit). The hill descent control system works with or without selected gears. The hill descent control system is immediately disabled:
If the ESC is enabled. After leaving the downhill area. If the vehicle speed exceeds 30 km/h or if the vehicle comes to a complete stop. If the off-road mode is disabled. WARNING Always be ready to apply the brakes, in order to prevent accidents and injuries. The hill descent control system is merely a supporting system and may not be able to brake the vehicle in some situations. The hill descent control system may not pre-
vent the vehicle from gaining speed. The hill descent control system also works with the reverse gear selected. The same tyre models must be installed in all 4 wheels in order to ensure proper oper-
ation of the off-road mode. Different tyre tread diameters could cause unexpected changes in engine torque. Driver assist systems 93 Cruise control system (GRA) Introduction The speed regulator system (GRA) assists the driver keeping constant a set speed. Depending on the vehicle version, the cruise con-
trol (GRA) may not be available. Speed range The GRA is available for forward driving from 20 km/h onwards. Changing gear As soon as the clutch pedal is stepped on, the cruise control is interrupted and automatically taken up again after the gear change. Driving downhill When driving downhill the set speed may be ex-
ceeded due to the slope gradient. Use the brake to reduce the speed of the vehicle accordingly and shift to a lower gear if necessary. How do I control the GRA?
According to its version the GRA can be control-
led by means of a lever on the steering column or through the multifunction steering wheel page 94. WARNING When it is not possible to drive safely over a sufficient length and constant speed, the cruise control system may cause severe accidents and injuries. Never use the cruise control system (GRA) under intense traffic, short distances, steep, sinuous, and slippery circuits, such as ice, snow, humidity, or gravel, in addition to wet roads. Never use the GRA in free terrain or unpaved roads. Adjust the speed and safety distance from vehicles ahead based on weather, road, and traffic conditions. In order to prevent unexpected speed adjust-
ments, always switch off the GRA after us-
ing. 94 Owner's Manual It is dangerous to resume stored speeds if the speed is too high for current road, traffic, or weather conditions. In descending slopes, the GRA may not maintain constant vehicle speed. The vehi-
cle's weight increases speed by itself. Reduce the gear or apply the brakes. Cruise control system commands Please refer to on page 94. at the start of the chapter Fig. 86 To the left on the steering column: lever with switch and GRA operating buttons. Switch on Place switch B into position . No speed is saved and no control is yet active. Starting the cruise controlling While driving, press C in the area . Above 20 km/h, the current speed is stored and set. In addition, the green indicator lamp lights up . Set speed The saved speed can be adjusted via the button A while the GRA is controlling:
Press A in area (briefly): + 1 km/h Press C in area (briefly): - 1 km/h To alter the set speed continuously keep buttons A or C pressed. The system adjusts the current speed accelerating or slowing down the vehicle, respectively. The vehicle does not actively brake. Interrupting the control Press the switch B into position or press the brake or clutch pedal. The speed will remain stored. Resume operation Press A in area . The current speed is resumed and adjusted. Switch off Set the switch B to position . The system is switched off. The stored memory is deleted. Troubleshooting Please refer to on page 94. at the start of the chapter The cruise control is automatically interrupted. Several causes are possible:
In case of a system failure that could restrict the GRA function. When driving for extended periods of time faster than the stored speed. When the brake or clutch pedals are activated. If the gear is shifted via the manual transmis-
sion. When the airbag is activated. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Parking and manoeuvring Parking Please adhere to relevant legislation when stop-
ping and parking your vehicle. Parking the vehicle The actions should only be carried out in the specified order. Park the vehicle on a levelled and stable sur-
face
. Depress and hold the brake pedal until the en-
gine has stopped. Lift the handbrake lever up page 95. Switch off the engine and take your foot off the brake pedal. Remove the key from the ignition. Select 1st gear for flat ground or uphill in-
clines, or reverse gear for downhill inclines, and then release the clutch. Ensure that all occupants, particularly children, have left the vehicle. Take all vehicle keys with you when you leave the vehicle. Lock the vehicle. Parking on uphill and downhill slopes Before switching off the engine, turn the steering wheel so that the front wheels will roll against the kerb if the parked vehicle starts to move. When facing downhill, turn the wheels so that they face the kerb. When facing uphill, turn the wheels so that they face the centre of the road. WARNING The components of the exhaust system be-
come very hot. This can cause fires and serious injuries. Never park the vehicle so that parts of the exhaust system can come into contact with inflammable material underneath the vehi-
cle, e.g. leaves, dry grass, spilt fuel, etc. Parking and manoeuvring 95 WARNING Leaving and parking the vehicle incorrectly may cause the vehicle to move. This could lead to accidents and severe injuries. Ensure that the handbrake is correctly en-
gaged. Never remove the vehicle key from the igni-
tion cylinder while the vehicle is in motion. Always take all vehicle keys with you when you leave the vehicle. The engine can be started and electrical equipment such as the window controls can be operated, which may lead to severe injuries. Never leave unattended children or people with special needs in the vehicle. They could become trapped in the vehicle in an emer-
gency and may not be able to get themselves to safety. Depending on the time of year, for example, locked vehicles can be subjected to very high or very low temperatures. This can cause serious injuries and illness or fatalities, especially to small children. NOTICE Only release the brake pedal after pulling the handbrake, in order to prevent sudden vehicle movement after parking. Drive carefully in parking lots with long kerbs or fixed posts. Objects higher than the ground level may damage the bumper and other vehi-
cle parts when parking. On order to avoid any damage, stop the vehicle before the wheels touch the bollards or kerbs. Carefully drive through entrances and slumps in terrains, ramps, kerbs, and other objects. Lowered vehicle parts, such as the bumper, spoiler and chassis, engine or exhaust parts may be damaged in these situations. Handbrake Engaging the handbrake Fig. 87 Between front seats: handbrake lever. Always pull the handbrake lever when leaving or parking the vehicle. Applying the handbrake Press the interlock button and pull the hand-
brake lever upwards Fig. 87 (arrow). The handbrake is pulled when the indicator lamp lights up in the instrument cluster, while the ignition is switched on. Releasing the handbrake Pull the handbrake lever slightly upwards and press the lock button Fig. 87 (arrow). Guide the handbrake lever down while press-
ing down the interlock button. WARNING Incorrect use of the handbrake can cause se-
vere accidents and injuries. The handbrake should never be used to brake the vehicle, except in emergencies. The brak-
ing distance is considerably longer as only the rear wheels are braked. Always use the foot brakes. Never drive with the handbrake lever slightly pulled. This could overheat the brake and compromise the braking system. In addition, this causes premature wearing of rear brake pads. Never drive the vehicle with the handbrake lightly applied. The vehicle can move even while the handbrake is applied. 96 Owner's Manual NOTICE Only release the brake pedal after pulling the handbrake, in order to prevent sudden vehicle movement after parking. Park distance control (Park Pilot) Introduction The park distance control system assists the driver with parking and manoeuvring. The rear Park Distance Control (Park Pilot) may not be available, depending on the vehicle equip-
ment. The parking aid (Park Pilot) helps drivers steer and park vehicles. If the rear part of the vehicle approaches an obstacle, an intermittent alarm is sounded. The smaller the distance, the shorter are the intervals between acoustic alarms. When the obstacle is very close, a continuous alarm sounds, in which case it is recommended to stop the vehicle to avoid a collision. When the vehicle continues to approach an ob-
stacle while the continuous alarm is sounded, the system is no longer able to calculate the distance and the alarm may stop. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the rear bumper sensors transmit and receive ultrasound waves Using such ultrasound waves (transmis-
sion, reflection off of obstacles and reception), the system continuously calculates the distance between the bumper and the obstacle. WARNING The parking distance control (Park Pilot) cannot replace the full concentration of the driver. Manoeuvring vehicles without due attention may cause severe injuries. Always adjust your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic con-
ditions. Ultrasound sensors have blind spots in which obstacles and people may not be detected. Always monitor the area around the vehicle as the ultrasound sensors will not always de-
tect small children, animals and objects. Certain object and clothing surfaces may not reflect ultrasound sensor signals. These ob-
jects and people with such clothes may not be detected by the system, or be incorrectly detected. External sound sources may affect ultra-
sound sensor signals. Therefore, in certain circumstances the system may not detect persons and objects. Certain pavement surfaces may cause non homogeneous readings, such as for example, rugged asphalt or cobblestones. NOTICE The ultrasound sensors may not always be able to recognize objects such as trailer drawbars, thin rails, fences, posts, trees and open or opening dropsides and may result in damage to the vehicle. If the parking distance control has detected an obstacle and issued a warning, the obstacle may move out of the detection range of the sensors as the vehicle approaches it, particu-
larly if the object is very high or very low. In this case, these objects are no longer regis-
tered. he vehicle can sustain considerable damage if the warning given by the parking distance con-
trol is ignored. Impacts or collisions may damage or deregu-
late ultrasound sensors installed in the bump-
er. The system ultrasound sensors in the bumper must be kept clean and free of mud, dirt, ice and snow and not be covered up by stickers or other items as otherwise the system will not work properly. The ultrasound sensors should only be sprayed briefly when cleaning with pressure hoses and steam cleaners. A distance of more than 10 cm between the ultrasound sensors and the steam/hose nozzle must be ensured. Sources of noise can lead to errors in the park-
ing distance control system, such as rough as-
phalt, cobblestones, induction coils, construc-
tion machines, or noises from other vehicles. Parking and manoeuvring 97
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Special accessories eventually assembled in the vehicle, such as bicycle supports and/or towing devices, may limit the parking distance control operation. In case of system failure, seek assistance at a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recom-
mends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Volkswagen recommends that drivers prac-
tise using the parking distance control in a low-traffic area or parking lot to familiarise themselves with the system. Enabling and disabling Please refer to chapter on page 97. and at the start of the Fig. 88 On the upper part of the centre console:
parking distance control on/off button (Park Pilot). Depending on the vehicle version, the parking distance control may not be available. Enabling the park distance control Selecting reverse gear. OR: press the button. The park distance control is automatically ena-
bled when the vehicle moves in reverse gear. According to the vehicle version, the park dis-
tance control system may also be enabled auto-
matically. Disabling the Park Distance Control Press . OR: accelerate the vehicle forward at a speed higher than approximately 0 to -15 km/h. 98 Owner's Manual Special features of the parking distance control The parking distance control only functions at a speed of up to 15 km/h. In some cases, the parking distance control registers water as an obstacle in the ultra-
sound sensors. If the distance remains the same, the acoustic warning volume reduces after a few seconds. If the continuous warning sounds, the volume will remain the same. As soon as the vehicle clears away from the obstacle, the intermittent alarm is automati-
cally switched off. In case a new object ap-
proaches, the intermittent alarm is automati-
cally switched on. The volume of the acoustic warning can be set in the Settings menu of vehicles with the Volkswagen Information System (I-System). Alternatively, a Volkswagen Dealership is qualified to set the sound volume. The indicator lamp of the button re-
mains lit (yellow) while the parking distance control function is enabled. Representation on the display Please refer to chapter on page 97. and at the start of the Fig. 89 Parking distance control display (coloured display): A obstacle identified in the segment. Depending on the vehicle version, the radio dis-
play (not available in some versions) Fig. 89 will show the area scanned by the vehicle's rear ultrasound sensors A . Possible obstacles are displayed using the vehicle as a reference point
. Simultaneously acoustic alarms are soun-
ded. A Rear vehicle area scanned. Obstacle in the way of the vehicle's course. An intermittent acoustic sound is sounded. The shorter the distance, the shorter the intervals between acoustic alarms. Nearby obstacle. A continuous acoustic sound is sounded. Stop driving!
Obstacle out of the vehicle's course. The rear vehicle area scanned by the ultrasound sensors are shown on the factory-fitted radio or navigation system display. Possible obstacles are displayed using the vehicle as a reference point
. WARNING Be careful not to become distracted from traf-
fic due to display images. In some versions, when the parking dis-
tance control is activated, the radio volume may be partially or entirely muted in order to al-
low the driver to hear the intermittent alarm. For additional information, refer to page 112. Acoustic warnings (and visual, if applicable) might take a few seconds to be played. Rear view camera Introduction In vehicles with rear view camera the rear view is displayed to assist the driver when parking or driving in reverse gear. According to the version of the vehicle, the rear view camera system may not be available. A camera in the rear bumper assists the driver when backing into a parking space or during ma-
neuvering. The camera image is displayed to-
gether with the orientation guides projected by the system on the factory installed radio or navi-
gation system's display. WARNING The use of the rear view camera to asses the distance to obstacles (people, vehicles, etc.) is imprecise and may cause serious accidents and injuries. The camera lens amplifies and distorts the field of vision making the displayed objects seem altered or imprecise. Certain objects, due to the display resolution and insufficient lighting, may not be dis-
played at all or only partially so, such as thin posts or fences. Therefore extra caution is required from the driver with the use of the camera to prevent accidents. The rear view camera has dead viewing an-
gles where people and objects cannot be de-
tected by it. Keep the camera lens clean, free of snow and ice and uncovered. WARNING The intelligent technology shipped with the rear view camera cannot go beyond the limits imposed by physics and will only operate within the limitations of the system. Inattentive use or without supervision of the reverse gear driving assistant may cause serious accidents and inju-
ries. The system cannot substitute the driver's attention. Adapt your speed and driving style to ac-
cording to the visibility, weather, road and traffic conditions. Always keep in mind the parking direction and the relevant areas around the vehicle. Be careful not to become distracted from traffic due to display images. Always watch the area around the vehicle as small children, animals and objects are not always detected by the rear view camera. It is possible that the rear view camera is not able to display all the areas sharply. Use the rear view camera only with the drop-
side completely closed. NOTICE The rear view camera only shows two-dimen-
sional images on the display. Due to the absence of image depth, protruding objects or recesses on the road may be difficult to identify or not be identifiable at all. Parking and manoeuvring 99
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Enabling and disabling Please refer to chapter on page 99. and at the start of the Enabling the rear view camera system Selecting reverse gear. Disabling the rear view camera system Drive forward at least 15 km/h. OR: as soon as the reverse gear is disengaged or the selector lever moved from R position. Assumptions Please refer to chapter on page 99. and at the start of the Settings When the rear view camera system is on, set-
tings can be made via the function buttons on the display Fig. 90. Some settings depend on the version. Function touch pad surfaces and rear view cam-
era system icons:
x Adjust the display: brightness, contrast, colour. Switch to Park Distance Control page 97. Displays the Park Distance Control indica-
tor, Hides the Park Distance Control indicator, Exit current display. Turning the Park Distance Control sound on and off. The following prerequisites must be met:
The dropside must be closed. A reliable and clear image, for example, good visibility conditions and a clean lens. The space behind the vehicle must be clearly and completely recognized. The vehicle may not be damaged. The system must be checked by a Volkswagen Dealer if the position or the installation angle of the rear view camera is altered, such as after an impact to the rear. Rear view camera settings Some settings such as brightness, contrast and colour can be set touching the respective func-
tion surfaces - or + , or sliding the respective adjustment slide. Stop the vehicle in a safe place and secure against rolling away. Turn the ignition and the radio or the naviga-
tion system on. Touch the function button . Perform the desired settings with the menu. Representation on the display Please refer to chapter on page 99. and at the start of the Orientation lines Red line: safe distance backwards Green side-lines: vehicle extensions. Fig. 90 Display of the radio or navigation system:
reverse camera turned on (schematic). 100 Owner's Manual Parking Please refer to chapter on page 99. and at the start of the Fig. 91 Display of the radio or navigation system:
enter the parking spot with the rear view camera
(schematic display). Key for Fig. 91:
Select parking spot. Parking in the selected parking spot. Line up vehicle to parking spot. Lane. Parking space. Side limits of the parking space. Rear limit of the parking space. 1 2 3 4 All length indications of the assistance guides re-
fer to a vehicle on a flat surface. Entering the parking space Position the vehicle in front of the parking spot Fig. 91 2 . Selecting reverse gear. Drive slowly in reverse and manoeuvre so that the green side guides lead in between the de-
limiting lines of the selected parking space 2 . Align the vehicle in the selected parking spot so that the green side guidelines are superim-
posed on the lateral limitation lines 3 . Stop the vehicle when the red line hits the rear limit 4 . 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. NOTICE Small objects are not recognized by the rear view camera until 40 cm behind the vehicle and may cause damages to the vehicle. NOTICE Simulation images of the rear view camera are merely illustrative. Brake support systems Information to the brake support systems Depending on the vehicle version, some functions may not be available. The braking support systems are the electronic brake variator (EBV), anti-lock brake system
(ABS), brake assist (BAS), electronic differential lock (EDS), traction control system (ASR), and the electronic stability control (ESC). Two different brake assist systems are used:
Base system: the ABS and EBV brake assist systems only function when the engine is run-
ning. They make a considerable contribution to active driving safety. ESC system: the ESC, ABS, off-road ABS, BAS, ASR, EDS, and EBV brake assist systems only function when the engine is running. They make a considerable contribution to active driving safety. Traction control (TCS) The ASR reduces the engine drive in case of wheel skidding and adjusts the drive to road sur-
face conditions. The TCS facilitates the starter, acceleration, and uphill effort, even under ad-
verse road surface conditions. To manually switch the ASR on or off, briefly press the button on the centre console page 104. Electronic stability control (ESC) ESC helps mitigate skidding risks and enhances rolling stability by braking individual wheels in certain driving scenarios. The ESC recognizes roll-
ing dynamics limit scenarios, such as vehicle Parking and manoeuvring 101 oversteering or understeering, or wheel skidding. Specific braking interventions or reduced engine torque help the system stabilize the vehicle. The ESC has limits. It is important to note that the ESC cannot defy the laws of physics. The ESC cannot assist in all scenarios faced by the driver. For instance, the ESC cannot assist whenever there is a sudden change of road conditions. If a length of a dry road is covered in water, mud, or snow, the ESC cannot provide the same assis-
tance as an entirely dry road. If the vehicle aquaplanes (runs over a film of water instead of asphalt), the ESC will not be able to assist the driver, since there will be no asphalt contact and the vehicle can no longer be braked or steered. During quick curves, especially in areas with mul-
tiple curves, the ESC may not be as efficient in handling adverse scenarios, such as during cour-
ses of lower speed. When towing a trailer, the ESC will not be able to assist the driver in regain-
ing vehicle control, unlike when the vehicle is not towing a trailer. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibili-
ty, weather, road and traffic conditions. The ESC cannot defy the laws of physics, improve torque transmission available or keep the vehicle on the road when the driver is responsible for steering the vehicle away from the road. Instead, the ESC enhances the possibility of regaining vehicle con-
trol and assists under extreme road driving con-
ditions based on the shift in direction caused by the driver, maintaining the vehicle in the desired direction. When driving at speeds that move the vehicle away from the road before the ESC can provide any assistance, the ESC will not be of any use. The ABS and off-road ABS systems, set stability assist functions, and the uphill assist system are integrated to the ESC. The ESC and integrated systems may be partially enabled/disabled manually page 104. Anti-lock brake system (ABS) The ABS prevents the wheels from locking when the brakes are applied up until the point where the vehicle is nearly stationary and assists the driver in steering the vehicle and keeping it under control. This means that the vehicle is also less likely to spin, even when the brakes are de-
pressed fully:
102 Owner's Manual Strongly press and hold the brake pedal. Do not take your foot off the brake pedal or re-
duce the force on the brake pedal!
Do not pump the brake pedal or reduce the pressure on the brake pedal!
Steer the vehicle while the brake pedal is fully depressed. The ABS will switch off when the brake pedal is released or if the pressure on the brake ped-
al is reduced. If the ABS is taking corrective action, you will be aware of a pulsing movement in the brake pedal and some noise. However, ABS will not necessa-
rily guarantee shorter braking distances in all conditions. The braking distance could even be longer when braking on gravel or on fresh snow covering an icy or slippery surface. Anti-lock brake system for off-road driving
(off-road ABS) The off-road ABS system enhances vehicle brak-
ing in unstable surfaces. The off-road ABS system is part of the off-road feature page 92. Enable off-road ABS Briefly press the Fig. 85 button on the centre console. Manually disable off-road ABS Briefly press the Fig. 85 button on the centre console. Automatically disable off-road ABS The ABS or ESC (only for vehicles with ESC) de-
tects critical driving scenarios. Electronic brake variator (EBV) In all vehicles, upon activating the brakes, the ve-
hicle's centre of gravity shifts forward. This gen-
erates the risk of blocking rear wheels due to low traction. The electronic brake variator distributes brake force to all rear wheels, ensuring an ade-
quate brake force distribution between the front and rear axles. Under normal conditions, the var-
iator prevents damages to the rear section of the vehicle due to brake force applied over rear wheels. The electronic brake variator is part of the ABS functions. Brake assist (BAS) The brake assist system can help reduce the braking distance. The brake assist system enhan-
ces braking power if the driver quickly steps on the brake pedal during emergency braking sce-
narios. As a result, the total brake pressure is quickly reached, the braking power is enhanced, and the braking distance is reduced. This enhan-
ces the speed and efficiency of the ABS system. Do not relieve pressure applied to the brake ped-
al! By releasing the brake pedal or reducing the pressure applied to the pedal, the brake assist system automatically disables braking power en-
hancement. Electronic differential lock (EDS) The EDS brakes skidding wheels and transfers traction force other traction wheels. In order to prevent the braked wheel disc from overheating, the EDS operates simultaneously with ASR and is automatically disabled in case of unusually high demand. As soon as the brake is cooled, the EDS is automatically enabled. WARNING Driving fast on icy, slippery or wet roads can lead to a loss of control of the vehicle and could cause serious injury to the driver and pas-
sengers. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions. Do not let the extra safety afforded by the brake assist system tempt you into tak-
ing any risks when driving. The brake assist system cannot defy the laws of physics. Slippery and wet roads will re-
main extremely dangerous. Driving too fast on wet roads can cause the wheels to lose contact with the road surface and aquaplane. A vehicle cannot be braked, steered or controlled once it has lost contact with the road surface. The brake assist system cannot prevent an accident if, for example, you are driving too close to the vehicle in front or are driving too fast for the individual situation. Although the brake assist systems are very effective and can help to control the vehicle in difficult driving situations, please always remember that the driving stability of the vehicle depends on tyre grip. When accelerating on a slippery surface, for example on ice and snow, press the accelera-
tor carefully. The wheels can spin even with active brake assist system, which may lead to a loss of vehicle control. WARNING The effectiveness of the brake assist systems can be considerably reduced if other compo-
nents and systems that affect driving dynamics are not serviced correctly or are not functioning properly. This also applies, but not exclusively, to the brakes, tyres and other systems that have already been named. Always remember that modifications and changes to the vehicle may affect the brake assist systems. Alterations to the damping system or the use of non-approved wheel and tyre combina-
tions can affect the function of the ABS and EBV and reduce its efficiency. The proper effectiveness of the brake assist systems is also conditioned to the use of suitable tyres page 217, Wheels and tyres. WARNING Driving with worn brake pads or with a faulty brake system can cause severe accidents and injuries. If there is any suspicion that the brake pads might be worn or the brake system might be damaged, immediately seek assistance at a Volkswagen Dealership to check the brake system and replace worn brake pads. WARNING Incorrectly parking the vehicle could cause se-
vere injuries. Never remove the vehicle key from the igni-
tion cylinder while the vehicle is in motion. Never park the vehicle so that parts of the exhaust system can come into contact with inflammable material underneath the vehi-
cle, e.g. leaves, dry grass, spilt fuel, etc. Always apply the handbrake fully when the vehicle is parked. Never leave unattended children or people with special needs in the vehicle. They could release the handbrake, move the selector lever or gearshift lever, and thus set the ve-
hicle in motion. This could lead to accidents and severe injuries. Parking and manoeuvring 103
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Always take the vehicle keys with you when you leave the vehicle. The engine can be started and electrical equipment such as the window controls can be operated, which may lead to severe injuries. Never leave unattended children or people with special needs in the vehicle. They could become trapped in the vehicle in an emer-
gency and may not be able to get themselves to safety. Depending on the season of the year, the interior of closed / locked vehicles, for example, can get extremely hot or cold. This can cause serious injuries and illness or fatalities, especially to small children. NOTICE Only release the brake pedal after pulling the handbrake, in order to prevent sudden vehicle movement after parking. Drive carefully in parking lots with long kerbs or fixed posts. Objects higher than the ground level may damage the bumper and other vehi-
cle parts when parking. On order to avoid any damage, stop the vehicle before the wheels touch the bollards or kerbs. Carefully drive through entrances and slumps in terrains, ramps, kerbs, and other objects. Lowered vehicle parts, such as the bumper, spoiler and chassis, engine or exhaust parts may be damaged in these situations. The ESC and ASR can only operate properly if all 4 wheels share the same tyre type. Dif-
ferent tyre tread diameters could cause unexpec-
ted changes in engine torque. In case of damages in the ABS system, the ESC, TCS, and EDS will also be disabled. Operating noises may be heard during regu-
lating procedures of the described systems. ESC system (Electronic stability control) Fig. 92 On the centre console: manual ASR on/off button. Depending on the vehicle version, the ESC func-
tion may not be available. The electronic stability control system (ESC) only works while the engine is switched on and in-
cludes ABS, EDS, and ASR. The ASR may only be disabled by pressing the Fig. 92 button while the engine is running. On-
ly disable the ASR system under sufficient pro-
pulsion scenarios (among others):
When driving in deep snow or over loose ground. During free tyre spinning while stuck in mud or other areas. When sufficient propulsion is no longer reached. Next, enable the ASR by pressing the button . With the ASR disabled, the set stability and stabi-
lizing brake interventions remain active. Troubleshooting Failure warning and indicator lamps
. Stop driving! Damaged brake system. Go immediately to a Volkswagen dealer-
ship or a specialized company Lit: ABS out of action or malfunctioning. Go to a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. The vehicle can be braked with-
out ABS. Lit: ESC disabled for system-related rea-
sons. Switch the ignition off and on again. As the case may be, drive on for a short 104 Owner's Manual distance at about 15-20 km/h. Case is still be on, seek a Volkswagen dealership or a specialized company. Guidelines for the braking support systems When there is a suspicion that there may be a faulty function, read and observe the following instructions:
The ESC and TSC can only function properly when all four wheels are equipped with the same tyre type and model. Different diameters among the wheels/tyres may cause an unex-
pected reduction in engine power. In case of damages in the ABS system, the ESC, TCS, and EDS will also be disabled. Operating noises may result from adjustments to the described systems. Adverse conditions:
The Electronic Stability Control (ESC) may not identify very steep slopes or gradients (greater than 30%), which could affect the proper func-
tioning of the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) and, consequently, the Hill Start Assist (HHC - Hill Hold Control) and the parking sensor. To restore the aforementioned systems, it is suf-
ficient that the vehicle is turned off and on again and that the driver starts the car and drives it at a speed greater than 25 km/h for a few seconds. WARNING Failure to observe the warning lamps and text messages could lead to your vehicle breaking down in traffic, and to accidents and serious in-
juries. Never ignore any warning lamps or text mes-
sages that appear. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. WARNING Driving with faulty brakes may cause severe ac-
cidents and injuries. If the braking system warning lamp lights up or remains lit while driving, the brake flu-
id level is too low or the braking system is faulty. Stop immediately and seek expert technical assistance page 211, Brake fluid. If the braking system warning lamp lights up along with the ABS control lamp , the ABS regulation function may be faulty. This indicates that the rear wheels may skid rela-
tively fast when breaking. Locked rear wheels may cause the driver to loose control of the vehicle! Whenever possible, reduce speed and drive carefully at minimum speed to the nearest Volkswagen Dealership to check the braking system. Avoid sudden braking and driving manoeuvres while driv-
ing. If the ABS control lamp lights up or re-
mains lit while driving, the ABS is not func-
tioning properly. The vehicle can only be braked with regular brakes (without ABS). The protection provided by the ABS is not available in this scenario. Go to a Volkswagen Dealership as soon as possible. NOTICE Failure to observe the illuminated indicator lamps could lead to vehicle damages. Parking and manoeuvring 105
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Practical equipment Stowage compartment Introduction Only use stowage compartments to stow light or small objects. WARNING Loose objects may be flung through the vehicle interior in the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre. This can cause serious in-
jury and can also lead to loss of control of the vehicle. Do not stow any pets or any hard, heavy or sharp objects in the vehicle's open stowage compartments, on the dash panel, items of clothing or bags in the vehicle interior. Always keep stowage compartments closed while driving. WARNING Items in the driver footwell can hinder pedal operation. This can lead to loss of control of the vehicle and increase the risk of serious injury. Ensure that all pedals can always be operat-
ed without any hindrance. Foot mats must always be properly secured in the footwell. Additional foot mats or other floor coverings should never be placed over the fitted foot mat. Ensure that no objects can enter the driver footwell while the vehicle is in motion. Stowage compartment in the driver side Please refer to chapter on page 106. and at the start of the Fig. 93 On the left-hand side, in the lower section of the console: stowage compartment. A stowage compartment may be available on the driver side to store small objects Fig. 93. WARNING Loose objects may be projected inside the vehi-
cle in the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, as well as during accidents, and may cause severe injuries. Do not stow any hard, heavy or sharp objects loose in the open stowage compartment. Front stowage compartment Please refer to chapter on page 106. and at the start of the NOTICE Do not store any temperature-sensitive ob-
jects, food or medicines inside the vehicle. Hot and cold temperatures could damage them or render them unusable. Items stored in the vehicle made from trans-
parent materials, e.g. glasses, magnifying glasses or transparent suction cups on the windows, can concentrate the sun's rays and thus cause damage to the vehicle. B A B5U-0473 Fig. 94 In the front centre console: stowage com-
partment. 106 Owner's Manual Open stowage compartment in the front centre console Fig. 94 B . Depending on the vehicle version, stowage com-
partment A may contain a factory-fitted USB in-
terface page 112. There may be a 12 V socket in the stowage compartment. page 109 Stowage compartment on the passenger side Please refer to chapter on page 106. and at the start of the There may be an open stowage compartment in the side of the passenger seat Fig. 95. Opening and closing the stowage compartment To open, pull the opening lever Fig. 96. To close, press the cover upwards until it fits into place. The vehicle wallet may be kept in the stowage compartment. WARNING Open stowage compartments may increase the risk of severe injuries in case of accidents or sudden driving or braking manoeuvre. Always keep glove box closed while driving. Rear stowage compartments Please refer to chapter on page 106. and at the start of the Fig. 95 In the side of the passenger seat: stowage compartment. Fig. 96 On the passenger side: stowage compart-
ment. Stowage compartment on the side of the seat Depending on the vehicle version the seat side stowage area may not be available. Fig. 97 On the passenger seat: stowage bag. Practical equipment 107
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. WARNING Closed drink bottles can explode in the vehicle in extreme heat or crack in extremely cold tem-
peratures. Never leave closed drink bottles in an ex-
tremely hot or extremely cold vehicle for ex-
tended periods. NOTICE Do not leave any open drinks in the cup holder while the vehicle is in motion. Drinks that are spilled, for example during braking, can damage the vehicle and the vehicle electric system. Cup holders in the centre console Please refer to chapter on page 108. and at the start of the Fig. 99 In the front centre console: cup holder. Fig. 100 In the rear centre console: cup holder. There are two cup holders in the front centre console Fig. 99 and one cup holder in the rear centre console Fig. 100. Fig. 98 In the rear centre console: stowage com-
partment. Stowage compartment. Depending on the vehicle version, the storage bag on the passenger seat may not be available. On the rear part of the passenger's seat there's a storage bag Fig. 97. Stowage compartment in the rear centre console There may be a stowage compartment in the rear centre console Fig. 98. Cup holder Introduction WARNING Incorrect use of the cup holders can cause in-
jury. Do not place any hot drinks in a cup holder. In the event of a sudden braking manoeuvre or accident, hot drinks in a cup holder can be spilled and cause scalding. Ensure that drink bottles or any other objects do not enter the driver footwell and obstruct the pedals while the vehicle is in motion. Never place heavy cups, food or any other heavy items in the cup holder. These heavy objects could be flung through the vehicle interior during an accident and cause serious injuries. 108 Owner's Manual Drink holder on the side of the rear seat - New Saveiro with Extended Cab Please refer to chapter on page 108. and at the start of the Open the tailgate to use the bottle holder Fig. 102 1 and drink holders 2 . There are two bottle holders 1 and two cup holders 2 in the tailgate lining; one of each in each side of the tailgate lining. Socket Introduction Electrical equipment can be connected to the socket in the vehicle. Electrical equipment connected must be in per-
fect conditions and must not have any defects. WARNING Improper use of the socket and electrical ac-
cessories can cause fires and other severe inju-
ries. Never leave children in the vehicle unatten-
ded. The socket and the devices connected to it can be used when the ignition is switch-
ed on. If the electrical device gets too hot, switch off the device immediately and disconnect it from the socket. NOTICE In order to prevent damage to the electrical sys-
tem, never connect equipment which generates electricity, such as solar panels or battery charg-
ing units for charging the vehicle battery, to the 12-volt socket. Do not leave the engine running when the vehicle is stationary. Using electrical appliances with the engine switched off and the ignition switched on will drain the battery. Unshielded devices can cause interference with radio reception and vehicle electronics. Interference of AM radio reception could occur if electric devices are used in the vi-
cinity of the rear window aerial. Practical equipment 109 Fig. 101 On the side of the rear seat: cup holder. In vehicles with extended cab, there is a drink holder on the sides of the rear seat Fig. 101. Cup holders and bottle holders in the tailgate lining Please refer to chapter on page 108. and at the start of the Fig. 102 In the tailgate lining: 1 bottle holder and 2 drink holders. The bottle holder and cup holders may only be used while the tailgate is opened and the vehicle is stationary. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. In the front centre console Fig. 103. In the stowage compartment on the right hand side of the internal luggage compartment Fig. 104 (may not be available depending on the vehicle version). On the internal luggage compartment (not available in some vehicle versions). NOTICE Refer to the owner's manuals of connected devices!
Never exceed the maximum power rating as this could damage the entire vehicle electrical system. 12 V socket:
Only use accessories that have been ap-
proved in accordance with current guide-
lines concerning electromagnetic compati-
bility. Never feed electricity into the socket. Vehicle sockets - New Saveiro with extended cab Please refer to chapter on page 109. and at the start of the Fig. 105 In the front centre console: 12 V socket. Vehicle sockets Please refer to chapter on page 109. and at the start of the Fig. 103 In the front centre console: 12 V socket. Fig. 104 In the side panel of the internal luggage compartment:12 V socket. Maximum power rating 12 V socket 120 W The maximum power rating of the sockets may not be exceeded. The maximum power rating of each device is stated on its type plate. 12 V socket The 12-volt socket only works while the ignition is switched on. Using electrical appliances with the engine switched off and the ignition switched on will drain the battery. Therefore only plug electrical consumers into the sockets when the engine is running. To prevent damage due to voltage fluctuation, switch off any connected devices before switch-
ing the ignition or engine on or off. The following 12-volt sockets are available in the vehicle:
110 Owner's Manual Only use accessories that have been ap-
proved in accordance with current guide-
lines concerning electromagnetic compati-
bility. Never feed electricity into the socket. Luggage compartment socket Please refer to chapter on page 109. and at the start of the Fig. 107 Luggage compartment: 12-volt socket. Depending on the vehicle version, the luggage compartment 12-volt socket may not be availa-
ble. Maximum power rating 12 V socket 120 W The maximum power rating of the sockets may not be exceeded. The maximum power rating of each device is stated on its type plate. 12 V socket The 12-volt socket only works while the ignition is switched on. Using electrical appliances with the engine switched off and the ignition switched on will drain the battery. Therefore only plug electrical consumers into the sockets when the engine is running. To prevent damage due to voltage fluctuation, switch off any connected devices before switch-
ing the ignition or engine on or off. The 12-volt socket is located on the internal luggage compartment Fig. 107 (not availa-
ble in some vehicle versions). Practical equipment 111 Fig. 106 On the side of the rear seat: 12-volt socket
- New Saveiro with extended cab. Maximum power rating 12 V socket 120 W The maximum power rating of the sockets may not be exceeded. The maximum power rating of each device is stated on its type plate. 12 V socket The 12-volt socket only works while the ignition is switched on. Using electrical appliances with the engine switched off and the ignition switched on will drain the battery. Therefore only plug electrical consumers into the sockets when the engine is running. To prevent damage due to voltage fluctuation, switch off any connected devices before switch-
ing the ignition or engine on or off. The following 12-volt sockets are available in the vehicle:
In the front centre console Fig. 105. On the stowage compartment on the right-
hand side of the rear seat Fig. 106. On the internal luggage compartment (not available in some vehicle versions). NOTICE Refer to the owner's manuals of connected devices!
Never exceed the maximum power rating as this could damage the entire vehicle electrical system. 12 V socket:
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. NOTICE Refer to the owner's manuals of connected devices!
Never exceed the maximum power rating as this could damage the entire vehicle electrical system. 12 V socket:
Only use accessories that have been ap-
proved in accordance with current guide-
lines concerning electromagnetic compati-
bility. Never feed electricity into the socket. Radio Before using the unit for the first time Depending on the vehicle version, the radio may not be available. Before using the unit for the first time, follow the steps below in order to safely operate the unit and make full use of its functionalities:
Follow the basic safety notes page 113. Get familiar with the operation of the radio. In system and function settings, reset the ra-
dio to its factory settings. Only use appropriate data storage units for media operation. Overview of the convenience consumers The radio may be factory equipped with the fol-
lowing components1), in part as optional equip-
ment:
1) the type and quantity of the cited compo-
nents are country and device specific and may vary in a model series and, in addition, be dif-
ferent in a special model. Loudspeakers, installed in different fitting lo-
cations and output levels (Watt). Multifunction steering wheel with its controls Media units. Cable connections to the external multimedia units. Wireless connection for external multimedia devices. Mobile phone interface. Sound system, in part, subwoofer. Aerial and radio feed A radio feed aerial is installed on the roof of vehi-
cles with factory-fitted radio units. 112 Owner's Manual Interference of AM radio reception could occur if electric devices are used in the vi-
cinity of the roof aerial (e.g. mobile phones). Special precaution areas Switch off mobile phones in areas with risk of ex-
plosions. Such areas are very common, although
. Some of these not often identified as such areas are:
Areas with pipes and tanks containing chemi-
cals. Lower decks in ships and ferries. Areas nearby vehicles powered by liquid gas
(e.g. propane or butane). Areas with chemicals or other particles such as flours, dust, or metallic dust in the atmos-
phere. Any other area where the vehicle engine must be switched off. WARNING Switch off mobile phones in areas with risk of explosion. NOTICE Mobile phones must always be turned off in loca-
tions in which their use is prohibited. The radia-
tion generated by mobile phones may cause in-
terference with delicate medical and technical equipment, which may hinder or damage such devices. the accuracy, actualization or integrity for third-party information and does not infringe third party rights. The radio stations or the owners of data sour-
ces are responsible for the broadcast content. Covered parking places, tunnels, tall buildings, mountains or additionally operated electric equipment, such as battery chargers, may also interfere with the radio reception. Metal-coated stickers or films may hinder re-
ception in vehicles with window aerials. WARNING Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. Using radio systems or mobile phones while driving could potentially distract the driver. Always drive carefully and responsibly. Only connect, insert, or remove data storage units while the vehicle is safely parked away from traffic. Adjust unit volume in order for the driver to hear external warnings and sounds (e.g. emergency service sirens) Legal provisions must be followed. Excessively high volumes may damage hear-
ing, particularly above 85 decibels, even when exposed to such high volumes for a short period of time. WARNING Sudden volume variations may occur when switching or connecting an audio source. Reduce the master volume before connect-
ing or switching audio sources. Safety recommendations WARNING Prior to first use of the device, read and follow the safety instructions listed below to detect and prevent possible hazards to yourself and others:
Carefully read the following instructions. Some function buttons may contain links to third-party web pages. Volkswagen does not take ownership of third-party web pages ac-
cessible through links and is not responsible for their content. Some function buttons may contain third-par-
ty information, originated by other suppliers. Volkswagen does not take responsibility for Driving recommendations and traffic symbols displayed by the navigation system may differ from the actual traffic situation. Traffic signs and instructions must be priori-
tized over driving recommendations and in-
structions provided by the navigation sys-
tem. Always adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic con-
ditions. Radio 113
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. WARNING WARNING External device connection cables could hinder the driver's movement. Arrange connection cables so that they do not obstruct the driver. Opening a CD player's tray may lead to injuries caused by invisible laser radiation. Only repair CD player units at Volkswagen Dealerships or qualified workshops. WARNING NOTICE Loose or unsecured external devices may be flung through the vehicle interior and cause in-
juries in case of sudden evasive or breaking ma-
noeuvres or in the event of accidents. Never place or attach external devices on doors, windscreen, on or near areas marked with AIRBAG on the steering wheel, dash-
board, seat backrests, or between these areas and vehicle occupant himself. External devices may cause severe injuries in the event of accidents, especially if the airbags are triggered. WARNING In explosion prone places, turn mobile tele-
phones off!
WARNING Unfavourable light conditions and a damaged or dirty display may cause information and indi-
cations not able to be read or be correctly read on the display. Indications or information on the display must never be a reason to run a safety risk. The display is not in condition to replace the drivers attention. WARNING Radio stations may broadcast danger and cat-
astrophe warnings. The following conditions prevent radio stations from being received:
If your current location is in a region of poor or no reception. Such region includes tun-
nels, urban canyons, parking garages, under-
ground passageways, mountains, and valleys. If, in areas with the bandwidths of the radio stations present interferences or are unavail-
able. When the necessary vehicle components re-
quired for radio signal reception are dam-
aged, inoperative or without sufficient elec-
tric power. 114 Owner's Manual Mobile phones must always be turned off in loca-
tions in which their use is prohibited. The radia-
tion generated by mobile phones may cause in-
terference with sensitive medical devices and technical equipment, which may hinder or dam-
age such devices. NOTICE The vehicle's loudspeakers may be damaged if the volume is too high or the sound is distorted. NOTICE Introduction of objects, incorrect placing and in-
troduction of data storage units of different shapes and sizes may damage the media readers and the radio. Ensure correct insertion position when insert-
ing a data storage unit . Insert only adequate data storage units into the respective media reading units. Excessive pressure could break the SD card slot lock. NOTICE Foreign matter and liquids adhering to a data storage device may damage the media reading unit and the radio. Do not attach stickers or similar materials to data storage units. Stickers may peel off and damage the media reading unit. Do not use data storage units with printable data. Residues and stickers may peel off and damage the media reading unit. Use only dry, clean, adequate and non-dam-
aged SD cards. NOTICE Incorrect insertion of data carriers or of incom-
patible data carriers will possibly damage the ra-
dio. Follow the correct insertion position. Excessive pressure could break the SD card slot lock. Only use suitable SD cards. Insert or remove CDs always at a straight angle to the front panel of the unit without damag-
ing their surface doing so. Trying to insert another CD while a CD is still inside the unit or being ejected may damage the CD driver of the unit. Always wait until the CD/DVD has been fully ejected!
NOTICE The CD unit may be damaged by foreign objects attached to data media, as well as oval-shaped data media. Only clean 12 cm standard CDs may be used. Do not attach stickers or similar materials to data storage units. Stickers may peel off and damage the unit. Do not use data storage units with printable data. Residues and adhesives may peel off and damage the CD driver. Do not insert single 8 cm or Shape CDs into the unit. Do not insert DVD-Plus, Dual Disc or Flip Disc CDs, since these are thicker than regu-
lar CDs. Instructions for use The radio is supplied in different versions of the device which are distinguished from each other by its group of functionalities, inscrip-
tions and button functions as well as by the lay out of the controls. When using the radio, follow the specific na-
tional recommendations and legal determina-
tions. To operate the radio a light touch on the but-
ton or screen suffices. To make the best of the radio's features and optimal operation it is important that the date and time be correctly set. Some of the function buttons and modes de-
tailed herein may not be available due to vary-
ing market-specific unit software available. The absence of a button or function button is not a defect of the radio. Depending on the country, some functions of the radio are no longer selectable on the dis-
play as of a certain speed threshold. This is not a functional fault, but rather a legal obligation. In certain countries there may be restrictions regarding the use of Bluetooth1) devices. Ad-
ditional information may be obtained from lo-
cal authorities. The display of all indications and the execution of the functions are only available after the complete start up of the radio. The start up time of the system depends on the scope of the radio function and can last more than usu-
al especially at low and high temperatures. Upon changing the settings, displays may vary and the unit may behave in a partially different way from the described in this manual. The radio is connected to the vehicle. The sys-
tem cannot be operated through a different vehicle. High speeds, poor weather and road condi-
tions, as well as a high noise level (also outside the vehicle) and the the network quality may impair a phone call in the vehicle. In some vehicles equipped with Park Pilot, the current audio source volume is automatically reduced when the reverse gear is selected. Volume reduction can be adjusted in the vehi-
cle page 97. Information on the radio's software and li-
cense conditions are stored in the radio:
MENU Config. Copyright . Power management When, with the ignition turned off and the device on, the battery power falls below the minimum voltage of the electrical network, an acoustic sig-
nal sounds and the message LOW BATTERY is dis-
played. In this case, the unit must be switched off. 1) Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Radio 115
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Anti-theft coding The unit is protected against theft and unauthor-
ized use by a security code (anti-theft coding) . After its first being entered, the anti theft code is saved to the memory of the vehicle (convenience coding of the radio) If the anti-theft coding has to be manually deactivated, e.g. when installing the unit in another vehicle, please contact a Volkswagen Dealership. If the vehicle battery has been disconnected, switch the ignition on before switching the unit on. Device overview Composition Touch (R 340G) Fig. 108 Control overview. Depending on the vehicle version, the radio may not be available. The unit is provided in different variations, distin-
guished by the unit's button functions and letter-
ing. 1 2 Rotary/push knob Microphone: do not obstruct the microphone and keep it always clean. Function buttons:press to access a function pad. 3 4 5 6 7 8 Display: touchscreen. Settings button: the function is conditioned to the respective operating condition. USB port: to connect external data storage units. AUX-IN multimedia port: to connect external audio sources. OR SD memory card slot: to insert SD cards. SD memory card slot: to insert SD cards. 116 Owner's Manual Media Plus (RCD 320G 2DIN) Fig. 109 Control overview. Depending on the vehicle version, the radio may not be available. The unit is provided in different variations, distin-
guished by the unit's button functions and letter-
ing. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Rotary/push knob:
Function buttons: the function is condi-
tioned to the respective operating condition. Press to execute the respective function. CD Slot: insert and eject CDs. Display: adjustable brightness. EJECT Press to eject the CD. Setting knob: the function is conditioned to the respective operating condition. In all radio models, turn to manually set stations or channels. In media mode, turn to manually change tracks. Display Clean the display To clean, turn the radio off. 7 8 9 10 USB port: to connect external audio sources. AUX-IN multimedia port: to connect external audio sources. SD memory card slot: to insert SD cards. Carefully insert the SD card into the slot, with the printed side facing up. Radio buttons: press to access an operation area. The lettering and function are condi-
tioned to the unit variation. To clean the display, use a clean soft cloth, slightly damp with clean water or a cleaning cloth available at Volkswagen Dealerships Soften resistant dirt with a humidified cloth, tak-
ing care not to damage the radio. Radio 117
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. NOTICE Do not dry clean the display. Doing so may cause scratches that cannot be removed. Do not use aggressive or solvent-based clean-
ing products. Such cleaning products may damage the radio and leave the display mis-
ty. Exert only a light pressure when cleaning the display. Turn the volume control (right or clockwise to turn up and left or counter clockwise to turn down) Some volume adjustments can be preset. Mute When in mute mode, the active audio source is interrupted or muted The indication can be seen on the display screen . Turn the volume control button counter clockwise until audio can no longer be heard. Approach sensors Depending on the radio version, the device is equipped with a built-in proximity sensor. The screen display switches automatically from display to operation mode when approached by the hand. In operation mode, the function but-
tons are automatically highlighted for ease of operation. Depending on the vehicle, the proximity sensors may be activated or deactivated via the Screen set-
tings menu. Rotary and push knob Rotary/push knobs The rotary/push knob is referred to as volume control or on/off button. The right-hand rotary/push knob is referred to as selector. Turning the radio manually on or off Press the on / off button briefly . Turn the radio on or off automatically According to its version, the unit is automatically turned off when the engine is turned off or the ignition key is removed from the ignition lock. If the radio is manually switched on again, it will be automatically switched off after approximately 30 minutes (timeout). Volume increase ore decrease Once on, the radio starts to operate at the last adjusted volume level, as long as the maximum pre defined turn on volume is not surpassed. Selector button The selector button can be turned or pushed. When turned, lists are searched or radio station lists or of media titles are opened. When pressed marked records are accessed, configurations are set and functions started or interrupted. Radio buttons Depending on the type and version of the vehicle, the function buttons may not be available. To operate the radio buttons, press them briefly. APP : access the interface with App-Connect. EJECT : eject CD. FM/AM : switch to radio mode and switch be-
tween frequency bands. MEDIA : change to media mode and from there select the media source. MENU : press to show additional functions related to the current mode (radio, media, etc.). MUTE : mute the audio source. PHONE : access the telephone interface. If there is no telephone interface installed, the current au-
dio source is muted. RADIO : turn on in radio mode and then change the frequency range. SETUP : press to show additional functions related to the current mode (radio, media, etc.). SOUND : access to the Sound settings menu. VOICE : activates the voice command mode.
: eject CD. 118 Owner's Manual Basic operating information Operating the function buttons on the display screen Fig. 110 Schematic representation: overview of possible function buttons on the display. The device is equipped with a touchscreen Fig. 110 3 . Active display areas with recorded functions are referred to as function buttons and operated by brief touches or extended touches on the dis-
play. Function buttons are described herein by the word function button and the button sym-
bol . Function buttons start specific functions or open other submenus. The currently selected menu is indicated on the title line of submenus Fig. 110 1 . Inactive function buttons (grey) cannot be cur-
rently selected. Extending or shortening the display exhibition time Photos can be zoomed in or out in image view-
ing. To do so stretch or compress the respective picture or image with the thumb and forefinger on the display surface. Overview of possible function buttons and displays 1 The title line indicates the currently selec-
ted menu and, eventually, other function buttons. Touch to open a different menu. Moving target: move the target over the display without removing the finger, slightly pressing or touching the desired 2 3
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. position in the display to move the target to the respective position. Fixed target:
move the indicated area below the target over the display without removing the fin-
ger, slightly pressing or touching the de-
sired position in the display to centralize into the target. The scroll bar is displayed when on a dis-
played list more than a single shown re-
cord may be selected page 119, Access and search lists. Touch to gradually close some lists one level above. Touch to gradually close submenus until returning to the main menu or to undo the previous entries. Touch to open a pop-up window contain-
ing additional settings. 4
OK
Some functions or displays are selected through a checkbox and activated or de-
activated by a touch. Touch to confirm an entry or selection. Touch to close a pop-up window or an en-
try template. Touch to gradually change the settings. Gently move the scroll bar pointer along the bar with a finger move applying a light uninterrupted pressure on the display sur-
face. Access and search lists Fig. 111 Schematic representation: list entries in the settings menu. List entries can be accessed by directly touching the screen or with the selector button Fig. 111 4 . Radio 119 If the available entries on a list do not fit the dis-
play, function buttons or a scrollbar are shown on the right-hand side to scroll through entries Fig. 111 1 . Selecting and accessing list entries with the control button Turn the control button to sequentially select list entries through a checkbox and search the list. Press the control button to access the selected list entry. Search lists (scroll) Search by list line: Briefly touch the function but-
ton or . Search by list page: Briefly touch the top or bot-
tom of the scroll bar. Quick search by list page: Touch and hold the top or bottom of the scroll bar. Quick search in long lists: Place finger over the scroll bar indicator and move it up or down in a single move. Remove the finger from the screen after reaching the desired position. The entry line with symbol entry mask (cursor) is located on the upper left display line. All entries are displayed in this area. Entry masks to enter text Letters, characters and special symbols can be selected in any combination to enter free texts in entry masks. The currently displayed sequence of symbols is applied by touching the function button OK . Entry masks to select stored entries Only combinations of letters, characters and spe-
cial symbols corresponding to a stored entry can be selected for the introduction mask. With each icon entry an objective is suggested on the entry line corresponding to the prescriptions. With composite terms, a space must be inserted. If less than 99 entries can be selected, the num-
ber of remaining entries is shown through the entry line Fig. 112 3 . Touching this function button will display all remaining entries in a list. If less than 6 entries can be selected, the list is automatically opened. Entry templates with the display's virtual keyboard Overview of function buttons 1 123 : touch to open the entry mask for special symbols and numbers. OR: ABC :
touch to switch to the letter entry mask. Touch to switch to a different keypad lan-
guage. The keypad language can be selec-
ted through the System settings menu. Shows the quantity and opens the list of entries corresponding to selectable pre-
sets. 2 3 Letters and numbers Touch to apply the entry line. Letters and Press and hold to open a pop-up window with special symbols based on the letters. Select the desired characters via touch. Some special signs can also be tran-
scribed (e.g. AE to ). Touch to switch between upper case and lower case, as well as numbers and special characters. Touch to insert a blank space. Touch to apply the introduction line sug-
gestion and close the entry mask. Touch to delete symbols on the entry line, from right to left. Press and hold to delete multiple symbols. Touch to close the entry mask. Fig. 112 Representation: entry mask with display keypad. Entry templates with display keypads are used to enter storage names, the selection of an address or entry of a search query to look up in longer lists among other. The function buttons listed herein are not availa-
ble in all countries or topic areas. The following chapters detail only the functions not covered in this representation. OK 120 Owner's Manual Additional displays and display options Display indications may vary from those descri-
bed herein, depending on the settings. The time can be shown on the display status line. All displays can only be shown after a complete start-up process of the radio. Connectivity App-Connect Introduction Depending on the type and version of the radio, the App-Connect functions may not be available. The following interfaces are available in the App-
Connect menu:
Apple CarPlay1) Android Auto2) To prevent the driver from distraction only spe-
cial applications may be used while driving According to the mobile device used, a connec-
tion is established through the respective inter-
face. Thereby it is possible that the functions and the contents displayed on the mobile devices are dis-
played and controlled on the radio display. WARNING The use of applications while driving may dis-
tract from the surrounding traffic. Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. Always drive carefully and responsibly. WARNING Loose or unsecured mobile phones may be flung through the interior and cause injuries in case of sudden evasive or breaking manoeuvres or in the event of accidents. While the vehicle is in motion, always secure mobile devices properly outside the airbag deployment zones or stow them away safely. WARNING Inadequately or inappropriately designed appli-
cations may cause damages to the vehicle, ac-
cidents and serious injuries. Volkswagen recommends to use only appli-
cations offered by Volkswagen for the spe-
cific vehicle. 1) Apple CarPlay is an Apple Inc. trademark. 2) Android Auto is a Google Inc. trademark Connectivity 121
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Protect the mobile device with its applica-
tions from misuse. Never alter the applications. Follow the owner's manual of the mobile de-
vice. NOTICE Mobile devices must always be turned off in loca-
tions where their use is not allowed. The radia-
tion generated by mobile devices may cause in-
terference with delicate medical and technical equipment, which may impair or damage such devices. NOTICE Volkswagen does not take responsibility for dam-
ages caused to the vehicle due to the use of low quality or defective applications, insufficient pro-
gramming of the applications, insufficient net-
work, for loss of data during transmission or mis-
use of mobile devices. Open the App-Connect settings menu In the App-Connect main menu, touch the Config. function button. . Enable data transmission for VW Apps Data trans-
mission for Volkswagen applications is en-
abled. Display alignment 180-degree rotation Select the display alignment Touch to rotate the screen display by 180 degrees. Prefer Infotainment system keypad Depending on the vehicle version, key entries will effec-
ted over the display keypad display and not over the mobile device keys. For more information, refer to the mobile device's owner's manual. Apple CarPlay For more information, refer to the mobile device's owner's manual. Apple CarPlay Menu App-Connect main menu Please refer to chapter on page 121. and at the start of the Fig. 114 Selection of the mobile device. Fig. 113 App-Connect main menu. 1 2 Info : display of further information. Config. : App-Connect Settings (may not be available, depending on the radio version and model). 122 Owner's Manual Fig. 115 Apple CarPlay Menu. The Apple CarPlay Menu screen may vary de-
pending on the mobile phone version and current release. Apple CarPlay Requirements The following conditions are required to use Apple CarPlay:
The mobile device must support Apple CarPlay. The mobile device must be connected by a USB cable to the radio. The USB cable to be used must be an original cable from the mobile phone manufacturer. Establish connection When a mobile device is connected for the first time follow the instructions on the radio display and on the display of the mobile device. All requirements to use Apple CarPlay must be met. Press the APP button. OR press MENU and touch the surface function App-Connect. Select your connected mobile device pressing on the corresponding icon. Disconnect While using Apple CarPlay, touch the surface function Fig. 115 1 to access App-Connect in the main menu. Touch the function button Fig. 114 1 to end the active connection. Particularities During an active Apple CarPlay connection, the following features are enabled:
Bluetooth connection among mobile devices and the radio are not possible. An active Bluetooth connection is automatical-
ly finalized. Telephone functions are only possible via Apple CarPlay. The radio functions described in this manual are not available. The connected device cannot be used as a me-
dia device on the Media menu. On the instrument cluster's display no call lists are displayed for detour routes and media op-
eration. Voice command Depending on the type and version of the vehicle, the voice command feature may not be availa-
ble. On the multifunction steering wheel or on the mobile phone, press VOICE or briefly to start the device's voice command feature. On the multifunction steering wheel or on the mobile phone, press VOICE or for a few seconds to start the connected device's voice command feature. For more information, refer to the mobile device's owner's manual. Android Auto Android Auto Menu Fig. 116 Selection of the mobile device. Fig. 117 Android Auto Menu Connectivity 123
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. An active Android Auto device cannot be used as a media device on the Media menu. On the instrument cluster's display no call lists are displayed for detour routes and media op-
eration. Voice commands Depending on the type and version of the vehicle, the voice command feature may not be availa-
ble. On the multifunction steering wheel or on the mobile phone, press VOICE or briefly to start the radio's voice command feature. On the multifunction steering wheel or on the mobile phone, press VOICE or for a few seconds to start the connected device's voice command feature. For more information, refer to the mobile device's owner's manual. Android Auto Requirements The following conditions must be met to use Android Auto:
The mobile device must support Android Auto. The mobile device must be connected by a USB cable to the radio. The USB cable to be used must be an original cable from the mobile phone manufacturer. Depending on the mobile device used, an ad-
equate application must be installed to use Android Auto on the device. Connect When a mobile device is connected for the first time follow the instructions on the radio display and on the display of the mobile device. All requirements to use Android Auto must be met. Press the APP button. OR press MENU and touch the surface function App-Connect. Select your connected mobile device pressing on the corresponding icon. Disconnect While using Android Auto, touch the function button , Fig. 117 1 . Select the Return to Volkswagen function to ac-
cess the App-Connect main menu. Touch the function button to end the active connection. Particularities During an active Android Auto connection, the following features are enabled:
An active Android Auto device may be simul-
taneously connected to the radio via Blue-
tooth. Bluetooth connection between other mobile devices and the radio are not possible. Telephone functions are possible via Android Auto. When the Android Auto device is si-
multaneously connected via Bluetooth to the radio, the phone function can also be used. Simultaneous phone calls via Android Auto and via the radio are not possible. 124 Owner's Manual Composition Touch (R 340G) Radio Introduction Depending on the vehicle version, the radio may not be available. Follow the national rules and legal provisions when using the radio. Other additional electric devices connected to the vehicle may interfere with the receipt of the broadcast radio signal and cause noises in the speakers. Parking lots, tunnels, tall buildings or mountains may interfere with unit signal reception. Metal-coated stickers or films may hinder reception in vehicles with windscreen aer-
ials. Radio main menu Fig. 118 The radio main menu. Fig. 119 Radio operation: station list. With the radio turned on, press the RADIO but-
ton. Radio mode turns on. The following options are available:
return to the memorized radio station. Seek next station. Memorize the tuned broadcasting stations. The currently tuned in radio station is displayed in the centre of the display. For stations with RDS the station's name can be displayed instead of its frequency, such as RADIO 21, in case of good re-
ception. Function buttons on the radio's main menu Function button: effect A FM/AM Select the desired frequency range. Radio frequency range indication.
1 to 15 SCAN Opens the list of radio stations currently available page 126. Opens the adjusted frequency scale
(frequency range). Opens the current frequency range set-
tings menu page 128, Radio Settings. Change between stored or available stations. Arrow button settings in menu page 128, Radio Settings. Station buttons to store stations page 126. Updating the frequency range's stations list. Function button that only becomes visi-
ble with the SCAN function is selected page 128. Press the control button to start the SCAN function. Composition Touch (R 340G) 125
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Function button: effect Cancel Cancelling a function. Disable Deactivation of a function. Radio Data System RDS RDS (Radio Data System) is a radio data system via the additional FM services whereby it is possi-
ble to display the station's names and radio texts. RDS is not supported by all devices and may not be available everywhere and for all FM radio sta-
tions. Without RDS basically no additional services are possible. Radio text (RDS) Some RDS enabled stations also broadcast addi-
tional text information known as radio text. Radio text is displayed on the upper half of the screen above the station buttons Fig. 118 A . Station button functions Fig. 120 Access stations through sta-
tion buttons Change the station button group Store stations in station but-
tons Touch the station button corre-
sponding to the desired sta-
tion. Stored stations can only be touched after accessing through station buttons and when available in the current location. Swipe the display in the station button area Fig. 120, from right to left or from left to right. The station buttons are dis-
played in groups of 5 function button pads ( 1 to 5 , 6 to 10 , and 11 to 15 ). See: storing stations page 127. The radio stations are responsible for the broadcast information content. Specific radio indications, menus and symbols Station buttons Fig. 121 The radio main menu. Fig. 120 The radio main menu. In the main menu: RADIO, the currently selected frequency band stations can be stored in 15 numbered frequency tracks. These function but-
tons are referred to as Station buttons. 126 Owner's Manual Manually set the station frequency OR: press and hold one of the arrow buttons Fig. 121 on the top of the display. After re-
leasing, the next radio station available will be automatically selected. OR: press and hold the fre-
quency range and slide to move it. Briefly press the settings knob. When a station is selected through the station button, the manual frequency selection is also closed. If no action is made, the frequency range au-
tomatically closes after a while. Press and hold the desired sta-
tion button Fig. 121 until an audible warning is heard. The currently played station will be stored in this station button. Touch the function button Fig. 121 or turn the settings knob to open the list of sta-
tions. Stations already stored to sta-
tion buttons are identified in the station list by the sym-
bol. Press and hold the display to select the desired station. Touch the desired station but-
ton in which the station must be stored. An audible warning is heard and the station is stored in the station button. Repeat this pro-
cedure to store other stations from the station list. All stations stored in the Radio Settings menu can be deleted in-
dividually or all at once page 128. Hide the fre-
quency range Store stations Store the cur-
rent station in-
to a station button Storing sta-
tions from the station list in station buttons Delete stored stations Composition Touch (R 340G) 127 Fig. 122 Radio operation: updatable radio station list (AM). Select the sta-
tion using the arrow buttons
Function button pads and their respective meaning on the radio Fig. 121 and Fig. 122:
Touch the function button < or
> Fig. 121. Depending on the arrow button settings, the function switches between stored and available stations. Arrow button settings in the Radio settings page 128 menu. Touch the function button Fig. 121 to open the list of stations. Search list and touch to select the desired station. Touch the function button Fig. 122 to close the list of stations. If no action is made, the radio station list automati-
cally closes after a while. The radio station list can be manually updated with the Fig. 122 function button. Select a station from the radio station list. Update the ra-
dio station list Touch the function button Fig. 121. Manually set the station frequency Introduce the frequency range Step-by-step instructions to change the fre-
quency Turn the settings knob. OR: touch the right or left fre-
quency range arrow buttons. Quick scan through the frequency range Touch one of the arrow buttons in the upper part of the display area Fig. 121. The next avail-
able station is automatically selected. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. SCAN Function button: effect Search station: the arrow buttons are used to change all tuneable stations in the selected frequency range. Delete memory: deletes all or some stations stor-
ed. All: all stored stations are deleted. Fig. 123 Radio mode: ongoing SCAN. Introduction Media By selecting the SCAN function, all stations avail-
able in the current frequency range are played for approximately 5 seconds. SCAN will be dis-
played on the screen. Starting and stopping the scan function Starting the scan function Briefly press the settings knob. OR: touch the surface function and select SCAN . Touch the SCAN function but-
ton to stop the scanning. The automatic scan function is also interrupted whenever a station is manually selected by the station buttons. Radio Settings Select the desired frequency range. Touch on RADIO , to toggle frequency ranges. Touch to open the desired settings. Function button: effect Scan: automatic SCAN. By selecting the SCAN function, all stations available in the current fre-
quency range are played for approximately 5 seconds page 128. Sound: sound settings. Arrow buttons: select settings for the arrow but-
tons < and > . Settings are applied to all fre-
quency ranges (FM). Memory: the arrow buttons are used to change all stations stored in the selected frequency range. 128 Owner's Manual Media sources are referred to as audio sources that contain audio data in different data storage units, such as external MP3 Players or audio files. These audio files may only be played by the re-
spective units or audio inputs of the radio system
(USB port, Bluetooth interface, SD card or AUX-
IN multimedia port). Copyrights Audio and video files stored in data media are generally subject to copyright laws, as per appli-
cable national and international standards. All applicable legal provisions must be followed. This product is protected by copyrights of Microsoft Corporation. This technology may not be reproduced or marketed without prior au-
thorization from Microsoft or one of its author-
ized affiliates. Volkswagen takes no responsibility for damaged or lost files. Limitations and recommendations regarding data carriers Dirt, high temperatures and mechanical damage may render a data carrier useless. Pay attention to the data carrier manufacturers instructions. The difference in data carrier quality from differ-
ent manufacturers may cause playback interfer-
ences. The configuration of a data carrier or the devices and programs used to record the data may result in some titles or data carriers being unreadable. Information on the best ways to create audio files and data carriers (rate of compression, ID3-
tag etc.) can be found, for example, on the Inter-
net. Due to the size, use (number of copies and dele-
tions), of the structure of the folders and file type of the used data carrier the reading time may vary substantially. A playlist only defines a certain playback se-
quence. Files are not memorized on the playlists. The playlists are not played back when the files on the data carrier are not saved where the play-
list is looking for them (path related data). Data base and file prerequisites Only 32 mm x 24 mm x 2,1 mm
(1,26 x 0,94 x 0,083 inch) or 1,4 mm (0,055 inch) SD cards can be used on the radio. Media source SD and MMC cards of up to a max. of 2 GB
(Gigabytes) with FAT16, FAT32 and ex-
FAT file systems. SDHC cards of up to a max. of 64 GB with FAT16, FAT32 and ex-
FAT file systems. SDHC cards of up to a max. of 256 GB with FAT16, FAT32 and ex-
FAT file systems. USB data storage unit according to USB 1.X, 2.0, 3.0 specification and FAT16, FAT32 and exFAT file systems. iPods, iPads and iPhones of different generationsa) ( Only with Apple Dock or Lightning connector). External audio source playback via the USB port. Playing requirements MP3 files (.mp3) with 32 to 320 kbit/s or vari-
able bit rates. WMA files (.wma) up to 9.2 mono/stereo without copy protec-
tion. M3U, PLS, ASX and WPL format playlists. Playlists with no more than 20 kB and 1000 records. File names and paths of up to a max. of 256 characters. External data media in the USB . Media source Audio file reproduc-
tion via Bluetooth. External audio source playback through the AUX-IN port. Playing requirements External Media Player must support Blue-
tooth A2DP profile. 3.5 mm jack plug for audio output. a) iPod, iPad and iPhone are trademarks of Apple Inc. Do not use any SD card adapter. No liability will be accepted for damaged or lost files in data storage units. Audio data storage unit playback sequence Fig. 124 Possible structure of a data storage unit. In data storage units, audio files are often or-
ganized into data folders and playlists in or-
der to define a certain playback sequence. Tracks, folders, and playlists are classified nu-
merically and alphabetically according to the name of the data storage unit. The figure Fig. 124 shows a typical data stor-
age unit containing tracks, folders and sub-
folders. Composition Touch (R 340G) 129
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Thus, the tracks and folders of this data storage unit are played and displayed in the following or-
der1):
1. Tracks 1 and 2 in the Root directory of the CD Tracks 3 and 4 in the first folder F1 of the root directory (display: 01). Track 5 in the first subfolder F1.1 of fold-
er F1 (display: 02). Track 6 in the first subfolder F1.1.1 of subfolder F1.1 (display: 03). Track 7 in the second subfolder F1.2 of folder F1 (display: 04). Tracks 8 and 9 in the second folder F2
(display: 05). 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. The playback sequence can be modified by selecting different playback modes page 130. Playlists are not played automatically, but must rather be individually selected in the track selection menu page 131. Media main menu Fig. 125 Media main menu. Fig. 126 Radio operation: station list. In the main menu: Different media sources can be selected and played through MEDIA. Press the MEDIA button to open the MEDIA main menu Fig. 125. The last media source played is resumed. Currently played media source is shown in the lower left function button pad Fig. 125. The MEDIA main menu shows a message if no media source can be selected. Media main menu function button pads Caption for Fig. 125 and Fig. 126:
Songs, files and playlists can also be ticked off turning the menu button and accessed or opened pressing the button. Source Shows the currently selected media source. Touch to select a different media source page 131. SD Card : memory card. USB : external data storage unit in the USB port. BT Audio : Bluetooth audio. AUX : external audio source connected to the AUX-IN multimedia port, depends on the vehicle's version. Shows the playback list page 131.
Changes tracks in media mode page 131. Playback is interrupted. The function but-
ton changes to page 131. Playback is resumed. The function but-
ton changes to page 131. Open the Media settings menu page 132. 1) In the Media settings menu, the function Mix/Repeat, including subfolder must be enabled page 132. 130 Owner's Manual Caption for Fig. 125 and Fig. 126:
Songs, files and playlists can also be ticked off turning the menu button and accessed or opened pressing the button. Touch to switch between available modes.
: repeat current tracks.
: repeat all tracks. All tracks in the same memory level as the current track will be repeated. In the Media settings menu, Mix/Repeat including subfolder enabled, subfolders are also included page 132. Mix function. The function button changes to . All tracks in the same memory level as the current track will be included. In the Media settings menu, Mix/Repeat including subfolder enabled, subfolders are also included page 132. Change the track on the media main menu The tracks of the media sources being played back can be successively run through with the ar-
row buttons page 131, Track selection from the track list. It is not possible with the arrow buttons to switch to playback from a playlist. Playback from a playlist needs to be manually started from the track selection menu page 131, Track selection from the track list. Operation through the media main menu Action Briefly touch the function button <
once. Change media source On the MEDIA main menu, press the radio's MEDIA button again, to go over all the availa-
ble media sources. In the pop-up window there are currently no se-
lectable media sources shown as inactive (grey a). The media source currently in use is displayed on the screen. If no media source can be selected, such is indi-
cated on the MEDIA main menu. If a media source previously played back is selec-
ted again, the playback starts at the point where it was last interrupted. The track information display can be disa-
bled in the Playlist page 131. Briefly touch the function button >
once. Press and hold the function button < . Press and hold the function button > . Touch the function button once, briefly. Touch the function button once, briefly. Effect Within less than 3 sec-
onds of the track's length, switches the be-
ginning of the previous track. Within more than 3 sec-
onds of the track's length, switches to the beginning of the current track. To the next track. After the last track, it returns to the first track of the current data storage unit. Fast rewind. Fast forward. Playback is interrupted. The function button changes to . Playback is resumed. The function button changes to . 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Track selection from the track list To open the track list in the MEDIA main menu, press OR turn the knob. The track about to be played back is highlighted. Composition Touch (R 340G) 131 Search the track list and touch on the desired track. When track information is available, the track number and name or the names of the files
(MP3) are displayed instead of the Title + no. 1). The track title list may not be supported by the source. Tracks, folders and playlists can also be marked, by turning the settings knob, and accessed/opened by pressing the knob. Specific media settings Opening the Media settings menu In the MEDIA main menu, touch the function button. Function button: effect Sound: opens the Sound settings menu. Mix/Repeat, including subfolders: subfolders are in-
cluded in the selected playback mode page 130. Bluetooth: opens the Bluetooth settings menu. Remove: remove the data unit (USB data storage unit or SD card) from the system. The respective function button is disabled after the data stor-
age unit is successfully removed. Wired or wireless connections Introduction Some external devices can be connected to the radio with or without wires (if existing) in the ve-
hicle. The type and number of connections with or without wires depend on the country and the ve-
hicle. Within a range of different models and in special models the connections may reveal dif-
ferences. For the wired connections use only original ca-
bles from the device or - if available - the factory supplied cables for the respective vehicle. Playback of an SD card Insert the SD card carefully into the SD card slot with the chamfered edge up and the in-
scriptions to the left of the SD card slot or. To remove the SD card, first see the system settings and execute the Safely remove source ac-
tion. Briefly touch the SD card so it springs out to removal position. Press the radio MEDIA button. Playback is taken up from the last used media source. To playback the SD card, press . When navigating the folders, use the function button and the knob or . Press to go to the higher level of the folders and rotate the selector button to select the desired folder. To change to the next or previous track, press one of the function buttons. Keep one of the arrow buttons pressed for a few seconds to move the playback forward or back-
ward. During playback of the SD card, some function keys are available at the bottom of the display. The active buttons are highlighted. USB Connection The USB port is located on the front of the unit or . Audio files on an external data storage unit con-
nected to the USB port can be played back and controlled by device. USB data manual are referred to in this manual as external data media, which contain playable files
(e.g. MP3 player, iPods and pen drives). Only supported audio files are shown. Other file types are ignored. Playback begins automatically if there are stored and readable audio files in the data storage units. The additional external data storage unit controls
(access track changes, track selection, and play-
back modes) are detailed in the respective chap-
ters. 1) Depending on the source. 132 Owner's Manual Instructions and restrictions The number of USB ports and compatibility with Apple devices, among other Media Players, may vary depending on the equipment. The typical USB voltage of 5 V is supplied through the USB port. External hard drives with capacity for over 32 GB must be reformatted into the FAT32 file system, depending on the conditions. Programs and in-
structions to perform such formatting process are available on the Internet, for example. Considering the wide range of different data storage units and various iPod, iPad and iPhone generations, it is impossible to ensure that all functions will be available. iPod, iPad and iPhone Depending on the country and equipment ver-
sion, iPods, iPads or iPhones may be con-
nected to the vehicle's USB port , through a suitable USB cable, and used as audio sources. Disconnect Connected data storage units must be prepared for removal before being disconnected. In the MEDIA main menu, touch the func-
tion button to open the Media settings menu. OR: press the SETUP radio button. Touch the Safe remove and then select USB . The function button is disabled after the data storage unit is successfully removed. The data storage unit may be disconnected. Unreadable data storage unit If a connected data storage unit contains unread-
able data, a corresponding message is shown on the device display. If an external Media Player is connected si-
multaneously via Bluetooth and the USB port to the device, the Bluetooth audio con-
nection is automatically disconnected after switching to the USB port. If a connected device cannot be recognized, remove all connections and reconnect the devices. Check whether the connection cable is working, if necessary. In case of operating faults in connected de-
vices, restart the respective device. This usually solves the issue. Do not use any memory card adapter, USB extension cord, or USB-Hubs (USB distribu-
tors)!
Refer to the external data storage unit manufacturer's operating manual. Connecting an external audio source to the multimedia AUX-IN port Depending on the type and version of the vehicle, the voice command feature may not be availa-
ble. The AUX-IN multimedia port only supports 3.5 mm jack plugs. The external audio source connected is played back through the vehicle's loudspeakers and can-
not be controlled by the device. Connected external audio sources are indicated by AUX on the display. Connecting an external audio source to the AUX-IN multimedia port Reduce the volume on the radio. Connecting an external audio source to the AUX-IN multimedia port. Start playback on the external audio source. Press the radio button MEDIA to display the available media sources selection menu. Press the function button . The playback volume of external audio sources must be adjusted to the volume of remaining au-
dio sources. Specificities regarding the use of external audio sources in the AUX-IN multimedia port Action Selection of another audio source on the device. Stop playback on the external audio source. Remove the plug from the AUX-IN multimedia port. Effect The external audio source continues to play in the background. The unit stays in the AUX menu. The unit stays in the AUX menu. Composition Touch (R 340G) 133
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. When the playback of the external audio source is finished or is disconnected from the multimedia AUX-IN port, the radio stays on the AUX menu. There may be noise interferences if the ex-
ternal audio source is used on the vehicle's 12 V power outlet. Read and follow the external audio source manufacturers operating instructions. Connecting external audio sources via Bluetooth Connecting an audio source via Bluetooth The Bluetooth audio mode can be displayed by the icon in the upper row. In Bluetooth audio mode audio files from a Bluetooth audio source connected via Blue-
tooth can be played back (for example a mobile phone), using the vehicle's loudspeakers (audio Bluetooth playback). Requisites The Bluetooth audio source must support the Bluetooth A2DP profile. In the Bluetooth settings menu, the BT Audio (A2DP/AVRCP) function must be ena-
bled. Start audio playback in Bluetooth Lower the base volume on the radio . Enable Bluetooth visibility in the external Bluetooth audio source (e.g. mobile phone). Press the radio MEDIA button. Touch the function surface and select BT audio . Touch the Search device function button to pair an external Bluetooth audio source for the first time. OR: select from the list of external Bluetooth audio sources. OR: pair through the Bluetooth Settings menu. Follow the instructions for other procedures on the radio display and the Bluetooth audio source display. Playback of the Bluetooth audio source must be initiated manually, if necessary. 134 Owner's Manual Whenever the Bluetooth audio source playback ends, the device remains in the Bluetooth audio mode. Playback control Control of the Bluetooth audio source through the device depends on the connected Bluetooth audio source. In media readers that support the Bluetooth AVRCP profile, playback may be automatically in-
itiated or interrupted from the Bluetooth audio source, if it is switched to Bluetooth audio play-
back or other audio sources. In addition a display of the track or a track change is possible through via the device. Due to the wide variety of Bluetooth audio sources, some of the functions described herein may not operate properly. To operate the multimedia mode with the Bluetooth device connected, read and fol-
low the manufacturers use instructions. Use only with devices that support Blue-
tooth technology. For further information on Bluetooth products compatibility contact a Volkswagen dealership or look up on the Inter-
net. Telephone Introduction The phone functions detailed below can be ac-
cessed through the device when there is an ac-
tive paired and connected mobile phone. The mobile phone must support the Bluetooth function in order to establish a connection be-
tween the mobile phone and the device. If no mobile phone is connected to the device, phone control will not be available. Instructions to use mobile phones in vehicles without external aerial connection page 112. Phone menu displays vary depending on the functions available on the mobile phone model. There may be differences depending on the mod-
el used. Use only with units that support Bluetooth technology. Additional information about prod-
ucts that support Bluetooth technology may be obtained at Volkswagen Dealerships or via the In-
ternet. Refer to the mobile phone and accessory suppli-
er's operating manual. Call interruption and reception flaws may occur in certain transmission blackout areas. Most electronic devices are shielded from HF sig-
nals (high frequency). In some rare cases, howev-
er, electronic devices may not be shielded against the HF signals of phone controls. This may result in damages. WARNING Using mobile phones while driving may distract drivers and cause accidents. Always drive carefully and responsibly. Adjust sound volume settings to allow the driver to hear external warnings and sounds
(e.g. emergency service sirens) In locations with partial or lack of mobile coverage, and depending on the circumstan-
ces (tunnels, garages and underground pas-
sages) telephone call may be hindered, pre-
venting the use of mobile devices (including emergency calls). WARNING If a mobile phone is not secured or not properly secured in the vehicle, it could be flung though the interior during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident. This can cause injuries. Always attach mobile phones properly and out of airbag triggering areas while driving. WARNING Mobile phones can cause interference when positioned nearby heart pacemakers. Keep a minimum distance of 20 centimetres between the mobile phone's antenna and the heart pacemaker, since the former may interfere with the latter. Do not carry activated mobile phones in chest pockets directly over heart pacemak-
ers. Turn off mobile phones immediately when-
ever there is suspicion of interference with pacemakers. NOTICE High speed, unfavourable weather and road con-
ditions, as well as poor network connection may hinder or interrupt mobile phone calls inside the vehicle. Bluetooth Please refer to chapter on page 135. and at the start of the Bluetooth Bluetooth technology connects mobile phones to the vehicle's phone controls. A single pairing process is required in order to use the phone controls with mobile phones equipped with Blue-
tooth. Some Bluetooth mobile phones are recognized and connected immediately upon switching on the ignition, if such phones have been previously connected. At the same time, the mobile phone and its embedded Bluetooth feature must be activated, and all active Bluetooth connections with other devices must be disconnected. Bluetooth radio communication is free of charge. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG, Inc. Bluetooth Profiles Whenever mobile phones are connected to the phone controls, data will be exchanged through one of the Bluetooth profiles. Phone use via Bluetooth Hands-Free-Profile
(HFP):
If mobile phones are connected via HFP with phone controls, wireless calls can be made via the hands-free device. In this case, the exter-
nal aerial cannot be used. Instructions to use mobile phones in vehicles without external aerial connection. Music playback via Bluetooth Advanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP):
Bluetooth profile to transfer audio signals with stereo quality. Composition Touch (R 340G) 135
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. OR:
Compare the PIN code shown on the radio dis-
play with the PIN code shown on the mobile phone. If the PIN code matches, it must be confirmed in both devices. After successfully completing the pairing proc-
ess, the main menu PHONE is shown and the contact list and list of calls stored in the mobile phone are automatically loaded. Confirm on the mobile phone, if necessary. The duration of the loading process varies de-
pending on the amount of data stored in the mo-
bile phone. After completing the loading process, the data of the device will be available. Pairing and connecting mobile phones Multiple mobile phones can be paired to the de-
vice. However, only one mobile phone can be connected to one device at any given time. When turning the radio on, the unit automatically connects to the last mobile phone connected. If it is not possible to connect to the last mobile phone used, the phone control automatically at-
tempts to connect to the next mobile phone in the list of paired phones. The maximum range of a Bluetooth connection is approximately 10 metres. Active Bluetooth connections are interrupted if such range is ex-
ceeded. The connection will be automatically re-
stored as soon as the device is in reach of the Bluetooth range. Refer to a Volkswagen Dealership for more information on mobile phone connections and pairing. Switching off phone controls Please refer to chapter on page 135. and at the start of the End active calls. Switch off the ignition. Remove the key from the ignition. Switch off the mobile phone. Playback control via Bluetooth Audio Video Re-
mote Control Profile (AVRCP):
Bluetooth profile to display track information and playback controls in mobile devices. Pair up and connect the mobile phone to the radio Please refer to chapter on page 135. and at the start of the In order to operate a mobile phone via the radio unit, both devices must be paired once. Pairing must be performed while the vehicle is stationary. Requisites Ignition switched on. Remove the headset connection to the mobile phone if necessary. The Bluetooth function must be enabled and visible on the phone and radio. The key blocking feature must be unlocked on the mobile phone. Follow the owner's manual of the respective mo-
bile phone. During the pairing process, the mobile phone's keypad must be used. The mobile phone must be prepared for such process. Initiate mobile phone pairing Press the PHONE button. Touch the Search phone function button. After the process is completed, all names of Bluetooth devices found are displayed. Select the mobile phone from the list of Blue-
tooth devices found. Then the device and the mobile phone will be connected. Additional mobile phone or radio en-
tries may be required to conclude their connec-
tion. Confirm successful pairing in the mobile phone, if necessary. Depends on the mobile phone:
Insert the PIN code displayed on the radio screen into the mobile phone and confirm. 136 Owner's Manual If the vehicle key remains in the ignition cylinder after switching off the ignition, phone controls will not be switched off. Phone controls are only switched off a few minutes later (factory settings: approximately 15 minutes). If mobile phones were connected with phone controls, the mobile phone transmis-
sion unit remains active after switching off phone controls. Switching of the mobile phone may be required. WARNING Loose or unsecured mobile phones may be flung through the interior and cause injuries in case of sudden evasive or breaking manoeuvres or in the event of accidents. While the vehicle is in motion, always secure mobile devices properly outside the airbag deployment zones or stow them away safely. Using mobile phones in the vehicle may cause loudspeaker noises. Phone control description Please refer to chapter on page 135. and at the start of the Some features and settings are only available while the vehicle is stationary and are not sup-
ported by all mobile phone brands. The range of possible settings depends on the country, unit, and the vehicle's equipment speci-
fications. Phone controls can recognize up to 20 devices. Respectively, devices can be connected via the Hands-Free-Profile (HFP) and the Advanced Au-
dio Distribution Profile (A2DP). User profile assignment Connected mobile phones are stored in the phone controls under a user profile. Up to 4 user profiles can be assigned in phone controls. If another mobile phone is paired, the profile with longest idle time is automatically de-
leted. Contact list, favourite numbers (speed dial but-
tons) and User profile settings menu settings are stored in the user profile. If a mobile phone is reconnected to the phone controls, the respective settings and data will be available once again. If a mobile phone's contact list entries are changed while connected, contact list data can be manually updated via the User profile settings menu. The contact list will be automatically up-
dated upon the next mobile phone connection
(e.g. during the following vehicle use). PHONE main menu Please refer to chapter on page 135. and at the start of the Fig. 127 The telephone main menu. Fig. 128 Call details. Opening the Phone main menu Press the PHONE button. Composition Touch (R 340G) 137
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Telephone main menu function buttons Function button: effect 1 2 Name of the paired mobile phone or se-
lected user profile. Touch to connect or pair to another mobile phone. Favourites (speed dial buttons) to which contact list numbers can be assigned page 141. Open a numeric keypad to enter a phone number page 139. Open the contact list of the paired mobile phone page 139. Open call lists of the mobile phone paired page 140. a) Open the message list (SMS) of the mobile phone paired. a) Touch the function button to enter a phone number through voice command. Open the Phone settings menu page 141. Touch to answer a call. Touch to end a call. OR: touch to reject calls received. Touch to mute sound during a call. Touch the function button to unmute the sound. a) Depends on the mobile phone. Phone control symbols and displays Display: meaning Name of the mobile network carrier in which the SIM card of the paired mobile phone is registered. Stored name or phone number display. Battery charge status of the connected mobile phone. Intensity of the mobile communication transmission signal currently available. Displays an active Bluetooth connection. A B 138 Owner's Manual During a phone call Please refer to chapter on page 135. and at the start of the Fig. 129 During a phone call. When a connection with the dialled phone num-
ber has been established, the PHONE main menu display switches to Phone call Fig. 129. Function buttons and displays: action and ef-
fect A B Touch to switch off the mobile phone microphone during a call (the function button changes to ). Touch to switch on the mobile phone microphone during a call (the function button changes to ). Display of the call duration and call num-
ber or stored name. Touch to end a call. Battery charge status of the connected mobile phone. Functions available during a phone call Possible functions Mute mobile phone micro-
phone Unmute mobile phone micro-
phone Starting phone calls via mobile phone Touch the function button . The mobile phone microphone is muted (the function button changes to ). Touch the function button . The mobile phone microphone is unmuted (the function but-
ton changes to ). Touch the function button and select Hands-free . Possible functions Possible functions The hands-free function is disabled and the call is direc-
ted to the mobile phone Touch the function button and select Hands-free . The hands-free function is en-
abled and the call is directed to the mobile phone controls. Starting phone calls via the mo-
bile phone con-
trols Call voice mail-
box Enter phone number menu Please refer to chapter on page 135. and at the start of the Enter phone number Select contact from the list Enter country code Fig. 130 Enter phone number menu. Touch the Voicemail func-
tion button to establish a con-
nection. If a voice mailbox number has not been stored, enter the calling number and confirm by pressing OK . Previously saved call numbers can be edited in the User profile settings menu page 142. Enter phone number via the keypad. Touch the function button to establish a connection. Enter the first letter of the contact name via the keypad. Possible entries are shown in the contact list. Search the contact list and touch the desired contact to call. When entering country codes, instead of entering the two first digits (e.g. 00), it is pos-
sible to enter the symbol +. Touch and hold the function button 0 for approximately 2 seconds to enter the + charac-
ter. Phone contacts list menu Please refer to chapter on page 135. and at the start of the Fig. 131 Enter phone number menu (select contact from the list). Enter phone number menu functions. Touch the function button to access the En-
ter phone number menu. Fig. 132 Contact Menu (contact list). Composition Touch (R 340G) 139
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Call list menu Please refer to chapter on page 135. and at the start of the Fig. 133 Search mask. After the first pairing process, it may take a few minutes until the paired mobile phone's con-
tacts1) become available on the device. This proc-
ess can take up to approximately one hour, de-
pending on the volume of data to be transferred. Confirm the transmission process on the mobile phone, if necessary. Contacts can also be accessed during calls. Opening the Contacts menu Touch the function button to access the Contact list (contacts) menu. Possible functions Select contact from the list Search contacts through the search mask. Search the list and touch the desired contact to call. OR: if multiple phone num-
bers are stored for the same contact, touch the contact and then the desired phone number to call. Touch the contact surface Fig. 132 to open the search mask. Enter the desired name into the search mask Fig. 133. The appropriate number of events is shown to the right of the search field. Touch the function button to switch to list view. Search the list and touch the desired contact to call. Phone menu availability varies depending on the mobile phone used. Fig. 134 Call Menu (call lists). Whenever a phone number is stored as a contact, the stored name will be displayed instead of the call list number. Opening the Calls menu Touch the function button to access the Calls menu. Touch the function button Fig. 134 1 . Select the desired call list: All , Lost , Ignored or Answered . Dis pla y Definition Missed : displays the numbers of missed and unanswered calls. Dialled : displays phone numbers selected via the mobile phone and the device's tele-
phone control. Received : displays numbers of calls taken via the mobile phone and the device's tele-
phone control. Call list availability varies depending on the mobile phone used. 1) Depending on the unit model, only contacts stored in the phone memory are loaded. 140 Owner's Manual Favourites (speed dial buttons) Possible functions Please refer to chapter on page 135. and at the start of the Delete favourite Call favourite Favourite entries can be de-
leted in the User profile settings menu, under the Manage favour-
ites option page 142. In the PHONE main menu, briefly touch the function button of the respective fa-
vourite contact assigned to call the stored phone number. Contacts stored as favourites are not auto-
matically updated. If a contact stored as fa-
vourite in the mobile phone is changed, the func-
tion button must be reassigned. Fig. 135 The telephone main menu. Phone settings A total of 4 phone numbers from the contact list can be stored as favourites. All favourite numbers must be assigned manually and then attributed to a user profile. Favourite functions Possible functions Assign favourite Edit favourite In the PHONE main menu, touch one of the free function buttons. Select the desired contact from the contact list. If more than one phone number is stored for the desired contact, select the desired number. In the PHONE main menu, press and hold the favourite entry until the Contacts menu opens. Select the desired contact from the contact list. If more than one phone number is stored for the desired contact, select the desired number. To close the Contacts menu without applying changes, touch the function button . Please refer to chapter on page 135. and at the start of the Open the Phone settings menu In the PHONE main menu, touch the func-
tion button. Touch the function button in which settings must be made. Changes are automatically applied upon clos-
ing a menu. Function button: effect Select phone: select device from the list to con-
nect it. Search phone: touch to connect a new Blue-
tooth device. Bluetooth: opens the Bluetooth settings menu page 142. User profile: opens the User profile settings menu page 142. Mobile phone reminder: if a Bluetooth connection with the mobile phone is established, the mes-
sage Don't forget your phone appears after switching off the ignition. Composition Touch (R 340G) 141
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Bluetoothsettings Please refer to chapter on page 135. and at the start of the Open the Bluetooth settings menu In the PHONE main menu, touch the function button. OR: press the SETUP button. Then, touch the Bluetooth function button. Touch the function button in which settings must be made. Changes are automatically ap-
plied after closing a menu. Function button: effect Bluetooth: touch to switch off Bluetooth. All current connections will be interrupted. Visibility: switch Bluetooth visibility on or off. Visible: Bluetooth visibility enabled. Invisible: Bluetooth visibility disabled. Blue-
tooth visibility must be switched on to pair external Bluetooth devices to the ra-
dio. Name: shows or changes the device name. This name is shown in other Bluetooth devices un-
der the Bluetooth settings. Paired devices: shows the paired device. Discon-
nect and connect individual Bluetooth devices and Bluetooth profiles. Search devices: search active and visible Blue-
tooth devices in range of the device. The maxi-
mum range is approximately 10 metres. BT Audio (A2DP/AVRCP): if an external audio source is to be connected to the device via Bluetooth, this function must be enabled . User profile settings Please refer to chapter on page 135. and at the start of the Function button: effect Manage favourites: edit favourites page 141. All: all favourites are deleted. Favourite: touch to delete the stored num-
ber. Free function button: touch to store a con-
tact list number as favourite. 142 Owner's Manual Function button: effect Voicemail No.: enter or edit the voice mailbox number. Sort by: set the contact list sorting sequence (Last name or Given name). Import contacts: import the contact list of the paired phone or update imported contact lists. Select a ringtone: select a ringtone from a list of ringtone presets. The ringtone is played and stored after exiting the submenu. Delete other profiles: delete some or all inactive user profiles. Settings Menu and system settings According to the vehicle version or type the menu and system functions and setting options may vary. Open the System settings menu Press the radio SETUP button Press the function button area of the mode to which the introduction of settings is intended. Changes are automatically applied upon clos-
. ing a menu. Function button: effect Sound: adjust sound and volume settings page 143. Display: display settings. Turn display off (in 10 s): if the function is en-
abled and the device remains idle, the dis-
play is automatically shut down after 10 seconds. The display is switched back on by touching the display or pressing a button. Brightness level: select the display brightness level. Touchscreen sound: confirmation sound when touching a function button enabled. Display time in Standby mode: the current time is shown on the display while in Standby mode. Date/time: to enter date/time settings Time: manual current time setting. Function button: effect Time format: to define the preferred time dis-
play format (12 or 24 hours). Daylight saving time: sets the daylight saving time automatically. Date: to set the current date. Date format: to define the preferred date dis-
play format (dd-mm-yyyy, yy-mm-dd or mm-dd-yy). Additional keypad languagesa): select additional key-
pad languages. Units: define the units display in the vehicle. Bluetootha): make Bluetooth adjustments. Safe removal: remove the desired data storage unit safely from the system. The function but-
ton is disabled after the data storage unit is suc-
cessfully removed. Default settings: the return to default settings is disabled as selected in the Entries and settings applied. System data: display of system data (unit number, hardware/software versions.) Copyright: copyright information. Update software: update the software version. a) Depending on the unit and the country. WARNING Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. Never proceed with settings while driving. To make the best of the radio's features and optimal operation it is important that the date and time be correctly set. Sound and volume settings According to the vehicle version or type the sound and volume function and setting options may vary. Press the SETUP button and then select Sound . Function button: effect Volume: volume settings. Max. start volume.: set the maximum switch-
on volume. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Function button: effect Speed-dependent volume control: set volume ad-
justments based on the vehicle's speed. The audio volume is increased automatical-
ly as the speed increases. Entertainment dimmer: set warning volumes. AUX volume: set the playback volume of au-
dio sources connected to the AUX-IN multi-
media port (Low, Medium or High). Also see page 143, Adjust playback volume of ex-
ternal audio sources. Bluetooth Audioa): establish the playback vol-
ume of audio sources connected via Blue-
tooth (Low, Medium or High). Also see page 143, Adjust playback volume of ex-
ternal audio sources. Balance - Fader: set sound equalization. The grid shows sound equalization inside the vehicle. To edit sound equalization, touch the desired position in the vehicle interior display or use the arrow buttons to sequentially change settings. To centre sound equalization in the ve-
hicle interior display, touch the function button between the arrows. Bass - mid - treble: set sound characteristics (bass -
mid - treble). Touchscreen sound: confirmation sound when touching a function button enabled. a) Depending on the country and the device. Operation mode of the volume increase as a function of speed The speed-dependant volume increase automati-
cally adjusts the volume based on the vehicle's speed. The volume increase is set in levels from 1 to 7. If a low value is set, the volume is slightly adjus-
ted at higher speeds, if the set value is high, the volume increases sharply. At level 0 the volume increase as a function of the vehicle's speed is disabled. Adjust playback volume of external audio sources Whenever the playback volume of an external audio source must be raised, first lower the de-
fault volume of the device. If the connected audio source has very low vol-
ume, increase the output volume in the external audio source. If this procedure is not sufficient, set the on volume to Medium or High. Composition Touch (R 340G) 143 If the external audio source connected has dis-
torted or very high volume, lower the output vol-
ume in the external audio source. If this proce-
dure is not sufficient, set the on volume to Medi-
um or Low. WARNING Accidents and injuries can occur if the driver is distracted. Never proceed with settings while driving. 144 Owner's Manual Media Plus (RCD 320G 2 DIN) Radio Main menu RADIO Fig. 136 RADIO main menu. Depending on the vehicle version, the radio may not be available. The radio system is provided based on the re-
spective country and unit variations. All possible unit variations are listed in the unit overview. Radio access and controls are conditioned to the unit variation. Press the unit buttons FM or AM to select the radio mode in the respective frequency band. Changing the frequency band The current radio station is displayed in the cen-
tre of the screen Fig. 136. Whenever RDS is available, the station name may also be displayed, in addition to the respective station frequency. The side areas of the screen display the station frequencies memorized in the respective station buttons Fig. 136. Multiple station frequencies can be memorized in station buttons page 149. Fig. 137 RADIO main menu: displays frequency bands and memory levels. Media Plus (RCD 320G 2 DIN) 145
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. The currently selected frequency band is dis-
played over the station description Fig. 137 1 . A frequency band can be selected by pressing the respective FM and AM unit button. Press the FM or AM unit buttons repeatedly to switch between frequency band levels. FM range: FM 1 - FM 2 - FM AS - FM 1 AM range: AM - AM AS - AM Changing the station Fig. 138 Changing stations with function or unit buttons. Select the desired radio frequency range page 145. Function Switch to the next station memorized. Change to the next station available in the current frequency band. Adjacent sta-
Action Briefly press the func-
tion button Fig. 138 1 page 149. Briefly press the unit button or Fig. 138 2 . Function tions are displayed when switching sta-
tions. Manually adjust the station frequency. Action Turn the setting knob Fig. 138 3 until the desired station frequen-
cy is displayed on the screen (e.g. 101.1). Quick scan through the frequency band If the unit button or is pressed and held, the unit will quickly scan through the frequency band. If the respective unit button is released, the scan will stop at the next station available in the cur-
rent frequency band. 146 Owner's Manual SCAN Fig. 139 Starting and stopping the SCAN function. After activating the SCAN function, the radio plays all stations available in the current fre-
quency band for approximately 5 seconds each. In radio operation, select the desired frequency band page 145. Function Initiate the automatic scan function. Stopping the auto-
matic scan in the cur-
rent station. Action Briefly press the unit button SCAN Fig. 139. Briefly press the unit button SCAN Fig. 139 while the automatic SCAN function is active. Function Stopping the auto-
matic SCAN function and returning to the last station available. Stopping the auto-
matic SCAN function and seeking the next station available. Action Briefly press the unit button SCAN or Fig. 139 while the au-
tomatic SCAN function is active. Briefly press the unit button Fig. 139. The scan function starts with the first available radio station. When the automatic scan function is initiated, the word SCAN flashes on the display. Media Plus (RCD 320G 2 DIN) 147
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Select the memory level Fig. 140 Select the frequency band and memory level. Different memory levels are available for each frequency band available (e.g. FM or AM). Six function buttons are indicated in each memo-
ry level to store and access radio stations. These function buttons are referred to as station but-
tons. Switch the memory level in radio operation Press the unit button FM or AM Fig. 140 3 until the desired memory level is displayed Fig. 140 2 . When switching memory levels, memorized radio station frequencies are displayed next to the sta-
tion buttons Fig. 140 1 . If no radio stations are memorized for a station button, the display reads - - - next to such sta-
tion button. The frequency band will also be switched when switching memory levels, if necessary page 145. Station buttons within a memory level may be manually or automatically assigned page 149. 148 Owner's Manual Memorizing and selecting stations Fig. 141 Stations memorized in FM1 memory level station buttons. Manually and individually assign station buttons Select the frequency band and memory level page 145. Select the stations. Press and hold the desired station button until an audible warning is heard. The station currently selected
(at Fig. 141: 101.1 MHz) is stored in this station button. The station button in which the current station is memorized is marked on the radio display with a filled arrow or . Automatically store the station (AUTOSTORE) With the Autostore function, the stations with strongest reception are stored in the 6 station buttons of the FM AS or AM AS memory level. Select the frequency band and memory level page 145. Press and hold the unit button FM or AM for over 2 seconds. An audible warning is heard and the station seeking and storing process is initiated. During the storing process, STORING is dis-
played on the centre of the screen. This proc-
ess may take a few seconds. When the storing process is completed, the STORING display is removed from the centre of the screen. If no station is available, NO STATION is displayed on the centre of the screen. If less than 6 stations were found, - - - is dis-
played next to the undesignated station buttons. Selecting stored stations Select the frequency band and memory level in which the desired station is stored page 145. Briefly press the desired station button. Stored stations may only be selected if available, depending on the vehicle's current location. If a radio station is stored in a previously designated station button, the previous sta-
tion stored will be deleted. Media Plus (RCD 320G 2 DIN) 149
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Media source Audio file repro-
duction via Blue-
tootha). External audio source playback via the AUX-IN multimedia port. External audio source playback via the USB port. Playing requirements The external audio source must support the Blue-
tooth A2DP or AVRCP pro-
file and must be paired to the radio. 3.5 mm jack plug for audio output. USB media sources that can be connected to play-
back audio files. a) Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc. Restrictions and recommendations Contamination, exposure to high temperatures and mechanical damage may render a data stor-
age unit unusable. Follow the data storage unit manufacturer's instructions. Variations in the quality of data storage units produced by different manufacturers may cause interferences during playback. Please observe copyright laws. CDs recorded in UDF or Direct CD format are not supported. Observe the format in Windows. The configuration of data storage units or re-
cording devices and programs may prevent the playback of isolated tracks or operation of the data storage unit. Information regarding appro-
priate methods to create audio files and data storage units (compression rate, ID3 tag, etc.) can be found on the Internet, for example. Data storage units with compacted files (MP3, WMA, etc.) take longer to read compared to reg-
ular audio CDs due to the greater amount of da-
ta. Complex folder structures can also slow down the reading of a data medium. Playlists merely define a certain playback se-
quence. No files are saved in playlists. Playlists are not played when the data storage unit files are not saved in the directory indicated in the re-
spective playlist (data shortcuts). Media Introduction Media sources are referred to as audio sources that contain audio data in different data storage units, such as CD or external MP3 Player. These audio files may only be played by the respective units or audio inputs of the radio system (internal CD drive, USB port, Bluetooth interface, or AUX-
IN multimedia port). This product is protected by copyrights of Microsoft Corporation. This technology may not be reproduced or marketed without prior au-
thorization from Microsoft or one of its author-
ized affiliates. Media source and audio file requirements Factory-fitted CD Players conform to safety class 1 according to the DIN IEC 76 (CO) 6/ VDE 0837 standard. The unit supports only standard 12 cm CDs. Supported listed file formats are simply referred to as audio files. Audio data CDs are referred to as audio file CDs. Media source Audio CDs (up to 80 min.). CD-ROM-, CD-
R-, CD-RW and CD with audio data totalling up to 700 MB (megabyte) as per ISO 9660 or in the Joliet file sys-
tem. Playing requirements CD digital audio specifica-
tion . MP3 files (.mp3) with 48 to 320 kbit/s or variable bitrates. WMA files (.wma) up to 9.2 mono/stereo without copy protection. PLS and M3U playlists. Playlists with up to 20 kB and 250 integrations. Maximum of 32 playlists in data storage units. File names smaller than 64 characters. Folder structures with up to ten levels. Up to 120 folders and 500 files in data storage units. 150 Owner's Manual Audio data storage unit playback sequence The playback sequence can be modified by selecting different playback modes (REPEAT, MIX) page 156. Insert or eject CD Either audio or data CDs can be played on the in-
ternal CD unit. Audio CDs are displayed as CD and audio data CDs are displayed as MP3 page 155. Insert CD Insert the CD into the tray with the printed side up 4 only until it is automatically re-
trieved by the unit. After inserting the CD, playback will start auto-
matically. READING will be displayed. If a CD is inserted in the internal CD unit, CD will be displayed on the upper central area of the screen. Eject CD In convertible vehicles, depending on the coun-
try, the vehicle key must be inserted into the ig-
nition lock in order to eject CDs (anti-theft pro-
tection). Press the unit button EJECT . The inserted CD will be ejected and must be removed within approximately 10 seconds. If the CD is not removed within approximately 10 seconds, it will be retracted back into the drive for safety purposes. Error messages on the screen In case of errors, text messages indicating the causes will be displayed on the centre of the screen, if necessary. NO CD: no readable data storage unit in the CD drive. It is not possible to switch to media mode. ERROR: the CD inserted cannot be read. The CD will be ejected. Check the CD for damages. OVER HEAT: CD unit overheating. CD playback is disabled. Another audio source will be selected. NO FILE: no file available in the data storage unit. NO SUPPORT: no readable file available in the data storage unit. Media Plus (RCD 320G 2 DIN) 151 Fig. 142 Possible structure of an MP3 CD. In data storage units, audio files are often divi-
ded into data folders and playlists in order to define a certain playback sequence. Tracks, folders, and playlists are classified nu-
merically and alphabetically according to the name of the data storage unit. Therefore, subfolders are treated as folders and numbered based on the data storage unit's se-
quence. The illustration Fig. 142 shows a typical MP3 CD that contains tracks , folders and sub-
folders, for example. The tracks and folders of such CD are, therefore, played and shown in the following sequence:
Tracks 1 and 2 in the root directory 1.
(ROOT) of the CD. Tracks 3 and 4 in the first folder F1 in the root CD directory (display: 01). Track 5 in the first subfolder F1.1 of fold-
er F1 (display: 02). Track 6 in the first subfolder F1.1.1 of subfolder F1.1 (display: 03). Track 7 in the second subfolder F1.2 of folder F1 (display: 04). Tracks 8 and 9 in the second folder F2
(display: 05). 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. The text message is displayed for approximately 2 seconds. Then, the device returns to the last playback mode. The audio playback may skip when driving in streets with improper conditions and in-
tense vibrations. Main menu MEDIA Fig. 143 Example of media playback display: the radio reads files in an SD card. Several media sources may be selected and con-
trolled in media mode. To switch to media play-
back, briefly press the unit button MEDIA Fig. 143 2 . If the last media source played is still connected, this media source will be automatically played, and it will be briefly displayed on the centre of the screen when switching to media playback Fig. 144 2 . During media playback, the selected media source will always be displayed on the upper central area of the screen Fig. 143 1 . All available media sources page 153, Selecting media sources are displayed on the side of the screen Fig. 144. In some playback situations, for example, when the radio reads a media source, no media source can be selected Fig. 143. Error messages on the screen The current media source's status is displayed on the centre of the screen (e.g. READING,while the radio reads a media source Fig. 143 3 , track information page 155 or error messages:
ERROR: media source inserted cannot be read or an error has occurred. NO FILE: no file available in the data storage unit. NO SUPPORT: no readable file available in the data storage unit. NO SD: no SD card inserted on the memory card slot. NO USB: no USB or iPod storage unit connected to the internal USB port. NO AUX: no external audio source connected to the AUX-IN multimedia port. NO BT: no Bluetooth audio source available. NO MEDIA: no media source available. 152 Owner's Manual Error messages are displayed for approximately 2 seconds. Then, the device returns to the last playback mode. If no media sources are available, the radio cannot be switched to media playback. In this case, NO MEDIA will be displayed on the screen. The unit will automatically switch back to the previous playback mode. Selecting media sources Fig. 144 Media playback display example: playback of the last media source is resumed; other media sources cannot be selected. Start media mode page 152, Main menu MEDIA. If the last media source played is still connected, this media source will be automatically played, and it will be briefly displayed on the centre of the screen when switching to media playback Fig. 144 2 . All media sources available are displayed on the side of the screen Fig. 144. Select the desired media source as follows:
Briefly press the function button programmed with the desired media source Fig. 144 1 . Function button SD USB Media source SD card on the internal memory card slot. USB or iPod storage unit in the internal USB port. Function button AUX BT EXIT Media source External audio source in the AUX-IN multime-
dia port Bluetooth audio source connected Return to the last play-
back mode. OR: press the unit button MEDIA as many times as necessary until the media source is displayed (except CD) Fig. 144 3 . OR: press the unit button CD to play a CD in the internal CD drive Fig. 144 4 . Whenever a previously played media source is selected once again, the media source is played from the previous playback point (Exception: ex-
ternal audio sources). Media Plus (RCD 320G 2 DIN) 153
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Changing tracks manually Fig. 145 Media playback display example: MP3 storage location displayed when changing tracks. The media source tracks can be changed sequen-
tially. Follow the data storage units' playback sequence page 151. Action Turn the setting knob once to the left. Changing tracks in sequence Press the unit button or Fig. 145 2 . OR: turn setting knob Fig. 145 3 . Effect Previous If the current track is played for less than ap-
proximately 3 seconds:
previous track. If the current track is played for more than approximately 3 sec-
onds: beginning of the current track. Fast forward. Fast rewind. Turn the setting knob to the right. Turn the setting knob to the left. Changing folders in the data storage unit playback Briefly press the function button F+ or F-
to switch to the first track of the next folder or previous folder. When changing folders, the folder name is dis-
played for a few seconds. Changing playlist or folder Access the list of tracks and folders in order to view all available tracks and folders. Action Briefly press the unit button . Briefly press the unit button . Press and hold the unit button . Press and hold the unit button . Turn the setting knob once to the right. Effect Next: next track. Previous If the current track is played for less than ap-
proximately 3 seconds:
previous track. If the current track is played for more than approximately 3 sec-
onds: beginning of the current track. Fast forward while the unit button is pressed. Fast rewind while the unit button is pressed. Next: next track. 154 Owner's Manual Briefly press the setting knob Fig. 145 3 . OR: briefly press the function button BRW The list of tracks and folders will close if no selection is made for more than approxi-
Fig. 145 1 . Turn the setting to browse through the lists. A filled triangle is displayed in front of the track or folder and the name is highlighted. Briefly press the unit button or setting knob to open a folder or play a track. Briefly press the unit button to move to an upper level. If more than 4 tracks or folders are available, a scroll bar will become available. A triangle displayed to the left of the data folder tree indicates that an upper level is available. Track information display mately 1 minute. OR: if the unit button is briefly pressed Fig. 145 2 . OR: if the setting knob is pressed for approxi-
mately over 2 seconds Fig. 145 3 . If the settings menu is opened, the volume can be changed using the right-hand rotary/
push button . This maintains the display and no volume bar is displayed on the lower part of the screen. Fig. 146 Example of media playback display: track information on an MP3 CD played. When audio CDs without CD text are playing, the central line of the screen Fig. 146 3 displays only TRACK and the track number corresponding to the playing order on the data storage unit. When playing audio files containing additional track information (CD text , ID3-Tag in MP3 files), various types of track information can be displayed. Changing track information display The type of information regarding the selected track is displayed on the upper line centre (e.g. TITLE Fig. 146 2 ). Briefly press the function button INFO Fig. 146 1 to change the type of track in-
formation displayed on screen. Display Fig. 146 2 FILE FOLDER TITLE ARTIST ALBUM Track informa-
tion Fig. 146 3 File name (except for audio CDs). File folder (except for audio CDs). Track name. Track artist. Album name. No display: storage location based on playback sequence page 151. If the selected track information is too extensive to be displayed on the centre line of the screen, the track information will be automatically scrol-
led. Media Plus (RCD 320G 2 DIN) 155
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Changing the playback mode (SCAN, MIX, REPEAT) Fig. 147 Media playback display example: select playback modes. Refer to the information on the playing order of files and folders page 151. Selecting playback modes Playback modes available for the current data storage unit are displayed as function buttons on the side of the screen Fig. 147 1 . Press a function button to start the corre-
sponding playback mode. A filled triangle is displayed next to the activated function. If a media source contains only tracks, only the MIX and RPT functions will be available. If a media source contains folders with tracks, it is possible to switch between multiple functions by repeatedly pressing the respective function button. Action Briefly press the MIX function button once. Briefly press the MIX function button twice. Briefly press the MIX function button three times. Briefly press the unit button . Effect Random playback: dis-
play MIX. All tracks in the current folder are played once in random sequence. When all tracks are played, the function must be selected once again. Random playback: dis-
play MIX F. All tracks in the current folder are played in random sequence. Random playback: dis-
play MIX A. All tracks in the all folders are played in random sequence. During random play-
back: the next track is played. 156 Owner's Manual Action Briefly press the unit button . Briefly press the unit button . Effect During the automatic scan: the automatic scan will be interrupted and the next track is played. During the automatic scan:
if the current track is played for less than ap-
proximately 3 seconds:
the automatic scan will be interrupted and the previous track will be played. If the current track is played for more than approximately 3 sec-
onds, the automatic scan will be interrup-
ted and the current track will be played. The random playback (Mix) or repeat function
(Repeat) remain active for the respective media source until they are completed. Press the unit button SCAN , the function but-
ton MIX or RPT again to interrupt the current playback mode of the current track. Action Briefly press the unit button . Briefly press the RPT function button once. Briefly press the RPT function button twice. Briefly press the unit button SCAN once. Effect During random play-
back: the previous ran-
dom playback track is played. If the unit button is held, the previous data storage unit track will be played. Repeat function: dis-
play RPT . the selected track will be repeated after it is played once. Repeat function: dis-
play RPT F . The selected folder will be repeated after it is played once. Data stor-
age units with com-
pressed audio files
(MP3, WMA) can only be repeated in an or-
ganized manner, but not completely. Automatic scan: dis-
play SCAN flashes All tracks are played for approximately 10 sec-
onds. The automatic scan begins with the next track and is auto-
matically completed when all tracks are played once. Wired and wireless connections Introduction External audio sources connected to the radio through the AUX-IN port cannot be controlled through the radio system. Refer to the external audio source manu-
facturer's manual. External audio source in the AUX-IN multimedia or USB port Connecting an external audio source to the AUX-IN multimedia port The AUX-IN multimedia port is located on the front part of the device. The AUX-IN multimedia port only supports 3.5 mm jack plugs. Connected external audio sources are indicated by AUX on the display. Media Plus (RCD 320G 2 DIN) 157
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Bluetooth Audio playback is indicated by BT-AUDIO on the screen. Start audio playback in Bluetooth Pair and connect the external Media Player to the radio via the Bluetooth interface. Lower the base volume on the radio. Start external Media Player playback. When the external media source playback is interrupted, the radio system will remain in the BT-AUDIO menu. To prevent interference noises and faults, always switch off alert and service sounds in Bluetooth audio sources connected (e.g. key-
pad button sounds on a mobile phone). Telephone Introduction The phone functions described below can be ac-
cessed through the radio if the mobile phone is paired and connected to the unit. If no mobile phone is connected, phone functions cannot be accessed through the radio unit. Instructions to use mobile phones in vehicles without external aerial connection page 112. WARNING Using radio systems or mobile phones while driving could potentially distract the driver. Legal provisions must be followed. Always drive carefully and responsibly. Adjust unit volume in order for the driver to hear external warnings and sounds (e.g. emergency service sirens) In locations with partial or lack of mobile coverage, and depending on the circumstan-
ces (tunnels, garages and underground pas-
sages) telephone call may be hindered, pre-
venting the use of mobile devices (including emergency calls). Connecting an external audio source to the AUX-IN multimedia port. The radio device switches to AUX-IN (display on the centre of the screen: AUX). Lower the base volume on the radio. Start playback on the external audio source. The output volume of an external audio source connected must be adjusted to that of the re-
maining audio sources. During external audio source playback, the vol-
ume can only be adjusted on the device. If the external audio source playback is interrup-
ted or if the connector is removed from the AUX-
IN multimedia port, the device will resume the last playback mode. Connecting an iPod to the USB port The USB port is located on the front of the unit. Whenever an iPod is connected, specific iPod playlists can be selected in the upper selection area (Playlists, Artists, Albums etc.). The iPod selection menu is controlled as usual. Track control is restricted to the connected iPod. Connect the iPod to the USB port. The radio device switches to iPOD mode (display on the centre of the screen: iPOD). Lower the base volume on the radio. Start playback on the device. The output volume of an iPod connected must be adjusted to that of the remaining audio sour-
ces. There may be noise interferences if the ex-
ternal audio source is used on the vehicle's 12 V power outlet. Connecting an external Media Player via Bluetooth The external Media Player, for example, a mobile phone, must support the Bluetooth A2DP or AVRCP profile. During Bluetooth audio playback, audio files played by a Media Player connected via Blue-
tooth can be played on the vehicle's loudspeak-
ers. 158 Owner's Manual WARNING If a mobile phone is not secured or not properly secured in the vehicle, it could be flung though the interior during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident. This can cause severe injuries. Never place or attach mobile phones on doors, windscreen, above or near areas marked with AIRBAG on the steering wheel, dashboard, seat backrests, or be-
tween these areas and vehicle occupants. Mobile phones may cause severe injuries in case of accidents, especially if the airbags are triggered. WARNING Always switch mobile phones off when filling the gas tank in areas subject to explosions. Electromagnetic radiation can generate sparks which can in turn start a fire. Mobile phones may automatically connect to the mobile communication network when the Bluetooth radio is disconnected. WARNING If you use mobile phones in the car without an external aerial, electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle could exceed limit values. This also ap-
plies to external aerials which have not been correctly installed. Maintain a minimum distance of approxi-
mately 20 centimetres between the mobile phone's antenna and the heart pacemaker, since the former may interfere with the lat-
ter. Do not carry activated mobile phones in chest pockets directly over heart pacemak-
ers. Turn off mobile phones immediately when-
ever there is suspicion of interference with pacemakers. WARNING Sudden volume variations may occur when switching audio sources. Lower the base volume before switching au-
dio sources. NOTICE Mobile phones must always be turned off in locations in which their use is prohibited. The radiation generated by mobile phones may cause interference with delicate medical and technical equipment, which may hinder or damage such devices. High speed, unfavourable weather, and poor network connection may hinder mobile phone calls inside the vehicle. Follow the mobile phone preparation in-
struction manual applicable to the vehicle to learn more about controls and operation. Follow the owner's manual of the mobile phone and accessory supplier, as well as po-
tential prescriptions regarding the use of head-
sets. Call interruption and reception flaws may occur in certain transmission blackout areas. Most electronic devices are shielded from RF signals (high frequency). In some rare cases, however, electronic devices may not be shielded against the radio's RF signals. This may result in damages. Media Plus (RCD 320G 2 DIN) 159
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Main menu PHONE Please refer to and at the start of the chapter on page 158. Fig. 148 PHONE main menu. Fig. 149 PHONE main menu: connection established. After the first pairing process, it will take a few minutes until the paired mobile's phone contact list becomes available on the radio display. Press the PHONE device button to access the PHONE main menu Fig. 148. Current audio playback is maintained. Main menu displays PHONE The name of the PHONE menu is displayed on the upper line of the screen. Functions, actions, names, and phone numbers or the name of the paired phone may be displayed on the centre of the screen Fig. 1481). During an active call, TALKING is displayed on the centre of the screen. The symbol indicates an existing Bluetooth connection. Function button on the PHONE main menu Action Briefly press the func-
tion button REDIAL . Function Redial and recent call lists: the last 15 calls are displayed. The conversation se-
lection mode is ac-
cessed. The contact list is ac-
cessed. Briefly press the func-
tion button VOICE . Briefly press the func-
tion button CONTACTS . 1) Depending on the mobile phone brand, this function is not available in HFP connections. 160 Owner's Manual Action Briefly press the func-
tion button PAIR . Briefly press the func-
tion button CONNECT . Briefly press the func-
tion button DELETE . Function The mobile phone is paired to the radio via Bluetooth page 161. The mobile phone paired to the radio is connected page 162. Deletes the paired mo-
bile phone from the ra-
dio memory page 163. Pairing mobile phones to the radio Please refer to chapter on page 158. and at the start of the All mobile phones must be paired once with the radio via the Bluetooth Hands Free profile.1) The pairing process may take a few minutes. Valid for vehicles with chargers: mobile phone connection to the charger (phone support) is not required to perform the pairing process. Refer to the mobile phone manufacturer's in-
structions and prepare the mobile phone for pairing. Keep the mobile phone at hand, since during the first pairing process between the radio and the mobile phone additional entries to the mobile phone are required. Step 1: enable Bluetooth connection visibility Before pairing the mobile phone, ensure there are no other nearby devices that could connect to the radio via Bluetooth. If necessary, disable Bluetooth in such devices during the pairing process. To switch the radio into visible mode, proceed as follows:
Switch the radio on. Open the PHONE main menu On the radio, briefly press the function button PAIR . The radio will now be visible to other devices with Bluetooth for approximately 60 seconds. The mobile phone must be paired to the radio within these 60 seconds, since the radio's Blue-
tooth visibility is automatically interrupted after such period. Step 2: pair the mobile phone Activate the Bluetooth feature in the mobile phone. Start searching for Bluetooth devices in the mobile phone. A list of devices found is dis-
played. Select VW RADIO. The 4-to-6-digit PIN code displayed on the ra-
dio screen must match the 4-to-6-digit PIN code displayed on the mobile phone. Entering an incorrect PIN code interrupts the pairing process. In this case, repeat the pairing proc-
ess. If the PIN code matches, press the YES func-
tion button on the radio and confirm the Blue-
tooth connection in the mobile phone. Confirm any mobile phone inquiries regarding whether subsequent Bluetooth connections can be performed without reinserting the PIN code. This will allow the Bluetooth connection to be automatically performed the next time the radio is switched on page 162. The pairing process is now complete. Contact in-
formation in the mobile contact list will be trans-
ferred to the vehicle.2) 1) If the mobile phone is used as a media source and not to make phone calls, the mobile phone can also be connected via the A2DP or AVRC Bluetooth profile. 2) Depends on the mobile phone. Media Plus (RCD 320G 2 DIN) 161
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. User profiles The radio supports up to 5 user profiles. If anoth-
er mobile phone must be paired to the radio, at least one user profile must be deleted page 163. Contact lists and call lists are assigned to a spe-
cific user profile and memorized in the radio. When the respective mobile phone is reconnec-
ted, this data will become available. Contact list entries that have been altered will be automati-
cally updated in the radio upon each new con-
nection. Only 1 active user profile can be connected to the radio at any given time. If another mobile phone must be connected, the active user profile must be first disconnected from the radio page 163. Exception: a mobile phone may be connected via the Hands Free profile, while an-
other mobile is connected via A2DP as an exter-
nal audio source. Connecting mobile phones paired to the radio Please refer to chapter on page 158. and at the start of the In order to use mobile phone features, the phone must be paired page 161 and connected to the radio. Certain settings can only be accessed through the mobile phone if, for example, button block-
ing, button sounds, or warning sounds are deac-
tivated or if the mobile phone display light is ac-
tive. Automatic connection After switching on the radio, it automatically scans for mobile phones paired in sequence, starting from the last device connected. For such, proceed as follows:
Turn on the mobile phone and Bluetooth. Switch the radio on. Some settings in the mobile phone may be re-
quired in order for the radio system to automati-
cally connect to the phone (authorization) page 161. Manual connection If the mobile phone is connected after the radio has been switched on, and if the automatic con-
nection is not working or if another paired mo-
bile phone must be connected to the radio, the connection must be established manually. On the radio, briefly press the function button CONNECT . A list containing all paired mobile phones is displayed. Turn the setting knob to scroll the list down or up. An entry will always be marked. Turn the right-hand setting knob until the de-
sired entry is marked. Press the right-hand setting knob or unit but-
ton briefly to select the desired entry. If a mobile phone is already connected to the radio, deactivate the Bluetooth in all other mobile phones in range in order to prevent connection errors. The Bluetooth connection range is approximately 10 metres. Functions with connected mobile phones Please refer to chapter on page 158. and at the start of the The following applies to paired mobile phones:
The mobile phone is connected to a built-in microphone in the radio. Call audio is played on the vehicle's loudspeak-
ers. In this case, radio, CD, and other playback modes are interrupted (muted). Phone calls can be accepted, rejected, or ended through the radio. The Bluetooth connection remains active until the radio or mobile phone is switched off or until the active Bluetooth connection is inter-
rupted. Phone calls are transferred to the mobile phone if the radio is switched off. When performing phone calls with the radio unit switched off and the vehicle ignition switched on, the unit is automatically activa-
ted and the call is transferred to the vehicle's speakers. To perform a phone call solely via the mobile phone set, disconnect the phone 162 Owner's Manual Turn the setting knob to scroll the list down or up. An entry will always be marked. Turn the right-hand setting knob until the de-
sired entry is marked. Press the right-hand setting knob or unit but-
ton briefly to select the desired entry. If requested, confirm the removal process by pressing the function button Yes or cancel the process by pressing No. from the radio unit page 163, Disconnecting the active Bluetooth connection or activate private mode. In case of mobile phones that support Ad-
vanced Audio Distribution Profile (A2DP), songs recorded on the mobile phone may be played via an appropriate radio. Disconnecting the active Bluetooth connection On the radio, briefly press the function button PAIR . OR: perform the corresponding function on the mobile phone. Deletes the paired mobile phone from the radio memory On the radio, briefly press the function button PAIR . If 5 mobile phones are already paired to the radio, the radio display will read BT FULL for approximately 2 seconds and a tone will be heard. If a new mobile phone is paired to the radio, the pairing with the mobile phone that has been most idle will be automatically de-
leted. OR: briefly press the DELETE function button. A list containing all paired mobile phones is displayed. Media Plus (RCD 320G 2 DIN) 163
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Settings Change settings If the list of tracks or folders is displayed, the volume can be adjusted using the right-
hand rotary/push button . This maintains the display and no volume bar is displayed on the lower part of the screen. Fig. 150 SETUP menu: set the on volume. Press the unit button MENU from any menu Fig. 150 4 . Press the function buttons to open the respec-
tive settings menu Fig. 150 1 . Turn the setting knob to change current set-
tings Fig. 150 5 . OR: briefly press the unit button or to change the current settings Fig. 150 6 . Close the setup menu The settings menu will be closed if no selection is made for more than approxi-
mately 5 seconds. OR: if the unit button MENU Fig. 150 4 is briefly pressed. General system and function settings SETUP is displayed on the upper line of the screen. Settings menus overview The range of possible settings depends on the country, unit, and the vehicle's version. 164 Owner's Manual Function button SDV ON VOL AUX LVL PDC VOL SCROLL DISPLAY Settings Set volume increase based on speed page 165. Set the maximum on volume page 165. Set the playback vol-
ume from other audio sources page 165. Set the current audio source volume upon activation of the park-
ing distance warning system page 165. Activate or deactivate the function that dis-
plays the full track ti-
tle. While this function is activated, whenever a specific track's infor-
mation is too extensive to be displayed on the centre of the screen, such information is scrolled on the screen. The display of data is-
sued via RDS by radio stations cannot be al-
tered. Adjust display bright-
ness intensity in 5 dif-
ferent levels. GALA: Set volume increase based on speed SDV will be displayed on the centre of the screen. The speed-dependant volume increase automati-
cally adjusts the volume based on the vehicle's speed. The volume increase degree is set in levels be-
tween SDV 1 and SDV 7. If a higher value is set, the radio increases the volume at low speeds. If a lower value is set, the radio increases the volume at high speeds. On volume MAX ON VOL Fig. 150 2 is displayed on the cen-
tre of the screen, and the volume bar is displayed directly underneath Fig. 150 3 . When turning the device on, if the volume is higher than the on volume, the latter is applied. When turning the device on, if the volume is low-
er than the on volume, the former is applied. If the device is muted when turned off, it will re-
main muted when turned back on. Adjust the playback volume AUX LEVEL is displayed on the centre of the screen. The on volume for some external audio sources
(AUX) may be adjusted to the playback volume of other audio sources. If the playback volume of an audio source needs to be increased, first lower the base volume in the radio system. If the connected audio source has very low vol-
ume, increase the output volume in the external audio source, if possible. If this procedure is not sufficient, define the on volume in the system settings as AUX LEVEL 2 or AUX LEVEL 3. If the connected audio source has distorted or very high volume, reduce the output volume in the external audio source, if possible. If this pro-
cedure is not sufficient, define as AUX LEVEL 2 or AUX LEVEL 1. Playback volume with parking distance warning system activated The volume of the current audio source will be reduced to this preset level when the parking distance warning system is active. ATTENUA. 0: no volume reduction. ATTENUA. 1: low volume reduction (audio source volume 13) ATTENUA. 2: medium volume reduction (audio source volume 7) ATTENUA. 3: high volume reduction (audio source volume 0) This function only applies to vehicles equipped with parking distance warning system. Due to legal requirements from specific countries, some functions can no longer be selected when driving over certain speed limits. Media Plus (RCD 320G 2 DIN) 165
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Transporting Stowing cargo Always safely store heavy loads on the bed and ensure even weight distribution. Always use suit-
able securing straps with the fastening rings to secure heavy objects. Never overload the vehicle. Both the payload and the distribution of the load in the vehicle affect driving response and braking distance
. Stow all items of luggage in the vehicle securely The vehicle or bed floors must be free from oil and dust, properly swept and dried in order to prevent cargoes from sliding. Check permitted axle cargoes and total per-
mitted vehicle weight. Distribute cargoes on the vehicle over the roof and bed as evenly as possible. Heavy objects must be stowed between the rear axle and the front area of the bed. Avoid heavy single-point loads over the vehicle floor. Always distribute any loads in the vehicle as evenly as possible. Fasten objects in the luggage compartment to strapping eyelets with appropriate straps page 166. Adjust tyre pressure according to the vehicle load. Refer to the tyre pressure sticker page 223. In vehicles with tyre pressure control system, set the new load conditions when necessary page 217. WARNING Objects that are not secured, or are secured in-
correctly, can cause serious injuries in the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or accident. This applies particularly if objects are struck by the airbag when activated and then flung through the vehicle interior. Please apply the following rules to reduce the risk of acci-
dents:
Always stow all objects in the vehicle secure-
ly. Always stow luggage and heavy objects in the luggage compartment. 166 Owner's Manual Always use suitable straps to prevent lug-
gage from entering the deployment zones of the side airbag or the front airbag in the event of a sudden driving or braking ma-
noeuvre or an accident. Objects should be stowed in the vehicle inte-
rior in such a way that they can never enter the airbag deployment zones while the vehi-
cle is in motion. Always keep stowage compartments closed while driving. Stowed objects must never cause passengers to assume an incorrect sitting position. Any seat blocked by stowed objects must not be used by any passengers. WARNING The vehicle handling and braking effect may al-
ter significantly if large or heavy objects are be-
ing transported. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions. Accelerate carefully and gently. Avoid sudden braking and driving manoeu-
vres. Brake earlier than in normal driving. Observe information regarding towing and page 172, Towing a trailer luggage carri-
ers page 170, Roof rack. Luggage compartment Introduction Always stow heavy objects on the front area of the bed instead of inside the vehicle. WARNING When the vehicle is not in use, always lock the doors and dropside to reduce the risk of severe or fatal injuries. Never leave children playing unattended in or around the vehicle, especially when the bed cover is open. Children could climb into the bed and shut the bed cover. In these situations, children would not be able to leave the bed by themselves. This could lead to severe or fatal injuries. Never let children play in or around the vehi-
Cargo or luggage stowage Please refer to chapter on page 166. and at the start of the cle. Never travel in the bed. WARNING Objects that are not secured, or are secured in-
correctly, can cause serious injuries in the event of a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre or accident. This applies particularly if objects are struck by the airbag when activated and then flung through the vehicle interior. Please apply the following rules to reduce the risk of acci-
dents:
Always stow all objects in the vehicle secure-
ly. Always stow luggage and heavy objects in the luggage compartment. Always fasten objects with appropriate strapping tapes or tension belts. Always keep stowage compartments closed while driving. Do not stow any hard, heavy or sharp objects in any of the vehicle's open stowage areas, on the luggage compartment cover or on the dashboard without proper securing. Remove any hard, heavy or sharp objects from items of clothing and bags inside the vehicle and stow them securely. WARNING Transporting heavy objects changes the vehi-
cle's handling and increases the braking dis-
tance. Heavy loads that are not properly stow-
ed or secured in the vehicle can lead to a loss of vehicle control and can cause serious injuries. Transporting heavy objects changes the ve-
hicle's handling and the centre of gravity. The payload should be distributed as evenly as possible in the vehicle. Always secure heavy objects as far back into the luggage compartment as possible. NOTICE Hard objects could chafe against the wires of the heating element in the rear window and cause damage. Fig. 151 On the roof: cross member and pivot sup-
port. Depending on the vehicle version, the cross member and pivot support may not be available. Use only the roof cross strut Fig. 151 A and articulated supports B to support larger objects that do not fit the luggage compartment
. WARNING Use pivot supports to fasten light objects (e.g. surfboards) that cannot be adequately stowed on the bed floor. The maximum load supported by the roof cross member is 45 kg. All cargo and luggage must be safely stow-
ed, using strapping supports, roof cross member, and pivot supports when available. Transporting 167
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Strapping eyelets Fixed strapping supports Please refer to chapter on page 166. and at the start of the Please refer to chapter on page 166. and at the start of the Fig. 153 On the bed: fixed supports 1 for vehicles without bed canvas and 2 for vehicles with bed canvas. Depending on the vehicle version, fixed strapping supports may not be available. Fixed strapping supports Fig. 153 assist in load or luggage distribution on the luggage compart-
ment. Fig. 152 Bed: strapping eyelets. There are strapping eyelets on the luggage com-
partment to fasten objects Fig. 152 (arrows). The maximum strapping eyelets' traction load is 300 kgf (approximately 3,000 N). Check the luggage compartment capacity in page 266. WARNING Improper or damaged strapping tapes or ten-
sion belts may break during braking manoeu-
vres or in case of accidents. In this case, objects may be projected towards the vehicle, causing severe or fatal injuries. Always secure loads properly using suitable and undamaged securing straps or tension belts. Safely attach strapping tapes or tension belts on strapping eyelets. Loose objects on the bed may suddenly slide and change the vehicle's direction. Also attach light and small objects. Never exceed the maximum strapping eyelet traction capacity. Appropriate cargo protection systems and tension belts may be acquired from quali-
fied workshops. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. 168 Owner's Manual Sliding strapping supports Please refer to chapter on page 166. and at the start of the Fig. 154 On the bed: sliding support for vehicles without bed canvas. the appropriate locking position. Locking posi-
tions are determined by locks throughout the track. To fasten the support
, turn the handle in the opposite direction indicated by the arrow A . WARNING Ensure that sliding supports are properly fas-
tened in locking positions throughout the track before driving. Otherwise, loads or luggage may become loose. Luggage compartment access step Please refer to chapter on page 166. and at the start of the Fig. 155 On the bed: sliding support for vehicles with bed canvas. Depending on the vehicle version, sliding strap-
ping supports may not be available. Sliding strapping supports Fig. 154 or Fig. 155 assist in load or luggage distribution on the luggage compartment. Adjusting sliding support positions In both versions Fig. 154 or Fig. 155, adjust-
ing sliding support positions is based on the fol-
lowing concept:
To release the support, turn the handle in the direction of the arrow A . Firmly press the support in the direction of the arrow B and, simultaneously, slid through the track in the direction of the arrows C , until Fig. 156 On the vehicle's side: bed access step. Depending on the vehicle version, luggage com-
partment climbing step may not be available. The foot step support Fig. 156 is provided in each side of the vehicle, facilitating access to the luggage compartment. WARNING Only use the lateral steps to access the cargo compartment, for example, when loading or unloading the vehicle. NOTICE When accessing the luggage compartment, be careful not to damage the vehicle paint. The maximum admissible load over each step is 120 kg. Transporting 169
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Roof rack Introduction The roof rack only applies to some New Saveiro versions. The vehicle is provided with two vertical ribs, and cross struts may be acquired at Volkswagen Dealerships. The vehicle's roof was designed to optimize aer-
odynamics. Only additional roof rack supports cleared by Volkswagen may be used. When should the roof rack cross members be removed:
When they're no longer necessary, thus spar-
ing fuel, the wind noise is reduced and theft of the roof rack is avoided. When the vehicle passes through an auto-
wash system. When the vehicle level exceeds the maximum passage height in a garage, for example. WARNING When transporting heavy or large objects in the roof carrier, vehicle driving conditions are al-
tered due to the shift of the gravity centre and increased wind resistance surface. Always secure loads properly using suitable and undamaged securing straps or tension belts. Heavy, large, long or flat loads negatively af-
fect the vehicle's aerodynamics, centre of gravity and driving behaviour. Avoid abrupt and sudden braking and driving manoeuvres. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions. NOTICE Remove the roof carrier before submitting the vehicle into an auto-wash system. The vehicle level is altered after assembling a roof carrier and stowing loads. Compare the vehicle level with available passage heights, for example, in road bridges and garage doors. 170 Owner's Manual The roof antenna must not be impaired by the roof carrier and the carried load. Remove roof rack cross beams when not in use, preventing unnecessary fuel consump-
tion due to greater aerodynamic resistance. Using the roof rack Please refer to chapter on page 170. and at the start of the Fig. 157 Roof rack longitudinal supports (both sides). The longitudinal supports are but the base for a complete load transport system and are supplied with the vehicle. For luggage transport, addition-
al cross beams are necessary for safety reasons. For safety reasons, exclusive additional supports are required when transporting luggage, bicycles, surf boards, skiing equipment, and boats. Addi-
tional accessories can be acquired at Volkswagen Dealerships. Conventional roof carriers must not be installed in vertical ribs. We recommend that only roof rack cross beams homologated by Volkswagen are used. WARNING Improperly fastening base supports and roof carriers, as well as its incorrect use, may cause the entire system to detach from the roof, re-
sulting in injuries and accidents. If additional cross members homologated by Volkswagen are not used or are improperly fixed, the transported load or the roof rack itself may fall off the vehicle roof. Always follow the instructions provided in the owner's manual. Only use roof carriers when base supports are properly fastened and the roof carrier presents proper use conditions. Correctly mount the roof rack cross mem-
bers. Check fastening points before driving and re-
tighten them after short drives if necessary. In case of long hauls, check the bolt and fas-
tening spots upon each stop. Always assemble special roof carriers for bi-
cycles, skiing equipment, surf boards, etc. correctly. Do not modify or repair roof carriers and base supports. NOTICE Always observe roof carrier cross beam manufac-
turer's installation instructions. Keep roof carrier manufacturer's installation and use instructions along with the vehicle's documents. NOTICE Damages caused by improper roof carrier fasten-
ing are not covered by the warranty. The vehicle level is altered after assembling a roof carrier and stowing loads. Compare the vehicle level with available passage heights, for example, in road bridges and garage doors. Read and follow installation instructions provided along with the roof carrier, always keeping such instructions in the vehicle. It is paramount to know applicable laws re-
garding the sizes of volumes transported over vehicle roofs. Loading the roof carrier Please refer to chapter on page 170. and at the start of the
. Maximum roof weight permitted The maximum roof weight permitted is 45 kg. The roof load encompasses the weight of the roof carrier and the load to be transported over the roof Always mind the weight of the roof carrier and load to be transported. Never exceed the maxi-
mum roof load permitted. When using roof carriers with lower load capaci-
ties, the maximum roof load permitted may not be used. In this case, the roof carrier may only be loaded until the weight limit indicated in its in-
stallation instructions. Distributing load Evenly distribute the load between the members and along their full length
. Controlling fastening points After the roof rack members were fastened, check them after a short drive and subsequently at regular intervals. WARNING Accidents and severe injuries can occur if the maximum permitted roof weight is exceeded. Never exceed the maximum roof weight per-
mitted, maximum axle weight permitted and the total vehicle weight permitted. Never exceed the roof carrier load capacity, even if under the maximum roof load capaci-
ty. In this case load the roof rack beams only to the weight limit indicated by the manu-
facturer's instructions. Fasten heavy objects as far ahead as possible and uniformly distribute the load. WARNING Loose or incorrectly fastened loads may fall from the roof carrier and cause accidents and injuries. Always secure loads properly using suitable and undamaged securing straps or tension belts. Properly fasten loads. The load may be safely fastened when a roof rack system homologated by Volkswagen is used and is properly mounted
. Sometimes the roof rack beams remain mounted even if they're not longer neces-
sary. Due to the greater aerodynamic resistance, Transporting 171
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Always secure loads properly using suita-
ble and undamaged securing straps. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions. Trailers with a high centre of gravity are more likely to tip over than trailers with a low centre of gravity. Avoid abrupt and sudden braking and driv-
ing manoeuvres. Take special care when overtaking. Reduce your speed immediately if the trailer shows even the slightest sign of snaking. When towing a trailer do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph). This also applies to countries where higher speeds are per-
mitted Always obey speed limits. In some areas speed limits for vehicles towing trailers are lower than for vehicles without trailers. Never try to stop a trailer from snaking by increasing your speed. In new vehicles, do not tow a trailer during the first 1,000 km page 85, Running-in. Technical requirements Please refer to on page 172. at the start of the chapter Only use a towing bracket which is approved for the gross weight of the trailer you wish to tow. The towing bracket must be suitable for your ve-
hicle and trailer and must be securely bolted to the vehicle's chassis. Always check and follow the data provided by the towing bracket manu-
facturer. Towing brackets fitted to the rear bumper Never fit a towing bracket to the rear bumper or to its fastening. A towing bracket must not pre-
vent the rear bumper from functioning correctly. Do not carry out any alterations to the exhaust or brake systems. Check regularly to see if the tow-
ing bracket is fitted securely. the vehicle will unnecessarily consume more fuel. Therefore remove the roof rack beams when no longer in use. The load transported on the roof must be properly fastened. Transporting loads on the roof changes the vehicle's behaviour. Towing a trailer Introduction Observe any country-specific regulations when towing a trailer and using a towing bracket. Your car is intended mainly for transporting pas-
sengers and luggage. However, it can also be used to tow a trailer or caravan, provided that it is fitted with the appropriate technical equip-
ment. This additional maximum trailer weight will affect the durability, fuel consumption and performance of the vehicle and, in certain cir-
cumstances, can shorten the service intervals. Driving with a trailer not only places an extra load on the vehicle, but also requires increased concentration on the part of the driver. In low temperatures, fit winter tyres to both the vehicle and the trailer. WARNING It is dangerous to transport people in a trailer and it may also be illegal. WARNING Improper use of the towing bracket can cause injury and accidents. Only use the towing bracket if it is fitted properly and is not damaged. Do not perform any modifications or repairs to the towing bracket. WARNING Towing a trailer and transporting heavy or bul-
ky items can change the way the vehicle's han-
dling and cause accidents. Therefore, observing the instructions below is essential to ensure the safety of the driver, passengers, and other road users. 172 Owner's Manual Engine cooling system There is an increased load on the engine and the cooling system when towing a trailer. The cool-
ing system must contain sufficient coolant and be able to cope with the extra load added by the trailer. Trailer brake If the trailer is equipped with its own brake sys-
tem, observe any legal requirements. The trailer's brake system must never be connected to the ve-
hicle brake system. Emergency breakaway cable Always use the emergency breakaway cable be-
tween your vehicle and the trailer page 173. Rear trailer lights The rear lights on the trailer must meet legal re-
quirements page 173. Never connect the trailer lights directly to the electrical system of your vehicle. If you are un-
certain whether the trailer has been connected correctly, please contact a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Exterior mirrors you are unable to see the traffic behind the trail-
er in the vehicle's standard exterior mirrors, addi-
tional exterior mirrors should be fitted in accord-
ance with any country-specific regulations. Be-
fore setting off, adjust the mirrors so that you have a sufficient view of the rear. WARNING If the towing bracket is unsuitable or incorrect-
ly fitted, the trailer can become detached from the vehicle and cause severe injuries. NOTICE The vehicle electronics may be damaged if the trailer lights are not connected properly. The vehicle electronics may be damaged if the trailer uses too much electricity. Never connect the trailer's electrical system directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or to other sources of electricity. Use only suitable connectors to supply power to the trailer. Volkswagen recommends additional serv-
ices between the normal inspection inter-
vals if the vehicle is used frequently for towing a trailer. Engaging and connecting the trailer Please refer to on page 172. at the start of the chapter Emergency breakaway cable Always fasten the emergency breakaway cable properly in the towing vehicle. In this case, leave some slack for the breakaway cable to allow curves. However, the breakaway cable must not drag on the ground while driving. Rear trailer lights Ensure that the rear trailer lights are functioning properly and are in compliance with legal re-
quirements. WARNING Unsuitable or incorrectly connected electrical cables may power the trailer, cause malfunc-
tions in the vehicle electronics and cause se-
vere injuries. All activities regarding the electrical system can only be conducted by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. Never connect the trailer's electrical system directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or to other sources of electricity. NOTICE A trailer parked over the support wheel or over the trailer supports must not be connected to the vehicle. For example, the vehicle is lifted or low-
ered due to load changes or tyre damages. In this case, major forces act over the trailer bracket and over the trailer, which may damage the vehicle and the trailer. If the engine is not running and electrical equipment is switched on in the trailer via the trailer socket, the vehicle battery will dis-
charge. Transporting 173
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Loading the trailer WARNING Accidents and serious injuries can occur if you exceed the vehicle's maximum permitted gross axle weight rating, drawbar load, gross vehicle weight rating or gross combination weight rat-
ing. Never exceed the specified values. Never let the actual weights at the front and rear axles exceed the gross axle weight rat-
ings. Never exceed the permissible gross ve-
hicle weight for the vehicle with weight at the front and rear of the vehicle. WARNING Moving loads can severely impair the vehicle's stability and driving safety, which can cause ac-
cidents and severe injuries. Always load trailers correctly. Always secure loads properly using suitable and undamaged securing straps. Towing a trailer Please refer to on page 172. at the start of the chapter Headlight adjustment Towing a trailer can raise the front end of the ve-
hicle enough for the dipped beam to blind other road users. The headlights must be adjusted in a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. Things to note when driving with a trailer If the trailer has an overrun brake, apply the brakes gently at first, and then firmly. This will prevent the jerking that can be caused by the trailer wheels locking. The gross combination weight causes the braking distance to increase. Select a low gear before driving down a hill. This enables you to use the engine braking ef-
fect to slow down the vehicle. The brake sys-
tem could otherwise overheat and fail. Please refer to on page 172. at the start of the chapter Maximum trailer weight and drawbar load The maximum trailer weight is the weight that the vehicle can pull
. The drawbar load is the weight that the towing bracket exerts on the ball coupling vertically from above page 258. The figures for maximum trailer weight and draw bar weights that are given on the data plate of the towing bracket are for certification purposes only. The correct values for your specific model, which may be lower than these figures, are provi-
ded in the vehicle registration documents. All da-
ta in the official vehicle documents take prece-
dence over this data. In the interest of road safety, Volkswagen recom-
mends that you always transport the maximum drawbar load. The response of the trailer on the road will be poor if the drawbar load is too small. The drawbar load increases the weight on the rear axle and reduces the maximum load level as a result. Gross combination weight The gross combination weight is comprised of actual loaded vehicle and loaded trailer weights. Loading the trailer The weight of the load should be distributed evenly. The maximum permitted drawbar load should be utilised. Do not place the load only at the front or the rear of the trailer:
Distribute loads in the trailer so that heavy ob-
jects are either over or as near to the axle as possible. Secure all loads on the trailer properly. Tyre pressure Follow the trailer manufacturer's recommenda-
tions concerning the tyre pressure for the trailer tyres. When towing a trailer, inflate the wheels on the towing vehicle with the maximum permitted tyre pressure page 217. 174 Owner's Manual The vehicle's centre of gravity and the vehi-
cle's handling will change because of the max-
imum trailer weight and the increased com-
bined towing weight of the vehicle and trailer. The weight distribution of a loaded trailer with an unladen towing vehicle is very unfavoura-
ble. When driving in this situation, drive partic-
ularly carefully and slowly. Pulling off on hills when towing a trailer Depending on the steepness of the slope and the total weight of the trailer and vehicle, a parked vehicle towing a trailer could roll back a short distance when moving off on a hill. When towing a trailer, pull off on hills as follows:
Pull the handbrake. Press and hold the brake pedal. Press the clutch fully. Engage the 1st gear. Release the brake pedal. Slowly release the clutch. Only let go of the handbrake lever when the engine has sufficient power to move off. WARNING Incorrect trailer towing can cause loss of vehi-
cle control and severe personal injuries. Towing a trailer and transporting heavy or bulky items can change the way the vehicle's handling and increase the braking distance. Always drive carefully and defensively. Brake earlier than in normal driving. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions. Reduce your speed, especially when going downhill. Accelerate carefully and gently. Avoid abrupt and sudden braking and driving manoeuvres. Take special care when overtaking. Reduce your speed immediately if the trailer shows even the slightest sign of snaking. Never try to stop a trailer from snaking by increasing your speed. In some areas speed limits for vehicles tow-
ing trailers are lower than for vehicles with-
out trailers. Retrofitting a towing bracket Please refer to on page 172. at the start of the chapter Fig. 158 Attachment points for retrofitting a tow-
ing bracket. Figure Fig. 158 illustrates, as an example, the fastening point to retrofit a towing bracket in the New Saveiro model. Towing bracket retrofitting must be executed in accordance with the instructions provided by the bracket's manufacturer, always considering the attachment points indicated in Fig. 158 A . The towing bracket securing points can be seen from the lower part of the vehicle. The towing bracket must be secured to such points. Transporting 175
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Retrofitting a towing bracket Observe applicable laws in the country in which the vehicle will run. It might be necessary to disassemble and reas-
semble the rear bumper. Additionally, it is also necessary to tighten the towing bracket screws with a torque meter and connect a socket to the vehicle's electrical system. For such, special tools and expertise are required. The figure indicates securing points that must be observed when installing towing brackets. WARNING Unsuitable or incorrectly connected electrical conductors may cause operating faults in all of the vehicle's electronic components, which may cause severe accidents and injuries. Never connect the trailer's electrical system directly to the electrical connections of the tail lights or to other improper sources of electricity. Use only suitable connectors for trailer connection. Trailer bracket retrofitting activities must be conducted by a qualified workshop. WARNING If the towing bracket is unsuitable or incorrect-
ly fitted, the trailer can become detached from the vehicle. This could lead to severe accidents and fatal injuries. NOTICE Towing a trailer represents a greater stress for the vehicle. Before deciding to retrofit, contact a Volkswagen Dealership to know if it is necessary to perform any modifications in the cooling sys-
tem or if thermal shielding plates must be instal-
led. Fuel Fuel handling safety guidelines WARNING Filling the tank incorrectly and improper han-
dling of fuel can cause explosions, fire and seri-
ous burns and injuries. Always ensure that the tank cap is closed properly to prevent the evaporation and spillage of fuel. Fuel is highly explosive and inflammable and can cause serious burns and other injuries. Fuel can spill out if the engine is not switch-
ed off or the filler nozzle is not fully inserted into the fuel filler neck when filling the tank. This may cause fires, explosions and serious burns and injuries. When filling the tank with fuel, the engine and the ignition must be switched off for safety reasons. When filling the tank, always switch off your mobile telephone and two-way radio or any other radio equipment. Electromagnetic ra-
diation can generate sparks which can in turn start a fire. When filling the tank, never get into the ve-
hicle. If in exceptional cases you have to en-
ter the vehicle, close the door and touch a metal object before touching the filler nozzle again. This will remove any spark-generating electrostatic charges from you. Sparks can cause a fire when filling the tank. Never fill the tank or fill up a spare canister near open flames, sparks or glowing items
(e.g. cigarettes). Electrostatic discharge and electromagnetic radiation must be avoided when filling the tank. Follow all applicable safety information pro-
vided by the filling station when filling the tank. Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the lug-
gage compartment. 176 Owner's Manual WARNING For safety reasons, Volkswagen does not rec-
ommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. Fuel can spill out of the full or empty canister and catch fire, especially in the event of an accident. This could cause explosions, fire and injuries. If, in exceptional circumstances, you have to transport a spare fuel canister, please note the following:
When refilling, never place the canister in or on top of the vehicle (e.g. in the lug-
gage compartment). There may be an electrostatic charge during refilling caus-
ing the fuel fumes to ignite. Always place the spare fuel canister on the ground. When filling a spare fuel canister, place the filler nozzle as far as possible into the filler opening. If the spare fuel canister is made of metal, the filler nozzle must have constant con-
tact with the canister in order to avoid static charging. Please follow all legislation concerning the use, stowage and transportation of spare fuel canisters. NOTICE Remove spilt fuel from the vehicle paint as quickly as possible in order to avoid damage to the wheel housing, tyres and vehicle paint. Do not run the tank empty. Irregular filling pe-
riods can cause backfiring and allow unburnt fuel to enter the exhaust system. This could damage the catalytic converter. After the fuel filler nozzle is automatically switched off for the first time, the tank will have reached its capacity. Do not force fuel filling, since fuel may overflow. When filling, fuel may be spilt on the ground, polluting the environment. Always fill the at authorized filling stations with proper fluid collection and disposal systems. Fuelling and fuel types Introduction The fuel cap is located at the rear right-hand side of the vehicle. The factory- fitted sticker on the inside of the tank flap indicates the fuel type that is required for the vehicle. WARNING Incorrect handling of fuel may cause explo-
sions, fire and severe burns and injuries. Fuel is highly explosive and inflammable. For safety reasons, Volkswagen does not rec-
ommend carrying a spare fuel canister in the vehicle. Fuel can spill out of the full or empty canister and catch fire, especially in the event of an accident. This could cause explo-
sions, fires and severe injuries. In exceptional cases, when it is necessary to transport spare fuel canisters, the instruc-
tions in page 177, Fuelling and fuel types must be followed. Never handle fuel near open flames, sparks or glowing items (e.g. lighters). Switch off your mobile telephone or two-
way radio when dealing with fuel. Electro-
magnetic radiation can generate sparks which can in turn start a fire. Electrostatic discharge and electromagnetic radiation must not be generated near fuels. Never spill fuel in the vehicle or in the lug-
gage compartment. Observe any valid safety information and legislation concerning the handling of fuels. NOTICE If the TOTALFLEX vehicle is immobilized by lack of fuel, the vehicle must be refilled with the last type of fuel used - petrol or ethanol. If it is necessary to fill the tank with a different type of fuel, the following may occur:
Cold starting difficulties. Considerable decrease in engine perform-
ance. Fuel 177
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Just one tank full of leaded fuel, or fuel containing other metallic additives (such as manganese), can seriously impair the efficiency and cause damages to the catalytic converter. TOTALFLEX engine Please refer to chapter on page 177. and at the start of the Petrol Vehicles must be driven using unleaded petrol free from any metallic additives (such as manga-
nese), with RON 95/E24 (blue) ethanol percent-
age. Petrol additives The quality of petrol influences the running prop-
erties, performance and service life of the en-
gine. Therefore, fuel up with quality fuel and, when necessary, use the adequate additives. The use of unsuitable petrol additives can cause considerable damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Metallic petrol additives should be avoided at all times. Ethanol The vehicle must be fuelled exclusively with hy-
drated ethanol, in accordance with applicable country laws. NOTICE The use of unsuitable petrol additives can cause considerable damage to the engine and catalytic converter. If, in an emergency, you have to use fuel dif-
ferent than specified, drive at medium engine speeds and avoid high engine loading. Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine loads. Failure to do so can result in engine damage!
Fill the tank with the recommended petrol as soon as possible. Just one tank full of leaded fuel, or fuel con-
taining other metallic additives (such as man-
ganese), can seriously impair the efficiency and cause considerable damages to the cata-
lytic converter. The vehicle must run for approximately 5 kilo-
metres to recognize the new fuel type, in order to prevent any of the scenarios above. After the fuel filler nozzle is automatically switched off for the first time, the tank will have reached its capacity. Do not force fuel filling, since fuel may overflow. When filling, fuel may be spilt on the ground, polluting the environment. Always fill the at authorized filling stations with proper fluid collection and disposal systems. When the airbags are triggered during an accident, the fuel supply is interrupted page 36, In case of airbag triggering - Crash detection function. Petrol engine Please refer to chapter on page 177. and at the start of the Petrol Vehicles with a petrol engine must be driven us-
ing unleaded petrol free from any metallic addi-
tives (such as manganese), in accordance with applicable country laws. Petrol additives The quality of petrol influences the running prop-
erties, performance and service life of the en-
gine. Therefore, fuel up with quality fuel and, when necessary, use the adequate additives. The use of unsuitable petrol additives can cause considerable damage to the engine and catalytic converter. Metallic petrol additives should be avoided at all times. NOTICE The use of unsuitable petrol additives can cause considerable damage to the engine and catalytic converter. If, in an emergency, you have to use petrol with higher or lower anhydrous ethanol pro-
portions, drive at medium engine speeds and avoid high engine loading. Avoid high engine speeds and heavy engine loads. Failure to do so can result in engine damage! Fill the tank with the recommended petrol as soon as pos-
sible. 178 Owner's Manual Filling the tank with petrol or ethanol Please refer to chapter on page 177. and at the start of the Fig. 159 Open tank flap with tank cap attached to the holder. Switch off the engine, ignition and the mobile telephones before filling the tank and leave them switched off during the process. Vehicles with TOTALFLEX engine were designed to use both petrol and ethanol in any amount. Check the fuel tank capacity in page 266. Opening the tank flap The tank flap is located at the rear of the vehi-
cle on the right. Open the tank flap by pulling it from the crease in the vehicle body work. Unfold the vehicle key bit, if necessary page 45. Insert the key in the tank flap lock cylinder and turn anticlockwise. Screw the cap anticlockwise and hang it over the tank flap Fig. 159. Filling the tank The correct fuel grade for your vehicle is shown on a sticker on the inside of the tank flap page 177. The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle clicks off for the first time
. Do not continue filling the tank after it switches off! The expansion space in the fuel tank will otherwise fill up and the fuel could spill out. This could also happen when the fuel warms up and expands. Closing the tank cap Turn the tank cap clockwise into the fuel filler neck until you hear it engage. Turn the vehicle key in the tank flap lock cylin-
der clockwise and remove it. Close the tank flap. The tank flap must be flush with the vehicle bodywork. WARNING Do not continue filling the tank once the filler nozzle stops automatically. The fuel tank can-
not be overfilled. This can cause fuel to splash out and overflow. This could cause explosions, fires and severe injuries. NOTICE If the TOTALFLEX vehicle is immobilized by lack of fuel, the vehicle must be refilled with the last type of fuel used - petrol or ethanol. If it is necessary to fill the tank with a different type of fuel, the following may occur:
Cold starting difficulties. Considerable decrease in engine perform-
ance. The vehicle must run for approximately 5 kilo-
metres to recognize the new fuel type, in order to prevent any of the scenarios above. NOTICE Remove spilt fuel from the vehicle paint as quick-
ly as possible in order to avoid damage to the wheel housing, tyres and vehicle paint. After the fuel filler nozzle is automatically switched off for the first time, the tank will have reached its capacity. Do not force fuel filling, since fuel may overflow. When filling, fuel may be spilt on the ground, polluting the environment. Always fill the at authorized filling stations with proper fluid collection and disposal systems. Fuel 179
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Engine control unit and exhaust gas emission control system Introduction WARNING The exhaust system components become very hot. This may cause fires. Park the vehicle so that no part of the ex-
haust system can come into contact with any inflammable material underneath the vehi-
cle, e.g. dry grass. Never apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con-
verter, diesel particulate filter or the heat shields on the exhaust system. following points to ensure that the exhaust sys-
tem and catalytic converter in the engine func-
tion properly for extended periods of time:
Fill the tank only with unleaded petrol free from other metallic additives (such as manga-
nese) Never allow the fuel tank to run completely dry. Never overfill engine oil page 205. Never push and/or pull the vehicle to start the engine (push starting), but rather use the jump starting system page 197. If you notice misfiring, uneven running or loss of power when the vehicle is moving, reduce speed immediately. The vehicle should be inspected at the nearest Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. If this happens, unburnt fuel can enter the exhaust system and escape into the atmos-
phere. The catalytic converter can also be dam-
aged by overheating!
Electronic engine power control
(EPC) Please refer to on page 180. at the start of the chapter The electronic engine power control (EPC) is a system designed to determine the throttle valve position based on the torque required by the driver through the electronic pedal (e-gas sys-
tem); the indicator lamp lights up in the event of system malfunctions. Under normal operating conditions, when the driver activates the accelerator pedal, the system transforms such request into a need for speed and power. By controlling engine components (sensors and actuators), the best performance possible is cal-
culated, based on the driver's request. Catalytic converter Please refer to on page 180. at the start of the chapter The catalytic converter is used for exhaust gas post-treatment and helps mitigate the emission of pollutants into the atmosphere. Observe the 180 Owner's Manual NOTICE Just one tank full of leaded fuel, or fuel contain-
ing other metallic additives (such as manganese), can seriously impair the efficiency and cause damages to the catalytic converter. Even when the exhaust purification system is working perfectly, there may be a smell of sulphur from the exhaust in some conditions. This depends on the sulphur content of the fuel being used. Often, it is simply a case of using a different fuel brand. Lambda probe Please refer to on page 180. at the start of the chapter The purpose of the lambda probe is to monitor exhaust gases through a sensor hit by led or oth-
er metallic additives (e.g. manganese) contained in the fuel, and gradually reduced. The lambda probe completely loses its efficiency after 10,000 km. The resulting lack of monitoring could cause engine malfunctions, such as:
changes in driving conditions;
hot engine starting problems;
increased fuel consumption. Activated charcoal filter - supply system When switching the ignition on, certain warning and indicator lamps flash to check functions. Such lamps go out after a few seconds. Please refer to on page 180. at the start of the chapter WARNING The supply system has an activated charcoal sys-
tem that accumulates hydrocarbons (steam) gen-
erated in the fuel tank (evaporative emission control), preventing such hydrocarbons from be-
ing released into the atmosphere. While the en-
gine is running, these accumulated hydrocarbons are used in the normal engine combustion proc-
ess. The activated charcoal filter prevents fuel tank gas hydrocarbons from being released into the atmosphere. Troubleshooting Please refer to on page 180. at the start of the chapter If the engine operates irregularly or in case of en-
gine jolts while driving, this could be related to insufficient fuel or low-quality fuel (e.g. water mixed in the fuel). When these signs appear, re-
duce speed immediately and go to the nearest authorised Volkswagen repairer, driving only at medium speed and with low engine demand. If these events occur immediately after filling the tank, switch off the engine immediately also to avoid secondary damages and seek assistance at an authorised Volkswagen repairer. Indicator lamps Engine management system fault (Elec-
tronic Power Control). On: the engine must immediately be checked at an authorised Volkswagen repairer Faulty emissions in the exhaust system
(OBD). On: slow down. Drive carefully to an authorised Volkswagen repairer. The en-
gine must be checked. Flashing: faulty catalytic converter. Reduce your speed. Carefully drive to the nearest Volkswagen Dealership or qualified work-
shop. The engine must be checked. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Failure to observe the warning lamps and text messages could lead to your vehicle breaking down in traffic, and to accidents and serious in-
juries. Never ignore any warning lamps or text mes-
sages that appear. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. NOTICE Failure to observe the illuminated indicator lamps and its descriptions and meanings could lead to vehicle damages. If the indicator lamps or are lit up, fuel consumption may be higher and engine performance reduced. Fuel quality Please refer to on page 180. at the start of the chapter Considering the impracticality of supervising all filling stations, Volkswagen recommends filling the tank in stations included in the Distributor Network, which have clear programs, in order to ensure product quality. Volkswagen Dealerships are prepared to handle engine sediments. Fuel injection system The vehicle is equipped with a fuel injection sys-
tem that, under normal circumstances, waives the need for any periodical cleaning process, ei-
ther with fuel additives or disassembling the in-
jection valves to clean ultrasound systems. Cleaning is required whenever damages or im-
proper engine function occur due to use of low-
quality fuel. In this case, Volkswagen recom-
mends visiting a Volkswagen, Dealership, which has suitable additives and equipment. Fuel 181 NOTICE Damages caused on the engine due to the use of improper or insufficient fuel are not covered by the warranty. If and when Vehicle toolkit Introduction Observe any country-specific legislation when securing your vehicle in the event of a break-
down. WARNING In the event of a sudden driving or braking ma-
noeuvre or accident, a loose vehicle toolkit and spare wheel could be flung though the vehicle and cause severe injuries. Always ensure that the vehicle toolkit or spare wheel are secured in its respective housings. WARNING Unsuitable or damaged tools in the vehicle toolkit can lead to accidents and injuries. Never work with unsuitable or damaged tools from the vehicle toolkit. 182 Owner's Manual Vehicle toolkit stowage and access
- Single cab Saveiro Please refer to on page 182. at the start of the chapter Fig. 160 Behind the passenger seat backrest: 1 vehicle toolkit securing straps and 2 vehicle toolkit bag. Fig. 161 Vehicle toolkit fastening straps. The vehicle toolkit's placement varies depending on the vehicle version and/or model. The passenger seat must be folded to access the vehicle toolkit page 60. Retrieving the vehicle toolkit To access the tool bag of vehicles with the front seat backrest folding lever: fold down the passenger seat. To access the tool bag of vehicles without the front seat backrest folding lever: push the seat to the front. Pull the fastening strap buckles in the direc-
tion of the arrow Fig. 161 3 . Retrieve the vehicle toolkit. Placement of the tools in the bag After use of the vehicle tools, ensure they are correctly positioned in the vehicle tool bag. Fit the jack in the bag and fully close it Fig. 160, with the jack base in the wider part of the bag. Insert the wheel wrench into the extractor hook to store in the tool bag. Fit the wheel wrench into its proper housing and ensure that the pawl Fig. 160 (magnify-
ing glass) is placed underneath the wheel wrench to prevent rattling when driving. Fit the emergency wheel adapter in its proper housing. Returning the vehicle toolkit Place the vehicle toolkit bag behind the pas-
senger seat, on top of the warning triangle and through the fastening straps, as per Fig. 160 in the direction of the arrow. For correct securing of the toolkit, position same with the velcro straps of the bag turned forward Fig. 160 2 . Firmly pull the straps 1 in the direction of the arrow Fig. 161 4 to secure the toolkit. Always ensure that the vehicle toolkit is properly fastened to the floor behind the passenger seat. If and when 183
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Vehicle toolkit stowage and access
- Double cab Saveiro Please refer to on page 182. at the start of the chapter Fig. 162 On the rear seat floor: access to the vehi-
cle toolkit housing. Fig. 163 Vehicle toolkit fastening handle. The vehicle toolkit's placement varies depending on the vehicle version and/or model. The passenger seat must be folded to access the vehicle toolkit page 60. Remove the vehicle toolkit Turn the knob in the direction of the arrow Fig. 162 and remove the lining completely to access the vehicle toolkit. Turn the knob anticlockwise Fig. 163 to un-
lock the jack and access the vehicle toolkit. 184 Owner's Manual Returning the vehicle toolkit Place the jack in the vehicle toolkit under the rear seat and turn the handle clockwise to lock it in place, secure the other tools in the vehicle toolkit. Position the vehicle toolkit lining and turn the knob counterclockwise to secure it in place Fig. 162 . Always make sure that the vehicle toolkit is correctly secured in the toolkit under the rear seat. Contents of the vehicle tool kit Please refer to on page 182. at the start of the chapter Fig. 164 Contents of the vehicle toolkit. The content of the vehicle toolkit depends on the vehicle equipment level. The following describes the maximum scope. Components of the vehicle toolkit. Fig. 164 Jack. Before reinserting the jack back into 1 the toolkit, close the jack with the box span-
ner until reaching the stop, in order to pre-
vent noises while driving. Lug wrench. Also used as a jack lever to lift the vehicle page 232. Adapter to remove or fasten the spare wheel. Wire hook for pulling off the centre cover, wheel covers and the wheel bolt caps. 3 4 2 Turn the jack back to its original position af-
ter use so it may be securely stored. Wiper blades Cleaning and replacing wiper blades - standard Fig. 165 Replacing windscreen wiper blades. Fig. 166 Replacing the rear window wiper blades. Standard window wiper blades may not be avail-
able, depending on the vehicle version. The factory-fitted window wiper blades are coat-
ed with graphite. The graphite coating allows the window wiper blades to silently slide over the window and ensures optimal cleaning perform-
ance Check the condition of the window wiper blades on a regular basis. Replace the window wiper blades whenever they are dirty or are not per-
forming properly Damaged window wiper blades must be replaced immediately. Window wiper blades can be bought at Volkswagen Dealerships or qualified workshops. Lift and fold out the window wiper arms. To lift or fold out window wiper arms, hold them only by the blade attachment area. Cleaning window wiper blades Lift and fold out the window wiper arms. Clean the window wiper blades carefully using a soft cloth
. Lower the window wiper arms back onto the window. Replacing windscreen wiper blades Lift and fold the windscreen wiper arms. Position the wiper in a perpendicular position to the wiper arm Fig. 165. Push the release lever as directed by the arrow A . Disengage the wiper as indicated by arrow B , move the wiper in the wiper arms opposite direction and remove the wiper in the opposite direction to the indicated by arrow B . Insert a new wiper blade of the same length and design onto the wiper arm repeating the removal procedure in reverse until the wiper engages audibly. Ensure the new blade is correctly installed. Fold the windscreen wiper arms back onto the windscreen. Replacing the rear window wiper blades Lift and fold the rear window wiper arm. Press and hold the release button Fig. 166 A at the same time pull off the windscreen wiper blade in the direction of the arrow. Remove the rear window wiper blade in the di-
rection of the arrow B . Insert a new rear window wiper blade of the same length and design into the rear window wiper arms until it is properly fitted. Fold the rear window wiper arm back towards the rear window. WARNING Worn or dirty window wiper blades reduce visi-
bility and increase the risk of accidents and se-
vere injuries. Replace window wiper blades whenever they are damaged or worn, and no longer appro-
priately perform their function. If and when 185
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. NOTICE Do not attempt to recover or reapply the graph-
ite layer of the window wiper blades. If this layer is damaged, replace the wiper blades. NOTICE Damaged or dirty window wiper blades may scratch the window. Detergents containing solvents, hard sponges and other sharp objects can damage the graphite coating during cleaning. Do not use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the win-
dows. Cleaning and replacing window wiper blades - Aerowischer Fig. 167 Replacing windscreen wiper blades. Fig. 168 Replacing the rear window wiper blades. Aerowischer window wiper blades may not be available, depending on the vehicle version. The factory-fitted window wiper blades are coat-
ed with graphite. The graphite coating allows the windscreen wiper blades to silently slide over the window and ensures optimal cleaning perform-
ance
. 186 Owner's Manual Check the condition of the window wiper blades on a regular basis. Replace the window wiper blades whenever they are dirty or are not per-
forming properly Damaged windscreen wiper blades must immedi-
ately be replaced. Wiper blades can be bought at an authorised Volkswagen repairer or qualified workshops. Lift and fold out the window wiper arms. To lift or fold out window wiper arms, hold them only by the blade attachment area. Cleaning window wiper blades Lift and fold out the window wiper arms. Clean the window wiper blades carefully using a soft cloth
. Lower the window wiper arms back onto the window. Replacing windscreen wiper blades Lift and fold the windscreen wiper arms. Press and hold the release button Fig. 167 1 and pull off the windscreen wiper blade in the direction of the arrow Insert the new wiper blade of the same length and design into the wiper arms until it is prop-
erly fitted. Fold the windscreen wiper arms back onto the windscreen. WARNING Worn or dirty window wiper blades reduce visi-
bility and increase the risk of accidents and se-
vere injuries. Replace window wiper blades whenever they are damaged or worn, and no longer appro-
priately perform their function. NOTICE Do not attempt to recover or reapply the graph-
ite layer of the window wiper blades. If this layer is damaged, replace the windscreen wiper blades. NOTICE Damaged or dirty window wiper blades may scratch the window. Detergents containing solvents, hard sponges and other sharp objects can damage the graphite coating during cleaning. Do not use fuel, nail varnish remover, paint thinner or similar products to clean the win-
dows. Vehicle components that use LEDs are listed be-
low:
Side turn signal lamp: located in exterior mir-
Exterior lighting Introduction Before repairing the product, check which tech-
nology is used, bulb or LED. As rule of thumb, light bulbs can be replaced by yourself. When, according to the vehicle version, the exterior lighting is of LED technology, the replacement of the LED light unit or of the individual LEDs by yourself is not possible. The burning out of indi-
vidual LEDs may be an indication of possible burn outs of other LEDs. In such case, the lights must be checked, and if necessary, replaced by a speci-
alized workshop. Changing the vehicle bulbs requires considerable technical skill. If you do not feel confident with the procedure, Volkswagen recommends that you have the bulbs changed by a Volkswagen Dealership or that you seek other expert assis-
tance. Contact a qualified workshop if other vehi-
cle parts around the lights need to be removed. A box containing spare light bulbs for lights that are required to ensure that the vehicle is road-
worthy should be stored in the vehicle at all times. Spare bulbs are available from Volkswagen Dealerships. Driving with burned out exterior lighting devices may be illegal. Additional bulb specifications Some bulbs in headlights or in tail light clusters might have factory specifications that are differ-
ent than standard bulbs. The designation is in-
scribed on the bulb, either on the glass part or on the base. LED technology in vehicles Components that use LEDs in vehicles have a long service life and do not require frequent re-
placement. Volkswagen recommends that the replacement of components that use LED be done at a Volkswagen dealership. rors. Brake light bulb: located above the rear win-
dow, outside the vehicle. WARNING Despite being illegal, driving with burnt bulbs may cause accidents. Burnt bulbs must be re-
placed as soon as possible. Insufficient lighting of roads, such as streets, avenues and squares, results in low visibility and increases the risk of accidents, since other road users might be unable to see ve-
hicles running with burnt bulbs. WARNING Changing the bulb incorrectly can cause acci-
dents and serious injuries. Before initiating any work in the engine compartment, always read and observe the warnings page 200, Safety guidelines for work in the engine compartment. The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dan-
gerous area and may cause severe injuries. Only change the defective bulb once it has had time to cool down completely. Never change a bulb unless you are familiar with the procedure. If you are uncertain of what to do, the work should be carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with unprotected fingers. When the light is switched on, heat will cause fingerprints to evaporate on the bulb which will causes the reflector to dim. There are sharp-edged parts in the headlight housing in the engine compartment and on the tail light cluster housing. Protect your hands when changing a bulb. NOTICE Damage to the electrical system can be caused if the rubber covers of the headlight housing are not properly mounted especially due to water entering the system. If and when 187
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. 10. Change the faulty bulb as instructed
; use a flashlight if necessary. Always use identical bulbs with the same designation. The desig-
nation is inscribed on the bulb, either on the glass part or on the base. 11. Do not touch the glass part of the bulb with unprotected fingers. The heat of the bulb would cause the fingerprint to evaporate and condense on the reflector, compromising the brightness of the headlight. 12. After changing the bulb, check to make sure that the bulb is working properly. If the bulb is not working properly, the bulb may not have been inserted properly or may have failed again, or the connector may have been inserted incorrectly. 13. Each time you change a bulb in the front of the vehicle, the headlight settings should be checked by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. WARNING Ignoring any of the points on this important safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju-
ries. Always follow the instructions on the check-
list and comply with applicable safety pre-
cautions. NOTICE Always take care when removing or fitting lights to prevent damage to the paintwork or to other vehicle parts. Burnt bulbs must not be disposed of as common trash, since they contain residues that are potentially harmful to the environment. In order to help preserve the environment, Volkswagen recommends returning burnt bulbs to a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop, in order for them to be properly dis-
posed of based on specific legal requirements re-
garding handling, storage and disposal. NOTICE Volkswagen recommends special attention to some plastic parts with clamps, which might break when removing or fitting bulbs. Depending on the vehicle version, there may be two lighting reflectors in the rear bumper that are not equipped with bulbs. How-
ever, if these elements break and need to be re-
placed, visit a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. On cold and humid days the headlight len-
ses may become temporarily fogged be-
cause of the difference of temperature between the outside and the inside. With the headlight turned on, the outgoing light surface defogs in a short time, eventually leaving some residues at the borders. The tail lights and the turn signals may also be affected. The fogging phenomenon does not interfere with the life cycle of the lighting system of the vehicle. Information on changing bulbs Please refer to chapter on page 187. and at the start of the Checklist Always carry out the following actions for chang-
ing a bulb in the given order 1. Park the vehicle on a flat and solid surface at
a safe distance from the flow of traffic. 2. Apply the handbrake page 95. 3. Turn the light switch to position 0 page 63. 4. Shift the turn signal lever to the neutral posi-
tion page 63. 5. Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition cylinder page 86. 6. Select a gear page 88. 7. Switch off the orientation lighting page 63. 8. Let the defective bulb cool down. 9. Check to see if a fuse has blown page 193. 188 Owner's Manual Changing headlight bulbs -
standard headlights Please refer to chapter on page 187. and at the start of the Fig. 169 In the engine compartment: rear view of the headlight with rubber cover (left side of illustra-
tion) - A dipped beam / main beam, B B daytime running light / side light and C turn signals. Rear view of the front headlight without the rubber cover
(right-hand side of the illustration): 1 locking spring of the dipped beam / main beam headlight bulb. Fig. 170 In the engine compartment: rear view of the front headlight 2 daytime running light / side light and 3 turn signals. In the engine compartment, the headlights are partially covered by other vehicle parts. Volkswagen recommends changing bulbs at a Volkswagen Dealership in case of doubt. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. The actions should only be carried out in the specified order:
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Observe and follow the instructions on the checklist page 188. Open the bonnet page 200. Disengage the bulb connector. Main beam / dipped beam , remove the rubber cover on the rear part of the headlight A . Running light and side light , turn the bulb holder 2 in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the socket. Turn signals , turn the bulb socket 3 , in the direction of the arrow, and remove it. Dipped beam / main beam , press the lock-
ing spring in the direction of the arrow 1 and move it to release the bulb. Running light and side light , pull the de-
fective bulb from its holder to remove it. Turn signals , press on the defective bulb and turn it to remove it. Dipped beam / main beam , move the spring to remove the defective bulb from its housing. Replace the defective bulb with a new bulb of the same type. Dipped beam / main beam , insert the new bulb into the housing with the largest socket reference flap facing up. Running light and side light , insert the new bulb into the holder. Turn signals , insert the new bulb into the holder, press on the bulb and turn it as far as possible. Dipped beam / main beam , press the lock-
ing spring and secure it in the holder to se-
cure the bulb. Running light and side light and turn sig-
nals , make sure that the holder is correctly attached to the assembly. Dipped beam / main beam , remove the rubber cover on the rear part of the headlight
. Running light and side light , turn the bulb holder 2 in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the socket. Turn signals ,, turn the bulb holder 3 in the direction of the arrow and remove it from the socket. If and when 189 11 12 13 14 Dipped beam / main beam , reinsert the rubber cover securely in place. Ensure that the connection terminals do not damage the rubber cover. Running light and side light and turn sig-
nals , make sure that the holder is correctly attached to the assembly. Fit the bulb connector, pressing it as far down as possible. Close the bonnet page 200. Dipped beam / main beam , after installing the new bulb, adjust the beam. The illustrations show the left-hand head-
light from the rear. The right-hand head-
light is a mirror image of the one shown. Changing bulbs in the front bumper
- fog light Please refer to chapter on page 187. and at the start of the To access and change the fog light bulb the vehi-
cle must be lifted
. Also see page 253. Volkswagen recommends changing fog light bulbs at a Volkswagen Dealership in case of doubt. The actions should only be carried out in the specified order:
1 Observe and follow the instructions on the checklist page 188. Disconnect the bulb connector Fig. 171 in the direction of the arrow A and press the connector securing lock simultaneously. Turn the bulb socket Fig. 171, in the direc-
tion of the arrow B , and remove it The fog light bulb is secured in the holder;
the entire bulb/holder assembly must be re-
placed Replace the defective bulb with a new bulb of the same type. Insert the new bulb/socket set into the hous-
ing. Press the socket down as far as possible and turn clockwise. Ensure that the socket is properly secured. Fit the bulb connector. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 WARNING Never lift the vehicle using the vehicle jack to change fog light bulbs. The illustration shows the left-hand side fog light. The right-hand fog light is a mir-
ror image of the one shown. Fig. 171 Behind the front bumper: access to the fog light bulb. 190 Owner's Manual Changing bulbs in the rear bodywork lights Please refer to and at the start of the chapter on page 187. Fig. 172 Tail light: C remove the bulb support and 1 , 2 , 3 , 4 e 5 remove the bulbs. Access to the rear lamp to change bulbs is made through the luggage compartment. The rear fog light is located only on the left side. Volkswagen recommends changing bulbs at a Volkswagen Dealership in case of doubt. The actions should only be carried out in the specified order. Removing the tail light 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Observe and follow the instructions on the checklist page 188. Open the tailgate page 52. Carefully remove the cover A by pulling it out. Remove the two fastening bolts B . Carefully pull the tail light out to remove it from the bodywork Disconnect the light bulb connector to com-
pletely remove the bulb. Place the rear light in a smooth and even sur-
face. To unlock the bulb support, press each lock-
ing pin C in the direction of the arrow. Carefully remove the bulb holder. Changing bulbs 1 2 3 4 5 To remove the defective bulbs 1 , 2 and 3 , press the bulb against the support and turn it anticlockwise. Replace the defective bulb with a new bulb of the same type. To insert new bulbs 1 , 2 and 3 , insert the new bulb into the respective socket. Press the bulb and turn clockwise until reaching the stop. Ensure that the bulbs are properly secured in the bulb holder. Insert the rear light bulb support. The locking pawls C must audibly fit into place. Installing the tail light 1 2 3 4 5 Fit the bulb connector. Carefully fit the rear light in the bodywork housing. Reinsert the two fastening bolts B and tighten them. Reinsert the dropside A . The cover must be properly secured. Close the tailgate page 52. The location and identification of bulbs Fig. 172 are provided below:
1 2 3 Side light bulb. Side light and brake light bulb. Reverse gear light bulb. If and when 191
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. 4 5 Fog light bulb - only on the left side, when available in the vehicle. Turn signal light bulb. The rear fog light is located only on the left side, beneath other lamps. NOTICE Always take care when removing or fitting rear lights into the bodywork, in order to prevent damage to the paintwork or to other vehicle parts. Volkswagen recommends special attention to some plastic parts with clamps, which might break when removing or fitting bulbs. The actions should only be carried out in the specified order:
1 Observe and follow the instructions on the checklist page 188. Using a screwdriver, press the lock Fig. 173 to remove the assembly. Turn the bulb socket in the direction of the arrow Fig. 174 and remove it from the housing. Pull the defective bulb from the socket to re-
move it. Replace the defective bulb with a new bulb of the same type. Carefully insert the new bulb into the socket. Press down the socket and turn in the oppo-
site direction of the arrow Fig. 174. Ensure that the socket is properly secured. Insert the bulb set into the bumper housing, initially fitting the right side and then the left side. Press the number plate light in the bumper until it is audibly secured in place. Ensure that the number plate light set is properly secured. 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 NOTICE Always take care when removing or fitting the number plate bulb in the rear bumper, in order to prevent damage to the paintwork or to other ve-
hicle parts. Changing bulbs in the number plate light Please refer to chapter on page 187. and at the start of the Fig. 173 On the rear bumper: remove the number plate light. Fig. 174 Number plate light: remove the bulb sock-
et. A screwdriver may be used to remove the num-
ber plate light
. 192 Owner's Manual Changing bulbs in the luggage compartment Please refer to chapter on page 187. and at the start of the 5 6 7 8 9 Replace the defective bulb with a new bulb of the same type. Carefully insert the new bulb into the socket. Carefully fit the high-mounted brake light in its housing. Reinsert and tighten the fastening bolts Fig. 175. Ensure that the high-mounted brake light is properly secured in its housing. NOTICE Volkswagen recommends changing luggage compartment light bulbs at a Volkswagen Deal-
ership or qualified workshop in order to prevent vehicle damages. Fig. 175 On the bed: remove the elevated brake light. Fuses Introduction Several electrical consumers could share a single fuse. Conversely, a single consumer could have more than one fuse. Therefore, fuses should only be replaced when the cause of a fault has been rectified. If a newly inserted fuse blows after a short time, the elec-
trical system must be checked by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. WARNING High voltages in the electrical system can cause electric shocks, severe burns and death!
Never touch the electrical wiring of the igni-
tion system. Avoid causing short-circuits in the electrical system. WARNING Using unsuitable or repaired fuses and bridging an electrical circuit without fuses can cause fires and severe injuries. Never fit fuses that have a higher fuse pro-
tection limit. Fuses must always be replaced with a new fuse which has the same amp rating (same colour and imprint) and size. Never repair a fuse. If and when 193 Fig. 176 Elevated brake light: remove the bulb from the bed light. The luggage compartment bulb is located next to the high-mounted brake light, above the rear window, outside the vehicle. The actions should only be carried out in the specified order:
1 Observe and follow the instructions on the checklist page 188. Remove the fastening bolts Fig. 175. Carefully pull the high-mounted brake light outwards in order to remove it. Using a screwdriver, press one of the sides of the light Fig. 176 to remove it from the set. 2 3 4
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Never use a metal strip, paper clip or similar items to replace a fuse. NOTICE In order to avoid damage to the electrical sys-
tem in the vehicle, the ignition, the lights and all electrical consumers must be switched off and the vehicle key removed from the ignition cylinder before changing a fuse. You can damage another position in the elec-
trical system by using a fuse with a higher amp rating. Fuse boxes must be protected from dirt and moisture when opened. Dirt and moisture in the fuse boxes can damage the electrical sys-
tem. Fuses must always be replaced with a new fuse which has the same amp rating (same colour and imprint) and size. Opening and closing the dashboard fuse box Remove the stowage compartment / fuse box cover Fig. 177 in the direction of the arrow. NOTICE Remove the covers for the fuse boxes carefully and install them again properly so as to avoid damage to the vehicle. Fuse boxes must be protected from dirt and moisture when opened. Dirt and moisture in the fuse boxes can damage the electrical sys-
tem. A single consumer may have more than one fuse. Several consumers may share a single fuse. This chapter does not refer to all the fuses located in the vehicle. These must be changed only by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. Fuses in the dash panel Please refer to chapter on page 193. and at the start of the Fig. 177 On the driver's side of the dashboard: fuse box cover. 194 Owner's Manual Fuse box in the dashboard Please refer to and at the start of the chapter on page 193. Fig. 178 Fuse box. Volkswagen recommends keeping spare fuses in the vehicles, which may be stored in the upper part of the fuse box Fig. 178 R (such as 5 A, 10 A, 15 A, 20 A, 25 A and 30 A fuses for vehicles without air conditioning or 40 A for vehicles with air conditioning system). Some fuses may be specific to certain versions. Locations with respective functions for equip-
ment that may be available in your vehicle are provided below:
1 2 Free Convenience system module / Radio (vehi-
cles equipped for radios) Light switch / Fog light Free Airbag module Rear window heating Ignition transformer 12-volt socket in the luggage compart-
ment ABS /ESC module Radio / USB charger / Rear view camera system LWR Interior lighting Free Exterior electric mirror Electromagnetic air conditioning gearing Alarm / Rain and twilight sensors Central locking Rear seat 12 V socket 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 Turn signals / Multifunction steering wheel Diagnostic socket / load compartment lighting Turn signals / Brake lights Comfort system module / USB charger Arrow key Instrument cluster / Electric control unit relay / Fuel pump relay Windscreen washer pump / Windscreen wipers Injection module Free Free Fuel pump Warm starting (E-FLEX) Right and left main beam / Main beam in-
dicator lamp in the instrument cluster Left-hand side dipped beam headlights Reverse gear light Instrument cluster / Cold starting system relay / Fuel pump relay / Parking distance control relay / Air conditioning relay / En-
gine control module / Electric interior mir-
ror / Rain and twilight sensors Electric window control module / Right-
hand mirror tilt down module Light switch Horn Interior ventilation Free If and when 195 40 41 42 Fuel injection valves / Clutch pedal sensor /
Brake pedal sensor Lambda probe / Activated charcoal filter cleaning valve Windscreen wipers 43 44 45 Right-hand side dipped beam headlights 12-volt socket on the centre console Electric control unit Fuses in the engine compartment Please refer to chapter on page 193. and at the start of the Fuse box in the engine compartment Please refer to chapter on page 193. and at the start of the Fig. 179 On the engine compartment: fuse box cov-
er. Opening the fuse box in the engine compartment Open the bonnet page 200. Press the retainers in the direction of the ar-
row Fig. 179 1 to release the fuse box cov-
er. Lift off the cover in the direction of the arrow 2 . To fit, place the cover over the fuse box. Press the cover down, in the opposite direction to the arrow 2 , until it clicks into place. NOTICE Remove the covers for the fuse boxes carefully and install them again properly so as to avoid damage to the vehicle. Fuse boxes must be protected from dirt and moisture when opened. Dirt and moisture in the fuse boxes can damage the electrical sys-
tem. 196 Owner's Manual Fig. 180 Fuse box. Fuses are located in the engine compartment, above the vehicle battery Fuses in the engine compartment must only be replaced by a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Locations with respective functions and amp rat-
ing for equipment that may be available in your vehicle are provided below:
1 2 3 Alternator Internal compartment supply Radiator fan
- 2nd speed Free ABS / ESC 4 5 6 Warm starting (E-FLEX) 7 ABS / ESC Radiator fan
- 1nd speed Convenience system Free 8 9 10 175 110 40
40 110 25 40 5
11 12 Free Free WARNING
Before initiating any work in the engine com-
partment, always read and observe the warning notes page 200, Safety guidelines for work in the engine compartment. The engine compart-
ment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area and may cause severe injuries. Changing a blown fuse Please refer to chapter on page 193. and at the start of the Fig. 181 Blown fuse. Fig. 182 Removing or fitting a fuse using the plastic pliers 1 . Colour code of fuses under the dashboard Colour Lilac Amp rating 3 A
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. 5 A 10 A 15 A Light brown Brown 7.5 A Red Blue Yellow White or clear Green Orange 20 A 30 A 40 A 25 A Preparations Switch off the ignition, the lights, and all elec-
trical consumers. Open the respective fuse box page 194. Detecting a blown fuse A melted metal strip indicates that the fuse has blown Fig. 181. Shine a flashlight onto the fuse. This will help you to spot the blown fuse more easily. Changing a fuse If applicable, take the plastic tweezers Fig. 182 1 out of the fuse box cover. For small fuses, push on the catch 1 from above Fig. 182 A. For bigger fuses, push the catch 1 onto the fuse from the side Fig. 182 B. Pull out the blown fuse. If the fuse has blown, replace it with a new fuse of the same amp rating (same colour and same imprint) and same size
. Reinsert the cover. NOTICE You can damage another position in the electrical system by using a fuse with a higher amp rating. Jump starting Introduction If the engine fails to start because of a dis-
charged vehicle battery, the battery can be con-
nected to the battery of another vehicle to start the engine. Before using jump starting, check the window on the vehicle battery page 213. If and when 197 The vehicles must not touch each other, other-
wise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. The discharged vehicle battery must be properly connected to the vehicle's electrical system. The jump leads must have sufficient length to ensure proper distance between the vehicles. WARNING Using the jump leads incorrectly or completing the jump start procedure incorrectly can cause the battery to explode, which can lead to se-
vere injuries. Please note the following points in order to reduce the risk of the battery ex-
ploding:
All work on the vehicle battery and the elec-
trical system can cause serious chemical burns, fire and electric shocks. Always read the warnings and safety information before carrying out any kind of work on the vehicle battery page 213, Vehicle battery. The assistance providing vehicle's battery must be of the same voltage as the dis-
charged vehicle battery (12-volt) and be ap-
proximately of the same capacity (see im-
print on battery). Never charge a frozen or defrosted vehicle battery. A discharged vehicle battery can even freeze at temperatures of around 0 C
(+32 F). The battery should be replaced if it has fro-
zen or defrosted. A highly explosive mixture of gases is given off when jump starting the vehicle battery. Always keep fire, sparks, naked flames and lit cigarettes away from the vehicle battery. Never use a mobile telephone when the jump leads are being connected or discon-
nected. Only charge the battery in a well-ventilated space as the battery emits a highly explosive mixture of gases when the vehicle is being jump started. Position the jump leads so that they never come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment. Never confuse the negative and positive ter-
minals or connect the jump leads incorrectly. Observe the jump lead manufacturer's in-
structions. 198 Owner's Manual NOTICE Please note the following in order to avoid con-
siderable damage to the vehicle electrical sys-
tem:
short circuit can be caused if the jump leads are connected incorrectly. The vehicles must not touch each other, other-
wise electricity could flow as soon as the posi-
tive terminals are connected. How to start the engine using jump leads Please refer to chapter on page 198. and at the start of the Fig. 183 Engine compartment: access to the posi-
tive battery terminal. Fig. 184 Jump lead attachment diagram: dis-
charged vehicle battery A and battery in the vehicle providing assistance B . Key for Fig. 184:
A Vehicle with discharged vehicle battery which is getting jump starting assistance. Vehicle with the current supplying battery assisting jump starting. Proper grounding point: a piece of solid met-
al firmly bolted to the cylinder block. B X The discharged vehicle battery must be properly connected to the vehicle's electrical system. The vehicles must not touch each other. Other-
wise electricity could flow as soon as the positive terminals are connected. Make sure the battery clamps have good metal-
to-metal contact with the battery terminals. If the engine does not start immediately, switch off the starter after about 10 seconds and try again after about one minute. The actions should only be carried out in the specified order. Attaching the jump leads Switch off the ignition in both vehicles page 86. Open the positive terminal cover. To open, press the lock in the direction of the arrow Fig. 183 1 and move the cover to the side, in the direction of the arrow 2 . Connect one end of the red jump lead to the positive terminal Fig. 184 + of the vehicle with the discharged battery A
. Connect the other end of the red jump lead to the positive terminal + of the battery in the vehicle providing assistance B . Connect one end of the black jump lead to the negative terminal - of the battery in the ve-
hicle providing assistance B . Connect the other end of the black jump lead X to the vehicle with the discharged battery. Connect it to the screwed-in towing eye at the front, a solid metal component which is bolted on to the engine block, or to the engine block itself. However, do not connect it to a point near the vehicle battery A
. Position the leads in such a way that they can-
not come into contact with any moving parts in the engine compartment. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Starting the engine Start the engine of the vehicle which is provid-
ing assistance and let it run at idle. Start the engine of the car with the discharged vehicle battery and wait two to three minutes until the engine is running smoothly. Removing the jump leads Before disconnecting the jump leads, switch off the dipped beam headlights if they are switched on. Turn on the heating and fresh air system blow-
ers and rear window heater (not available in some versions) in the vehicle battery with the discharged battery. This helps to minimise voltage peaks which are generated when the leads are disconnected. With the engines running, disconnect the jump leads in the exact reverse order to the instruc-
tions given above. Close the positive battery terminal cover. WARNING Jump starting the vehicle incorrectly can cause the battery to explode, which can lead to seri-
ous injuries. Please note the following points in order to reduce the risk of the battery explod-
ing:
All work on the vehicle battery and the elec-
trical system can cause serious chemical burns, fire and electric shocks. Always read the warnings and safety information before carrying out any kind of work on the vehicle battery page 213, Vehicle battery. Make sure there is no one inside the vehicle when connecting battery jump leads. In case of electrical failure, airbags may be acciden-
tally engaged and cause severe or even fatal injuries to vehicle occupants. Always wear suitable eye protection and never lean over the vehicle battery. Attach the connector cables in the correct order the positive cable first, followed by the negative. Never connect the negative cable to parts of the fuel system or to the brake hose/pipe. Non-insulated parts of the battery clamps must not be allowed to touch. Additionally, the jump lead attached to the positive vehi-
cle battery terminal must not touch metal parts of the vehicle. If and when 199 Check the window on the vehicle battery us-
ing a flashlight if necessary If the display is light yellow or colourless, do not jump start the vehicle. Seek expert assistance. Avoid electrostatic discharge in the vicinity of the vehicle battery. The gas emitted from the vehicle battery could be ignited by sparks. Never use jump starting to start the engine if the vehicle battery is damaged, frozen or has defrosted. NOTICE Incorrectly attached jump leads could result in substantial damages to the vehicle's electrical system. Tow starting and towing Introduction For technical reasons, vehicles must not be tow started. Use jump leads to start the engine in-
stead page 197. For technical reasons, vehicles with a discharged battery must not be tow started. Jump start the engine instead page 197. Towing Whenever it is necessary to tow your vehicle, use a specialized towing service, using tow trucks or platforms. When using tow trucks, the vehicle must be se-
curely fastened by the front wheels. Ensure that no gears are selected and the handbrake lever is not applied. NOTICE Always comply with applicable traffic laws re-
garding towing. Checking and refuelling In the engine compartment Safety guidelines for work in the engine compartment Always park the vehicle on a levelled and stable surface before carrying out any work in the en-
gine compartment. The engine compartment of a motor vehicle is a hazardous area. Never carry out any work on the engine or in the engine compartment if you are not familiar with the necessary procedures and the general safety requirements, as well as with-
out the unsuitable tools, fluids and resources
. If necessary, such work must be available carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership or quali-
fied workshop. Serious injuries can be caused if work is carried out incorrectly. WARNING Unintentional vehicle movements during serv-
ice work can cause serious injury. Never work underneath a vehicle if it is not secured against rolling away. If you are working underneath the vehicle while the wheels are on the ground, the vehicle must be on a level, the wheels must be blocked and the vehicle key must be removed from the ignition cylinder. If you have to work underneath the vehicle, use suitable stands to provide extra support. The vehicle jack is not sufficient for this task and can fail, which can lead to serious inju-
ries. WARNING The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a dangerous area and may cause severe inju-
ries!
The utmost care and attention must be paid when carrying out any work and you must follow the general safety rules. Never take any risks. Never do any work on the engine or in the engine compartment unless you know exact-
ly how to carry it out. If you are uncertain of what to do, the work should be carried out 200 Owner's Manual by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. Serious injuries can result from work that has not been carried out properly. Never open the cover if you see steam or coolant escaping from the engine compart-
ment. Hot steam or coolant can cause severe burns. Always wait until you can no longer notice steam or coolant coming from the en-
gine compartment. Always let the engine cool down before opening the engine compartment cover. Hot parts of the engine or exhaust system may burn the skin. Before opening the engine compartment cover once it has cooled down:
Pull the handbrake and place the gear se-
lector lever into neutral position. Remove the vehicle key from the ignition lock. Always keep children away from the en-
gine compartment and never leave the ve-
hicle unattended. The engine cooling system is under pressure when the engine is hot. Never open the cap of the coolant expansion tank when the en-
gine is hot. Coolant may spray out and cause severe burns and injuries. After cooling, turn the cap slowly and very carefully anticlockwise while exerting some downwards pressure on the cap. Always protect the face, hands and arms from hot coolant or steam with a large, thick cloth. When refilling, do not spill any service fluids on engine components or on the exhaust system. Spilt service fluids may start fires. WARNING The high voltage in the electrical system can cause electric shocks, burns, serious injuries and death!
Never short circuit the electric system. The vehicle battery could explode. Please note the following guidelines to help reduce the risk of an electric shock and seri-
ous injuries while the engine is running or being started:
Never touch the electrical wiring of the ig-
nition system. Never touch electrical wiring. WARNING There are rotating components in the engine compartment that can cause serious injury. Never touch the radiator area or fan directly. Touching the rotary blades may result in se-
vere injuries. The fan is temperature-control-
led and can start automatically, even if the engine has been switched off and the vehicle key has been removed from the ignition cyl-
inder. If any work has to be performed when the engine is started or with the engine running, there is an additional, potentially fatal, safety risk from the rotating parts, such as the Poly-
V or drive belts, alternator, radiator fan, etc., and from the high-voltage ignition system. Always be extremely cautious. Always ensure that no body parts, jewel-
lery, ties, loose items of clothing or long hair can be caught up in rotating engine components. Before starting work, remove any jewellery and ties, tie up long hair and pull clothes in tightly to avoid them get-
ting caught in the engine compartment. Always depress the accelerator carefully and never thoughtlessly. The vehicle can move even while the handbrake is applied. Always make sure you have not left any ob-
jects, such as cleaning cloths and tools, in the engine compartment. Any forgotten items can cause malfunctions, engine dam-
age and fires. WARNING Operating fluids and some materials in the en-
gine compartment are highly flammable and may cause fires and severe injuries!
Never smoke around the engine compart-
ment. Never work near naked flames or sparks. Never spill fluids onto the engine. They could ignite on hot engine components and cause injuries. Please note the following when carrying out any work on the fuel system or the electrical system:
Always disconnect the vehicle battery. En-
sure that the vehicle is unlocked before the battery is disconnected. Otherwise, the alarm system will be activated. Checking and refuelling 201
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Never work in the direct proximity of heat-
ing systems, water heaters or any other open flames. Apply the handbrake page 95. Position the gear selection lever into the neutral position page 88. Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition lock page 86. Allow the engine to cool down sufficiently. Children and other people should be kept well away from the engine compartment. Ensure that the vehicle cannot roll away un-
expectedly. WARNING Ignoring any of the points on this important safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju-
ries. Always follow the instructions on the check-
list and comply with applicable safety pre-
cautions. NOTICE When refilling or changing operating fluids please ensure that the fluids are in the correct container. Incorrect operating fluids can cause serious functional problems and engine dam-
ages!
Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi-
ronment. Regularly check the ground un-
derneath your vehicle. If there are spots of oil or other fluids on the ground, the vehicle must be inspected by a Volkswagen Dealership. Preparing the vehicle for working in the engine compartment Checklist The following steps should always be carried out in the specified order before working in the en-
gine compartment Park the vehicle on a levelled and stable sur-
face. Depress and hold the brake pedal until the engine has stopped. Opening and closing the engine compartment cover Fig. 185 Bonnet release lever on the driver side footwell. Bonnet release lever on the inner side of the bonnet. 202 Owner's Manual Fig. 186 Bonnet stay. Bonnet secured with the bonnet stay. WARNING If the engine compartment cover is not closed properly, it can open suddenly while you are driving and completely obscure your view of the road. This could lead to accidents and se-
vere injuries. After closing the engine compartment cover, always check that it is properly secured. The engine compartment cover must be flush with the surrounding body panels. If you notice that the bonnet is not closed properly while the vehicle is in motion, stop the vehicle as soon as possible and close the bonnet. Open or close the engine compartment cover only when you are sure that nobody is in its path. NOTICE The bonnet should only be opened when the wiper arms are flush to the windscreen in order to avoid damage to the bonnet and the wind-
screen wiper arms. Opening the engine compartment cover Ensure that the windscreen wiper arms are positioned on the windscreen before opening the bonnet
. Pull the release lever in the direction of the ar-
row Fig. 185 . The bonnet is released from its lock by a spring mechanism
. Slightly lift the bonnet and press the release lever Fig. 185 located on the inner side of the bonnet simultaneously, in the direction of the arrow, to open the bonnet. Take the bonnet stay out of the holder in the direction of the arrow Fig. 186 and insert it in the bonnet opening Fig. 186 1 . Closing the engine compartment cover Lift the bonnet slightly Take the bonnet stay out of the holder
. Fig. 186 1 and insert it in the opening in the bonnet Fig. 186 . Release the bonnet at approximately 20 cm from the lock do not press down!
If the bonnet is not closed, open it again and close it properly. The engine compartment cover sits flush with the body parts around it when it is closed proper-
ly. WARNING When the open bonnet supported by the bon-
net stay, do not push or apply additional force to close the bonnet, since this could cause bon-
net damages and severe injuries. Checking and refuelling 203
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Service fluids and consumables All service fluids and consumables, e.g. toothed belts, tyres, coolant, engine oil, spark plugs and vehicle batteries, are being constantly perfec-
tioned. For this reason, service fluids and con-
sumables should be replaced at a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. Volkswagen Dealerships are always updated about innova-
tions. WARNING Unsuitable service fluids and consumables, and the incorrect use of these fluids and consuma-
bles, can cause accidents, serious injuries, burns or poisoning. Service fluids must be kept in their original sealed container. Never store service fluids in empty food con-
tainers, bottles or any other non-original containers as people finding these containers could drink them. Keep children away from all service fluids and consumables. Always read and follow the information and warnings on the service fluid packaging. When using products that give off harmful fumes, always work outdoors or in a well ventilated area. Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other volatile fluids to wash, clean or care for your vehicle. These substances are poisonous and highly flam-
mable. They could cause fires and explo-
sions!
NOTICE Only use suitable service fluids for refilling. Never use the service fluids not recommended. Failure to observe this warning can result in serious faults and engine damages!
Optional equipment and other accessories in front of the air inlet reduce the cooling effect of the coolant. The engine may overheat at high ambient temperatures and high engine loads!
204 Owner's Manual Service fluids leaks are harmful to the envi-
ronment. Regularly check the ground un-
derneath your vehicle. If there are spots of oil or other fluids on the ground, the vehicle must be inspected by a Volkswagen Dealership. Washer fluid Fig. 187 On the engine compartment: windscreen washer fluid reservoir cap. The windscreen washer fluid level should be checked regularly and topped up as necessary. Open the bonnet page 200. The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is iden-
tified by the symbol on its cap Fig. 187. Check whether there is enough windscreen washer fluid in the reservoir. To top up, mix clean water with a washer fluid recommended by Volkswagen the dilution instructions on the packaging. Observe At low temperatures, add a special antifreeze agent so that the fluid cannot freeze
. Check the window washer reservoir capacity in page 266 WARNING Never mix antifreeze or other unsuitable addi-
tives into the windscreen washer fluid. An oily film may otherwise be left on the screen, com-
promising visibility. Use clean water with a washer fluid recom-
mended by Volkswagen. Suitable antifreeze agents may be added to the windscreen washer fluid, if necessary. NOTICE Engine oil specification Please refer to on page 205. at the start of the chapter VW 508 88 is the standard engine oil in your Volkswagen. This standard must be described on the oil packaging. Engine oils approved by Volkswagen are available at Volkswagen Dealer-
ships. When refuelling, engine oils approved by Volkswagen according to the VW 508 88 stand-
ard can be mixed with each other. If, in an emergency, no approved VW 508 88 standard engine oil is available, you may tempo-
rarily use an engine oil that meets the following requirements: ACEA A3/B4 specification with the following viscosity grades: SAE 0W 30, SAE 0W 40, SAE 5W 30, SAE 5W 40, SAE 10W 30 or SAE 10W 40. However, we recommend seeking a Volkswagen Dealership as soon as possible for the oil change with factory approved engine oil. Engine oil specifications are available in the product package. Engine oils are constantly being developed and improved. Volkswagen Dealerships are always updated about innovations. That is why Volkswagen recommends having engine oil changes performed at a Volkswagen Dealership. NOTICE Use only expressly Volkswagen approved en-
gine oil specifications. Using other engine oils may cause damages to the engine!
Do not mix additional lubricating additives to the engine oil. Damages caused by such addi-
tives are not covered by the warranty. Damages to the engine caused by using oil that does not meet the VW 508 88 standard are excluded from the warranty. Never mix other cleaning agents with the cleaning agents recommended by Volkswagen. This may cause the components to coagulate and, as a result, clog the windscreen wiper nozzles. Never mix up service fluids when refilling! Fail-
ure to observe this warning can result in seri-
ous faults and engine damages!
Engine oil Introduction WARNING Incorrect handling of engine oil can cause se-
vere burns and injuries. Always wear eye protection when handling engine oil. Engine oil is toxic and must be stored out of the reach of children. Engine oil must be kept in the closed original container. This also applies to used oil before proper disposal. Never use empty food containers, bottles or other containers to store engine oil, since other people may then drink the engine oil. Regular contact with engine oil can damage the skin. Skin that has been in contact with engine oil should be washed thoroughly with water and soap. Engine oil becomes extremely hot when the engine is running and may scald skin severe-
ly. Always allow the engine to cool down. Leaking or spilt engine oil can pollute the environment. In order to prevent such event, replace the engine oil preferably at a Volkswagen Dealership, which is equipped with special tools and qualification to properly dispose of used engine oil. If engine oil or other fluid stains are found on the floor, underneath the vehicle, Volkswagen recommends inspecting the vehicle, preferably at a Volkswagen Dealership. Checking and refuelling 205
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Checking the engine oil level and refilling engine oil Please refer to on page 205. at the start of the chapter Fig. 188 Oil dipstick with markings. Fig. 189 On the engine compartment: engine oil opening lid. Checklist
Carry out the steps in the specified order 1. With the engine at operating temperature, park the vehicle on a level surface to ensure that the engine oil reading is correct. 2. Switch off the engine and wait a few minutes for the engine oil to flow back into the sump. 3. Open the bonnet page 200. 4. Identify the engine oil filler cap and oil dip-
stick. The engine oil filler opening bears the symbol on the cap Fig. 189 and the oil dipstick has a coloured handle. If you cannot 206 Owner's Manual find the cap and dipstick please contact a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified work-
shop. 5. Pull the dipstick out of the guide tube and 6. wipe it off with a clean cloth Insert the oil dipstick into the guide tube again as far as it will go. If the oil dipstick has a marking, it must be adjusted to the corre-
sponding groove on the upper edge of the guide tube upon insertion. 7. Pull the dipstick out again and read the en-
. Proceed to step 15. gine oil level on the dipstick Fig. 188 as follows:
A : do not refill oil B : proper oil level. Refill with oil (approxi-
mately 0.5 l). Proceed to step 8 or 15. C : recommended oil must be refilled until level reaches region B . Proceed to step 8. 8. After reading the oil level, push the oil dip-
stick back into the guide tube as far as it will go. 9. Unscrew the engine oil filler opening cap Fig. 189. 10. Only refill with engine oils approved by Volkswagen gradually, in small quantities (up to 0.5 l). 11. To avoid overfilling, wait for approximately one minute after each pour to allow the en-
gine oil to flow into the oil sump up to the marking on the engine oil dipstick. 12. Read the engine oil level from the dipstick again before refilling with a further small quantity of engine oil. Never overfill engine oil
. 13. After the refilling procedure, the engine oil level must be at least in the centre of area Fig. 188 B , but never above area A
. 14. After refilling, screw the engine oil filler cap back on correctly. 15. Correctly insert the oil dipstick into the guide tube again as far as it will go. 16. Close the bonnet correctly page 200. Check the engine oil level in page 266. WARNING Engine oil can ignite if it comes into contact with hot engine components. This may cause fires, serious burns and injuries. If engine oil is spilt on cold engine parts it can heat up and ignite when the engine is running. Always ensure that the engine oil filler cap is securely tightened after refilling, and that the dipstick is properly inserted back into the guide tube. This will prevent the engine oil from draining out on to hot engine compo-
nents when the engine is running. NOTICE Do not start the engine when the engine oil level is above the range Fig. 188 A . Seek professional assistance immediately. The cata-
lytic converter and the engine could otherwise be damaged!
When refilling or changing operating fluids please ensure that the fluids are in the correct container. Incorrect operating fluids can cause serious functional problems and engine dam-
ages. NOTICE Use only cloths that don't shred to clean the oil dipstick, since such shredding could damage the engine. The engine oil level must never exceed the Fig. 188 A region, otherwise, the oil may be aspirated by the crankcase ventilation and dis-
charged into the atmosphere by the exhaust sys-
tem. Additionally, oil may be combusted inside the catalytic converter, damaging it. Leaking or spilt engine oil can pollute the environment. In order to prevent such event, Volkswagen recommends replacing the engine oil preferably at a Volkswagen Dealership, which is equipped with special tools and qualifi-
cation to properly dispose of used engine oil. Engine oil consumption Please refer to on page 205. at the start of the chapter Engine oil consumption may vary from engine to engine. Due to the design of internal combustion engines, in order to adequately lubricate compo-
nents, part of the engine oil is consumed during normal engine operation. Therefore, engine oil consumption may vary throughout the engine's service life. In addition, depending on driving be-
haviors and vehicle use conditions, oil consump-
tion may reach up to 0.5 l in 1,000 km. Engine oil level must therefore be checked at regular inter-
vals preferably when refuelling and before long journeys. When the engine is working hard, the oil level must be kept within the Fig. 188 A area for instance during long motorway cruising in sum-
mer or climbing mountain passes. Changing the engine oil Please refer to on page 205. at the start of the chapter The engine oil must be regularly renewed. Ob-
serve which service interval applies to the vehicle page 238. Ensure that such frequency is fol-
lowed, especially when the vehicle is used in ex-
treme conditions, which requires greater fre-
quency of such services. The engine oil and filter must be changed by qualified workshops due to the fact that such procedure requires special tools and expertise. This also ensures proper disposal of used oil. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. More information on service intervals can be found at page 238. WARNING If, in exceptional cases, you have to carry out an oil change yourself, please note the following:
Always wear eye protection. Always allow the engine to cool down com-
pletely to avoid burns. Keep your arms horizontal when removing the oil drain plug with your fingers to help prevent oil from running down your arm. Use a suitable container when draining the used oil. It must be at least large enough to hold the entire quantity of engine oil re-
quired for refilling. Never store engine oil in empty food con-
tainers, bottles or any other non-original containers as people finding these containers may not know that they contain engine oil. Checking and refuelling 207
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Engine oil is toxic and must be stored out of Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and the reach of children. when safe to do so. The oil pressure warning lamp is not in-
dicative of the engine oil level. The engine oil level must be controlled in regular intervals, preferably whenever the tank is filled. Engine coolant Introduction Never carry out any work on the engine coolant system if you are not familiar with the requisite procedures, or if you do not have access to the correct tools, operating equipment and flu-
! In this case, all activities must be carried ids out by a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recom-
mends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Serious injuries can be caused if work is carried out incorrectly. WARNING Engine coolant is toxic!
Engine coolant must only be kept in sealed original containers in a safe place. Never store engine coolant in empty food containers, bottles or any other non-original containers as people finding these containers may then drink the engine coolant. The engine coolant must be stored out of the reach of children. Please note that the amount of correct cool-
ant additive used must be sufficient for the lowest ambient temperature that you expect the vehicle to be exposed to. Coolant can freeze at extremely cold outside temperatures, causing the vehicle to break down. In this case, the internal vehicle heat-
ing will also no longer function, which may lower the body temperature of vehicle occu-
pants with inadequate winter clothing. Prolonged exposure to cold and loss of body heat are hazardous factors to human health. NOTICE Do not mix additional lubricating additives to the engine oil. Damages caused by such additives are not covered by the warranty. Volkswagen recommends replacing the oil and filter preferably at an authorised Volkswagen repairer, which is equipped with spe-
cial tools and qualification to properly dispose of used engine oil. Never dispose of old oil in locations such as gardens, woods, sewerage systems, on streets and roads, or in rivers and waterways. In order to completely drain used oil, use an appropriate and sufficient recipient to collect all of the engine oil; refer to page 266. Troubleshooting Please refer to on page 205. at the start of the chapter Warning lamps and text messages may light up and be displayed on the instrument cluster dis-
play. In addition, acoustic signals may be soun-
ded. Engine oil Central warning lamp and On: engine oil pressure too low. Stop driving! Switch off the engine. Check the engine oil and refill if necessary page 206. If the warning light remains lit and the oil level is suitable, do not drive on or keep the engine running. The engine could otherwise be damaged. Seek out as-
sistance from an authorised Volkswagen repairer immediately. WARNING Failure to observe the warning lamps and text messages could lead to your vehicle breaking down in traffic, and to accidents and serious in-
juries. Never ignore warning lamps or text messag-
es. 208 Owner's Manual WARNING Insufficient antifreeze in the coolant system can cause the engine to break down. Ensure that the correct engine coolant addi-
tive ratio is used based on the ambient tem-
perature to which the vehicle is exposed. NOTICE Never mix genuine coolant additives with other coolants that have not been approved by Volkswagen. Mixing with non-approved coolants could cause serious damage to the engine and cooling system. Brown liquid in the coolant expansion tank in-
dicates that the engine coolant has been con-
taminated. he coolant must be changed as soon as possible if this is the case. Failure to observe this warning can result in serious faults and engine damages!
Under no circumstance may old engine coolant be reused. Observe specific disposal regulations for this product. Volkswagen recommends changing or refill-
ing the engine coolant and its additives at a Volkswagen Dealership, which has proper fluid disposal procedures. Never dispose of used fluids in locations such as gardens, woods, sewerage systems, on streets and roads, or in rivers and waterways. Under no circumstance may old engine coolant be reused. Observe specific disposal regulations for this product. Volkswagen recommends changing or refill-
ing the engine coolant and its additives at a Volkswagen Dealership, which has proper fluid disposal procedures. Never dispose of used fluids in locations such as gardens, woods, sewerage systems, on streets and roads, or in rivers and waterways. Engine coolant specifications Please refer to on page 208. at the start of the chapter The engine cooling system is factory supplied with a mixture of distilled water and 40% G 12evo (TL-VW 774 L) engine coolant additive. This mixture provides the necessary antifreeze of up to -25 C (-13 F) and protects the alloy parts of the cooling system against corrosion. The mix-
ture also prevents scaling and raises the boiling point of the coolant. In order to protect the coolant system, the pro-
portion of coolant additive must always be at least 40%, even if antifreeze is not required in warm weather and warm climates. If greater antifreeze is required in very cold cli-
mates, the proportion of antifreeze additive can be increased. However, the percentage of cool-
ant additive must not exceed 60%, as this would reduce the antifreeze and the cooling effect. When topping up the coolant, a mixture of distil-
led water and at least 40% coolant additive must be used in order to obtain the optimum corrosion protection Mixing G 12evo with the engine coolants G 13
(TL-VW 774 J), G 12 plus-plus (TL-VW 774 G), G 12 plus (TL-VW 774 F) or G 12 (red colour) signif-
icantly compromises ant-corrosion properties and must be avoided. Refer to Volkswagen Dealerships for more infor-
mation on coolants approved by Volkswagen. That is why Volkswagen recommends having en-
gine oil changes done by a Volkswagen dealer-
ship. Checking and refuelling 209
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Checking coolant level and refilling coolant Please refer to on page 208. at the start of the chapter Fig. 190 On the engine compartment: marking on the coolant expansion tank. Fig. 191 On the engine compartment: cap of the engine coolant expansion reservoir (variant 1) or cap of the engine coolant expansion reservoir (var-
iant 2) The warning lamp for the engine coolant will light up if the engine coolant level is too low. Preparations Park the vehicle in a flat and steady surface. Allow the engine to cool down
. 210 Owner's Manual Open the bonnet page 200. The coolant expansion tank has the symbol on its cap Fig. 191. Checking the engine coolant level Check the coolant level at the side marking of the expansion tank when the engine is cold Fig. 190. Refill the engine coolant if the liquid level is below the minimum marking (min). When the engine is warm, the coolant level may be slightly above the top end of the marked area. Refilling engine coolant Always protect your hands and arms from hot coolant or steam by placing a suitable cloth on the cap of the coolant expansion tank. Carefully unscrew the cap Refill only new coolant according to anticlockwise. Volkswagen specifications ( page 209)
. The coolant level must be between the marks on the expansion tank Fig. 190. Do not fill up over the top line of the marked area max
Firmly screw-in the cap clockwise. If in an emergency you do not have access to the coolant of the required specification, do not use any other coolant additive! Instead, top off with distilled correct proportion of coolant additive page 209 must be re-established as soon as possible. only. Then add the WARNING Hot steam or engine coolant can cause severe burns. Never open the bonnet if steam or engine coolant can be seen or heard coming out of the engine compartment. Always wait until no escaping steam or coolant can be seen or heard. Always let the engine cool down completely before carefully opening the bonnet. Hot parts may cause burns when touched. Before opening the engine compartment cover once it has cooled down:
Apply the handbrake and move the selec-
tor lever to position N or move the manual gear lever to the neutral position. Remove the vehicle key from the ignition lock. Always keep children away from the en-
gine compartment and never leave the ve-
hicle unattended. The engine cooling system is under pressure when the engine is hot. Never open the cap of the coolant expansion tank when the en-
gine is hot. Coolant may spray out and cause severe burns and injuries. Turn the cap slowly and very carefully an-
ticlockwise while exerting some down-
wards pressure on the cap. Always protect the face, hands and arms from hot coolant or steam with a large, thick cloth. When refilling, do not spill any service fluids on engine components or on the exhaust system. Spilt service fluids may start fires. In certain circumstances, the ethylene glycol in the engine can catch fire. NOTICE Do not fill coolant above the top of the marked area max Fig. 190. Otherwise the excess coolant will be pressed out of the cooling sys-
tem when the engine is hot and could cause damage. If a large amount of coolant has been lost, do not refill the coolant until the engine has com-
pletely cooled. Substantial coolant loss is an indication of leaks in the engine cooling sys-
tem. The engine cooling system must be checked by a Volkswagen Dealership or quali-
fied workshop. Failure to do so can result in engine damage!
When refilling operating fluids, please ensure that the correct container is filled. The use of incorrect operating fluids could result in seri-
ous malfunctions and engine damage!
Brake fluid Fig. 192 On the engine compartment: brake fluid reservoir cap. Brake fluid will gradually absorb water from the surrounding air. The brake system will be dam-
aged if there is too much water in the brake fluid. The boiling point of the brake fluid is also consid-
erably reduced by the water content. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock in the brake system if the water content is too high. Va-
pour locks reduce levels of braking power, con-
siderably increase braking distance and can even cause the brake system to fail completely. Your own safety and that of other road users depends on having a brake system that functions properly at all times
. Brake fluid specification Volkswagen has developed a brake fluid opti-
mised for the brake system in the vehicle. To en-
sure optimal operation of the brake system, Volkswagen recommends the use of DOT 4 standard brake fluid Fig. 192. Additionally, we recommend using original Volkswagen brake flu-
id. Before using a particular brake fluid, check that the specifications printed on the container corre-
spond to the vehicle requirements. Suitable brake fluids may be acquired at a Volkswagen Dealership. Brake fluid level The brake fluid level must always be between the MIN and MAX marking on the brake fluid contain-
er or above the MIN marking
. Checking and refuelling 211
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. The brake fluid level cannot be checked accurate-
ly in all models, since engine components con-
ceal the brake fluid container. If the brake fluid level cannot be read exactly, please seek expert technical assistance. The brake fluid level drops slightly when the ve-
hicle is being used as the brake pads wear and the brakes are automatically adjusted. Changing brake fluid The brake fluid must be changed by a qualified workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Only brake fluid that conforms with the required spec-
ification should be refilled. WARNING Brake failure or reduced braking effect can be caused by the brake fluid level being too low or by brake fluid that is too old or unsuitable. The brake system and brake fluid level must be checked regularly. Renew the brake fluid regularly. Heavy use of the brakes may cause a vapour lock if the brake fluid is left in the system for too long. Vapour locks reduce levels of brak-
ing power, considerably increase braking dis-
tance and can even cause the brake system to fail completely. Please ensure that the correct brake fluid is used. Only use brake fluid compliant with the DOT 4 standard. Any other brake fluid or a low-quality one can affect the functioning of the brakes and reduce their effectiveness. Do not use the brake fluid if the DOT 4 standard is not indicated in the fluid package. The refilled brake fluid must be new. WARNING Brake fluid is toxic. In order to reduce the risk of poisoning, nev-
er use bottles or other containers to store brake fluid. These containers could encour-
age other people to drink out of them, even if they are labelled otherwise. Brake fluid must always be stored in its origi-
nal sealed container and kept out of the reach of children. 212 Owner's Manual NOTICE Spilt or leaked brake fluid may damage the vehi-
cle paintwork, plastic parts, and tyres. Immedi-
ately clean spilt or leaked brake fluid over the ve-
hicle's paintwork or other vehicle parts. Never mix different types of brake fluids. Clean the cover before removing it and placing it back in the reservoir. Brake fluid can pollute the environment. Collect and dispose of used fluids properly. Replacing brake fluids requires special pro-
cedures, equipment and knowledge, in ad-
dition to specific environmental standards. Therefore, disposing the brake fluid and its re-
spective package as common trash is prohibited. Applicable laws establish specific disposal proce-
dures for these cases. For your safety and con-
venience, Volkswagen recommends replacing the brake fluid at Volkswagen Dealerships. Warm starting system (E-
FLEX) Information on the warm starting system The warm starting system will switch on auto-
matically whenever the coolant temperature is too low and the fuel tank has a high percentage of ethanol. The indicator lamp will be lit in the instrument cluster upon switching on the ignition. Wait until the indicator lamp on the instrument cluster is switched off before starting the engine. If the engine starting attempt occurs before the indicator lamp is switched off on the instru-
ment cluster, the lamp will flash, indicating the need to interrupt the starting process page 86. In case of warm starting system temperatures below 0 C, under severe engine operating condi-
tions (e.g. weak vehicle battery, low fuel quality, unperformed engine service, exhaust system emissions indicator lamp (OBD) lit page 180, etc), more than one starting attempt may be re-
quired. In order to prevent starting issues with cold en-
gine, after refilling the vehicle's fuel (replacing the current fuel in the vehicle), the vehicle must run approximately 5 kilometres in order to recog-
nize the new fuel or mixture page 176. In case of failure in any warm starting system component, the indicator lamp will light up and remain lit after the engine is started. In this case, there may be difficulties in starting the cold engine, and we recommend submitting the sys-
tem to due inspection by a Volkswagen Dealer-
ship or qualified workshop. NOTICE If the TOTALFLEX vehicle is immobilized by lack of fuel, the vehicle must be refilled with the last type of fuel used - petrol or ethanol. If it is necessary to fill the tank with a different type of fuel, the following may occur:
Cold starting difficulties. Considerable decrease in engine perform-
ance. The vehicle must run for approximately 5 kilo-
metres to recognize the new fuel type, in order to prevent any of the scenarios above. When filling, fuel may be spilt on the ground, polluting the environment. Always fill the at authorized filling stations with proper fluid collection and disposal systems. Vehicle battery Introduction The vehicle battery is a component of the electri-
cal system in the vehicle. Never carry out any work on the electrical system if you are not familiar with the necessary proce-
dures and the general safety requirements and only unsuitable tools are available
! In this case, all activities must be carried out by a quali-
fied workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Serious injuries can be caused if work is carried out incor-
rectly. Vehicle battery installation location The vehicle battery is located in the engine com-
partment. Always wear eye protection!
Definition of warnings on the vehicle battery Electrolyte is very corrosive and caustic. Always wear protective gloves and eye protection!
Fires, sparks, smoke, and naked lights are prohibited!
A highly explosive mixture of gases is given off when the vehicle battery is charging!
Always keep children away from acid and the vehicle battery!
WARNING Works on the vehicle battery and the electrical system can cause severe chemical burns, fire and electric shocks. Always read the following warnings and safety information before carry-
ing out any kind of work:
Switch off the ignition and all electrical con-
sumers before carrying out any work on the vehicle battery and also disconnect the neg-
ative cable from the vehicle battery. Children should always be kept away from electrolyte and the vehicle battery. Always wear eye protection. Electrolyte is very aggressive. It can burn the skin and can cause blindness. When working with the battery, ensure that your hands, arms and face in particular are protected from acid spillages. Never open a vehicle battery. Do not smoke and never work near naked flames or sparks. When handling cables and electrical equip-
ment, avoid generating sparks and electro-
static charge. Never short circuit the battery poles. Never use a damaged vehicle battery. It can explode. A damaged vehicle battery must be replaced as soon as possible. A damaged or frozen vehicle battery must be replaced immediately. A discharged vehicle battery can even freeze at temperatures of around 0 C (+32 F). Checking and refuelling 213
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Ensure there is no one inside the vehicle while replacing the battery. In case of elec-
trical failure, airbags may be accidentally en-
gaged and cause severe or even fatal injuries to vehicle occupants. Checking the electrolyte level of the vehicle battery Please refer to chapter on page 213. and at the start of the NOTICE Never disconnect the vehicle battery with the ignition switched on or the engine running, and never connect it to another battery; other-
wise the electrical system and electronic com-
ponents may be damaged. Do not allow direct sunlight onto the vehicle battery for extended periods, since the UV rays could damage the battery housing. If the vehicle is parked for extended periods, ensure the vehicle is not parked in open spaces in order to protect the vehicle battery from freezing and being damaged. Never install damaged or improperly sealed batteries. Dispose of batteries according to environment protection standards page 215, Charging, replacing, disconnecting and connect-
ing the vehicle battery. After starting the engine with a fully dis-
charged or replaced battery, system set-
tings (such as time, date, convenience settings and programs) may have been deprogrammed or deleted. Check and adjust settings after the vehi-
cle battery is sufficiently charged. 214 Owner's Manual Fig. 193 On the engine compartment: example of display position on the upper side of the vehicle bat-
tery. The electrolyte level of the vehicle battery should be checked regularly in high-mileage vehicles, in hot countries and in older vehicle batteries. The vehicle battery is otherwise maintenance-free. Preparations Preparation for working in the engine com-
partment page 200 Open the bonnet page 202. Checking the electrolyte level Ensure that sufficient light is available in order to see the colours clearly. Never use naked flames or glowing items as a light source. The round display Fig. 193 on the top side of the vehicle battery changes its colour accord-
ing to the electrolyte level. Tap lightly on the display to eliminate air bub-
bles that may affect the colour. Light yellow or without colour The electrolyte level of the battery is too low. The vehicle battery should be checked and replaced by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified work-
shop. Eventual different colours are destined to battery diagnosis at a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. WARNING Handling the vehicle battery may cause chemi-
cal burns, explosions or severe electrical shocks. Always wear protective gloves and eye pro-
tection. Electrolyte is very aggressive. It can burn the skin and can cause blindness. When working with the battery, ensure that your hands, arms and face in particular are protected from acid spillages. Never tip the vehicle battery. Electrolyte might leak from the vents and cause chemi-
cal burns. Never open a vehicle battery. In case of spilled electrolyte on the skin or eyes, wash the affected area immediately with cold water for a few minutes. Then seek medical assistance. In case of electrolyte ingestion, seek medical assistance immediately. Charging, replacing, disconnecting and connecting the vehicle battery Please refer to chapter on page 213. and at the start of the Fig. 194 Batteries contain toxic substances and must be recycled. Therefore, batteries may not be disposed in common trash; they must be returned to the reseller after replacement. Charging the battery The vehicle battery should be charged by a quali-
fied workshop, as the technology used in factory-
fitted batteries requires voltage-limited charging
. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Replacing the battery The battery has been developed to suit the con-
ditions of its location and has special safety fea-
tures. If a vehicle battery has to be replaced, dis-
cuss the electric compatibility, appropriate load capacity (A/h) for the vehicle, size and necessary servicing, output and safety requirements for the new vehicle battery with a Volkswagen Dealer-
ship before purchasing. Volkswagen recommends changing the vehicle battery in a Volkswagen Dealership. Disconnecting the battery Please note the following points if the vehicle battery has to be disconnected from the electri-
cal system in the vehicle:
Switch off the ignition and all electrical con-
sumers. The vehicle must be unlocked before discon-
necting the battery as the alarm will otherwise be triggered. First disconnect the negative cable and then the positive cable
. If the vehicle is stationary for a long period of time, disconnect the negative battery cable. Oth-
erwise, the battery could be discharged by the current consumers in the vehicle, preventing the engine from starting. Connecting the battery Switch off all electrical consumers and the ig-
nition before reconnecting the vehicle battery. First connect the positive cable and then the negative cable
. Switch on the ignition. Set the clock. Re-establish operation of the automatic win-
dow opening and closing system page 56. In case of issues during start-up in low gears, switch the ignition on for 30 seconds and then switch it off. Then, switch the engine on. Various indicator lamps may light up after the ve-
hicle battery has been connected and the ignition is switched on. Such lamps go out after a few Checking and refuelling 215
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. WARNING A highly explosive mixture of gases is given off when the vehicle battery is charging!
Vehicle batteries should only be charged in well-ventilated spaces. Never charge a frozen or defrosted vehicle battery. A discharged vehicle battery can even freeze at temperatures of around 0 C
(+32 F). A vehicle battery must be replaced if it has been frozen. Incorrectly connected cables can cause a short circuit. First connect the positive cable and then the negative cable. NOTICE Only recode the radio if the battery is recon-
nected and the radio is switched on before the ignition. Please refer to a qualified Volkswagen Dealership to recode the radio system. Never disconnect or connect the vehicle bat-
tery with the ignition switched on or the en-
gine running, and never connect it to another battery; otherwise the electrical system and electronic components may be damaged. Never connect any power generating equip-
ment, such as solar panels or battery charging units to charge up the vehicle battery, to the 12-volt outlet socket. This can damage the ve-
hicle electrical system. Batteries may contain toxic substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. This product can-
not be disposed / discarded along with common trash. There are specific legal requirements re-
garding the disposal / discarding of used batter-
ies. For your safety and convenience, Volkswagen recommends replacing vehicle batteries at a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. The acid solution and lead contained in the battery could contaminate the ground and waters if disposed of incorrectly. Consumption of lead-contaminated waters may cause high blood pressure, several gastrointestinal disorders and anaemia (weakness and drowsiness). seconds. If the indicator lamps remain lit up, the vehicle should be checked by a Volkswagen Deal-
ership or qualified workshop. If the vehicle battery was disconnected for long periods, the system may not able to calculate or correctly display the time when the next service is due page 14. Observe the maximum permis-
sible service intervals in the page 238. Automatic consumer deactivation Through a smart electric management system, in case of high battery demand, different measures are adopted to prevent the battery from being discharged:
Slow-gear rotation is increased in order for the alternator to provide more current. If necessary, some power consumers are limi-
ted or deactivated completely, in case of emergency. When starting the engine, the 12 V lighter power supply may be temporarily interrupted. The electric management system does not al-
ways prevent the battery from being discharged. This may occur if the ignition remains switched on while the engine is turned off for extended periods, of if the indicator light remains on for extended periods, while the vehicle is parked. What can cause the vehicle battery to discharge?
Long periods at a standstill in which the en-
gine is not running, especially if the ignition is switched on. Use of electrical consumers when the engine is switched off. WARNING Incorrect attachment of the battery and the use of incorrect vehicle batteries can cause short circuits, fire and serious injuries. Always use maintenance-free and leak proof batteries which have the same properties, specifications and dimensions as the factory-
fitted vehicle battery. Ensure there is no one inside the vehicle while replacing the battery. In case of elec-
trical failure, airbags may be accidentally en-
gaged and cause severe or even fatal injuries to vehicle occupants. 216 Owner's Manual Troubleshooting Please refer to chapter on page 213. and at the start of the Vehicle battery Central warning lamp The vehicle battery will not be charged by the al-
ternator while the vehicle is in motion. Switch off unnecessary electrical consumers. Contact a Volkswagen Dealership. Have the electric system checked. WARNING Failure to observe the warning lamps and text messages could lead to your vehicle breaking down in traffic, and to accidents and serious in-
juries. Never ignore any warning lamps or text mes-
sages that appear. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. NOTICE Failure to observe the illuminated indicator lamps could lead to vehicle damages. Wheels and tyres Tyre monitoring system Introduction The tyre monitoring system warns the driver when tyre pressure is too low. Depending on the vehicle version, the tyre moni-
toring system may not be available. WARNING The technology shipped with the tyre monitor-
ing system cannot go beyond the limits im-
posed by physics and will only operate within the limitations of the system. Inadequate use of the wheels and tires may cause a sudden loss of tyre pressure, displacement of the tire treads and even their blowing up. Check tyre pressures regularly and always keep to the specified tyre pressure value page 223, Tyre pressure. When the tyre pressure is very low, the tyre can become so hot that the tyre tread may come loose and the tyre blow up. Always maintain the correct tyre pressures calibrated with cold tyres according to the indicated on the sticker page 223, Tyre pressure The tyre pressures should be checked regu-
larly on cold tyres. If necessary adjust the tyre pressure page 223, Tyre pressure. Check the tyres regularly, looking for wear and tear signs. Never exceed the top speed and load capaci-
ty permitted for the fitted tyres. A too low tyre pressure increases fuel con-
sumption and tyre wear. When driving for the first time with new tyres at high speed, they may expand some-
what and so a single tyre pressure warning may be issued. Old tyres should only be replaced by tyres that have been approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle type. Wheels and tyres 217
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Do not rely only on the tyre monitoring sys-
tem. Regularly check the tyres to ensure that their pressures are correct and to see whether there are signs of damage, such as holes, cuts, cracks or bubbles. Remove foreign bodies from the tread of the tyre before they penetrate the tyre interior. Tyre Pressure Loss Indicator Please refer to on page 217. at the start of the chapter The tyre pressure loss indicator compares, assis-
ted by the ABS sensors, the speed and, conse-
quently the rolling circumference of each tyre, among other things. The tyre pressure loss indi-
cator indicates on the instrument cluster a change in diameter of one or more wheels. Changes to the diameter The rolling circumference of the tyre can change:
When the tyre pressure has been changed manually. When the tyre pressure is very low. When the tyre has structural damages. When the vehicle is loaded on only one side. When the wheels of one axle are heavily loa-
ded, e.g. when carrying a very heavy load. Whether an emergency wheel is mounted. When one wheel has been changed. The tyre pressure loss indicator can be delayed or not display nothing under given conditions such as, for example, when the driving style is very sporty on unpaved roads, Setting the tyre pressure loss indicator After a tyre pressure change or after changing one or more wheels, the tyre pressure loss indi-
cator must be reset again. This is also valid when rotating front versus rear wheels. To reset the system the saved values must first be reset. Switch on the ignition. Access the submenu Tyre pressures on the dis-
play of the instrument cluster page 14. When the 4 tyre pressures correspond to the prescribed values, touch the Confirm function pad to save the tyre pressures. The menu item Return cancels the saving of the current tyre pressures and the programming of the system. The system is programmed after resetting the saved values during the normal driving of the ve-
hicle with the tyre pressures defined by the driv-
er and with mounted tyres. After a long drive at different speeds, the set values are recorded and monitored. With very high loads on the wheels, for example, in case of a heavy load, before the program, the pressure of the tires must be increased until reaching the recommended full load pres-
sure page 223 The tyre pressure loss indicator does not work when the ESC or the ABS are damaged page 101, Brake support systems. When driving with one emergency wheel, a malfunction warning may appear as the pe-
rimeter of the emergency wheel may be different from that of the other wheels. Tyre pressure loss indicator troubleshooting Please refer to on page 217. at the start of the chapter on The pressure of one or more tyres went down or the tyre suffered a structural damage. Stop driving!
Check all the tyre pressures and adjust page 219. Replace the damaged tyres. Resetting the tyre pressure loss indicator again page 218. Should the problem persist, seek specialized assistance. flashes for about one minute and then remains permanently lit System damaged. Stop driving!
Turn the ignition off and on again. 218 Owner's Manual Resetting the tyre pressure loss indicator again page 218. Should the problem persist, seek specialized assistance. WARNING Different tyre pressures or very low tyre pres-
sures may result in collapsing tyres, loss of con-
trol over the vehicle, accidents, severe injuries and loss of life. If the indicator lamp lights up, stop imme-
diately and check all tyres page 223. Different tyre pressures or very low tyre pressures may increase tyre wear, deterio-
rate stability and increase braking distance. Different tyre pressures or very low tyre pressures may result in a sudden collapse of the tyre, causing the tyre to blow up and the loss of control over the vehicle. The driver is responsible for the correct pres-
sure in all the tyres of the vehicle. The rec-
ommended tyre pressure is always available on the sticker page 223. The tyre monitoring system can only fulfil its mission when all tyres have the correct pres-
sure when cold. Using incorrect tyre pressure values may cause accidents and damages to the tyres. All tyres must always have their tyre pres-
sure adjusted to the carried load condition page 223. Prior each trip, always calibrate the tyres to the correct tyre pressure page 223. When travelling with very low tyre pressure, the tyres necessarily undergo more deforma-
tions. This way the tyres may get so hot that the tread may come loose, the tyres may blow up and loss of control over the vehicle may occur. High speeds and overload may heat a tyre in such a way that the tyre may blow-up and lead to loss of control over the vehicle. If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehi-
cle will not handle well. If the tyre is not punctured and is not nec-
essary to change the wheel immediately, drive at low speed to the nearest Volkswagen dealership or specialized compa-
ny, to check and correct the tyre pressures page 219. WARNING Failure to observe the warning lamps and text messages could lead to your vehicle breaking down in traffic, and to accidents and serious in-
juries. Never ignore any warning lamps or text mes-
sages that appear. Stop the vehicle as soon as possible and when safe to do so. NOTICE Failure to observe the illuminated indicator lamps could lead to vehicle damages. With the ignition turned on, if a low tyre pressure is detected, the indicator lamp lights up . In addition, an acoustic warning sounds and a text message may be exhibited. When a damage to the system is detected with the ignition turned on, the warning lamp blinks for a while and then stays perma-
nently lit. In addition a text message may be ex-
hibited. A long drive over unpaved roads or a spor-
tive driving style may temporarily disable the tyre pressure loss indicator. The indicator lamp displays the malfunction, but goes off, however, when the road conditions or driving style change. Important information on wheels and tyres Introduction Volkswagen recommends that work on tyres and wheels is carried out by a qualified workshop. They are familiar with the procedure and have the necessary special tools and spare parts as well as the facilities for proper disposal of old tyres. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. WARNING Worn or damaged tyres cannot provide full lev-
els of vehicle control and braking power. Wheels and tyres 219
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Incorrect handling of wheels and tyres can reduce vehicle safety and cause accidents and severe injuries. All 4 wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern. New tyres will have to be run in, as they will initially have reduced grip and braking effect. Drive particularly carefully for the first 600 km in order to prevent accidents and severe injuries. At high and continuous speed, tyres with low pressure are excessively heated, which could cause the treads from detaching or even ex-
ploding. Always maintain the recommended tyre pressure. Never drive with worn tyres or tyres that are damaged (cuts, cracks or blisters). Driving with tyres in this condition can result in blown tyres, accidents and severe injuries. Worn or damaged tyres must be replaced immediately. Never exceed the top speed and load permit-
ted for the fitted tyres. The effectiveness of the driver assist systems and brake assist systems depends on the tyre grip. If you notice unusual vibrations or if the ve-
hicle pulls to one side when driving, stop the car immediately and check the wheels and tyres for damage. Do not use wheels or tyres if you do not know their previous history. Used wheels and tyres could be damaged, even if the damage is not visible. Old tyres even if never used may loose pressure or burst, especially at high speeds, and thus cause accidents and severe injuries. Avoid using tyres that are more than six years old. If you have no alternative, drive slowly and with extra care at all times. For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from other vehi-
cles. This can also apply to wheels of the same vehicle type. Consult a Volkswagen Dealership, if necessary. 220 Owner's Manual Handling wheels and tyres Please refer to on page 219. at the start of the chapter Fig. 195 Diagram showing how to swap wheels. Tyres are the most used and most underestima-
ted parts of a vehicle. Tyres are very important as the tyre surfaces are the only contact between the vehicle and the road. The service life of tyres is dependent on tyre pressure, driving style, handling, and fitting. Tyres and wheel rims are an essential part of the vehicle's design. Tyres and wheels approved by Volkswagen are specifically matched to the char-
acteristics of the vehicle and make a major con-
tribution to good road holding and safe handling. Avoiding damages to the tyres If you have to drive over a kerb or similar ob-
stacle, drive slowly and at a right angle if pos-
sible. Inspect the tyres regularly for damage such as cuts, cracks or blisters. Remove foreign objects that are in the outer tyre tread and have not penetrated the inner tyre page 225. If the case, observe the warning messages of the tyres control system page 217. Worn or damaged tyres must be replaced im-
mediately page 225. Regularly check the tyres for hidden damage page 225. Never exceed the top speed and load permit-
ted for the fitted tyres page 228. Protect the wheels, including the spare wheel, from contact with corrosive substances, in-
cluding oils, lubricants, fuel and brake fluid
. Replace missing valve caps immediately. Rotating wheels A regular rotation of the wheels as shown in the illustration Fig. 195 is recommended to ensure a uniform level of wear for the tyres. All the tyres will then last for about the same time. Volkswagen recommends to check the need to rotate the tyres at every servicing of the vehicle, and when there is such need, that alignment and balancing be performed. Volkswagen recommends having the wheels ro-
tated by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. Storing tyres Mark tyres before you remove them to ensure you will be able to mount them correctly when replacing (left, right, front, rear). When removed, the wheels or tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and preferably dark place. Do not vertically store tyres mounted on the wheels. Tyres without wheels should be protected against dirt and stored in proper covers standing on the tread. New tyres Drive particularly carefully for the first 600 km with new tyres, as the tyres have to be run in. Tyres that have not been run in have reduced grip and braking effect
. All 4 wheels must be fitted with radial tyres of the same type, size (rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern. The tread depth of new tyres may differ from manufacturing and profile modelling charac-
teristics according to the type and make of tyre and the tread pattern. Replacing tyres Tyres should be replaced at least in pairs and not individually (e.g. both front tyres or both rear tyres together)
. Old tyres should only be replaced by new tyres that have been approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle type. Ensure that the tyres used are correct in respect of size, diameter, load-carry-
ing capacity and maximum speed. Never use tyres with an effective size that is larger than Volkswagen-approved tyres. Larger tyres could rub against the body or other parts of the vehicle. In addition on vehicles with a Tyre Pressure loss indicator On vehicles with tyre pressure loss control, after each mounting of a wheel, the system must be reset, regardless whether the wheel is the same that was originally mounted there till now or of a new wheel page 217. For more information regarding the Tyre pres-
sure control, how it works and what needs to be known page 217. WARNING Corrosive liquids and other substances can cause visible and invisible damage to the tyres, which can cause the tyre to burst. Always keep chemicals, oils, lubricants, fuel, brake fluid and other corrosive substances away from the tyres. WARNING New tyres will have to be run in, as they will in-
itially have reduced grip and braking effect. Drive particularly carefully for the first 600 km in order to prevent accidents and severe injuries. WARNING Wheels must have the proper necessary free-
dom of operation. If the wheels do not have the necessary freedom of operation, the tyre could rub on parts of the running gear, the vehicle body and the brake system. This can lead to a fault in the brake system and to tread separa-
tion and thus to a tyre bursting. Wheels and tyres 221
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Wheel bolts Wheel bolts must always be tightened with the correct tightening torque page 232. Wheels with bolted-on trims Wheels may have removable trims which are at-
tached to the wheel with self-locking bolts. Damaged trims may only be repaired by a quali-
fied workshop. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Wheel identification Due to legal requirements in some countries, the information on new wheels may contain some specific wheel features. The following wheel data may be available, depending on the country:
Seal of conformity Rim size Manufacturer or brand name Manufacture date Country of origin Manufacturing number Raw material Part code WARNING The use of improper or damaged wheels can impair vehicle safety and cause accidents and severe injuries. Only use wheels which have been approved for the vehicle. Check the wheels regularly for damage and replace as necessary. The actual tyre size must not exceed the tyre dimensions of manufacturers approved by Volkswagen and must not rub on any vehicle body parts. Old tyres must be disposed of with specific technical knowledge and equipment, based on specific standards. Therefore, we recommend visiting a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop for such purpose. Tyre disposal requires equipment and knowledge of applicable environment pro-
tection standards. Tyres cannot be disposed /
discarded along with common trash. Applicable laws establish specific disposal procedures for these cases. For your safety and convenience, Volkswagen recommends replacing tyres at a Volkswagen Dealership. Despite identical size details, the actual size of the various tyre makes may vary from these specified dimensions, or the tyre contours may vary considerably. Volkswagen-approved tyres are guaranteed to have the dimensions that are suitable for the vehicle. The salesperson will have to provide a certificate from the tyre manufacturer for other tyre makes to prove that the tyre is also suitable for the vehicle. This certificate must be stored in a safe place within the vehicle. Wheels Please refer to on page 219. at the start of the chapter The design of the wheel bolts is matched to the wheels. If different wheels are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and properly shaped bolt heads must be used. This ensures that the wheels are fitted securely and that the brake system works properly page 232. For technical reasons, it is not generally possible to use the wheels from other vehicles. This can also apply to wheels of the same vehicle type. Tyres and wheels approved by Volkswagen are specifically matched to the characteristics of the vehicle and make a major contribution to good road holding and safe handling. 222 Owner's Manual Tyre pressure Please refer to on page 219. at the start of the chapter Fig. 196 Sticker with the tyre pressures. Fig. 197 On the inner side of the fuel tank flap: tyre pressure label. Indications on the tyre pressure stick-
er Fig. 196:
A B 1 Tyre pressures for the front axle tyres. Tyre pressures for the rear axle tyres. Guideline: regularly check the pressure on the cold tyres. Tyre pressure under partial load. Depending on the vehicles version: Comfort tyre pressure under partial load. Tyre pressure under full load. Emergency wheel tyre pressure. 2 3 4 5 The sticker only indicates the correct tyre pres-
sures for approved tyres and is located on the in-
side of the fuel tank flap Fig. 197. According to the version of the vehicle the ap-
pearance of the sticker may vary. Additional tyre sizes may be contained page 228. If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehicle will
. Proper tyre pressure is par-
not handle well ticularly important at high speeds. Incorrect tyre pressure causes premature wear and can cause tyres to burst. The pressure should therefore be checked at least twice a month and before starting a jour-
ney. The given tyre pressure applies to cold tyres. Tyre pressure is always higher in warm tyres than it is in cold tyres. For this reason, never reduce the pressure in warm tyres to adjust the tyre pressure. This would result in low tyre pressures that could cause the tyre to burst suddenly. Checking tyre pressure The tyre pressure should only be checked if the tyres have not been driven for more than just a few kilometres at low speed in the last 3 three hours. The tyre pressures should be checked regularly and only when the tyres are cold. Always check all the tyres, including the spare wheel. The tyre pressure should be checked at more regu-
lar intervals in colder regions, but only if the vehicle has not been moved beforehand. The tyre pressure tester must function correctly. The tyre pressures must be altered to suit the vehicle load. After correctly adjusting the tyre pressures, don't forget to put back the valve covers and if necessary, follow the information and guide-
lines for the configuration of the tyre pressure loss control system page 217. The spare wheel is filled to the highest tyre pres-
sure permissible for the vehicle. WARNING A tyre pressure that is too high or too low may cause the tyre to suddenly lose pressure or burst while the vehicle is in motion. This could lead to severe accidents and fatal injuries. Low tyre pressure may cause the tyres to heat to such an extent that the tread peels off and the tyre bursts. Wheels and tyres 223
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Fast speeds or overloading of the vehicle can cause overheating, sudden tyre damage in-
cluding tyre bursts and ripping of the tread surface and thus to a loss of control of the vehicle. If the tyre pressure is too low or too high, the tyres will wear prematurely and the vehi-
cle will not handle well. Check tyre pressures regularly, at least twice a month, and before every long journey. All tyres must have the correct tyre pressure to suit the vehicle load. Never reduce excess pressure when the tyres are warm. NOTICE When attaching the tyre pressure gauge, make sure that it does not touch the valve shaft. Otherwise, this could damage the tyre valve. Missing valve caps, or valve caps which are not suitable or not screwed on properly, may dam-
age the tyre valve. Always use valve caps that comply with the factory-fitted valve cap speci-
fications. Always screw on valve caps fully. Under-inflated tyres will increase fuel con-
sumption. If the tyre pressure loss indicator issues a warning of low pressure on at least one of the tyres, check the tyre pressure of the tyres with a tyre pressure gage in good working order. A too low tyre pressure cannot be verified only by the visual aspect of the tyre. This also valid for low profile tyres. When checking the tyre pressures, be aware of the particularities of the tyre monitoring system page 217. Tread depth and wear indicators Please refer to on page 219. at the start of the chapter Fig. 198 Tyre profile: wear indicators. Tread depth Difficult driving situations demand the deepest possible tread depth for the tyres and the same tread depth for the tyres on the front and rear axles In most countries, the minimum tread depth re-
quired by law is 1.6 mm (measured in the tread grooves next to the tread wear indicators). Ob-
serve any country-specific legal requirements. Winter tyres lose a large degree of their effec-
tiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm. The tread depth of new tyres can vary according to type and manufacturer due to construction and tread design. Tyre wear indicators The original tyres on your vehicle have 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators running across the tread Fig. 198. These wear indicators are posi-
tioned at set intervals around the tyre. Markings on the tyre sidewall (for instance the letters TWI or other symbols indicate the positions of the tread wear indicators. Tread wear indicators show if a tyre is worn down. The tyre must be replaced at the latest when the tread depth is just before the tread wear indicator. WARNING Worn tyres threaten the safety of vehicle occu-
pants and may cause loss of vehicle control and severe injuries. 224 Owner's Manual Tyres must be replaced at the latest when the tread is worn down to the tread wear in-
dicators. Worn tyres have considerably less tread, par-
ticularly on wet roads, which can cause the vehicle to glide along the road surface
(aquaplaning). Worn tyres reduce the possibility of control-
ling the vehicle well in normal and difficult driving situations and increase braking dis-
tance and the risk of sliding. Tyre damage Please refer to on page 219. at the start of the chapter Damage to tyres and wheels is often not readily visible. Unusual vibrations or if the vehicle pulls to one side, one of the tyres might be damaged Reduce your speed immediately if you suspect
. that a wheel is damaged!
Check the tyres and wheels for damages. If the tyre is damaged, do not drive on. Seek expert assistance. If there is no visible damage, drive slowly and cautiously to the closest Volkswagen Dealer-
ship or a qualified workshop in order to have the vehicle checked. Foreign bodies in the tyre Leave the foreign body in the tyre if it has en-
tered the inner tyre. However, foreign bodies that are stuck between the tyre tread blocks can be removed. Replaced the damaged wheel if necessary. Seek expert assistance if necessary. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Control and correct the pressure. Tyre wear Tyre wear is affected by several factors, such as:
Driving style. Unbalanced wheels. Running gear setting. Driving style Fast cornering, heavy acceleration and hard braking all increase tyre wear. The run-
ning gear should be checked by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop if the tyres show excessive wear despite a normal driving style. Unbalanced wheels The wheels on new vehi-
cles are balanced. However, various factors en-
countered in normal driving can cause them to become unbalanced, which results in steering vi-
bration. Unbalanced wheels will affect levels of wear on the steering system and the suspension. In this case the wheels should be balanced again. New wheels must be balanced out prior mount-
ing on the vehicle. Running gear setting incorrect wheel alignment causes excessive tyre wear, impairing the safety of the vehicle. The wheel alignment should be checked by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop if tyres show excessive wear. WARNING Unusual vibrations or if the car pulls to one side while driving, one of the tyres might be dam-
aged. Reduce speed immediately and park the ve-
hicle while complying with traffic laws. Check the tyres and wheels for damages. Never drive on if the wheels or tyres are damaged. Seek expert assistance instead. If there is no visible damage, drive slowly and cautiously to the closest Volkswagen Dealership or a qualified workshop in order to have the vehicle checked. Wheels and tyres 225
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Spare wheel Please refer to at the start of the chapter on page 219. Fig. 199 In the cargo compartment: access to the temporary spare wheel. Under the vehicle: spare wheel entirely on the floor and removal from underneath the vehicle. Turn the lug wrench clockwise Fig. 199 2 until the end of the mechanism's course, even after the spare wheel having completely touched the ground. The end of course is char-
acterized when the wrench is blocked by the mechanism's stop. Remove the lug wrench and the adapter from the mechanism screw. Close the tailgate page 52. Carefully pull the spare wheel, in the direction of the arrow Fig. 199 4 , removing it from underneath the vehicle. Place the spare wheel in vertical position Fig. 200. Remove the hook from the central wheel hole, in the direction of the arrow 6 . Placing the temporary spare tyre into its housing Place the spare wheel in vertical position, al-
lowing the filling nozzle to face up, when the wheel is in horizontal position. Insert the hook through the central wheel hole, in the direction of the arrow Fig. 200 5 . Place the spare wheel in horizontal position;
ensure that the filling valve is facing up and that the rim hook is locked through the central hole, thus preventing the spare wheel from becoming loose during the procedure. Fig. 200 On the spare wheel: remove the spare wheel cable. The spare wheel is fastened underneath the vehi-
cle with a cable; it must be turned downwards in order to be removed. The spare wheel may only be removed when the vehicle is safely parked and all necessary actions and procedures are well known! Seek expert as-
sistance if this is not the case. Taking the temporary spare tyre from its housing To access the spare wheel supporting mecha-
nism screw, open the tailgate page 52. Fit the adaptor Fig. 164 3 and the lug wrench 2 into the mechanism screw. 226 Owner's Manual Carefully push the temporary spare wheel, in the direction of the arrow Fig. 199 3 , plac-
ing it underneath the vehicle To access the spare wheel supporting mecha-
nism screw, open the tailgate page 52. Fit the adaptor Fig. 164 3 and the lug wrench 2 into the mechanism screw. Turn the lug wrench anti-clockwise Fig. 199 1 , until the end of course of the mechanism, which is characterized by the wrench's free rotation. Remove the lug wrench and the adapter from the mechanism screw. Close the tailgate page 52. In case of difference between the spare wheel and vehicle tyres If the spare wheel is different from the normal vehicle tyre version, for example, the former may be used only in case of emergency, temporarily and with due precautions Refit the normal road wheel as soon as possible. Observe the driving notes:
Do not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph)!
Avoid full acceleration, sudden braking and
. fast driving through bends in the road!
Tyre pressure must be checked as soon as pos-
sible after fitting the spare wheel page 223. Tyre pressure of the spare wheel must be checked along with the normal tyres at least twice a month. The spare wheel should have the highest pressure allowed for the vehicle page 223. WARNING Removing the spare wheel can be dangerous, especially when performed roadside. Park the vehicle on a flat and solid surface at a safe distance from the flow of traffic. WARNING Incorrect use of the spare wheel or temporary spare wheel can lead to a loss of control of the vehicle, to collisions or other accidents and cause serious injuries. Never use a spare wheel or temporary spare wheel if it is damaged or worn down to the tread wear indicators. Never exceed 80 km/h (50 mph). Avoid full acceleration, sudden braking and making turns at high speeds!
Replace the spare wheel with a regular wheel as soon as possible. The spare wheel is only intended for use in short periods of time. The temporary spare wheel must always be secured firmly with the wheel bolts supplied by the factory. After fitting the temporary spare wheel, the tyre pressure must be checked as soon as possible page 223, Tyre pressure. WARNING After changing the tyre, always ensure that the vehicle toolkit and spare wheel are properly se-
cured in their respective housings. This meas-
ure is necessary and mandatory, and must be observed even in small trips, in order to prevent injuries to individuals inside and outside the ve-
hicle in case of accidents. CAUTION Whenever it is necessary to remove or replace the spare wheel in its respective housing, use only the procedure described in this manual. Never use electric or pneumatic equipment when removing or installing spare wheels in its housing, in order to prevent vehicle dam-
ages. NOTICE After removing the spare wheel from the lower part of the luggage compartment floor, retrieve the spare wheel support mechanism cable, in case the wheel to be replaced is not installed in the housing. When discarding old or damaged tyres, Volkswagen recommends visiting a Volkswagen Dealership, which has all necessary equipment and technical knowledge regarding specific disposal standards for such material. If possible, firmly fasten the spare wheel or replaced wheel in the spare wheel support under the vehicle. Wheels and tyres 227
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Tyre lettering Please refer to at the start of the chapter on page 219. Fig. 201 International tyre lettering (example). Tyre lettering (example). Product name DOT JHCO CHWS 2213 Fig. 201 1 2 3 Definition Individual tyre lettering from the manufacturer. The tyre complies with the legal requirements of the De-
partment of Transportation, responsible for tyre safety standards. Tyre identification number ( a) in some cases only on the inner side of the wheel) and manufacturing date:
JHCO CHWS 2213 Tyre manufacturing origin identification code and manufacturer information regarding tyre size and features. Manufacture date 22nd week of 2013. Information for the end user concerning comparative values for specified basic tyres (standardised test procedure) page 255:
TREADWEAR 280 4 Relative life expectancy for the tyre, based on a standard test. Tyres with a treadwear of 280 tyres wear out 2.8 times slower than regular tyres with a treadwear of 100. Tyre per-
formance varies depending on use conditions and may sig-
nificantly vary from standard values due to driving behavior, maintenance, different road characteristics and weather conditions. 228 Owner's Manual Fig. 201 Tyre lettering (example). TRACTION AA 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 TEMPERATURE A 88 H Rolling direction and ar-
row OR: Outside MAX INFLATION 350 KPA
(51 psi / 3,51 bar) M+S or M/S or TWI Brand name, logo Made in Germany 14 023 E4 e4 0200477-b 15 RADIAL TUBELESS P 195 / 65 R 15 XL Definition Wet braking response of the tyre (AA, A, B or C). This rating is measured in certified test tracks, under controlled condi-
tions. Tyres marked with C have low traction power. The traction rating assigned to the tyre is based on levelled track tests and does not include acceleration, lateral curves, aquaplaning, or traction under maximum load. Temperature stability of the tyre at higher test speeds (A, B or C). Tyres marked with A and B exceed legal requirements. The temperature test is based on tyres with the proper pressure and excludes excess pressure. Excessive speeds, improper or excess tyre pressure may heat or damage the tyres, either separately or in combination. Load page 230 and speed index page 230. Identification of the tyre's rolling direction page 230. Identification of the tyre's outer wall page 230. Limitation for maximum air pressure. Denotes winter tyres (mud and snow tyres). Spiked tyres are identified with an E after the S. Indicates the position of the Tread Wear Indicator page 224. Manufacturer. Manufacturing country. Specific identification for China (China Compulsory Certifi-
cation). Specific identification for Brazil. Certification of conformity with international requirements with the number of the country that issued the approval. Tyres approved as per ECE regulations are marked with E, and tyres approved as per EG regulations are marked with e. This is followed by the multi-digit approval number. Tubeless radial tyre. Size designation:
P 195 65 R 15 XL Identification for passenger vehicle. Tyre width from wall to wall in mm. Height/width ratio in %. Tyre construction: radial. Wheel diameter in inches. Heavy-duty tyres (Reinforced). MAXIMUM LOAD 615 KG
(1235 LBS) Maximum load per wheel specification. Wheels and tyres 229 16 17 18 19
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Fig. 201 Tyre lettering (example). SIDEWALL 1 PLY RAYON 20 TREAD 4 PLIES 1 RAYON + 2 STEEL +
1 NYLON Definition Tyre cradle component specifications:
1 Rayon layer (synthetic silk). Tread component indications. In this example, there are 4 layers under the tread: 1 layer of Rayon (synthetic silk), 2 layers of steel strap and 1 layer of nylon. a) TIN is the tyre serial number. Tyres with directional tread pattern Tyres with directional tread pattern have been developed to roll in a single direction. An arrow on the tyre sidewall indicates the direction of ro-
tation on tyres with directional tread . The direc-
tion of rotation must be followed. This is the only guarantee for optimum grip and helps to avoid aquaplaning, excessive noise and wear. If, however, the tyre is fitted in the opposite di-
rection to the tread pattern, you must take more care when driving as the tyre is now no longer being used according to its designation. This is particularly important on wet roads. Tyres must be replaced as quickly as possible or be fitted with the tread in the correct direction. Tyre load capacity The load capacity index indicates how many kilo-
grams can be loaded onto an individual tyre (tyre load). 80 85 90 91 93 450 kg 515 kg 600 kg 615 kg 650 kg 95 97 99 100 690 kg 730 kg 775 kg 800 kg Speed index The speed index indicates the maximum permit-
ted speed that may be driven when particular wheels are fitted. P Q R S T U H V W Y max. 150 km/h max. 160 km/h max. 170 km/h max. 180 km/h max. 190 km/h max. 200 km/h max. 210 km/h max. 240 km/h max. 270 km/h max. 300 km/h Some tyre manufacturers use the code ZR for tyres with a highest permitted speed of over 240 km/h (149 mph). Winter tyres Please refer to on page 219. at the start of the chapter In winter road conditions winter tyres will con-
siderably improve the car's handling. The design of summer tyres (width, rubber compound, tread pattern) gives less grip on ice and snow. Volkswagen urgently recommends the use of winter tyres or all-year tyres on all 4 wheels of the vehicle, particularly if winter conditions are expected on the roads Winter tyres will also im-
prove the braking response of the vehicle and will help to reduce braking distances in winter weather. At temperatures below +7 C (+45 F) Volkswagen recommends that winter tyres be fitted to the vehicle. lose a large degree of their effectiveness when the tread is worn down to a depth of 4 mm. Win-
ter tyres also largely lose their effectiveness through ageing regardless of the remaining tread depth. The following applies when using winter tyres:
Observe any country-specific legal require-
ments. Use winter tyres on all 4 wheels at the same time. 230 Owner's Manual Only use in winter road conditions. Only use the sizes of winter tyre that have been approved for the vehicle. Winter tyres must have the same type, size
(rolling circumference) and the same tread pattern. Observe the maximum speed permitted by the speed index
. Speed limit Winter tyres have a speed limitation depending on the speed index page 230. If you use V-rated tyres, the speed limits and tyre pressure will be determined by engine size. You must ask your Volkswagen Dealership about the highest permitted speed and required tyre pres-
sure. WARNING Improved driving conditions due to the use of winter tyres during winter weather does not mean safety risks must not be prevented. Adapt your speed and driving style to suit visibility, weather, road and traffic condi-
tions. Never exceed the maximum speed and load limits for fitted winter tyres. Reassemble summer tyres only after the winter season is over. At temperatures above +7 C (+45 F) vehicle handling is better with summer tyres fitted. They are quieter, do not wear so quickly and reduce fuel consump-
tion. Volkswagen Dealerships can provide details on permissible winter tyre sizes. Hub caps Introduction WARNING Using unsuitable hubcaps and fitting the hub-
caps incorrectly can cause accidents and severe injuries. Hub caps which are not fitted properly could become loose while the vehicle is in motion and endanger other road users. Do not use damaged hub caps. Always ensure that the flow of air to cool the brakes is not restricted or reduced. This also applies when retrofitting wheel trims. If the flow of air is not sufficient, the braking dis-
tance could increase significantly. NOTICE Remove hub caps carefully and fit them again properly so as to avoid damage to the vehicle. Wheel bolt cap Please refer to chapter on page 231. and at the start of the Fig. 202 Removing the wheel bolt caps. Depending on the vehicle equipment, wheel bolt caps may not be available. Take the wire hook from the vehicle toolkit page 182. Insert the hook through the opening in the cap Fig. 202 and pull off in the direction of the arrow. The caps protect the wheel bolts and must be re-
placed after changing the tyre. Ensure that the caps are properly secured when fitting them. Otherwise, they could become loose while driving. Wheels and tyres 231
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Wheel cover WARNING Please refer to chapter on page 231. and at the start of the Fig. 203 Removing the wheel covers. Removing the wheel covers Take the lug wrench from the vehicle toolkit page 182. Remove the wheel bolts. The bolt opposite to valve Fig. 203 A serves as a guide in the fit-
ting sequence. Therefore, remove bolt A last-
ly and be careful not to let the wheel cover fall when removing the remaining bolts. Fitting the wheel covers Fit bolt A first; position the wheel cover and fit the remaining bolts. NOTICE The wheel cover is secured to the wheel and may only be removed by first removing the wheel bolts. Changing a wheel Introduction Only change the wheel yourself when the car is parked in a safe place, you are familiar with the necessary actions and safety procedures and you have access to all the correct tools! Seek expert assistance if this is not the case. 232 Owner's Manual Changing a wheel can be dangerous, especially when carried out at the side of a road. Please note the following points in order to reduce the risk of serious injuries:
Stop the vehicle as soon as possible in a safe location. Park the vehicle at a safe distance from moving traffic in order to carry out the wheel change. All passengers, especially children, must be at a safe distance and away from your area of work during the wheel change. Switch on the hazard warning lights and set up the warning triangle to warn other road users. Make sure that the ground is flat and firm. If necessary use a large, strong board or similar support for the vehicle jack. Only change the wheel yourself if you feel confident carrying out the procedure. Seek expert assistance if this is not the case. Always use suitable and undamaged tools to change the wheel. Always switch the engine off, pull the hand-
brake and select a gear to reduce the risk of vehicle movement. The wheel bolt tightening torque should be checked with a torque wrench immediately after changing a wheel. After changing a wheel, immediately pro-
gram the tyre monitoring system page 217. Preparations for changing a wheel Please refer to on page 232. at the start of the chapter Checklist The following actions must always be carried out in the given order in preparation for changing the wheel 1. In case of flat tyres, park the vehicle at a saf-
est distance possible from the traffic flow, in a steady and even terrain.
2. Apply the handbrake page 95. 3. Stop the engine and remove the key from the ignition lock page 86. Checklist (Continued) 4. Select a gear page 88. 5. Have all occupants get out of the vehicle and placed in a safe spot away from the traffic. 6. Place a wedge on the opposite wheel, using a rock or similar object. 7. While towing trailers: unhitch the trailer from the vehicle and park it properly. 8. With loaded bed: remove luggage items. 9. Take the vehicle tools out page 183as well as the temporary spare tyre page 226. 10. Remove the hub cap page 231 and loosen the wheel screws. WARNING Ignoring any of the points on this important safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju-
ries. Always follow the instructions on the check-
list and comply with applicable safety pre-
cautions. Wheel bolts Please refer to on page 232. at the start of the chapter Fig. 204 Changing the wheel: loosen wheel bolts. Only the spanner delivered with the vehicle should be used to loosen the wheel bolts. Only loosen the wheel bolts by approximately one turn before raising the vehicle with the vehi-
cle jack. If the wheel bolt is very tight, you may be able to loosen it by pushing down the end of the spanner carefully with your foot. Hold on to the car for support and take care not to slip. Loosening the wheel bolts Fit the box spanner over the wheel bolt as far as it will go Fig. 204. Hold the end of the box spanner and turn the wheel bolt approximately one turn anticlock-
wise
. Important information about the wheel bolts The wheel bolts were specifically designed for the factory-fitted wheels. If different wheels are fitted, the correct wheel bolts with the right length and properly shaped bolt heads must be used. This ensures that the wheels are fitted se-
curely and that the brake system works properly. Tightening torque for the wheel bolts The tightening torque for wheel bolts for steel and alloy wheels is 110 Nm. The tightening tor-
que should be checked with a torque wrench im-
mediately after changing a wheel. If the wheel bolts are corroded and difficult to turn, they must be replaced and the wheel hub threads cleaned before the tightening torque is checked. Never grease or lubricate the wheel bolts or the threads of the wheel hub. This could cause them to loosen while the vehicle is in motion, even if the required torque setting is used. WARNING Incorrectly tightened wheel bolts can loosen while the vehicle is in motion and cause acci-
dents, serious injury, and loss of control of the vehicle. Only use wheel bolts corresponding to the respective wheel. Never use different wheel bolts. The wheel bolts and threads of the wheel hubs must be clean, free from oil and grease, and turn easily. Always use the box spanner placed in the ve-
hicle at the factory to loosen and tighten the wheel bolts. Only loosen the wheel bolts by approximate-
ly one turn before raising the vehicle with the vehicle jack. Wheels and tyres 233
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Never grease or lubricate the wheel bolts or If the tightening torque of the wheel bolts is the threads of the wheel hub. This could cause them to loosen while the vehicle is in motion, even if the required torque setting is used. too low, the wheel bolts and wheels can loosen while the vehicle is in motion. The wheel bolts and threads can be damaged if the tightening torque is too high. Lifting the vehicle with the jack Please refer to at the start of the chapter on page 232. Fig. 205 Jacking points and vehicle jack at the rear left-hand side of the vehicle. The jack may be applied only at the jacking points shown (markings on the body) Fig. 205. Always use the jacking point closest to the wheel you are working on The vehicle must only be lifted by the jack lifting points and after loosening the respective wheel's bolts page 233. Checklist To ensure your own safety and the safety of the passenger, observe the following points in the order given 1. Find a flat and firm surface suitable for lifting
the vehicle. 2. Switch off the engine. Select a gear and pull the handbrake page 95. 3. Ensure that all passengers leave the vehicle. 4. Place a wedge on the opposite wheel, using a rock or similar object. 5. While towing trailers: unhitch the trailer from the vehicle and park it properly. 6. Loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel that is being changed page 233. 7. Find the jacking point under the vehicle 8. Fig. 205 closest to the wheel that is being changed. Insert the tip of the wrench in the jack and hold the wrench by the hexagonal end. Raise the vehicle jack until it just fits under the jacking point of the vehicle. 9. Ensure that the entire surface of the foot of the jack is resting securely on the ground and that the foot of the vehicle jack is positioned precisely below the jacking point Fig. 205. 10. Align the jack and, at the same time, raise the vehicle jack claw until it engages with the cross piece under the vehicle Fig. 205. 11. Crank the vehicle jack further until the wheel is just clear of the ground. WARNING Incorrect use of the vehicle jack can cause the vehicle to slip, which can lead to severe injuries. Please apply the following rules to reduce the risk of accidents:
234 Owner's Manual Only use jacks which have been approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle. Other vehicle jacks could slip out of position this includes vehicle jacks supplied with other Volkswagen models. The ground must be flat and firm. Tilted or unstable surfaces can cause the vehicle to slide. If necessary use a large, strong board or similar support for the vehicle jack. On a hard, slippery surface (such as tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the vehicle jack from slipping. Fit the vehicle jack only at the points descri-
bed. The vehicle jack claw must fit securely into the side member rib Fig. 205. When towing a trailer, unhitch the trailer from the traction vehicle before changing the wheel. Never place any part of your body (e.g. arm or leg) underneath the vehicle if the latter is only supported by the vehicle jack. Ensure that all passengers leave the vehicle. If you have to work underneath the vehicle, use suitable stands to provide extra support. Never lift the vehicle while the engine is run-
ning or if the vehicle is parked over a slope surface. Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised on a vehicle jack. Engine vibrations can cause the vehicle to fall off the vehicle jack. WARNING Ignoring any of the points on this important safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju-
ries. Always follow the instructions on the check-
list and comply with applicable safety pre-
cautions. Lifting the vehicle with the jack - Extreme version Please refer to at the start of the chapter on page 232. Fig. 206 Jacking points and vehicle jack at the rear left-hand side of the vehicle - vehicles with external sills. The jack may be applied only at the jacking points shown (removable cover) Fig. 206. Al-
ways use the jacking point closest to the wheel you are working on The vehicle must only be lifted once the respec-
tive wheel's bolts are removed page 233. Checklist To ensure your own safety and the safety of the passenger, observe the following points in the order given 1. Find a flat and firm surface suitable for lifting
the vehicle. 2. Switch off the engine. Select a gear and pull the handbrake page 95. Wheels and tyres 235
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Checklist (Continued) 3. Block the wheel diagonally opposite using the collapsible chocks or other suitable items. 4. While towing trailers: unhitch the trailer from the vehicle and park it properly. 5. Loosen the wheel bolts on the wheel that is being changed page 233. 6. Find the jacking point under the vehicle clos-
est to the wheel that is being changed. 7. Remove the jacking point access cover, in the 8. direction of the arrow Fig. 206. Insert the tip of the wrench in the jack and hold the wrench by the hexagonal end. Raise the vehicle jack until it just fits under the jacking point of the vehicle. 9. Ensure that the entire surface of the foot of the jack is resting securely on the ground and that the foot of the vehicle jack is positioned precisely below the jacking point Fig. 206. 10. Align the jack and, at the same time, raise the vehicle jack claw until it engages with the cross piece under the vehicle Fig. 206. 11. Crank the vehicle jack further until the wheel is just clear of the ground. WARNING Incorrect use of the vehicle jack can cause the vehicle to slip off the jack, which can lead to severe injuries. Please apply the following rules to reduce the risk of accidents:
Only use jacks which have been approved by Volkswagen for the vehicle. Other vehicle jacks could slip out of position this includes vehicle jacks supplied with other Volkswagen models. The ground must be flat and firm. Soft ground or surfaces at an incline under the vehicle jack may cause the vehicle to slip off the jack. If necessary use a large, strong board or similar support for the vehicle jack. On a hard, slippery surface (such as tiles) use a rubber mat or similar to prevent the vehicle jack from slipping. Fit the vehicle jack only at the points descri-
bed. The vehicle jack claw must fit securely into the side member rib Fig. 206. When towing a trailer, unhitch the trailer from the traction vehicle before changing the wheel. Never place any part of your body (e.g. arm or leg) underneath the vehicle if the latter is only supported by the vehicle jack. Ensure that all passengers leave the vehicle. If you have to work underneath the vehicle, use suitable stands to provide extra support. Never lift the vehicle when the engine is run-
ning, or if the vehicle is tilted to the side or on a gradient. Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised on a vehicle jack. Engine vibrations can cause the vehicle to fall off the vehicle jack. WARNING Ignoring any of the points on this important safety checklist can lead to accidents and inju-
ries. Always follow the instructions on the check-
list and comply with applicable safety pre-
cautions. 236 Owner's Manual Changing the wheel Please refer to on page 232. at the start of the chapter Fig. 207 Wheel replacement: wheel bolt removal sequence. Removing the wheel Read the checklist page 232. Loosen the wheel bolts page 233. Lift the vehicle page 234. Completely unscrew the loose wheel bolts us-
ing the lug wrench and place them on a clean surface. In vehicles with wheel covers, the bolt oppo-
site to valve Fig. 207 A serves as a guide in the fitting sequence. Therefore, remove bolt A last and be careful not to let the wheel cov-
er fall when removing the remaining bolts. Remove the wheel. Install spare wheel If applicable, take note of the running direction of the tyre page 217. Insert the spare wheel. Gently screw in the wheel bots and tighten them. In vehicles with wheel covers, fit bolt Fig. 207 A first; position the wheel cover and fit the remaining bolts. Lower the vehicle with the jack. Use the box spanner to tighten all the wheel bolts securely clockwise or anticlockwise sequence. Tighten them in diagonal sequence. Do not tighten the bolts in In vehicles with central hub cap, carefully place the hub cap over the wheel bolts press the hub cap down until you hear a click and ensure that the hub cap is properly fitted.
, WARNING An incorrect torque or incorrectly handled wheel bolts can lead to a loss of control of the vehicle, cause accidents and serious injuries. Always keep all wheel bolts and threads in the wheel hubs clean and free from oil and grease. Wheel bolts must be easy to turn and be tightened to the specified torque. NOTICE Volkswagen recommends special care when re-
moving the central hub cap, since the plastic fit-
tings may be damaged in case of excessive pres-
sure. Wheel bolts must be clean and able to turn freely. Never lubricate wheel bolts. When changing wheels, if you notice that the bolts are corroded or worn, they must be replaced before checking the tightening tor-
que. After changing a wheel Please refer to on page 232. at the start of the chapter Stow the spare wheel or the removed wheel securely in the housing underneath the vehi-
cle. Clean the tools as necessary and place them behind the passenger seat page 182. The tightening torque of the wheel bolts should be checked immediately with a torque wrench The damaged wheel should be replaced as soon as possible. Wheels and tyres 237
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. WARNING After changing the wheel, always ensure that the vehicle toolkit and spare wheel are properly secured in the luggage compartment. Maintenance Service NOTICE The tightening torque indicated for wheel bolts
(steel or alloy) is 110 Nm and must be ensured with a torque wrench. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. On vehicles with tyre pressure loss indica-
tor, immediately program the tyre monitor-
ing system page 217. Maintenance services and digital maintenance and warranty The vehicle data label on the back cover of this instruction manual confirms the initial release or delivery date, the delivery inspection and thus the start of the warranty coverage for your vehi-
cle. For some markets the digital Maintenance and warranty is not available. In this case your Volkswagen Dealership will be able to inform you about its service and documentation. Digital electronic registration of maintenance services performed Service vouchers will be stored in the central sys-
tem memory by the Volkswagen Dealership or specialized company. Through this transparent service history documentation, performed vehi-
cle maintenance work can be accessed at any time. Volkswagen recommends requesting, after each service performed, a printed proof of serv-
ice containing data on maintenance work stored in the system. With each new service, the previous proof of service is replaced by an updated printout. Service Digital Maintenance and warranty records the following information from your Volkswagen Dealership or specialist company:
When a given service was performed. Whether a repair recommendation was given, as for example, whether the brake pads will have to be replaced soon. Which components or fluids have been re-
newed. When your next service call will be due. WARNING Insufficient or not performed maintenance and failure to observe the service intervals may cause vehicle stops, traffic accidents, and seri-
ous injuries. 238 Owner's Manual Have the maintenance work performed by an authorized Volkswagen dealership or special-
ist company. NOTICE Volkswagen is not liable for damage to the vehi-
cle due to insufficient service or missing parts. Regular vehicle maintenance services not only serve the purpose to maintain the val-
ue of the vehicle, but also contribute to opera-
tional and traffic safety. Servicing work should therefore always be carried out in accordance with the Volkswagen maintenance guidelines. First service The servicing interval may be different according to the country. Petrol engines Service based on time or mileage Oil Change Service The service is carried out in accordance with the next servicing indicator, and according to which-
ever occurs first:
after 1 year or every 10,000 km;
after 1 year or every 15,000 km. TOTALFLEX Engine Service based on time or mileage Standard service inspection The service is carried out in accordance with the next servicing indicator, and according to which-
ever occurs first:
after 1 year or every 10,000 km. Information on the terms of use The indicated service intervals are established based on normal driving conditions. In case of adverse driving conditions, some in-
termediary services are required between each of the service intervals indicated. Adverse driving conditions include the following cases:
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. fuel with high sulphur content;
frequent driving at low engine speeds with in-
tense traffic, with extended periods operating at idling speed ("stop-and-go"; urban traffic), in short trajectories (below 8 km per day) or with the engine running below ideal tempera-
tures;
in urban routes with frequent stops;
high ambient temperature associated to con-
stant use of the air conditioning system frequent traffic in unpaved or dusty roads and highways.;
predominant driving under environments with high levels of suspended particles (mining, ce-
ment, steelworks, marble, and saline factories, etc.), predominant operation towing trailers or transporting cargoes;
vehicle operation to provide taxi services, school transportation, deliveries, special serv-
ices (patrolling, escorting, ambulance, fire trucks, military use) and/or similar applica-
tions. These conditions particularly affect the follow-
ing parts:
toothed belt;
dust and pollen filter air filter;
engine oil. Your Volkswagen Dealership will inform you of any eventual need to perform intermediary serv-
ices based on your vehicle driving conditions. The costs of Volkswagen services may vary ac-
cording to the vehicle model and equipment ver-
sion, as well as additional services and inspec-
tions eventually required. Your Volkswagen Deal-
ership will inform you of all costs (labour and ma-
terial) regarding Volkswagen maintenance serv-
ices. Service scopes Depending on the vehicle model/version, some of the scope items may not be available and/or be applicable to the vehicle. The service scopes include all the necessary maintenance items to keep your vehicle in safe condition for driving and the traffic (depending Maintenance 239 nance items may have to be performed on your vehicle. These items must be looked after based on the time and/or mileage. Additives: change/fill up Toothed belt/toothed belt tensioning roller:
check/ replace Poly V-belt: replace Air cleaner: replace Fuel filter: replace (only TOTALFLEX vehicles) Brake fluid: replace Dust and pollen filter: replace Engine: replace filter/oil Spark plugs: replace There may be changes to the service scope for technical reasons (continuous components devel-
opment). Volkswagen Dealerships are always up-
dated about innovations. on the conditions of use and the equipment of the vehicle such as for example, engine, trans-
mission or fluids). The maintenance service work is split between inspection items and mainte-
nance items. You can consult your Volkswagen Dealership for a detailed overview of the neces-
sary activities . Inspection items Electric system Battery: check Horn: check Lighting (interior and exterior): check Service interval display: reset Engine / Gearbox Poly V-belt: check Engine and engine compartment components
(upper and lower parts): check Cooling system: check Exhaust system: check Power transmission and final drive system:
check Running gear Coil springs and elastic stops: check Protective joint hoods: check Power steering: check Swivel joints/track rods: check Brake fluid level: check Shock absorbers and brake pads/discs: check Tyres: check Tyre pressure of all tyres: check Brake system: check Body Body: check for damages and corrosion Window wiper blades: check Windscreen: check Underside of the vehicle: check Window wiping and washing system: check Test drive: perform Maintenance items In addition to the inspection items (depending on the use and the vehicle's equipment, such as en-
gine, power transmission or fluids), other mainte-
240 Owner's Manual Vehicle conservation NOTICE Guidelines for the conservation of the vehicle Regular and expert care helps to maintain the value of the vehicle. Proper maintenance may al-
so be one of the requirements for the approval of warranty claims in the event of corrosion or paint defects. Suitable care products are available from Volkswagen Dealerships. WARNING Car care products can be toxic and hazardous. Unsuitable care products and incorrect applica-
tion of care products can cause accidents, se-
vere injuries, burns or poisoning. Care products must be kept in its original sealed container. Read the manufacturer's instructions. Never store car care products in empty food containers, bottles or any other non-original containers as people finding these containers may not know that they contain care prod-
ucts. Keep children away from care products. The products may generate harmful fumes during use. Such products should therefore only be used outside or in well-ventilated spaces. Never use fuel, turpentine, engine oil, nail varnish remover or other volatile fluids to wash, clean or care for your vehicle. These substances are toxic and highly flammable. WARNING Incorrect care and cleaning of vehicle parts can impair the safety features of the vehicle and thus cause serious injuries. Vehicle parts must be cleaned according to the manufacturer's instructions. Only use approved or recommended cleaning products. NOTICE Cleaning agents that contain solvents attack the material and can cause damage. Never attempt to remove dirt, mud or dust from a dry vehicle surface. Additionally, never use dry cloths or sponges in order to prevent risking the vehicle paint or windows. Dirt, mud and dust must be softened with water before they are re-
moved. Environmentally-friendly care products should be used. Leftover car care products should not be disposed of with common waste. Read the manufacturer's instructions. Washing of the vehicle The longer substances such as insects, bird drop-
pings, resinous tree sap, road dirt, industrial de-
posits, tar, soot or road salt and other corrosive materials remain on the vehicle, the more dam-
age they do to the paintwork. High temperatures and strong sunlight further intensify the corro-
sive effect. The underside of the vehicle must al-
so be cleaned thoroughly on a regular basis. Car washes Please observe the signs on the automatic car wash. Before using an automatic car wash, take the usual precautions, such as closing all win-
dows and folding in the exterior mirrors, in order to avoid vehicle damages. Inform the car wash operator if there are special parts on your vehicle such as spoilers, radio aerials The paint is so hard-wearing that the car can normally be washed without problems in an au-
tomatic car wash. However, the effect on the paint depends to a large extent on the design of the car wash. Volkswagen recommends the use of car washes without brushes. To remove any wax residues from the windows and to prevent windscreen wipers from rubbing, please note the following points page 243, Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors. High pressure washing machine Follow the instructions provided by the manufac-
turer when cleaning your vehicle using a high-
pressure cleaner. This applies in particular to the pressure and spraying distance
. Vehicle conservation 241
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. WARNING After the car has been washed, the braking ef-
fect could set in later than normal and extend the braking distance as the brake discs and brake pads will be wet, or iced up in winter. Dry the brakes and eliminate ice through careful braking manoeuvres. Proceed with-
out putting other drivers at risk or failing to abide by legal requirements. WARNING Incorrect use of a high-pressure cleaner can cause visible and invisible long-term damage to tyres and other materials. This could lead to ac-
cidents and severe injuries. Maintain sufficient distance between the nozzle and the tyres. Never clean the tyres with concentrated jet nozzles (dirt blasters). Even at large spray-
ing distances and short cleaning times, visi-
ble and invisible damage can occur to the tyres. NOTICE Water temperature should not be higher than
+60 C. Do not wash the vehicle in direct sunlight in order to avoid damage to the vehicle paint-
work. The parking distance control sensors in the bumpers must be clean and free of ice to guar-
antee correct function. When cleaning with pressure hoses and steam cleaners, the sen-
sors should only be sprayed briefly, always maintaining a distance of over 30 cm. Never clean with hard sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar products as these can dam-
age the surface. Do not clean windows that are iced over or covered in snow with a high-pressure cleaner. Never clean the headlights with a dry cloth or sponge. Soapy water is the preferred choice. Vehicle washing under cold weather: if the ve-
hicle is rinsed with a hose, do not direct the water into the lock cylinders or the gaps round the doors, boot, or bonnet. The locks and seals could freeze. Washing the vehicle with a high-pressure cleaner may cause water to enter the vehicle. Avoid using high-pressure cleaners at distances lower than 30 cm from the vehicle's surface. Using a high-
pressure cleaner of over 8,000 kPa (80 bar) could damage or remove paintwork or adhesives. Maintain sufficient distance to soft materials such as rubber hoses, insulation, and the park distance control sensors. Parking distance con-
. trol sensors are located in the rear bumper Never use concentrated jet nozzles or dirt blast-
ers
. Washing the car by hand When washing by hand, first soften the dirt with plenty of water and rinse off as well as possible. Then clean the vehicle with a soft sponge, a glove or a brush, using only light pressure. Start with the roof and work from the top to the bot-
tom. Use a shampoo for very persistent dirt only. The sponge or glove should be wrung out thor-
oughly at regular intervals. Clean the wheels, sill panels etc. last. Use a dif-
ferent sponge for this purpose. Vehicle paintwork conservation Waxing protects the paintwork. As soon as water no longer forms visible drops on the clean paint-
work it is time to protect it again with a good car wax. Even when a wax solution is used regularly in the car wash, Volkswagen recommends protecting the paint with a coat of hard wax at least twice a year. Polish the vehicle's paintwork Polishing is only necessary if the paint has lost its shine, and the gloss cannot be brought back by applying wax. The car must be waxed after polishing if the pol-
ish used does not contain wax compounds to seal the paint. WARNING Parts of the vehicle with sharp edges may cause injuries. Protect your hands and arms from cuts on sharp parts, for example when cleaning the underbody or the inside of the wheel hous-
ings. 242 Owner's Manual NOTICE Before using an automatic washing system, the following points must mandatorily be checked to prevent damages to the vehicle:
Make sure that the gap between the guide rails in the car wash is sufficient to prevent dam-
ages in wheels and tyres!
Check that the car wash is tall and wide enough for your vehicle. Fold in the exterior mirrors. In order to prevent damage to the paintwork on the engine compartment cover, fold the windscreen wipers back onto the windscreen after drying the wiper blades. Do not let them drop!
NOTICE In order to avoid damage, painted parts with a matt finish, plastic parts, headlight lenses and the tail lights should not be treated with polish or hard wax. Do not polish the paint if the vehicle is in a sandy or dusty environment or if it is dirty. The vehicle should only be washed in spe-
cially provided wash bays. This prevents toxic, oil, grease and fuel laden waste water from entering the sewage system. In some regions, washing vehicles anywhere else may be prohibi-
ted. Clean and conserve the exterior of the vehicle Cleaning windows and exterior mirrors Moisten the windows and exterior mirrors with standard alcohol-based glass cleaner. Dry the glass surfaces with a clean chamois leather or a lint-free cloth. Chamois leathers which have been used on painted surfaces have grease residues and are therefore not suitable for use on glass surfaces. Use window cleaner or a silicone remover to clean off rubber, oil, grease and silicone deposits
. Remove wax residues Car washes and care products could leave wax deposits on the glass surfaces. Wax residue can only be removed using a special cleaning product or cleaning cloths. Wax residues can affect the windscreen wiper system's performance, in addi-
tion to causing irregular movement or excessive noises. Volkswagen recommends using a glass cleaning cloth to remove wax deposits from the windows and exterior mirrors each time the vehi-
cle is washed. A window cleaner specifically for removing wax will stop the blades rubbing if added to the wind-
screen washer fluid. Dilute the cleaner as instruc-
ted. Grease removing cleaners will not remove wax deposits Special cleaners, glass cleaners and glass clean-
ing cloths are available from Volkswagen Dealer-
ships. Remove the snow Use a small brush to remove snow from the win-
dows and exterior mirrors. Remove the ice The best method for removing ice is to use a de-
icer spray. If you use an ice scraper, do not move it to and from, but push it in one direction only. Moving the ice scraper backwards can cause dirt to scratch the window. Clean chrome and aluminium parts Use a damp, clean, lint-free and soft cloth to clean the surfaces. For heavy soiling use a special solvent-free cleaning product. Polish the chrome and aluminium trim parts using a soft and dry cloth. Cleaning steel wheels Use an industrial cleaner to remove brake dust caught in the wheel. Steel wheels should there-
fore be cleaned regularly with a separate sponge. Any damage to the paint on steel wheels should be touched up before the metal starts to rust. Caring for and cleaning alloy wheels Wash grit and brake dust from alloy wheels ap-
proximately every 2 weeks. Then use an acid-free detergent to clean the wheels. Volkswagen rec-
ommends applying a hard wax compound to the wheels approximately every 3 months. Vehicle conservation 243
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. If the engine compartment is very dirty, we rec-
ommend that you always go to a qualified work-
shop to have it cleaned following correct proce-
dures. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Plenum chamber The plenum chamber is located in the engine compartment between the windscreen and the engine and has a perforated cover. Air from outside is drawn in from the plenum chamber and is passed into the vehicle interior via the heating and fresh air or the air conditioning system. Leaves and other loose items must be re-
moved from the cover of the plenum chamber at regular intervals using a vacuum cleaner or by hand. WARNING Dirty or misted windows reduce visibility and increase the risk of accidents and severe inju-
ries. Only drive when you have a clear view through all windows. Ice, snow and mist must be removed from the inside and outside of all windows. WARNING All work in the engine compartment carries the risk of injury, scalding, accidents and fire!
Before carrying out any work make sure that you are familiar with the requisite proce-
dures and general safety regulations page 200, Safety guidelines for work in the engine compartment. Volkswagen recommends having the work carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership. CAUTION Underseal and anti-corrosion coatings may ig-
nite on the hot exhaust system or on other hot engine parts. Never apply underseal or anti-corrosion coatings to the exhaust pipes, catalytic con-
verter, heat shields or other vehicle compo-
nents that become hot. If the brake dust is not removed regularly, the al-
loy wheel could be damaged. Always use an acid-free detergent for alloy wheels. Car polish or other abrasive agents should not be used on the wheels. If the protective coating is damaged (e.g. by stone impact) the damaged area should be re-
paired immediately. Conserve the rubber seals The rubber seals on the doors, windows etc. will seal better, remain flexible and last longer if they are treated at regular intervals with a suitable care product. Use a soft cloth to remove dust and dirt from the rubber seals before applying the product. Defrost the door lock cylinders Volkswagen recommends the use of genuine Volkswagen spray with lubricating and anti-cor-
rosive properties to de-ice the lock cylinders. Protection of the underside of the vehicle The underside of the vehicle is coated to protect it from corrosion and damage. The protective coating on the underside of the vehicle could be damaged when driving. Volkswagen recommends therefore that the protective coating on the un-
derside of the vehicle and on the running gear should be checked regularly and repaired if nec-
essary. Hollow cavities All hollow spaces exposed to corrosion are facto-
ry-fitted with long-lasting protective coating. Such coating does not require maintenance. If, due to extremely high temperatures, a small amount of wax is melted, it may be removed us-
ing a plastic spatula and benzene. Clean the engine compartment The engine compartment of any motor vehicle is a hazardous area page 200. The engine compartment must be cleaned by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. An incorrect cleaning procedure could possibly re-
move corrosion protection and damage electrical components, among others. Additionally, water could enter the vehicle interior directly via the plenum chamber
. 244 Owner's Manual NOTICE NOTICE Properly cleaning the windows enhances the window wiper system's performance and pres-
ervation. Never combine the recommended cleaning agents with other products in the windscreen washer fluid reservoir. This may cause the components to coagulate and, as a result, clog the windscreen wiper nozzles. Never use warm or hot water to remove snow and ice from windows and mirrors. This may cause the glass to crack!
Never use ice scrapers on mirror lens, other-
wise the chromed-coated surface will be scratched. The heating elements for the rear window heater (not available in some versions) are lo-
cated on the inside of the rear window. Never apply stickers over the heating elements and never clean the inside of the rear window with corrosive or acidic detergents or any other chemicals. NOTICE To ensure that the chrome and aluminium parts are not damaged:
Do not clean or polish in direct sunlight. Do not clean or polish in sandy or dusty envi-
ronments. Do not use any abrasive care products (e.g. cream cleaners). Never clean with hard sponges, rough kitchen sponges or similar products. Do not polish dirty surfaces. Do not use solvent-based cleaning products. Do not use any hard wax. NOTICE Chrome rims or wheel covers may also have an additional varnish finish and should not be trea-
ted using chrome or aluminium cleaning agents or chrome or aluminium polish. Regular paint care and standard cleaning products must be used instead. NOTICE Lock de-icers which contain substances which dissolve grease may cause the door lock cylinder to rust. Water that has entered the plenum chamber via a manual process (e.g. from a high-pressure cleaner) can cause considerable damage to the vehicle. Before removing wax with benzene, comply with applicable safety and environment standards regarding such product. Considering that when washing the engine, toxic waste water containing oil, grease and fuel may enter the sewerage system, the conta-
minated water needs to be purified by an oil sep-
arator. Therefore, the engine compartment should only be washed in extreme cases and in appropriate locations. Cleaning and conserving the interior of the vehicle Modern fabrics, such as dark denim, are often not colourfast. Light-coloured upholstery (soft mate-
rials or leather) is particularly sensitive to stain-
ing caused by these fabrics, even if you are care-
ful. This is not caused by a fault in the upholstery, but by the non-colourfast nature of the gar-
ments. Leaving stains, dirt and other deposits on the surface of vehicle components and cloth seat covers for a long time can make it difficult to clean and treat them. Stains, dirt and deposits may become impossible to remove, particularly if left for a long time. Seat covers Please note the following for handling and con-
servation of the seat covers:
Before getting into the vehicle, close all Velcro fasteners that could touch the cloth seat cov-
ers and fabric trims. Open Velcro fasteners can cause damage to cloth seat covers and fabric trims. Avoid the direct contact of sharp-edged items and accessories to the upholstery and fabric trims in order to prevent damage. Accessories include zips, studs, rhinestones on clothing or belts. Vehicle conservation 245
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Dust and grit in the pores and seams should be removed regularly so that no permanent dam-
age is caused to the surface of the seats by scratching. Always check whether garments are colourfast to prevent damage to the upholstery. This is especially important for light-coloured uphols-
tery. Cleaning paddings, fabric and NT - Non microfiber fabric Please read and follow the instructions, notes and warnings on the package before using cleaning products. Upholstery, fabric trims, NT - non-microfiber fabric trims, and carpeting must be regularly cleaned with a vacuum cleaner (brush tip). Do not use high-pressure cleaners, steam cleaners or coolant spray. We recommend that you use a soft sponge or commercially available lint-free microfiber cloth for cleaning jobs
. Clean NT - non-microfiber fabric surfaces with a slightly damp cotton or woollen cloth or a commercially available lint-free microfiber cloth
. General surface soiling of the upholstery and fab-
ric trim can be cleaned with standard foam cleaners. If the upholstery and fabric trims are generally heavily soiled, consult a Volkswagen Dealership for information on suitable cleaning methods be-
fore attempting any cleaning procedure. Take the vehicle to a specialist cleaning company, if nec-
essary. Padding, fabric and NT - Non microfiber fabric stain treatment When cleaning stains, it may be necessary to clean the entire surface and not just the stain it-
self. This particularly applies if the surface shows general signs of wear. The cleaned area could otherwise be lighter than the surrounding area. If in doubt, consult a specialist cleaning company. 246 Owner's Manual Type of stain Water-
based stains
(e.g. coffee, fruit juice or soda). Stubborn stains, e.g. chocolate, make-up. Oily stains, e.g. oil, lip-
stick. Recommended seat cover and up-
holstery cleaning process First, clean the stain as quick as possible with a dry and absorbent cloth, in order to prevent the liq-
uid from penetrating the uphols-
tery. For more difficult stains, mois-
ten the sponge with an atomizer and clean the stain in circular mo-
tions. Clean with a dry and absorbent cloth. Only use cleaning products ap-
proved by Volkswagen. Take the vehicle to a specialist cleaning company, if necessary. Conservation and treatment of natural leather covers Please contact a Volkswagen Dealership or quali-
fied workshop if you have any questions on cleaning and caring for the leather equipment in your vehicle. Natural leather is a sensitive material. Use a leather cream with sunlight protection and impregnation properties on a regular basis and always after cleaning. The cream nourish-
es the leather, keeps it breathable and supple and replaces lost moisture. It also protects the surface. Leather should be cleaned every two to three months to remove fresh stains. Treat the leather with a special leather care product every six months
. Always apply cleaning and care products ex-
tremely sparingly and always use a dry cotton or woollen cloth that is lint free. Do not apply cleaning and care products directly to the leather. Remove fresh stains such as ink, ball-point pen ink, lipstick, shoe cream etc. as quickly as pos-
sible. Look after the pigment. Use a special coloured leather cream to refresh the colour where nec-
essary. Wipe off excess with a soft cloth. Cleaning natural leather covers Volkswagen recommends that you use a damp cotton or wool cloth for general cleaning purpo-
ses. Do not let the water soak through the leather or soak into the seams. Please observe the following notes before clean-
ing the leather upholstery page 246, Cleaning paddings, fabric and NT - Non microfiber fabric. Cleaning Spread the smooth soap solu-
tiona) with a twisted cloth. Absorb by pressing lightly with a dry cloth. Remove stains while they are still moist with an absorbent cloth. Use a cleaning product appro-
priate for dry stains
. Remove stains while they are still moist with an absorbent cloth. Use a cleaning product appro-
priate for stains that still have not penetrated the surface
. Dry with a dry and absorbent cloth. Clean with a special leather stain remover. Type of stain Stubborn stains Water-
based stains, such as coffee, tee, juice, blood, etc. Oily stains, such as oil, lipstick, etc. Special stains, such as biro, felt tip pen, nail varnish, emulsion paint, shoe polish, etc. a) Smooth soap solution: two teaspoons of neutral soap in one litre of water. Cleaning vinyl covers Please observe the following notes before clean-
ing vinyl covers page 246, Cleaning paddings, fabric and NT - Non microfiber fabric. Only use water and neutral soap to clean vinyl covers. Cleaning stowage compartments and drink holders Some stowage compartments and cup holders have a removable rubber insert in the base. Moisten a clean, lint-free cloth with water and clean the parts. If this does not provide satisfactory results, use a special solvent-free plastic cleaning product. Conserving and cleaning plastic parts, wooden decorative elements and the dash panel Moisten a clean, lint-free cloth with water and clean the parts. Treat plastic parts (inside and outside the vehi-
cle) and the dashboard with a special solvent-
free plastic cleaning and care product ap-
proved by Volkswagen
. Treat wooden trims with a mild soap solu-
tion1). Cleaning the seatbelts The automatic belt will not be able to roll back properly if there is dirt on the belt and thus pre-
vent the seat belt from working properly. Seat belts must never be removed for cleaning purposes. Remove dirt with a soft brush Carefully pull the dirty seat belt right out and
. leave it out. Clean the seat belt with a mild1) soap solution. Allow the seat belt fabric to dry completely. Do not allow the seat belt to roll up until it has dried completely. WARNING Incorrect care and cleaning of vehicle parts can impair the safety features of the vehicle and thus cause serious injuries. Vehicle parts must be cleaned according to the manufacturer's instructions. Only use approved or recommended cleaning products. WARNING Cleaning agents that contain solvents cause the surface of the airbag modules to become po-
rous. In case of an accident that triggers the airbag, loose plastic parts can cause serious in-
jury. 1) Smooth soap solution: two teaspoons of neutral soap in one litre of water. Vehicle conservation 247
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Never clean the dash panel or the airbag cov-
High-pressure cleaners and coolant sprays can ers with cleansers that contain solvents. damage the upholstery. WARNING NOTICE Check the condition of all seat belts regularly. Damaged belt bands or any other seat belt parts must be removed and replaced immedi-
ately by a Volkswagen Dealership. Damaged seat belts are extremely dangerous and can cause severe or fatal injuries. Never use chemical cleaning agents on the seat belts or their components. Additionally, seat belts may not come into contact with corrosive fluids, solvents or sharp objects. This can considerably weaken the bands. After cleaning, allow seat belts to dry com-
pletely before rolling them up. Otherwise the automatic belt retractors could become damaged and thus impair their function. Never let any foreign bodies or liquids enter the seat belt buckle slot. This could prevent the belt buckle and seat belt from working properly. Never attempt to repair, modify or remove the seat belts yourself. Damaged seat belts must be replaced imme-
diately with new seat belts approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle type. Seat belts subjected to stress and stretched during an accident must be replaced by a Volkswagen Dealership. Replacement may be necessary even if there is no apparent damage. The belt anchorage should also be checked. NOTICE Cleaning agents that contain solvents attack the material and can cause irreparable dam-
ages. Stains, dirt, and other deposits with corrosive components and solvents may cause irrepara-
ble damages to the material, even in case of short exposure periods. Stains, dirt and other deposits must be re-
moved as quickly as possible and not allowed to dry in. To avoid damage, stubborn stains should be removed by a specialist cleaning company. NOTICE Do not use steam cleaners as the steam push-
es the soiling into the fabric and sets it. 248 Owner's Manual Soft-bristle brushes should be used on carpets and mats only! Other surfaces could be dam-
aged by brushes. When washing paste or fine detergent solu-
tions are applied with a damp cloth or sponge, visible edges may appear on the upholstery once it has dried. These edges are usually diffi-
cult or even impossible to remove. NOTICE The NT - non-microfiber fabric cannot be drenched in any circumstances. Do not use leather care products, solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, stain removers or sim-
ilar products on NT - non-microfiber fabric. Do not use brushes if cleaning with liquids. This could damage the surface of the material. NOTICE Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar products on leather. A stain cannot be removed if it has been left on the leather for a long time and has penetra-
ted the surface. Spilt liquids should be cleaned immediately us-
ing an absorbent cloth as the leather surface and seams absorb liquids quickly. Protect the leather from excessive sun expo-
sure to prevent fading. NOTICE Never use solvents, wax polish, shoe cream, spot removers or similar products on vinyl. These may cause the material to become hard and brittle prematurely. NOTICE Some car fresheners have substances in its chemical formula that may damage the structure, surface and paintwork of the vehicle's internal linings. Suitable care products are available from a Volkswagen Dealership. Volkswagen recommends cleaning stained upholstery in a qualified workshop. Slight colour changes of the natural leather covers due to use are normal. Accessories, modifications, repairs and part replacement Accessories and spare parts Volkswagen recommends that you seek advice from a Volkswagen Dealership before purchasing accessories, spare parts or service fluids. For ex-
ample, if the vehicle is to be retrofitted with ac-
cessories or if parts have to be renewed. Volkswagen Dealerships can recommend acces-
sories, parts and service fluids which are suitable for your requirements. Volkswagen strongly recommends that you only use approved Volkswagen Accessories and Volkswagen Genuine Parts. These parts and ac-
cessories have been specially tested by Volkswagen for suitability, reliability and safety. Volkswagen Dealerships are also qualified to per-
form proper installation procedures. Despite constant monitoring of the market, products not approved by Volkswagen cannot be evaluated by Volkswagen in terms of their credi-
bility, safety and suitability for use in the vehicle. Volkswagen can therefore assume no responsi-
bility for these parts, even if they have been ap-
proved by an official testing agency or are cov-
ered by an official approval certificate. WARNING Incorrectly performed repairs or modifications to your vehicle can impair the effectiveness of the airbags, cause operating failures, accidents and fatal injuries. Never secure or mount objects such as cup holders, telephone holders and GPS (global positioning system) on or next to the airbag covers or within the deployment zone of the airbag. Items which are either on or next to the air-
bag module covers or are in the deployment zone of the airbags can cause severe or even fatal injuries should the airbags be activated. Accessories, modifications, repairs and part replacement 249
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. WARNING Unsuitable spare parts and accessories as well as incorrectly carried out work, modifications and repairs can lead to damage to the vehicle, accidents and serious injuries. Volkswagen strongly recommends that you only use approved Volkswagen accessories and Volkswagen genuine parts. These parts and accessories have been specially tested by Volkswagen for suitability, reliability and safety. Repairs and modifications to your vehicle should only be carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership. Volkswagen Dealerships have the necessary tools, diagnostic equipment, repair information and qualified personnel. Never fit parts to your vehicle that are in any way different from the factory-fitted parts. Never secure or mount objects such as cup holders, telephone holders and GPS (global positioning system) on or next to the airbag covers or within the deployment zone of the airbag. Only use wheel/tyre combinations which have been approved by Volkswagen for your vehicle type. Repairs and technical modifications
Repairs and modifications must always be car-
ried out according to Volkswagen specifica-
tions Unauthorised modifications to the electronic components or software in the vehicle may cause faults As the electronic components are linked together in networks, these faults may indirectly affect the working of other systems. This can se-
riously impair safety, lead to excessive wear of components, and also compromise the vehicle's operating function. The authorised Volkswagen repairer cannot be held liable for any damage caused by technical modifications and/or work performed incorrectly. The authorised Volkswagen repairer cannot be held liable for any damage caused by technical modifications and repairs performed incorrectly. Such damages are also not covered by the Volkswagen warranty. 250 Owner's Manual Volkswagen recommends that all repairs and technical modifications be performed by an authorised Volkswagen Dealership with Volkswagen Genuine Parts. WARNING Incorrect repairs and modifications can cause functional problems and damage to the vehicle and impair the effectiveness of the driver assist systems. This could lead to accidents and se-
vere injuries. Repairs and modifications to your vehicle should only be carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership. Repairs and limitations in the airbag system
Repairs and modifications must always be car-
ried out according to Volkswagen specifica-
tions Modifications and repairs to the front bumper, the doors, the front seats, the roof or the body-
work should be carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership. System components and airbag sys-
tem sensors can be located on these vehicle components. If you work on the airbag system or remove and install parts of the system when performing oth-
er repair work, parts of the airbag system may be damaged. The consequence may be that, in the event of an accident, the airbag inflates incor-
rectly or does not inflate at all. Regulations must be observed to ensure that the effectiveness of the airbags is not reduced and that removed parts do not cause any injuries or environmental pollution. Volkswagen Dealerships are familiar with such requirements. Any modifications to the vehicle's suspension could prevent the airbag system from working properly during a collision. For example, using tyre/ wheel combinations which have not been approved by Volkswagen, lowering the vehicle, making modifications to the suspension rate in-
cluding work on the springs, struts and shock ab-
sorbers could cause the forces which are meas-
ured by the airbag sensors and sent to the elec-
tronic control unit to change. Some changes to the suspension could cause the forces measured by the sensors to increase. This can lead to the Any retrofit installation of electrical or electronic equipment in the vehicle will affect its vehicle type approval. Under certain circumstances, this can negate the type approval for the vehicle. Volkswagen has approved the vehicle for use with two-way radios providing the following conditions are observed:
Correct installation of external aerial. Maximum transmitting power of 10 watts. An external aerial is needed to give the equip-
ment its optimal range. Should a two way radio need to be installed with a transmission power of more than 10 W, contact a specialized company. A qualified workshop is familiar with the technical options for retrofit-
ting. Volkswagen recommends using a Volkswagen Dealership for this purpose. Please observe legislation as well as the instruc-
tions and information given in the operating manuals for radio equipment. WARNING If radio equipment is not secured or not proper-
ly secured in the vehicle, it could be flung though the interior during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an acci-
dent. This can cause injuries. While the vehicle is in motion, always secure two-way radios properly outside the airbag deployment zones or stow them away safely. CAUTION If two-way radios that are not connected to an external aerial are used, electromagnetic radia-
tion in the vehicle could exceed limit values and thus be a health hazard for drivers and other vehicle occupants. This also applies to external aerials which have not been correctly installed. Two-way radios should only be used in the vehicle if an external aerial is properly con-
nected. airbag system being triggered in collision scenar-
ios where it normally would not be triggered if modifications to the suspension had not been made. Other modifications can cause the forces measured by the sensors to decrease, preventing the airbag system from being triggered when it should have been. WARNING Incorrect repairs and modifications can cause functional problems and damage to the vehicle and impair the effectiveness of the airbag sys-
tem. This could lead to accidents and severe in-
juries. Repairs and modifications to your vehicle should only be carried out by a Volkswagen Dealership. Airbag modules cannot be repaired. They must be replaced. Never use recycled airbag components or components that have been taken from end-
of-life vehicles in your vehicle. WARNING Modifications to the vehicle's suspension, in-
cluding the use of unsuitable tyre/wheel com-
binations not approved by Volkswagen may cause the airbag system to work differently and increase the risk of serious or fatal injuries in the event of an accident. Never install any components in the suspen-
sion system that do not have the same char-
acteristics as the original factory-fitted com-
ponents. Never use tyre/wheel combinations that have not been approved by Volkswagen. Airbag system parts must never be reused in case of vehicle or component scrapping. All applicable environment disposal standards must be followed, in addition to other safety standards in effect. Volkswagen Dealerships are familiar with such requirements. Retrofitting two-way radios You will need an external aerial to use a two-way radio in the vehicle. Accessories, modifications, repairs and part replacement 251
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Information stored in control units Your vehicle is factory fitted with electronic con-
trol units which are responsible for engine and transmission management. The control units also monitor the function of the exhaust system and the airbags. These electronic control units continuously eval-
uate data relevant to the vehicle while the vehi-
cle is being driven. Only this data will be stored if there are any faults recorded or any deviations from the specified values. This is generally dis-
played by the indicator lamps on the instrument cluster. Special units are required to read and evaluate data stored in the control units. Under no circumstances do such control units re-
cord conversations held inside the vehicle. Reprogramming control units All data for the control of components is initially stored in the control units. Some convenience functions, such as lane change flash, single door unlocking and displays, can be reprogrammed using special workshop equipment. If the con-
venience functions are reprogrammed, the de-
scriptions in your vehicle wallet will no longer correspond with the original functions. Volkswagen recommends adding the reprogram-
ming coverage to the digital warranty and main-
tenance at a Volkswagen Dealership. Information about possible reprogramming can be obtained from Volkswagen Dealerships. Reading the vehicle fault memory A diagnosis interface for reading the fault memo-
. Elec-
ries is located in the vehicle interior tronic control unit status and operating data is stored in the fault memory. Additional informa-
tion on stored data can be obtained from your Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. The diagnostics connection is located on the driver's side footwell, near the fuse box. The fault memory should only be read and reset by a Volkswagen Dealership. After correcting faults, the respective data is de-
leted from the fault memory. Other memory con-
tents are successfully updated. 252 Owner's Manual WARNING Improper use of the diagnostics connection may lead to operating faults, in addition to se-
vere accidents and injuries. Never read the faulty memory through the diagnostics connection yourself. The diagnostics connection must only be read by a Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. Using a mobile telephone in the vehicle without a connection to the external aerial During a telephone call and when in standby mode, mobile telephones transmit and receive radio waves, also known as high-frequency ener-
gy. Current scientific literature warns us that ra-
dio waves can be harmful to human beings if they exceed certain limits. Government agencies and international committees have introduced threshold values and guidelines to ensure that electromagnetic radiation produced by mobile telephones does not pose a hazard to health. However, there is no proven scientific evidence that demonstrates that cordless telephones are absolutely safe. For this reason, some experts are calling for a precautionary use of mobile telephones through the application of measures which reduce the level of personal exposure to electromagnetic ra-
diation. If a mobile telephone which is not connected to the vehicle's external aerial is used inside the ve-
hicle, the level of electromagnetic radiation could be higher than when the mobile telephone is connected to an integrated aerial or any other external aerial. If the vehicle is fitted with a suitable hands-free system which enables the use of innumerable additional functions of Bluetooth compatible mobile telephones, this will comply with legal re-
quirements in many countries which permit the use of a mobile telephone in a vehicle only if a hands-free system is used. Mobile telephones must be located in a suitable telephone holder or be stored securely in the ve-
hicle. If a telephone holder is used it must be se-
curely attached to the base plate. This is the only way to ensure that the mobile telephone is se-
curely attached to the dashboard and always within reach of the driver. If the mobile telephone is connected to a tele-
phone aerial integrated in the vehicle or to an ex-
ternal telephone aerial, the electromagnetic radi-
ation generated by the telephone that could af-
fect the human body is reduced. Moreover, it im-
proves the quality of the signal. If a mobile telephone is used in the vehicle interi-
or without this hands-free system, it is not safely secured in the vehicle and also not connected to the vehicle's external telephone aerial. Further-
more, the mobile telephone is not being charged in the telephone holder. It is also likely that the telephone connection will be disrupted and the signal strength will be poor. A mobile telephone should only be used in the vehicle if it is connected to a hands-free unit. Volkswagen recommends the use of an external aerial when using a mobile telephone in the vehi-
cle. Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG, Inc. WARNING If a mobile phone is not secured or not properly secured in the vehicle, it could be flung though the interior during a sudden driving or braking manoeuvre, or in the event of an accident. This can cause injuries. Mobile telephones, other devices and tele-
phone accessories such as telephone holders, notepads and GPS (global positioning sys-
tem) must always be secured properly out-
side of the airbag deployment zones or be stowed in a safe place whilst the vehicle is in motion. WARNING If mobile telephones or two-way radios that are not connected to an external aerial are used, electromagnetic radiation in the vehicle could exceed limit values and thus be a health hazard for drivers and other vehicle occupants. This al-
so applies to external aerials which have not been correctly installed. Maintain a minimum distance of 20 centime-
tres between the mobile phone's antenna and the heart pacemaker, since the former may interfere with the latter. Do not carry a mobile telephone in your breast pocket above a pacemaker. The mobile telephone must be switched off immediately if there is a suspicion of inter-
ference with a pacemaker or other medical devices. Vehicle lifting points Fig. 208 Front lifting points for lifting with platform or vehicle jack. Fig. 209 Rear lifting points for lifting with platform or vehicle jack. For vehicles equipped with external sills, the jacking point access cover must be removed be-
fore lifting the vehicle page 232. The vehicle may only be lifted at the points shown in the illustrations Fig. 208 and Fig. 209. If the vehicle is not raised on the Accessories, modifications, repairs and part replacement 253
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. To prevent damage to the underside of the ve-
hicle when lifting, rubber pads must be used. Make sure that the lifting platform arms are able to move freely. The lifting platform arms must not be allowed to come into contact with the sills or any other part of the vehicle. lifting points shown, the vehicle could be dam-
aged
. There is also a risk of severe injuries Hydraulic lifting platforms may not be used for lifting the vehicle. There are many precautions that have to be fol-
lowed when lifting a vehicle on a lifting platform or floor jack. Do not try to lift a vehicle on a lift-
ing platform or vehicle jack unless you have the training, knowledge and experience to be able to do so safely. Instructions to lift the vehicle with the jack page 232. WARNING Lifting your vehicle incorrectly with a lifting platform or vehicle jack can cause accidents and serious personal injury:
Always read and heed the operating instruc-
tions from the lifting platform or vehicle jack manufacturer and any legal regulations be-
fore lifting the vehicle. All occupants must leave the vehicle before it is lifted. The vehicle may only be lifted at the points shown in the illustrations Fig. 208 and Fig. 209. If the vehicle is not lifted at the points shown, it could fall off the lifting plat-
form when work is carried out, e.g. when the engine or transmission is removed. The vehicle jacking points must be placed on the centre of the support surfaces of the ve-
hicle lift and have as much contact as possi-
ble. Never start the engine when the vehicle is raised! The vibration of the engine could cause the vehicle to fall off the lifting point. If work has to be carried out underneath the lifted vehicle, secure the vehicle with suita-
ble jack stands with a sufficient load-bearing capacity. Never climb up the lifting platform. Always ensure that the vehicle is not heavier than the lifting capacity of the lifting plat-
form. NOTICE Never lift the vehicle on the engine oil sump, the transmission or the front or rear axle. 254 Owner's Manual Consumer information Volkswagen warranty After conducting due body repair services, your Volkswagen Dealership will confirm due warranty coverage for corrosion perforations in the re-
paired area. Volkswagen Dealership Warranty Volkswagen Dealerships provide a warranty against manufacturing defects for the vehicles sold by them. Volkswagen Dealerships provide a warranty against manufacturing defects for new vehicles. Please refer to your purchase agreement for more information on warranty terms and condi-
tions. For additional information, please contact your Volkswagen Dealership. The warranty does not cover natural wearing, damages caused by abusive vehicle use, improper maintenance, or unauthorized modifications. If your vehicle is not operating properly, please contact the nearest Volkswagen Dealership. Body warranty Volkswagen Dealerships grant vehicles they sell a warranty against puncture corrosion on the body. In addition to the warranty terms for new Volkswagen vehicles, Volkswagen Dealerships al-
so grant on the vehicles they sell according to the purchase contract a warranty against perfo-
rating body corrosion over a period of time limi-
ted to 6 years. In case such defects are eventually identified, they will be fully repaired by any Volkswagen Dealership free of charge. The warranty is voided in the following cases:
defects result from external influences or lack of proper vehicle maintenance; or any body defects are not repaired in a timely fashion, as per the Factory's instructions; or corrosion perforations result from noncompli-
ance with the manufacturer's instructions re-
garding body repairs. General information Volkswagen offers one of the largest and most efficient Dealership Network to assist your vehi-
cle. Volkswagen Dealerships are equipped with cut-
ting-edge equipment and tools designed espe-
cially for your vehicle, in addition to highly-quali-
fied technical personnel and a wide range of ve-
hicle parts. All Volkswagen Dealerships abide by high-end standards recommended by the Factory. These include Service instructions, which ensure all re-
pair activities are carried out based on optimal quality standards and in a timely fashion, guaran-
teeing appropriate and safe vehicle conditions. Volkswagen Dealerships are clearly prepared to assist your vehicle. Make sure you don't miss out on all of these amenities. Additional service offers Mandatory inspection services Depending on local laws, the vehicle must be submitted to periodic mandatory inspections. In several countries, vehicles must be periodically submitted to inspections conducted by compe-
tent authorities, duly evidencing its effective and safe traffic operation and/or exhaust system con-
ditions. Volkswagen Dealerships are aware of all manda-
tory inspections and duly qualified to perform such verification services, along with an inspec-
tion service. This will save you time and money. They will indicate aspects that require special at-
tention in order to prevent your vehicle from be-
ing submitted to new inspections due to faults. Consumer information 255
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Volkswagen Genuine Parts Volkswagen Genuine Parts are particularly de-
signed for your vehicle and approved by Volkswagen, especially regarding safety meas-
ures. These parts accurately comply with Factory specifications regarding type, measurements, and materials. Volkswagen Genuine Parts are the most suitable for your vehicle. Therefore, we recommend always using Volkswagen Genuine Parts. Volkswagen does not guarantee the relia-
bility, safety, and suitability of non-original parts. The most essential Volkswagen Genuine Parts are virtually always available in stock. If any spe-
cific part is not available in stock, it can usually be ordered and received in brief periods of time. Volkswagen Dealerships offer a warranty for Volkswagen Genuine Parts after assembly or purchase. Always keep your Volkswagen Dealer-
ship invoice for warranty purposes. For additional information, please contact your Volkswagen Dealership. Warranty claims regarding these parts can be filed at any Volkswagen Dealership. Original Volkswagen accessories We recommend using original Volkswagen ac-
cessories and other accessories approved by Volkswagen. Please follow the recommendations below when equipping your vehicle with accessories:
Only use original Volkswagen accessories or oth-
er accessories duly approved by Volkswagen, whose reliability, safety, and suitability have been duly tested for the specific vehicle model. Volkswagen does not guarantee the reliability, safety, and suitability of non-original parts. Volkswagen Dealerships offer a warranty for original accessories after assembly or purchase. Always keep your Volkswagen Dealership invoice for warranty purposes. For additional information, please contact your Volkswagen Dealership. In addition to providing accurate and updated in-
formation, the Volkswagen Accessories Service also offers optional equipment assembly services by qualified personnel. 256 Owner's Manual In addition, Volkswagen Dealerships offer all ap-
propriate products to maintain and care for your vehicle. Information stickers and plates Safety certificates, stickers and plates containing important information on operating the vehicle are factory-fitted in the engine compartment and on certain parts such as the tank flap, passenger sun visor, the driver door pillar or in the luggage compartment floor. Never remove or damage the safety certifi-
cates, stickers and plates. They must remain legible at all times. If vehicle parts bearing safety certificates, stickers or plates are removed from the vehi-
cle, replacement safety certificates, stickers or plates with the same information must be ap-
plied properly to the new parts by Volkswagen Dealership or qualified workshop. Safety certificate A safety certificate on the door pillar of the driver door provides the information that all necessary safety standards and specifications of the trans-
port safety authorities of the individual country have been met at the time of production. The month and year of production and the chassis number may also be listed. High voltage warning stickers There is a sticker near the engine compartment cover lock that provides a warning of the high voltage in the electrical system of the vehicle. WARNING Handling the vehicle incorrectly increases the risk of accident and injuries. Legal provisions must be followed. Consult the Owner's Manual. NOTICE Handling the vehicle incorrectly may cause dam-
ages to the vehicle. Legal provisions must be followed. Perform maintenance services as prescribed. Installing the radio WARNING Follow the recommendations below when retro-
fitting a radio or replacing a factory-fitted radio:
In some versions, existing vehicle connections were designed for original Volkswagen radios, as of the model year of 2005. Radio devices with different connections will have to use adapting cables, which are availa-
ble at Volkswagen Dealerships. Radios not covered in the Volkswagen Original Accessories Programme may require additional adaptors if the signal feed is weak. Radios should be installed at a Volkswagen Dealership, whose personnel is qualified and trained on technical specifications of vehicles and if there are original radios and assembly parts required from the Volkswagen Accesso-
ries Programme, as well as the fact that all ac-
tivities are conducted based on factory guide-
lines. The maximum power of original factory-fitted speakers is 20 W (RMS). Volkswagen recommends also using speakers, assembly sets, aerials and interference sup-
pression kits of the Volkswagen Accessories Programme. These parts were designed espe-
cially for each vehicle type. WARNING Never cut the connection wire, leaving it ex-
posed. This may cause fires. When using headphones while driving, exterior acoustic signals, such as police and fire depart-
ment sirens and other vehicles' horns, may not be audible and may cause accidents. Declaration of conformity The individual manufacturer declares herewith that the following products conform, at the time of vehicle production, with the basic require-
ments and other applicable laws and regulations:
Radiofrequency equipment Electronic immobilizer. Vehicle key with remote control. Electrical equipment 12-volt socket. License to use the remote control key The remote control key, activated via radiofre-
quency, complies with all Brazilian approval and use criteria. Such approval must be used to obtain use licen-
ses in other countries. NOTICE Different radio connections may destroy or af-
fect important electrical components. Eventual interferences, such as the speed signal, may cause faults in the engine, ABS system, etc. Simply connecting the speed signal to a radio with automatic volume adjustment from dif-
ferent manufacturers may cause such faults. License to use the electronic immobilizer The electronic immobilizer, activated via radio-
frequency, complies with all Brazilian approval and use criteria. Such approval must be used to obtain use licen-
ses in other countries. Headphones When using mobile phones or other devices, con-
sult the respective owner's manual, applicable laws and standards regarding the use of head-
phones. For example, driving while using head-
phones is prohibited in Brazil. Consumer information 257
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Roof load, including the roof luggage carrier system. Trailer towing support load. Gross combination weight The listed admissible traction ratings are only ap-
plicable for altitudes of up to 1,000 m above sea level. The maximum weight of the car and trailer must be reduced by approximately 10% for every further 1,000 m in altitude. WARNING Ignoring or exceeding specific values and limits regarding weights, payloads, vehicle dimen-
sions, and speed limit could result in severe ac-
cidents and injuries. WARNING Exceeding the permitted gross weight and axle weights may damage the vehicle and cause se-
vere accidents and injuries. Actual axle loads must never exceed permit-
ted axle loads. The payload and distribution of the load in the vehicle affect driving response and brak-
ing distance. Adjust your speed accordingly. Observing maximum weight and axle load limits is essential to ensure the safety of the driver, passengers and other road users. WARNING Accidents and severe injuries can occur if the maximum trailer weight is exceeded. Never exceed the specified maximum trailer weight. NOTICE The payload should be distributed as evenly as possible in the vehicle. When transporting heavy objects in the luggage compartment, they should be placed either in front of or over the rear axle in order to minimise the effect on the vehicle's handling. Technical data Guidelines on the technical data Introduction To check which engine a vehicle is equipped with, refer to the vehicle data sticker and vehicle license documents. All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over this data. All data in this manual are valid for the basic model. The figures may be different if additional equipment is fitted, for dif-
ferent models, for special vehicles and for other countries. Engine On the vehicle data sticker or in the vehicle docu-
ments it can be seen with which engine the vehi-
cle is equipped. Performance figures All values apply to the basic model. Values may vary according to the quality of local fuel, vehicle equipment, load, tyre pressure, temperature, alti-
tude and driving behaviour. Range All data in the official vehicle documents take precedence over this data. All data in this manual are valid for the basic model. The vehicle data sticker and official vehicle documents indicate the vehicle's engine. The values quoted here may differ if additional equipment is fitted, for different models or for special vehicles. The values for the kerb weight in the following table apply for the road-ready vehicle with serv-
ice fluids, including fuel tank carrying 90% of to-
tal capacity and tools and spare tyre, if applicable creased due to optional equipment and addition-
al accessories installed, which proportionally re-
duces the maximum permitted load. The load includes the following weights:
Driver and passengers. Luggage. The indicated gear order weight is in-
258 Owner's Manual Fuel consumption information Vehicle identification data Please refer to chapter on page 258. and at the start of the Please refer to chapter on page 258. and at the start of the The figures quoted for fuel consumption and emissions do not refer to any one individual vehi-
cle. Their purpose is to enable comparisons to be made between various vehicle types. Fuel con-
sumption does not depend exclusively on the ef-
ficiency of the vehicle, but also on the way it is driven and other non-technical factors. Measuring fuel consumption The vehicle consumption and emissions values were determined according to directive UE 70/220/EEC in the currently valid version and ap-
ply for the given vehicle kerb weight. The figures do not refer to any one individual vehicle. Two measuring cycles are carried out on a rolling road test bed to calculate fuel consumption. The test criteria are as follows:
Urban cycle The urban cycle starts with an en-
gine cold start. Thereafter city driving at speeds between 0 and 50 km/h (0 and 31 mph) is simulated. Extra-urban cycle In the extra-urban cycle the car undergoes frequent acceleration and braking in all gears, as in normal everyday driving. In this case the driving speed rang-
es from 0 to 120 km/h (0 to 75 mph). Combined cycle The combined consumption is calculated with a weighting of around 37%
for the urban cycle and 63% for the extra-
urban cycle. Kerb weight may vary according to the re-
spective version. This may slightly increase fuel consumption figures. In practical terms, fuel consumption figures may differ from those measured based on the UE 70/220/EEC guidelines. Fig. 210 In front of the front passenger seat: vehi-
cle identification number (chassis number) on the floor, in front of the passenger seat. B5U-0472 Fig. 211 On the front right door pillar: vehicle parti-
al identification number label A and manufacturing year plate B . Vehicle identification number (VIN - chassis number) The vehicle identification number (VIN) is located on the floor, in front of the front passenger seat Fig. 210. Partial vehicle identification number (VIS partial chassis number) The plates (VIS) are located on the lower area of the front right door pillar Fig. 211 A and in the engine compartment on the driver side, in the suspension strut. These plates are destroyed when removed. Technical data 259
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Additionally, the VIS number is also available in the windscreen, rear window, and side windows. Engine identification number The engine identification number is located on the engine block. Open the bonnet to access the manufacturer identification sticker page 200. In some regions, the engine identification num-
ber is included in the official vehicle document. Manufacturer identification sticker The manufacturer identification sticker is located in the front cross strut in the engine compart-
ment. Open the bonnet to access the manufac-
turer identification sticker page 200. Manufacturing year identification plate The manufacturing year identification plate is lo-
cated on the lower area of the front right door pillar Fig. 211 B . This plate is destroyed when removed. Maximum cargo capacity identification label The label containing empty vehicle weight, pas-
senger capacity, total gross weight, and maxi-
mum traction capacity is located on the driver door column. NOTICE In case it is necessary to replace stickers or re-
engrave vehicle components, contact a local Volkswagen Dealership. NOTICE The plastic layer applied over the vehicle identifi-
cation number (chassis number) engraving is an anti-corrosive protection that prevents transfer-
ring the number into a paper sheet. Therefore, it must not be removed under any circumstances -
risk of voiding warranty against perforation due to corrosion!
Information on the air conditioning system Please refer to chapter on page 258. and at the start of the Fig. 212 Information on the air conditioning. Key for Fig. 212:
1 2 3 Air conditioner coolant specification. Air conditioner load level tolerance. Air conditioner load level 260 Owner's Manual Dimensions Please refer to and at the start of the chapter on page 258. Fig. 213 Dimensions. Table indications apply for the basic model with basic equipment. Indicated values may vary due to wheel and tyre sizes, optional equipment, different model ver-
sions, or different accessory installations. Key for Fig. 213:
A Front tracka) Rear tracka) B Vehicle width (not including exterior mirrors) C Vehicle width (including exterior mirrors) D Vehicle level (ground to roof)b) E Height of the free gap between the vehicle and the groundb) F Clearance between axles G Vehicle length H Height with the bonnet openb) Minimum vehicle rotation diameter a) Data may vary according to wheel and tyre sizes. b) Weight in gear order, without driver and cargo. Extended Cab Double cab - Ex-
treme version Single cab 1,493 mm 1,520 mm 1,431 mm 1,494 mm 1,721 mm 1,898 mm 1,561 mm 196 mm 2,752 mm 4,493 mm 1,769 mm 1,769 mm approximately 12.3 m 1,494 mm 1,560 mm 195 mm
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Useful floor length Useful top edge length Tailgate dimensions Single cab Extended Cab Double cab -
Extreme ver-
sion 1,655 mm 1,594 mm 1,106 mm 1,017 mm 1,106 mm 1,017 mm Technical data 261 Tailgate dimensions Maximum floor width Width between wheel boxes Luggage compartment height in the centre of the wheel 1,237 mm 1,006 mm 1,200 mm 1,005 mm 1,200 mm 1,005 mm 519 mm 519 mm 519 mm NOTICE Drive carefully in parking lots with long kerbs or fixed posts. Objects higher than the ground level may damage the bumper and other vehi-
cle parts when parking. Carefully drive through terrain entrances, ramps, kerbs, and other objects. Lowered vehi-
cle parts, such as the bumper, spoiler and chassis, engine or exhaust parts may be dam-
aged in these situations. 262 Owner's Manual Petrol engine 1.6 - 81 kW petrol Single cab Extended Cab Double cab - Extreme version Engine power Maximum torque EC Cylinders, Displacement Compression ratio Spark plugs Unleaded petrol free from other metallic additives (such as man-
ganese) Gearbox type Maximum speedc) Acceleration 0 - 80 km/hc) Acceleration 0 - 100 km/hc) Kerb weightd) Gross axle weight permitted
(GWP) Useful load Gross axle weight permitted in the front axle Gross axle weight permitted in the rear axle Roof load permitted Trailer with brake, gradients up to 8%
Trailer without brake, gradients up to 8%
Gross combination weight
(CMTe)) 81 kW (110 hp) at 5,750 rpm 155 Nm (15.8 kgfm) at 4.000 rpm CWSA 4 cylinders, 1,598 cm3 10,5:1 04C 905 616a) Valid only for Argentina Grade 2 or Superior min. 91 ON Super i.o. 95 Normal ON 91b) 5-gear manual gearbox (MQ 200) 176 km/h 6.6 s 10.2 s 1,073 kg 667 kg 174 km/h 6.7 s 10.4 s 1,109 kg 1,740 kg 631 kg 840 kg 900 kg 45 kg 400 kg 400 kg 2,140 kg 174 km/h 6.8 s 10.5 s 1,118 kg 622 kg Technical data 263
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Valid only for Argentina Fuel consumptionf) - Combined Euro 5 and Euro 4 legislation Valid only for Argentina CO2 emissions a) Volkswagen part number. Use only spark plugs recommended by Volkswagen in your vehicle, in order to prevent damages to the en-
7.57 l/100 km 176 g/km gine and ensure compliance with applicable emissions laws. b) With slight reduction in performance and increase in fuel consumption, with graded increase in engine noise until detonation regula-
tion intervention. c) Figures are related to the basic model. Data may vary according to the local fuel used, optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load, tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle route and driving habits. d) Weight for basic model without optional equipment. e) CMT = vehicle gross combination weight + maximum trailer weight. f) For reasons of vehicle registration and taxation, the fuel consumption of some engines may differ from the following indications in other countries. TOTALFLEX engines 1.6 TOTALFLEX 78/85 kW engine Engine power Maximum torque EC Cylinders, Displacement Compression ratio Spark plugs Gearbox type Engine oil specifications Maximum speed b) Acceleration 0 - 80 km/h b) Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h b) Kerb weight c) Gross axle weight permitted (GWP) Useful load Gross axle weight permitted in the front axle Gross axle weight permitted in the rear axle 264 Owner's Manual Petrol Ethanol 78 kW (106 hp) at 85 kW (116 hp) at 5,750 rpm 151 Nm (15.4 kgfm) at 4.000 rpm 5,750 rpm 158 Nm (16.1 kgfm) at 4.000 rpm CNXD 4 cylinders, 1,598 cm3 11,5:1 101 905 610.C a) 5-gear manual gearbox (MQ 200) as per the VW 508 88 standard 181 km/h 176 km/h 175 km/h 179 km/h 6.8 s 7 s 10.4 s 10.6 s 6.6 s 6.7 s 9.9 s 10.1 s 1,076 kg 1,102 kg 1,740 kg 664 kg 638 kg 840 kg 900 kg Single cab Extended Cab Single cab Extended Cab Single cab Extended Cab Single cab Extended Cab Single cab Extended Cab Roof load permitted Trailer with brake, gradients up to 8%
Trailer without brake, gradients up to 8%
Gross combination weight (CMTd)) Maximum sound level when vehicle is sta-
tionary e) Rotation at idling speed f) CO emission at idlef) a) Volkswagen part number. Use only spark plugs recommended by Volkswagen in your vehicle, in order to prevent damages to the en-
45 kg 400 kg 400 kg 2,140 kg 85.7 dB (A) 85.1 dB (A) 840 +/- 50 rpm
< 0.2% (max) Single cab Extended Cab gine and ensure compliance with applicable emissions laws. b) Figures are related to the basic model. Data may vary according to the local fuel used, optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load, tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle route and driving habits. c) Weight for basic model without optional equipment. d) CMT = vehicle gross combination weight + maximum trailer weight. e) This vehicle complies with the Noise pollution act for motor vehicles (PROCONVE). f) This vehicle complies with the Environment preservation program for motor vehicles (PROCONVE). 1.6 TOTALFLEX 78/85 kW engine - Extreme version Double cab - Extreme version Engine power Maximum torque EC Cylinders, Displacement Compression ratio Spark plugs Gearbox type Engine oil specifications Maximum speedb) Acceleration 0 - 80 km/h b) Acceleration 0 - 100 km/h b) Kerb weight c) Gross axle weight permitted (GWP) Useful load Gross axle weight permitted in the front axle Gross axle weight permitted in the rear axle Roof load permitted Trailer with brake, gradients up to 8%
Trailer without brake, gradients up to 8%
Gross combination weight (CMTd)) Maximum sound level when vehicle is stationary e) Petrol Ethanol 78 kW (106 hp) at 85 kW (116 hp) at 5,750 rpm 151 Nm (15.4 kgfm) at 4.000 rpm 5,750 rpm 158 Nm (16.1 kgfm) at 4.000 rpm CNXD 4 cylinders, 1,598 cm3 11,5:1 04C 905 607a) 5-gear manual gearbox (MQ 200) as per the VW 508 88 standard 174 km/h 178 km/h 7 s 10.8 s 6.7 s 10.2 s 1,135 kg 1,740 kg 605 kg 840 kg 900 kg 45 kg 400 kg 400 kg 2,140 kg 85.1 dB (A) Technical data 265
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Rotation at idling speed f) CO emission at idlef) a) Volkswagen part number. Use only spark plugs recommended by Volkswagen in your vehicle, in order to prevent damages to the en-
840 +/- 50 rpm
< 0.2% (max) gine and ensure compliance with applicable emissions laws. b) Figures are related to the basic model. Data may vary according to the local fuel used, optional devices equipped in the vehicle, load, tyre pressure, temperature, altitude, vehicle route and driving habits. c) Weight for basic model without optional equipment. d) CMT = vehicle gross combination weight + maximum trailer weight. e) This vehicle complies with the Noise pollution act for motor vehicles (PROCONVE). f) This vehicle complies with the Environment preservation program for motor vehicles (PROCONVE). Capacities Items Windscreen washer fluid reservoir
( page 204) Fuel tank
( page 179) Engine oil capacity
( page 206) Capacities Petrol engines 1.6 with 81 kW Single cab and double cab Extended Cab -
Cross version TOTALFLEX En-
gine 1.6 of 78/85 kW Single cab, dou-
ble cab and dou-
ble cab - Cross version 2.4 litres approximately 55 litres, of which approximately 8 litres reservea) 4.5 litres a) The reserve will be activated when the total tank level is reduced to approximately 8 litres of fuel. Luggage compartment capacities Version Single cab Extended cab Luggage compartment capacity Measured volumea) Maximum theoretical volumeb) 924 litres 580 litres 1,027 litres 645 litres a) Measurement carried out with standardized blocks according to ABNT NBR ISO 3832. b) Theoretical measurement of the total volume of the load compartment. 266 Owner's Manual Abbreviations Abbreviation Definition A A/h A2DP ABNT ABS AM ANATEL AVRCP bar BAS BCM BFM BT-Audio CD CDM cm CO CONTRAN dB (A) DIN E-FLEX EBV ECE EDS EPC ESC ESS FM GALA GRA HDC HFP hp INMETRO kg kPa Amp; electrical current measurement unit. Ampere-hour. Audio transmission technology via Bluetooth common in many manufacturers (Advanced Audio Distribution Profile). Brazilian Association of Technical Standards. Anti-lock brake system. Amplitude modulation (medium wave, MW). Brazilian Telecommunications Agency. Audio source remote control technology via Bluetooth common in many manufacturers
(Audio Video Remote Control Profile). Bar, unit adopted to measure pressure. Brake assist Body Control Module. Basic Function Module. See A2DP or AVRCP. Compact Disk (CD) is an optical memory unit used to store digital music. Engine code. Cubic centimetres. Unit of displacement. Carbon monoxide. National Traffic Council Decibel, unit adopted to measure sound. German Institute for Standardisation. Warm starting system. Electronic brake variator. Economic Commission for Europe-Regelung. Electronic differential lock. Engine management system (Electronic Power Control). Electronic stability control. Emergency brake lights (Emergency Stop Signal). Frequency modulation (ultra short wave, UKW) Adjustment of the volume in relation to the vehicle's speed. Cruise control system. Hill Descent Control. Hands-Free-Profile. Horsepower, engine power. National Institute of Metrology, Standardization and Industrial Quality. Kilogram, mass unit of the International System of Units. Kilopascal, standard pressure and tension unit of the International System of Units. Abbreviations 267
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Abbreviation Definition kW l LED m mm MP3 MQ 200 NBR Nm o C PDC PIN PROCONVE rpm s TCS TWI UKW USB V VIN VIS W WMA Kilowatt, engine power. Litre, capacity unit of the metric system. Light Emitting Diode. Metre, length measurement unit of the International System of Units. Millimetre, length unit equal to one thousandth of a metre. Audio file compression format. 5-speed manual transmission. Brazilian Standard. Newton metres, unit of engine torque. Celsius Degrees; temperature measurement unit. Park Distance Control. Personal identification number. Vehicular emission control program. Engine revolutions per minute. Seconds, basic time measurement unit of the International System of Units. Traction control system. Trade Wear Indicator. Ultra-short wave (USW), frequency modulation. Universal Serial Bus Volts, electrical difference of potential measurement unit. Chassis number (Vehicle Identification Number). Partial vehicle identification number with the last 8 digits of the running gear (Vehicle Indi-
cator Section). Watts, mechanical or electrical, thermal flow and energy flow of radiation measurement unit. Audio file compression format. 268 Abbreviations Index Numbers and Symbols 1,6 81kW petrol engine 263 A ABS see brake assist systems 102 Accessories 249 Acoustic alarms light 63 Acoustic warning unfastened seat belt 27 activated charcoal filter 181 Additional service offers 255 Adjust bed canvas 54 front seat 60 Adjusting correct sitting position 26 Headrest 62 steering wheel 59 Adjust the playback volume 165 Aerial 112 Air-conditioning air recirculation mode 75 Airbag crash detection function 36 Airbag system 34 dash panel cleaning 245 description 35 front airbag 37 function 35 indicator light 35 limitations 250 repairs 250 turn off the front passenger airbag 38 turn off using the switch activated by the key 38 use of child seats 38 vehicle conservation 245 wooden ornamental elements 245 Airbag System in case of airbag triggering 36 Air conditioner turn off 75 water underneath the vehicle 78 water vapour underneath the vehicle 78 window heating 76 Air conditioning 74, 75 air distribution 76 air recirculation mode 77 blower 75 controls 75 cooling mode 75 operating failure 78 operating instructions 78 temperature setting 75 tips 78 vents 77 Air recirculation mode 77 air-conditioning 75 operation 77 switch off 77 Alarm system 50 interior monitoring system 51 risk of false alarm 52 Alterations 250, 256 AM 125 Ambient lighting 67 Android Auto connect 124 disconnect 124 main menu 123 particularities 124 Anti-lock brake system for off-road driving (off-
road ABS) 102 Anti-lock brake system (ABS) 102 Anti-theft alarm system 50 description 50 Antifreeze 209 Anti theft coding 116 App-Connect 121 main menu 122 Apple CarPlay disconnect 123 establish connection 123 menu 122 particularities 123 Approach sensors 118 Areas with risk of explosion phone 113 Assemblies and insertions 250 Assist system uphill assist systems 92 Assist systems anti-lock brake system (ABS) 102 brake assist (BAS) 102 electronic differential lock (EDS) 103 electronic stability control (ESC) 101, 104 hill descent control system 93 off-road ABS 102 off-road mode 92 park distance control 97 tire control system 217 traction control (TCS) 101 tyre pressure loss Indicator 218 Index 269
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Assumptions rear view camera system 100 Audio data CD 150 Automatic belt retractor 33 Automatic consumer deactivation 216 Automatic driving light control 64 Automatic washing system 241 AUX 157 requirements 157 AUX-IN see External audio sources 133 AUX-IN multimedia port 157 see External audio sources 133 B Balance 143 BAS see Brake assist systems 102 Battery check vehicle battery 213 replacing the battery in the vehicle key with remote control 46 Battery electrolyte 215 Bed fixed strapping supports 168 Bed canvas 53 adjust 54 release 54 retract 55, 56 Bed cover 52 closing 53 driving with the bed cover open 84 locking 53 opening 53 unlocking 53 Bed lighting 68 Bed lighting button 68 Belt height adjuster 32 Belt tensioner disposal 33 service and disposal 33 Bluetooth profiles 135 settings 142 Bluetooth audio requirements 158 Bluetooth Audio 158 see External audio sources 134 Body warranty 255 Bottle holder tailgate 109 Brake emergency brake indicator 43 handbrake 96 Brake assist (BAS) 102 270 Index Brake fluid 211 specification 211 Brake light bulb 191 Brake pad run-in 82 Brake pad run-in also see brakes 82 Brakes brake fluid 211 brake pad run-in 82 brake pads 82 brake servo 83 changing brake fluid 212 fault 86 handbrake 96 brake servo 101 Brake servo 83 Brake support system 101 Brake support systems 101 ABS 101 ASR 101 BAS 101 EDS 101 ESC 101 brake system 101 Brake system check brakes 86 troubleshooting 86 BT Audio 158 Bulb failure see Exterior lighting 187 Buttons 116 C Call lists 140 Call voice mailbox 139 Capacities cold starting system petrol reservoir 266 engine oil 206, 266 fuel tank 179, 266 luggage compartment 266 window washer fluid reservoir 266 windscreen washer reservoir 204 Cargo stowage 167 Caring for the vehicle cleaning the window wiper blades 186 replacing window wiper blades 186 window aerial 112 Car phone 251 Carrier mobile network carrier 160 catalytic converter 180 Catalytic converter operating failure 181 CD-IN 151 CD operation see: MEDIA 152 Central locking 47 central locking button 49 indicator light 48 locking or unlocking from inside 49 mechanical locking 48 mechanical unlocking 48 Central locking system anti-theft alarm system 50 description 48 single door unlocking 48 Centre console 11 Changing a wheel 232 lifting the vehicle 234, 235 preparation actions 232 wheel bolts 233 Changing bulbs checklist 188 in standard headlights 189 in the bodywork 191 in the front bumper 190 luggage compartment light 193 number plate light 192 preparation actions 188 rear lights 191 Changing gears gear change indication 80 manual gearbox 88 selecting gears (manual gearbox) 88 Changing the wheel after changing a wheel 237 changing the wheel 237 Chassis number 259 Checking and refuelling 200 Checking the power steering fluid level 90 Checklist before working in the engine compartment 202 changing bulbs 188 checks when fuelling 23 check the engine oil level 206 fill engine oil 206 in an emergency 43 in case of faults 43 lifting the vehicle with the jack 234, 235 preparations for changing a wheel 232 preparations for travel 23 safe driving 23 seat belts 30 travels abroad 23 Checks when fueling 23 Check the engine oil 206 Child seat airbag sticker 41 securing systems 40 securing with the seat belt 41 weight classes 40 Child seats 39 child seat types 39 on rear vehicle seats 41 standard 40 switch off the passenger front airbag 38 transporting children in the vehicle 40 Cleaning see Vehicle conservation 241 Cleaning the vehicle sensors 97 Clean the display 117 Clock 14, 19 Close doors 47 tank flap 179 Closing bed cover 53 windows 56 Coming Home function 66 Communication window 73 Connection USB 132 without wires 132 with wires 132 Conservation see Vehicle conservation 241 Conservation of aluminium parts 243 Conservation of chrome parts 243 Consumables 204 Consumer information 255 Control basic control information 116 RADIO 125 Control light fuel level 16 fuelling 16 Control list rear view camera system 100 Control overview 116 Controls 116 additional displays 121 PHONE 134, 137 Control units 252 reprogramming 252 Convenience closing electric windows 57 Convenience functions reprogramming 252 Convenience opening electric windows 57 Coolant check engine coolant 208 Copyright information 143 Copyrights 128 Index 271
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Crash detection function airbag 36 Cruise control system 94 operate 94 Crystal waxing the paintwork 241 Cup holder 108 front centre console 108 tailgate 109 D Dashboard airbag system 34 Dash panel airbag system 245 cleaning 245 Dash panel insert indicators 21 menu structure 21 operation by way of the multifunction steer-
ing wheel 22 operation by way of the windshield wiper lev-
er 21 Dash panel insert operation 21 Data recording 252 Data recording while driving 252 Date setting 142 Daytime running light 63 declaration of conformity 257 Defrosting windows 76 Device overview 116 Media Plus (RCD 320G 2DIN) 117 Diagnostics connector 252 Differential lock see brake assist systems 103 Digital clock 19 Dimensions 261 Dipped beam bulb - standard headlights 189 Display 14, 17, 116, 117 clean 117 instrument cluster 17 operate 119 Display indicators time 19 Display keyboard see Operation 120 Disposal belt tensioner 33 Doors 47 emergency opening or closing 49 Drink holder on the side of the rear seat 109 Driver door overview 9 272 Index Driving data records 252 driving economically 81 driving through water on roads 84 fuel gauge 16 fuel level too low 16 parking on downhill inclines 95 parking on uphill inclines 95 preparations for travel 23 through salt water 85 travels abroad 23 with environmental awareness 81 Driving economically 81 Driving guidelines 79 Driving instructions with the spare wheel 227 Driving in the winter mirror 70 winter tyres 230 Driving safety 23 Driving saving fuel 81 Driving through salt water in roads 85 Driving through water on roads 84 Driving with environmental awareness 81 During a phone call 138 Dust filter 78 E E-FLEX 212 EBV see Braking support systems 102 Economical driving style 81 EDS see brake assist system 103 Electrical consumer 173 Electrical consumers 109 Electrical consumption 110, 111 Electricity-consuming equipment 44 Electric windows 56 buttons 56 closing 56 convenience closing 57 convenience opening 57 opening 56 operational failure 57 roll-back function 57 Electronic brake variator (EBV) 102 Electronic differential lock (EDS) 103 Electronic engine power control - EPC 180 Electronic immobilizer 88 Electronic stability control (ESC) 101, 104 Emergency brake indicator 43 Emergency brake lights 43 Emergency breakaway cable 173 Emergency locking manually locking the passenger door 50 Emergency opening or closing driver door 49 Engine irregular engine operation 181 noises 87 running-in 85 Engine and ignition 86 ignition cylinder 86 immobilizer 88 non-authorised vehicle key 86 start the engine 86 stopping the engine 87 unauthorized vehicle key 88 engine compartment 200 Engine compartment cleaning 243 engine coolant 208 engine oil 205 plenum chamber 243 preparation activities 202 vehicle battery 213 Engine compartment cover closing 202 opening 202 Engine control unit 180 Engine coolant 208 check engine coolant level 210 refilling 210 refilling opening 210 specifications 209 temperature indicator 16 warning light 16 Engine data 263 Engine identification number establish 260 Engine oil 205 changing 207 check the engine oil 206 complete 206 consumption 207 engine oil filler 206 oil dipstick 206 specification 205 Engine speed 15 Entry template see Operation 120 Entry template (rocker switch) 120 Environmental impact note fuel 177, 178, 179 Environment preservation program CO emission 259 slow-gear rotation 259 sound level 259 EPC - Electronic engine power control 180 ESC electronic stability control (ESC) 101 enable and disable 104 see brake assist systems 101 see Brake assist systems 104 ESS - Emergency Stop Signal 43 Ethanol 178 fuel 178 fuel gauge 16 Exhaust gas emission control system 180 Exterior lighting 187 Exterior mirrors 71 fold 71 memory for reverse gear 71 operation failure 72 towing a trailer 173 Exterior temperature indicator 17 External door handle 7 External aerial 251 External audio source adjust playback volume 143 AUX 157 Bluetooth audio 158 on volume 165 playback volume 165 USB port 157 External audio sources AUX-IN multimedia port 133 Bluetooth audio 134 USB connection 132 External data carrier USB connection 132 External jump starting check Jump starting 197 External mirrors vehicle conservation 243 F Fader 143 Fault memory 252 Faults protect the vehicle 42 Favourites (speed dial buttons) 141 Features approach sensors 118 with engaged reverse gear 80 Filling the tank ethanol 179 petrol 179 with ethanol 179 with petrol 179 Fire extinguisher 44 First service 239 Fixed strapping supports 168 Index 273
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. FM 125, 267 Fog light 64 Fog light bulb 190 Freio brake support system 101 Frequency range AM 125 change 118, 125 FM 125 select 118, 125 Front stowage compartment 106 Front airbag check airbag system 37 Front passenger airbag check airbag system 34 turn off using the switch activated by the key 38 Front seat 60 fuel 176 Fuel environmental impact note 177, 178, 179 ethanol 178 petrol 178 problems 181 Fuel consumption driving economically 81 what increases consumption? 181 Fuel gauge 16 control light 16 petrol or ethanol 16 fuel handling safety guidelines 176 Fuelling checks when fuelling 23 control light 16 fuel gauge 16 fuelling and fuel types 177 Fuel quality 181 Function buttons MEDIA main menu 130 operate 119 PHONE main menu 137 pop-up window 119 RADIO main menu 125 selection boxes 119 Fuses 193 changing 197 colour code 197 dash panel 194 detecting a blown fuse 197 engine compartment 196 fuse box in the dashboard 195 fuse box in the engine compartment 196 preparations for changing 197 274 Index G Gear change indicator 80 General information 255 Glove compartment 107 GRA 94 Guidelines for the conservation of the vehicle 241 Guidelines on the technical data 258 H Handbrake 96 Head light lever 63 Headlights international trips 65 Headphones 257 Headrest 62 Head restraints 61 Heating 74, 75, 77 operating instructions 77 Heating and air conditioning 74 High pressure washing machine 241 Hill descent control system 93 Hollow cavities 243 Horn 11 Hour setting 19 Hub cap wheel bolt cap 231 Hub caps 231 wheel cover 232 I Identification number 259 Identification sticker 259 Ignition 86 check engine and ignition 86 non-authorised vehicle key 86 Ignition key consult the vehicle key 45 Ignition turned off post-operation (Timeout) 118 Immobiliser malfunction 88 In an emergency 42 checklist 42 faults 42 making you and your vehicle safe 42 warning lamps 42 In case of emergency warning triangle 44 Indicator lamp ABS 104 braking support systems 104 ESC 104 seat belt 27 turn signals 66 tyre monitoring system 218 Indicator lamps overview 13 Indicator light airbag system 35 central locking 48 Indicators of the display Warning and information texts 19 Indicators on the dash panel insert display 21 information on the air conditioning system 260 Information on the warm starting system 212 Information stored in control units 252 Initial settings 142 Insert the SD card 117 Installing the radio 257 Instructions for use 115 Instrument cluster 10, 14 display 14, 17 indicator lamps 13 instruments 14 service interval display 20 symbols 13 warning lamps 13 Instruments 14 Interior light 67 Interior mirror 70 Interior monitoring system 51 International trips headlights 65 iPad 133 iPhone 133 iPod 133, 158 J Jump starting 197 K Key consult the vehicle key 45 Keyboard see Operation 120 Knobs 116 L lambda probe 180 Lamp Coming Home 66 interior lights 67 Leaving Home 66 reading lights 67 Leaving Home function 66 License to use the electronic immobilizer 257 license to use the remote control key 257 Lifting platform 253 Lifting the vehicle checklist 234, 235 jack 234, 235 with the jack 234, 235 Light acoustic alarms 63 daytime running light 63 fog light 64 functions 64 head light lever 63 instrument lighting 67 light's switch 63 side light 63 switch lighting 67 switch off 63 switch on 63 turn signal lever 63 lighting Turn signals 63 Lighting Driving light 63 main beam 65 troubleshooting 66 Lights 63 AUTO 64 Load capacity index 229 Loading cargo stowage 167 driving with the bed cover open 84 luggage compartment 166 roof carrier 171 stowing cargo 166 strapping eyelets 168 towing 174 Luggage compartment 166 luggage compartment access step 169 luggage compartment light 67 sliding strapping supports 169 Luggage compartment access step 169 Luggage compartment capacity 166 Luggage compartment socket 111 M Main beam bulb - standard headlights 189 Main menu Android Auto 123 App-Connect 122 MEDIA 130, 152 PHONE 137, 160 RADIO 125, 145 SETUP 164 Maintenance 238 Index 275
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Malfunction immobiliser 88 park distance control 97 tyre monitoring system 218 Mandatory inspection services 255 Manual gearbox 88 see also Changing gear 88 see also Shift gears 88 Manually locking the passenger door 50 Mats 79 MEDIA 150 audio data structure 129, 151 audio file CD 129 AUX 157 AUX-IN multimedia port 133 back 154 bitrate 129 Bluetooth audio 134, 158 CD playback 151 change media source 131 Change track 131 changing folders 154 changing tracks 154 copyrights 128 displays 130 external data carrier to USB 132 forward 154 forward and back 131 function buttons 130 iPod, iPad, iPhone 133 limitations 128 main menu 130, 152 media mode 128 media source selection menu 131 MIX 156 Mix function 130 MP3 files 129, 150 notes 150 playback mode 130, 156 playback sequence 129, 151 playlists 128, 150 prerequisites 129 REPEAT 156 Repeat function 130 requirements 150 SCAN 156 select data storage unit 131 selection menu 153 select track 131 settings 132 switch media source 153 text notes and messages 151, 152 track information 155 USB port 157 WMA files 129, 150 Media operation see: MEDIA 152 276 Index Media Player BT audio 158 Media source 152 Memory levels 148 Menu Apple CarPlay 122 Metal-coated windscreen 73 Mirror areas with no visibility 70 blind spot 70 Mirrors 70 exterior 71 folding 72 interior mirror 70 right-hand exterior mirror operation 71 Mix function 130 Mobile network carrier carrier 160 Mobile phone use without external aerial 252 Modifications 250 Multifunction steering wheel 10, 22 Multimedia playback SD card 132 Multimedia port 132 N New engine 85 Noises brake assist system 104, 105 engine 87 tyres 231 NT - non microfiber fabric 245 Number of seats 24 O Octane number 178 Odometer 14 off-road ABS 102 see Brake assist systems 102 Off-road mode 92 Oil check engine oil 205 Oil dipstick 206 On-board computer 18 Open doors 47 tank flap 179 Opening bed cover 53 windows 56 Opening or closing the rear vent window 58 Open radio stations list 118 Operating failure air conditioning 78 catalytic converter 181 parking distance control 98 radio feed 109, 113 rain sensor 69 twilight sensor 64 Operation access and search lists 119 basic operating information 119 display 119 display keyboard 120 entry template 120 function buttons 119 park distance control 98 pop-up window 119 scroll 119 scroll pointer 119 selection boxes 119 text entry 120 turn on and off 118 operational failure electric windows 57 Operation failure electric exterior mirrors 72 Original Volkswagen accessories 256 Overall guidelines 23 Overseas extended permanence 85 vehicle sales 85 Overview 116 centre console part 11 driver door 9 driver's side 10 front view 6 indicator lamps 13 instruments 14 menu structure 21 passenger side 12 rear view 8 roof headliner 12 side view 7 turn signal and main beam lever 63 warning lamps 13 Overview of the convenience consumers 112 Overview of the vehicle front view 6 rear view 8 side view 7 P Park distance control 97 operation 98 Park Distance Control representation on the display 98 Parking 95 Parking and manoeuvring 95 Parking distance control operating failure 98 using high pressure washing machine 241 warning message 99 Parking light 66 Park Pilot 97 see Park distance control 97 Partial odometer 14 Particularities absence of functions 115 Android Auto 124 Apple CarPlay 123 lower radio volume 99 parking distance control 98 volume reduction 115 water vapour underneath the vehicle 78 Part replacement 249 Passenger compartment 10 Pedals 26, 79 Petrol 178 additives 178 fuel 178 fuel gauge 16 types 178 Petrol engine 263 PHONE A2DP 135 areas with risk of explosions 113 Bluetooth profiles 135 Bluetooth settings 142 call lists 140 call voice mailbox 139 connecting mobile phones paired to the ra-
dio 162 contacts 139 contacts list 139 during a phone call 138 enter phone number 139 favourites (speed dial buttons) 141 function buttons 138 functions with connected mobile phones 162 HPF 135 main menu 137, 160 mobile phone pairing 136 operation description 135 overview 160 pairing mobile phones to the radio 161 pairing the mobile phone up 136 phone controls 134, 137 safety instructions 158 select 139 settings 141 special precaution areas 113 switching off phone controls 136 symbols and displays 138 Index 277
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. user profiles 162 user profile settings 142 Phone controls see PHONE 134 Physical principles of a frontal collision 28 Placing the temporary spare tyre into its hous-
ing 226 Plates 256 Playback AUX-IN 133 external data carrier (USB) 132 MEDIA 130 memory card 130 track 131 Playing RADIO 125 Plenum chamber 243 Polishing 241 Pollen filter 78 Pollutant filter 78 Pop-up window see the function buttons 119 Post-operation (timeout) 118 Power steering 90 checking the power steering fluid level 90 Pre-tuning buttons 126 Preparation actions changing a wheel 232 changing bulbs 188 vehicle battery 214 Preparation activities check the engine oil 206 complete engine oil 206 prior each travel 23 working in the engine compartment 202 Preparation procedures check engine coolant level 210 refilling the engine coolant 210 Preparations for travel 23 Prerequisites for CDs 129 for files and data storage units 129 for SD cards 129 for USB data storage units 129 R Radio 257 Composition Touch (R 340G) 125 open radio stations list 118 RADIO 125 changing frequency ranges 125 changing the frequency band 145 changing the station 146 displayed radio station names 126 displays and symbols 127 278 Index frequency bands 145 function buttons 125, 126 main menu 125, 145 memory levels 148 pre-tuning buttons 126 radio data system RDS 126 radio operation 125 radio text (RDS) 126 SCAN 128, 147 settings 128 setting the station frequency 146 station buttons 126, 149 Radio buttons 118 Radio feed aerial 112 operating failure 109, 113 Radio stations pre-tuning 126 Radio text (RDS) see RDS 126 Rain sensor 69 operating failure 69 RDS 126 radio text 126 regional RDS 126 station names 126 Reading light 67 Rear lights changing bulbs 191 Rear seat 61 Rear view see Rear view camera 99 Rear view camera 99 Rear view camera system control list 100 Enabling and disabling 100 parking 101 Representation on the display 100 Rear window defrost function 76 Rear window wiper blade cleaning 185, 186 replacing 185, 186 Reduction of exhaust gases problems 181 Release bed canvas 54 Release the temporary spare tyre cable 226 Remount the temporary spare tyre cable 226 Removing ice 243 Removing snow 243 Removing wax residues 243 Renew bulbs see Exterior lighting 187 Repairs 249, 250 airbag system 250 lifting platform 253 plates 256 stickers 256 Repeat 130 Repeat function 130, 156 Representation on the display Park Distance Control 98 Reprogramming control units 252 Requirements in CDs 150 Retract bed canvas 55, 56 Retrofitting car phone 251 two-way radio 251 Reverse gear driving support see Rear view camera 99 Revolution counter 14 Right-hand exterior mirror operation 71 Right-hand turn signal bulb - standard head-
lights 189 Rims cleaning 243 Rocker switch 120 Roll-back function electric windows 57 Roof rack 170 use the supports 170 Rubber seals 243 Run-in tyres 221 Running-in engine 85 first kilometres 85 S Safety equipment 36 Safety instructions phone 158 Safety recommendations 113 SCAN media playback 156 radio 128 RADIO 128 radio operation 147 see SCAN 147 Scroll see Operation 119 Scroll pointer see Operation 119 SD card compatibility and technical data 129 prerequisites 129 supported SD files 129 Search lists see Operation 119 Seat belt automatic belt retractor 33 seat belt status indicator 27 warning lamp 27 Seat belt roll-back function 33 Seat belt routing 31 Seat belts 26 belt height adjuster 32 belt routing 31 checklist 30 cleaning 245 fastening 30 not fastened 28 roll-back function 33 seat belt tensioner 33 twisted seat belts 30 unfastening 30 using 30 Seat belts protect 29 Seat belt tensioner 33 Seat covers 245 cleaning NT - non microfiber fabric 245 cleaning the fabric cover 245 cleaning the padding 245 conserving and cleaning the natural leather 245 seat cover handling 245 vinyl 245 Seats 24, 60 front seat 60 See text entry see Operation 120 selection boxes see the function buttons 119 Selector button 118 Select (phone number) 139 Service 238 Service fluids 204 Service interval display 20 Service scopes 239 Set hour 19 Settings 142 Bluetooth 142 factory settings 142 media 132 PHONE 141 radio 128 system 142 user profile 142 volumes 143 Settings Menu 19 Setting the clock digital clock 14 Side light 63 Side light bulb 191 Side light bulb - standard headlights 189 Index 279
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. Single door unlocking 48 Sitting adjusting the headrest 62 adjusting the steering wheel position 59 correct sitting position 26 Installing the headrest 62 number of seats 24 Removing the headrest 62 Sitting position incorrect position 25 Sliding headliner 73 Sliding strapping supports 169 Slow-gear rotation 259 Socket 109 Sockets 12 Volts 110, 111 Softkeys see the function buttons 119 Sound level 259 Sounds warning lamps and indicator lamps 13 Sound settings 143 Spare fuel canister 177 Spare key consult the vehicle key 45 Spare parts 249 Spare wheel 226 driving instructions 227 Special precaution areas 113 Specificities AUX playback 133 displays 121 engine jolting 181 folding mirrors 72 irregular engine operation 181 parking 96, 104, 262 prolonged downtime 47 radio feed 112 towing a trailer 174 Speed index 230 Starter assist see Assist systems 92 Starting the engine with jump leads how to 198 jump leads 198 Start up of the system 115 Station SCAN 128 scanning for stations 128 Station buttons 126, 149 Station names see RDS 126 Steering assistance 89 Steering wheel 59 adjusting 59 unilateral traction 225 vibration 225 Stickers 256 Stopped in traffic protect the vehicle 42 stowage compartment 106 Stowage compartment between the rear seats 107 driver side 106 front passenger side 107 glove compartment 107 rear centre console 107 Stowing cargo 166 Strapping eyelets 168 Sun visors 73 Support load loading the trailer 174 Support systems cruise control system 94 electronic brake variator (EBV) 102 GRA 94 rear view camera 99 Switch activated by the key turn off the front passenger airbag 38 switching the turn signals on and off 63 Symbols see Indicator lamps 13 see Warning lamps 13 Synchronize vehicle key 47 Systems ABS 102 anti-lock brake system (ABS) 102 automatic driving light control 64 BAS 102 brake assist (BAS) 102 cruise control system 94 EBV 102 EDS 103 electronic brake variator(EBV) 102 electronic differential lock (EDS) 103 electronic stability control 104 electronic stability control (ESC) 101 ESC 101, 104 GRA 94 hill descent control system 93 off-road ABS 102 off-road mode 92 TCS 101 traction control (TCS) 101 tyre monitoring system 217 tyre pressure loss indicator 218 uphill assist system 92 280 Index T Tachometer (Rev counter) 15 Tailgate bottle holder 109 cup holder 109 Taking the temporary spare tyre from its hous-
ing 226 Tank flap check tank flap 179 ethanol 179 petrol 179 TCS see brake assist systems 101 Technical data 258 1,6 81kW petrol engine 263 capacities 179, 204, 206, 266 CO emission 259 dimensions 261 engine oil specification 205 identification sticker 259 luggage compartment capacity 168, 266 petrol engine 263 roof load 171 slow-gear rotation 259 sound level 259 TOTALFLEX engines 264 type plate 259 tyre pressure 223 Vehicle data sticker 259 Technical modifications 250 lifting platform 253 plates 256 stickers 256 Telephone see: PHONE 158 Temperature display engine coolant 16 Temperature indicator exterior temperature 17 Text notes and messages CD playback 151 media playback 152 Thawing the door lock cylinder 243 Thawing the locks 243 Things to note towing 200 tow starting 200 Tightening torque wheel bolts 233 Timeout 118 Time setting 142 TIN 228 Toolkit check vehicle toolkit 182 TOTALFLEX engines 264 Total odometer 14 Towing 172, 200 a trailer 174 connecting 173 emergency breakaway cable 173 engaging 173 exterior mirrors 173 headlight adjustment 174 loading 174 parking distance control 98 rear lights 173 retrofitting a towing bracket 175 support load 174 technical requirements 172 things to note 200 towing a trailer 174 trailer load 174 Towing a trailer check towing 172 Towing bracket retrofitting 175 Tow starting 200 things to note 200 Tow starting and towing towing 200 Track list 131 Track scan see: SCAN 156 Traction 229 Traction control (TCS) 101 Trailer load loading the trailer 174 Transporting 166 cargo stowage 167 driving instructions 84 driving with the bed cover open 84 loading the trailer 174 roof carrier 171 stowing cargo 166 strapping eyelets 168 towing 172 towing a trailer 174 Transporting children in the vehicle 39, 40 Travels abroad checklist 23 Tread depth 224 Tread depth and wear indicators 224 Treadwear 228 Troubleshooting 50 12 V vehicle battery warning lamp 217 airbag deployment 50 airbags system 35 alternator warning lamp 217 braking support systems 104 check engine oil level 208 cruise control system (GRA) 95 Index 281
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. engine oil level sensor 208 engine oil pressure 208 front passenger front airbag disabled 35 ignition lock 88 immobiliser 88 re-establishing the one touch closing and opening operation of the windows 58 start button 88 Turn off radio 118 Turn on 118 Turn signal and main beam lever 63 Turn signal light bulb 191 Turn the main beam on and off 65 Twilight sensor operating failure 64 Two-way radio 251 Type plate 259 Tyre damage 225 Tyre load capacity 230 Tyre monitoring system 217, 218 indicator lamp 218 malfunction 218 tyre pressure loss indicator 218 Tyre pressure 223 checking 223 spare wheel 223 Tyre pressure loss control system tyre pressure 223 Tyre pressure loss indicator replace tyre 221 Tyres check wheels and tyres 217 see wheels and tyres 219 Tyres with directional tread pattern 230 Tyre wear 225 Tyre wear indicators 224 U UKW 267 Unit code see Anti-theft coding 116 Uphill assist system 92 USB connecting an external data carrier 132 iPad controls 133 iPhone controls 133 iPod controls 133 supported USB data storage units 129 USB connection 132 disconnect the connection 132 unreadable 132 USB port 157 iPod 158 282 Index User profile settings 142 V Valve caps 224 Vehicle locking or unlocking from inside 49 protection in case of faults 42 stopping on downhill inclines 95 stopping on uphill inclines 95 Vehicle battery 213 automatic consumer deactivation 216 battery electrolyte 215 charging 215 check electrolyte level 214 connecting 215 discharge 47 discharged 44, 86 discharging 216 disconnecting 215 installation location 213 preparation actions 214 replacing 215 starting the engine with jump leads 198 symbol definition 213 Vehicle conservation 241 aluminium parts 243 automatic washing system 241 chrome parts 243 cleaning the seat belts 245 cleaning the wheels 243 dash panel 245 engine compartment 243 exterior 241 external mirrors 243 fabric covers 245 high pressure washing machine 241 hollow cavities 243 interior 245 manual wash 241 natural leather 245 NT - non microfiber fabric 245 paddings 245 paintwork of the vehicle 241 plastic components 245 rubber seals 243 seat cover handling 245 Thawing the door lock cylinder 243 vehicle underbody protection 243 washing the vehicle 241 windows 243 wooden ornamental elements 245 Vehicle data sticker 259 Vehicle delivery 239 Vehicle identification data 259 Vehicle identification number 259 Vehicle jack 232 Vehicle key 45 consult the vehicle key 45 spare key 45 troubleshooting 47 Vehicle key with remote control replacing the battery 46 Vehicle lifting lifting platform 253 with lifting platform 253 Vehicle lifting points 253 Vehicle maintenance airbag module (dash panel) 245 cleaning the stowage compartment 245 cleaning the wiper blades 185 replacing wiper blades 185 vinyl 245 Vehicle modifications 249 plates 256 stickers 256 Vehicle sale 4 Vehicle sales in other countries / continents 85 Vehicle toolkit 182 Vehicle tool kit contents 184 Vehicle toolkit stowage 183, 184 toolkit access 183, 184 Vehicle underbody protection 243 Ventilation 75, 77 operating instructions 77 Ventilation and heating system controls 75 operating instructions 77 temperature setting 75 Vents 77 Vent window 58 Voice command Android Auto 124 Apple CarPlay 123 Volkswagen Dealership Warranty 255 Volkswagen Information System 19 Volkswagen Genuine Parts 256 Volume AUX-IN 143 Bluetooth audio 143 define external audio sources 143 maximum volume when turning the device on 143 traffic report 143 volume reduction 115 Volume control 118 W Warm starting 212 Warm starting system information on the warm starting system 212 Warning lamp brake system 104 braking support systems 104 seat belt 27 Warning lamps overview 13 Warning light engine coolant 16 Warning lights 42 Warning triangle 44 Washer fluid check 204 replenish 204 Washing 241 manual 241 with high pressure washing machine 241 Washing the vehicle 241 folding mirrors 72 What happens to passengers who have not fas-
tened their seat belts 28 Wheel bolts 232, 233 cap 231 tightening torque 233 Wheels 222 bolted-on trims 222 identification 222 Wheels and tyres 217, 219 avoiding damages 220 changing a wheel 232 check wheels and tyres 220 foreign bodies in the tyre 225 identification 228 new tyres 221 replacing tyres 221 run-in 221 serial number 228 spare wheel 226 speed index 229, 230 storing tyres 221 technical data 228 tread depth 224 tyre damage 225 tyre identification number (TIN) 228 tyre lettering 228 tyre load capacity 230 tyre pressure 223 tyres with directional tread pattern 230 tyre wear 225 tyre wear indicators 224 unbalanced wheels 225 valve caps 224 wheel alignment fault 225 Index 283
. 0 2 V A S 1 L 5 A 4 2
. wheel balancing 225 wheel rotation 221 wheels 222 winter tyres 230 Window activation 56 Windows defrosting 76 see Window activation 56 Window wiper blades cleaning 186 replacing 186 Windscreen washer 68 Windscreen washers windscreen washer lever 68 windscreen wiper rain sensor 69 Windscreen wiper 68 Windscreen wiper blades cleaning 185, 186 replacing 185, 186 Windscreen wipers windscreen wiper lever 68 Winter driving fuel consumption 82 towing 172 Winter tyres 230 speed limit 231 wiper blades 185 Wiper blades cleaning 185 replacing 185 284 Index
1 | User Manual Statement | Users Manual | 589.79 KiB | September 25 2023 / March 23 2024 | delayed release |
User Manual VW instrument cluster Model# 23040401
. General Product Description The Instrument Cluster has an integrated immobilizer system, which works with a security transponder assembled into the body of the car keys and interfaces to the Engine Management System via CAN Bus. Continental Model: 23040401 Product: VW instrument cluster FCC ID: 2AOUZ-23040401 This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
(1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired operation. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment. No changes shall be made to the equipment without the manufacturers permission as this may void the users authority to operate the equipment. FCC Class B digital device notice This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
is connected.
Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna. Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
1 | Internal Photos | Internal Photos | 1.85 MiB | September 25 2023 / March 23 2024 | delayed release |
1 | External Photos | External Photos | 2.20 MiB | September 25 2023 / March 23 2024 | delayed release |
1 | Label and Location | ID Label/Location Info | 214.24 KiB | September 25 2023 |
Model# 23040401 Label design.
(CE mark is embossed on the device) Internal Model# 23040401 Label location:
Internal
1 | Attestation Statement part 2.911(d)(7) | Attestation Statements | 208.21 KiB | September 25 2023 |
Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 USA Date: September 19, 2023 Ref: Attestation Statements Part 2.911(d)(7) Filing Grantee Code: 2AOUZ Continental Automotive Technologies GmbH (the applicant) certifies that, as of the date of the filing of the application, Continental Automotive Systems, Inc. is our designated U.S. affiliated company for service of process for the FCC applications. Continental Automotive Technologies GmbH accepts to maintain an affiliated company for no less than one year after the grantee has terminated all marketing and importation or the conclusion of any Commission-related proceeding involving the equipment. Continental Automotive Systems, Inc. accepts, as of the date of the filing of the application, the obligation of the designated U.S. affiliated company for service of process for the FCC applications. Designated Continental USA affiliated company Information:
Name: Continental Automotive Systems, Inc. FRN: 0022069249 Contact Person: Mark Kenney Address: 1 Continental Dr, Auburn Hills, Michigan, USA 48326 Tel.: (248) 393-5300 Email: Mark.Kenney@continental.com Applicant Information:
Company Name: Continental Automotive Technologies GmbH Grantee Code: 2AOUZ FRN: 0026981423 Contact Name: Bettina Christ Address: VDO-Strasse 1, 64832, Babenhausen, Germany Tel.: +49 6073 12-3647 Email: bettina.christ@continental.com Internal
1 | Attstn Stmt part 2.911(d)(5)(i)&(ii) | Attestation Statements | 369.67 KiB | September 25 2023 |
Certification Application Attestation Statements Continental Automotive Technologies GmbH VDO-Strasse 1 64832 Babenhausen Germany Subject: FCC ID: 2AOUZ-23040401 To Whom It May Concern:
Statement for 47 CFR section 2.911(d)(5)(i) Continental Automotive Technologies GmbH certifies that as of the date of the application the equipment for which authorization is sought is not covered equipment1 prohibited from receiving an equipment authorization pursuant to section 2.903 of the FCC rules. If the equipment for which the applicant seeks authorization is produced by any of the entities identified on the current Covered List, including affiliates or subsidiaries of the named companies, the applicant must include an explanation on why the equipment is not covered equipment. Additional Explanation: <N/A>
Statement for 47 CFR section 2.911(d)(5)(ii)
[Continental Automotive Technologies GmbH] (the applicant) certifies that, as of the date of the filing of the application, the applicant is not identified on the Covered List as a specifically named entity or any of its subsidiaries or affiliates that producing covered equipment. Date:
Name(2) :
Email address:
Signature:
September 19, 2023 Bettina Christ bettina.christ@continental-corporation.com
/ Elisabeth Sommer 1 - The Commissions Covered List is published by the Public Safety and Homeland Security Bureau and posted on the Commissions website. This Covered List, which is periodically updated, identifies particular equipment, produced by particular entities, that constitutes covered equipment. https://www.fcc.gov/supplychain/coveredlist .
(2): For FCC it must be the Grantee Code owner or the authorized agent.
(3): double click on the appropriate box and select checked then OK Internal
1 | Confidentiality Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 231.38 KiB | September 25 2023 |
Federal Communications Commission Authorization and Evaluation Division 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MD 21046 USA Date: September 19, 2023 Confidentiality Request regarding application for certification of FCC ID: 2AOUZ-23040401 Pursuant to Sections 0.457 and 0.459 of the Commissions Rules, we hereby request confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below:
Exhibit Type Block Diagram Schematics Operational Description The above materials contain trade secrets and proprietary information not customarily released to the public. The public disclosure of these materials may be harmful to the applicant and provide unjustified benefits to its competitors. The applicant understands that pursuant to Section 0.457 of the Rules, disclosure of this application and all accompanying documentation will not be made before the date of the Grant for this application. Pursuant to DA04-1705 June 15, 2004 of the Commissions public notice, we also request temporary confidential treatment of information accompanying this application as outlined below for 180 days. Exhibit Type External Photos Internal Photos Test Setup Photos Manual Sincerely, Continental Automotive Technologies GmbH _______________________ Signature:
Printed name: Bettina Christ Title:
Team Lead RF Homologation A AN EN HW COE HOM BBU _______________________ Elisabeth Sommer Homologation Specialist A AN EN HW COE HOM BBU Internal
1 | LOA Letter | Cover Letter(s) | 206.49 KiB | September 25 2023 |
TO:
Federal Communication Commission Equipment Authorization Branch 7435 Oakland Mills Road Columbia, MID 21046 Regarding FCC ID: 2AOUZ-23040401 To whom it may concern:
Continental Automotive Technologies GmbH VDO-Strasse 1 64832 Babenhausen Date: August 25, 2023 We, the undersigned, hereby authorize Kevin Tsai / Deputy Manager of SGS Compliance Certification Services Inc. to act on our behalf in all manners relating to application for equipment authorization with respect to the FCC ID above, including signing of all documents relating to these matters. Any and all acts carried out by the agent on our behalf shall have the same effect as acts of our own. We, the undersigned, hereby certify that we are not subject to a denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits, pursuant to Section 5301 of the Anti-Drug Abuse Act of 1988, 21 U.S.C. 862. Further, no party, as defined in 47 CFR 1.2002 (b), to the application is subject to denial of federal benefits, that includes FCC benefits. We also declare that the information provided to the FCC is true and correct to the best of our knowledge (47 CFR 2.911(d)) and we have been informed of the grantee responsibilities (47 CFR 2.909) with regard to certified equipment. Agency Agreement Expiration Date: 2024/08/30 During this period, this authorization is valid unless further cancellation notice from the applicant. Sincerely, Continental Automotive Technologies GmbH ____________________ Signature:
Printed Name: Bettina Christ Title:
Team Lead Homologation A AN EN HW COE HOM BBU _____________________ Elisabeth Sommer Homologation Specialist A AN EN HW COE HOM BBU __________________________________________________________________________________________ Continental Automotive Technologies GmbH | Vahrenwalder Strasse 9, 30165 Hanover, | P.O. Box 1 69 | 30001 Hanover Tel. +49 (0)511 938-01 | Fax +49 (0)511 938-81770 | www.continental-automotive.com Company headquarters: Hanover | Commercial Register: Amtsgericht Hannover | HRB 3669 | VAT-number: DE341447066 Chairwoman of the Supervisory Board : Katja Drrfeld Managing Director: Nicole Werner, Harald Stuhlmann, Frank Staiger, Dr. Andreas Listl Bank details: Deutsche Bank, Frankfurt | BIC/SWIFT: DEUTDEFFXXX | Account no.: 096887500 | Sort code: 50070010 |
IBAN: DE25500700100096887500 Internal
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2023-09-25 | 0.125 ~ 0.125 | DCD - Part 15 Low Power Transmitter Below 1705 kHz | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Effective |
2023-09-25
|
||||
1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Continental Automotive Technologies GmbH
|
||||
1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0026981423
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
VDO-Strasse 1
|
||||
1 |
Babenhausen, N/A 64832
|
|||||
1 |
Germany
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 | TCB Application Email Address |
t******@timcoengr.com
|
||||
1 | TCB Scope |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 | Grantee Code |
2AOUZ
|
||||
1 | Equipment Product Code |
23040401
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 | Name |
B****** C******
|
||||
1 | Title |
Team Lead RF Homologation
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
+4960******** Extension:
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
+4960********
|
||||
1 |
B******@continental.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | Yes | ||||
1 | If so, specify the short-term confidentiality release date (MM/DD/YYYY format) | 03/23/2024 | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Equipment Class | DCD - Part 15 Low Power Transmitter Below 1705 kHz | ||||
1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | VW instrument cluster | ||||
1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Compliance Certification Services Inc. Wugu Lab.
|
||||
1 | Name |
H******** L********
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
886-2******** Extension:
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
+886-********
|
||||
1 |
h******@sgs.com
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15C | 0.12500000 | 0.12500000 |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC